Yaskawa G7 Drive Manual
Reklāma
Reklāma
YASKAWA AC Drive G7
Technical Manual
Type: CIMR-G7U
To properly use the product, read this manual thoroughly and retain for easy reference, inspection, and maintenance. Ensure the end user receives this manual.
MANUAL NO. TM.G7.01
Warnings and Cautions
This Section provides warnings and cautions pertinent to this product, that if not heeded, may result in personal injury, fatality, or equipment damage. Yaskawa is not responsible for consequences of ignoring these instructions.
WARNING
YASKAWA manufactures component parts that can be used in a wide variety of industrial applications. The selection and application of YASKAWA products remain the responsibility of the equipment designer or end user. YASKAWA accepts no responsibility for the way its products are incorporated into the final system design. Under no circumstances should any YAS-
KAWA product be incorporated into any product or design as the exclusive or sole safety control. Without exception, all controls should be designed to detect faults dynamically and fail safely under all circumstances. All products designed to incorporate a component part manufactured by YASKAWA must be supplied to the end user with appropriate warnings and instructions as to that part’s safe use and operation. Any warnings provided by YASKAWA must be promptly provided to the end user. YASKAWA offers an express warranty only as to the quality of its products in conforming to standards and specifications published in the YASKAWA manual. NO OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IS OFFERED.
YASKAWA assumes no liability for any personal injury, property damage, losses, or claims arising from misapplication of its products.
WARNING
•
•
•
•
Read and understand this manual before installing, operating, or servicing this drive. All warnings, cautions, and instructions must be followed. All activity must be performed by qualified personnel. The drive must be installed according to this manual and local codes.
Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on. Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power is on. Do not remove or insert the digital operator while power is on.
Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50Vdc. To prevent electric shock, wait at least five minutes after all indicators are OFF and measure DC bus voltage level to confirm safe level.
Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the unit. This equipment uses sensitive devices and may be damaged by high voltage.
WARNING
•
•
Varispeed G7 is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 240
VAC maximum (200 V Class) and 480 VAC maximum (400 V Class). Use a circuit breaker or fuses having an interrupting rating not less than 100,000 RMS symmetrical ampers,600 VAC maximum.
Do not connect unapproved LC or RC interference suppression filters, capacitors, or overvoltage protection devices to the output of the drive. These devices may generate peak currents that exceed drive specifications.
i
ii
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
To avoid unnecessary fault displays caused by contactors or output switches placed between drive and motor, auxiliary contacts must be properly integrated into the control logic circuit.
YASKAWA is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user; doing so will void the warranty.
This product must not be modified.
Verify that the rated voltage of the drive matches the voltage of the incoming power supply before applying power.
To meet CE directives, proper line filters and proper installation are required.
Some drawings in this manual may be shown with protective covers or shields removed, to describe details. These must be replaced before operation.
Observe electrostatic discharge procedures when handling circuit boards to prevent ESD damage.
The equipment may start unexpectedly upon application of power. Clear all personnel from the drive, motor, and machine area before applying power. Secure covers, couplings, shaft keys, and machine loads before energizing the drive.
Please do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts. The operating company is responsible for any injuries or equipment damage resulting from failure to heed the warnings in this manual.
Intended Use
Drives are intended for installation in electrical systems or machinery.
The drives are designed and manufactured in accordance with applicable UL and cUL standards, and CE directives.
For use in the European Union, the installation in machinery and systems must conform to the following product standards of the Low Voltage Directive:
EN 50178: 1997-10, Electronic Equipment for Use in Power Installations
EN 60201-1: 1997-12 Machine Safety and Equipping with Electrical Devices
Part 1: General Requirements (IEC 60204-1:1997)
EN 61010: 1997-11 Safety Requirements for Information Technology Equipment
(IEC 950:1991 + A1:1992 + A2:1993 + A3:1995 + A4:1996, modified)
The G7 series drives comply with the provisions of the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC as amended by 93/68/EEC.
These drives conform to the following standard: EN 50178: 1997-10.
Your supplier or Yaskawa representative must be contacted when using leakage current circuit breaker in conjunction with frequency drives.
In certain systems it may be necessary to use additional monitoring and safety devices in compliance with the relevant safety and accident prevention regulations. The frequency drive hardware must not be modified.
General Safety
The following conventions are used to indicate precautions in this manual. Failure to heed precautions provided in this manual can result in serious or possibly even fatal injury or damage to the products or to related equipment and systems.
WARNING
Indicates precautions that, if not heeded, could possibly result in loss of life or serious injury.
CAUTION
Indicates precautions that, if not heeded, could result in relatively serious or minor injury, damage to the product, or faulty operation.
Failure to heed a precaution classified as a caution can result in serious consequences depending on the situation.
Indicates important information that should be memorized.
IMPORTANT iii
iv
Safety Information
Confirmations upon Delivery
CAUTION
• Never install an Inverter that is damaged or missing components.
Doing so can result in injury.
Installation
CAUTION
• Always hold the case when carrying the Inverter.
If the Inverter is held by the front cover, the main body of the Inverter may fall, possibly resulting in injury.
• Attach the Inverter to a metal or other noncombustible material.
Fire can result if the Inverter is attached to a combustible material.
• Install a cooling fan or other cooling device when installing more than one Inverter in the same enclosure so that the temperature of the air entering the Inverters is below 45 C.
Overheating can result in fires or other accidents.
Wiring
WARNING
• Always turn OFF the input power supply before wiring terminals.
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
• Wiring must be performed by an authorized person qualified in electrical work.
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
• Be sure to ground the ground terminal. (200 V Class: Ground to 100 or less, 400 V Class:
Ground to 10 or less)
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
• Always check the operation of any emergency stop circuits after they are wired.
Otherwise, there is the possibility of injury. (Wiring is the responsibility of the user.)
• Never touch the output terminals directly with your hands or allow the output lines to come into contact with the Inverter case. Never short the output circuits.
Otherwise, an electric shock or ground short can occur.
• If the power supply is turned ON during the FWD (or REV) Run Command is given, the motor will start automatically.
Turn the power supply ON after verifying that the RUN signal is OFF.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
• When the 3-wire sequence is set, do not make the wiring for the control circuit unless the multifunction input terminal constant is set.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
CAUTION
• Check to be sure that the voltage of the main AC power supply satisfies the rated voltage of the
Inverter.
Injury or fire can occur if the voltage is not correct.
• Do not perform withstand voltage test on the Inverter.
Otherwise, semiconductor elements and other devices can be damaged.
• Connect braking resistors, Braking Resistor Units, and Braking Units as shown in the I/O wiring examples.
Otherwise, a fire can occur and the Inverter, braking resistors, Braking Resistor Units, and Braking Units can be damaged.
• Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque.
Otherwise, a fire may occur.
• Do not connect AC power to output terminals U, V, and W.
The interior parts of the Inverter will be damaged if voltage is applied to the output terminals.
• Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors or LC/RC noise filters to the output circuits.
The Inverter can be damaged or interior parts burnt if these devices are connected.
• Do not connect magnetic contactors to the output circuits.
If a load is connected while the Inverter is operating, surge current will cause the overcurrent protection circuit inside the
Inverter to operate.
Setting User Constants
CAUTION
• Disconnect the load (machine, device) from the motor before performing rotational autotuning.
The motor may turn, possibly resulting in injury or damage to equipment. Also, motor constants cannot be correctly set with the motor attached to a load.
• Stay clear of the motor during rotational autotuning.
The motor repeats running and stopping until autotuning has been completed, possibly resulting in injury.
• In stationary autotuning 1, when the motor is first operated in the drive mode after tuning, the remaining motor constants E2-02 (Motor rated slip) and E2-03 (Motor no-load current) are set automatically. To perform an operation immediately after stationary autotuning 1, use the following procedure under the recommended conditions.
(1) Check the values of E2-02 and E2-03 in verify mode or advanced programming mode.
(2) Run the motor once in drive mode under the following conditions.
• The Inverter and the motor are connected.
• The motor shaft is not locked with a mechanical brake or other stopping mechanism (or function).
• A motor-load ratio of 30% or less is maintained.
• A speed of 30% or more of the base frequency set at E1-06 (default = highest frequency) is maintained at a constant speed for one second or more.
(3) After stopping the motor, check the values of E2-02 and E2-03 again in verify mode or advanced programming mode. If the values of E2-02 and E2-03 differ from the ones before the first operation was carried out, the settings have been successfully completed. Next, check if the values are suitable or not.
If the values of E2-02 and E2-03 differed greatly from the reference data of the motor in the test report or the instruction manual (TOE-S616-60.1), hunting, motor vibrations, insufficient motor torque, or an overcurrent may occur because the motor is operated although the aforementioned conditions have not been fulfilled after stationary autotuning 1. For elevators, failure to observe this caution may result in the cage falling or injury. If so, perform stationary autotuning 1 again and run the motor using the aforementioned procedure under the recommended conditions or perform stationary autotuning 2 or rotational autotuning.
Usually the standard setting for E2-02 is 1 Hz to 3 Hz, and that for E2-03 is 30 to 65 of the rated current for a generalpurpose motor. Generally, the larger the motor capacity is, the smaller the rated slip and the ratio of the no-load current to the rated current become. Use the data given in Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04) of Chapter 5 User Constants as a reference.
v
vi
Trial Operation
WARNING
• Check to be sure that the front cover is attached before turning ON the power supply.
An electric shock may occur.
• Do not come close to the machine when the fault reset function is used. If the alarmed is cleared, the machine may start moving suddenly.
Also, design the machine so that human safety is ensured even when it is restarted.
Injury may occur.
• Provide a separate emergency stop switch; the Digital Operator STOP Key is valid only when its function is set.
Injury may occur.
• Reset alarms only after confirming that the RUN signal is OFF.
Injury may occur.
CAUTION
• Don't touch the radiation fins (heatsink), braking resistor, or Braking Resistor Unit. These can become very hot.
Otherwise, a burn injury may occur.
• Be sure that the motor and machine is within the applicable ranges before starting operation.
Otherwise, an injury may occur.
• Provide a separate holding brake if necessary.
Always construct the external sequence to confirm that the holding brake is activated in the event of an emergency, a power failure, or an abnormality in the Inverter.
Failure to observe this caution can result in injury.
• If using an Inverter with an elevator, take safety measures on the elevator to prevent the elevator from dropping.
Failure to observe this caution can result in injury.
• Don't check signals while the Inverter is running.
Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged.
• Be careful when changing Inverter settings. The Inverter is factory set to suitable settings. For the
Inverters in the 400 V class of 55 kW or more, however, select the correct power supply voltage jumper according to the input voltage.
Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged.
Maintenance and Inspection
WARNING
• Do not touch the Inverter terminals. Some of the terminals carry high voltages and are extremely dangerous.
Doing so can result in electric shock.
• Always have the protective cover in place when power is being supplied to the Inverter. When removing the cover, always turn OFF the power supply to the Inverter through an ELCB or MCCB.
Doing so can result in electric shock.
WARNING
• Turn OFF the main circuit power supply and wait for at least 5 minutes. Wait until the CHARGE indicator light goes out before performing maintenance or inspections.
The capacitor will remain charged and is dangerous.
• Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized personnel.
Remove all metal objects, such as watches and rings, before starting work. Always use grounded tools.
Failure to heed these warning can result in electric shock.
• For 400-V class Inverters of 55 kW to 300 kW with SPEC: E and later, take safety measures such as the installation of an emergency-stop switch before adjusting constants.
Failure to do so may result in injury caused by the motor accidentally rotating during stationary autotuning performed by the Inverter when the constants are adjusted.
• Provide a separate holding brake if necessary.
Always make any adjustments other than those involving the operation of the Inverter with the holding brake released.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury.
• If using an Inverter with an elevator, take safety measures on the elevator to prevent the elevator from dropping.
Failure to observe this caution can result in injury.
CAUTION
• A CMOS IC is used in the control board. Handle the control board and CMOS IC carefully.
The CMOS IC can be destroyed by static electricity if touched directly.
• Do not change the wiring, or remove connectors or the Digital Operator, during operation.
Doing so can result in personal injury.
Other
• Do not attempt to modify or alter the Inverter.
Doing so can result in electrical shock or injury.
WARNING
CAUTION
• Do not subject the Inverter to halogen gases, such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine, at any time even during transportation or installation.
Otherwise, the Inverter can be damaged or interior parts burnt.
vii
viii
Warning Information and Position
There is warning information on the drive in the position shown in the following illustration.
Always heed the warnings.
Warning information position
Warning information position
Illustration shows the CIMR-G7U20P4
Warning Information
Illustration shows the CIMR-G7U2018
!"##!$!" ix
x
Registered Trademarks
The following registered trademarks are used in this manual.
• DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendors Association, Inc.).
• ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet International, Ltd.
• LONworks is a registered trademark of the Echelon.
• MODBUS is a registered trademark of the MODBUS.org
Before Reading This Manual
There are places in this manual where the constants and explanations depend on the software version. Explanations for both old and new versions are provided. Parts that are shaded and parts where “PRG 102 only” appears apply to G7-series Inverters with software version
PRG 102 and later.
Parts where “PRG 103 only” appears apply only to G7-series Inverters with software version PRG 103 .
Be sure to confirm the PRG number on the Inverter’s nameplate. An example is given below.
Inverter model
Input specifications
Output specifications
Lot number
Serial number
UL file number
G7U
400Hz
C
XXX
Inverter specifications
Mass
Software version
1
2
Contents
Handling Drives ...................................................................... 1-1
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions...............................................................1-7
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site ............................................1-10
Installation Orientation and Space..............................................................1-11
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover.............................................1-12
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover ........................1-14
Wiring....................................................................................... 2-1
Installing and Wiring Option Cards .............................................................2-31
xi
xii
3
4
5
Digital Operator and Modes....................................................3-1
Trial Operation .........................................................................4-1
Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (380-480 V Drives of 55 kW or Higher)....... 4-3
User Parameters ......................................................................5-1
Digital Operator Display Functions and Levels ............................................ 5-3
6 Parameter Settings by Function............................................ 6-1
Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Sent ....................................6-9
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics...........................................6-15
Adjusting Frequency References ...............................................................6-24
Operation Avoiding Resonance (Jump Frequency Function) .......................................6-27
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit
Reducing Motor Speed Fluctuation (Slip Compensation Function) ..............................6-32
Compensating for Insufficient Torque at Startup and Low-speed.................................6-35
Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is Lost ...........6-65
Performing Overheating Protection on Mounted Braking Resistors .............................6-67
xiii
xiv
7
Switching Operation between Digital Operator and Control Circuit Terminals............. 6-69
Raising and Lowering Frequency References Using Contact Signals (UP/DOWN) .... 6-72
Switching Operations between a Communications Option and Control Terminals ...... 6-76
Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands (FJOG/RJOG) . 6-77
Troubleshooting ......................................................................7-1
Protective and Diagnostic Functions............................................................ 7-2
Low Speed Control Accuracy at High-speed Rotation in Open-loop Vector Mode ...... 7-32
If There is Noise When the Drive is Started or From an AM Radio.............................. 7-34
8
Maintenance and Inspection.................................................. 8-1
9 Specifications ......................................................................... 9-1
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices........................................9-6
10 Appendix ............................................................................... 10-1
Varispeed G7 Control Modes .....................................................................10-2
Motor Application Precautions..................................................................10-10
Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts, and Chains) ...................10-11
Conformance to UL and CE Markings......................................................10-12
xv
xvi
Handling Drives
This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving or installing an drive.
Varispeed G7 Introduction ...........................................1-2
Confirmations upon Delivery........................................1-3
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions..............................1-7
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site ...........1-10
Installation Orientation and Space.............................1-11
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover ............1-12
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover .........................................................1-14
Varispeed G7 Introduction
1
-2
Varispeed G7 Models
The Varispeed-G7 Series of drives included two drives in two voltage classes: 200-240V and 380-480V. Maximum motor capacities vary from 20P4 to 2110 and 40P4 to 4300 (42 models).
Table 1.1 Varispeed G7 Models
21
26
32
40
6.9
8.4
11
16
1.4
2.6
3.7
4.7
85
110
140
160
37
50
61
70
13
19
25
30
Output
Capacity kVA
1.2
2.3
3.0
4.6
6.9
10
130
150
180
210
50
61
74
98
230
280
340
460
Voltage
Class
200-240V class
380-480V class
Maximum
Motor
Capacity kW
11
15
18.5
22
3.7
4.0
5.5
7.5
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
55
75
90
110
22
30
37
45
7.5
11
15
18.5
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
75
90
110
132
30
37
45
55
160
185
220
300
Varispeed G7
Basic Model Number
CIMR-G7U20P4
CIMR-G7U20P7
CIMR-G7U21P5
CIMR-G7U22P2
CIMR-G7U23P7
CIMR-G7U25P5
CIMR-G7U27P5
CIMR-G7U2011
CIMR-G7U2015
CIMR-G7U2018
CIMR-G7U2022
CIMR-G7U2030
CIMR-G7U2037
CIMR-G7U2045
CIMR-G7U2055
CIMR-G7U2075
CIMR-G7U2090
CIMR-G7U2110
CIMR-G7U40P4
CIMR-G7U40P7
CIMR-G7U41P5
CIMR-G7U42P2
CIMR-G7U43P7
CIMR-G7U44P0
CIMR-G7U45P5
CIMR-G7U47P5
CIMR-G7U4011
CIMR-G7U4015
CIMR-G7U4018
CIMR-G7U4022
CIMR-G7U4030
CIMR-G7U4037
CIMR-G7U4045
CIMR-G7U4055
CIMR-G7U4075
CIMR-G7U4090
CIMR-G7U4110
CIMR-G7U4132
CIMR-G7U4160
CIMR-G7U4185
CIMR-G7U4220
CIMR-G7U4300
Specifications
(Always specify through the protective structure when ordering.)
Open Chassis
(IEC IP00)
CIMR-G7
Enclosed Wall-mounted
(IEC IP20, NEMA 1)
CIMR-G7
20P41
20P71
Remove the top and bottom covers from the Enclosed
Wall-mounted model.
21P51
22P21
23P71
25P51
27P51
2011
20151
20181
-
20300
20370
20450
20550
20750
20900
21100
Remove the top and bottom covers from the Enclosed
Wall-mount model.
20220
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
40P41
40P71
41P51
42P21
43P71
44P01
45P51
47P51
-
-
-
-
40550
40750
40900
41100
41320
41600
41850
42200
43000
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
40111
40151
40181
40221
40301
40371
40451
-
Confirmations upon Delivery
Confirmations upon Delivery
Checks
Check the following items as soon as the drive is delivered.
Is the drive damaged in any way?
Table 1.2 Checks
Item
Has the correct model of drive been delivered?
Method
Check the model number on the nameplate on the side of the drive.
Inspect the entire exterior of the drive to see if there are any scratches or other damage resulting from shipping.
Are any screws or other components loose?
Use a screwdriver or other tools to check for tightness.
If you find any irregularities in the above items, contact the agency from which you purchased the drive or your Yaskawa representative immediately.
Nameplate Information
There is a nameplate attached to the side of each drive. The nameplate shows the model number, specifications, lot number, serial number, and other information on the drive.
Example Nameplate
The following nameplate is an example for a standard drive: 3-phase, 200-240Vac, 0.4kW, IEC IP20 and
NEMA 1 standards.
G U Drive specifications
Drive model
Output specifications
Lot number
Serial number
Mass
Fig 1.1 Nameplate
1-
3
1
-4
Drive Model Numbers
The model number of the drive on the nameplate indicates the specification, voltage class, and maximum motor capacity of the drive in alphanumeric codes.
CIMR – G7 U 2 0P4
AC Drive
G7 Family
No.
U
Spec
UL Specification
Rating t
No.
2
4
Voltage
3-phase, 208-240Vac
3-phase, 480Vac
Fig 1.2 Drive Model Numbers
Drive Specifications
The SPEC number on the nameplate indicates the voltage, drive rating, enclosure type, and the revision code of the drive in alphanumeric codes. The SPEC number for drives that have custom features, i.e. CASE software, will have a SPEC number that indicates the custom features installed.
No.
2
4
Voltage
AC input, 3-phase, 200-240V
AC input, 3-phase, 380-480V
2 0P4 1
No.
0P4
0P7 to
300
Max. Motor Capacity
0.4kW
0.75kW
to
300kW *
“P” indicates the decimal point
No.
0
1
Fig 1.3 Drive Specifications
Enclosure Type
Open chassis (IEC IP00)
NEMA Type 1 (IEC IP20)
TERMS
Open Chassis Type (IEC IP00)
Protected so that parts of the human body cannot reach electrically charged parts from the front when the drive is mounted in a control panel.
NEMA Type 1 (IEC IP20)
The drive is shielded from the exterior, and can thus be mounted to the interior wall of a standard building (not necessarily enclosed in a control panel). The protective structure conforms to the standards of NEMA 1 in the
USA.
Top protective cover must be installed to conform with IEC IP20 and NEMA 1 Type 1 requirements. Refer to
Confirmations upon Delivery
Component Names
Models CIMR-G7U20P4 thru 2015 and 40P4 thru 4015
The external appearance and component names of the drive are shown in Fig 1.4
. The drive with the terminal cover removed is shown in Fig 1.5
.
Top protective cover
[Required for NEMA Type 1 (IEC IP20)]
Front cover
Digital Operator
Terminal cover
Mounting hole
Diecast case
Nameplate
Bottom protective cover
Fig 1.4 Drive Appearance
Fig 1.5 Terminal Arrangement
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Ground terminal
1-
5
1
-6
Models CIMR-G7U2018 thru 2110 and 4018 thru 4300
The external appearance and component names of the drive are shown in Fig 1.6
. The drive with the terminal cover removed is shown in Fig 1.7
.
Mounting holes
Drive cover
Front cover
Cooling fan
Digital Operator
Terminal cover
Nameplate
Fig 1.6 Drive Appearance
Charge indicator
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
Ground terminal
Terminal Arrangement(18.5kW or More)
Fig 1.7 Terminal Arrangement
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
Open Chassis Drives (IP00)
Exterior diagrams of the open-chassis drives are shown below.
W1
4-d t1
W D1
3 D
Models CIMR-G7U20P4 thru 2015 and 40P4 thru 4015
CHARGE
(5)
∗
W
Front View
(5)
∗
D
Side View
D1 t1
Models CIMR-G7U2018 thru 2110 and 4018 thru 4160
Bottom View
1-
7
NEMA Type 1 Drives (IP 20)
Exterior diagrams of the Enclosed Wall-mounted drives (NEMA1 Type 1) are shown below.
W1
4-d
1
-8
W D1
3 D
Models CIMR-G7U20P4 thru 2015 and 40P4 thru 4015 t1
4-d
(5)*
+ 1
CHARGE
+ 3 t1
W1
W
Front View
(5)*
(5) D
Side View
D1
Models CIMR-G7U2018 thru 2075 and 4018 thru 4160
Bottom View
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
Table 1.3 Drive Dimensions (mm) and Masses (kg)
Voltage
Class
200-240V
(3-phase)
380-480V
(3-phase)
Model
CIMR-
G7U
W H
4075
4090
4110
4132
4160
4185
4220
4300
4018
4022
4030
4037
4045
4055
43P7
44P0
45P5
47P5
4011
4015
2090
2110
40P4
40P7
41P5
42P2
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
140 280
157
126 266 7
39
23P7
25P5
27P5
200 300
177
197 186 285
2011
2015
240 350
2018 250 400
207 216 335
260
195 385
2022 275 450
2030
375 600
2037
300
330
220 435
250 575
8
7.5
59
65.5
78
100
12.5
100
2045
2055
450 725 350 325 700
2075 500 850 360 370 820
130
15
575 885 380 445 855
140 280
157
126 266 7
140
39
177 59
200
240
300
350
197
207
186
216
285
335
8 65.5
78
275
325
450
500
575
450
550
725
850
916
258
283
348
358
378
220
260
325
370
445
435
535
700
820
855
7.5
12.5
15
45.8
100
105
130
140
D
Open Chassis (IP00)
W1 H1 H2 D1 t1
5
2.3
3.2
4.5
5
2.3
3.2
4.5
90
91
109
127
165
175
Approx
Mass
3
4
6
7
200 300 197 186 300 285 8
0
11
21
240
254
350
380
535
24 279 613
57
380 809
63
207
260
298
328
216
220
350
450
335
195 400 385
435
250 600 575
7.5
0
30
135
165
209
86
87
453 1027 348 325 725 700
12.5
302
108 504 1243 361 370 850 820 15 393
150
3.5
4.5
7
10
26
37
Dimensions (mm)
W
140
140
200
240
279
329
H
280
280
300
350
535
635
715
D
157
177
157
177
197
207
258
285
453 1027 348
504 1243 358
579 1324 378
Enclosed Wall-mounted (NEMA Type 1)
W1
126
126
186
216
220
260
325
370
445
H0
280
280
300
350
450
550
725
850
916
H1
266
266
285
335
435
535
700
820
855
---
H2
7
7
8
7.5
12.5
15
45.8
H3
0
0
85
165
302
393
408
D1
39
59
65.5
78
100
100
130
39
59
65.5
78
100
105
130
140 t1
5
Heat Generation
(W)
Approx
Mass
Mounting
Holes*
External Internal
21 36
Total
Heat
Cooling
Method
57
3
4
6
7
M5
43
58
83
42
47
53
85
105
136
122 64 186
187 87 274
263 112 375
Natural
2.3
11
24
M6
357 136 493
473 174 647
599 241 840
27
62
68
679 257 936
878 362 1240
1080 434 1514
3.2
94
95
M10
1291 510 1801
1474 607 2081
4.5
114 M12 2009 823 2832
5
3.5
M5
Fan
1660 871 2531
2389 1194 3583
10 39 49
Natural
21
33
44
46
65
79
41 49 90
4.5
6
10
77 63 140
100 66 166
132 80 212
197 107 304
246 116 362
311 135 446
2.3
M6
3.2
4.5
29
39
40
98
99
127
137
175
185
M10
M12
354 174 528
516 210 726
633 246 879
737 285 1022
929 340 1269
1239 488 1727
1554 597 2151
1928 762 2690
2299 928 3227
2612 1105 3717
3614 1501 5115
Fan
See Table 1.4
* Same for Open Chassis and Enclosed Wall-mounted drives
Table 1.4 480Vac (185 to 300 kW) Drive Dimensions (mm) and Masses (kg)
Voltage
Class
380-
480V
(3-phase)
Model
CIMR-
G7U
4185
4220
W H D
Open Chassis (IP00)
W1 W2 W3 H1 H2 D1
Dimensions (mm) t1
Heat Generation (W)
Approx
Mass
260
Enclosed Wall-mounted (NEMA Type1)
W H D W1 W2 W3 H1 H2 D1 t1
Approx
Mass
Mounting
Holes*
External Internal
Total
Heat
4436 1995 6431
710 1305 413 540 240 270 1270 15 125.5 4.5
280 --M12 5329 2205 7534
4300 916 1475 413 730 365 365 1440 15 125.5 4.5
415 6749 2941 9690
Cooling
Method
Fan
1-
9
1
-10
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site
Install the drive in the installation site described below and maintain optimum conditions.
Installation Site
Install the drive to a non-combustible surface under the following conditions in UL Pollution Degree 2 or less environments. This excludes wet locations where pollution may become conductive due to moisture, and locations containing conductive foreign matter
Table 1.5 Installation Site
Type
UL Type 1 wall-mounted enclosure
Ambient Operating Temperature
14 F to 104 F (-10 to + 40 C)
Humidity
95% RH or less (no condensation)
Open chassis 14 F to 113 F (-10 to + 45 C) 95% RH or less (no condensation)
Protective covers are attached to the top and bottom of the drive. It is recommended to remove the protective covers before operating a NEMA Type 1 drive (Models CIMR-G7U2015/4015 and smaller) in a panel to obtain the 113 45 C) ambient operating temperature.
Observe the following precautions when installing the drive. Make sure to install:
• In a clean location which is free from oil mist and dust.
• In an environment where metal shavings, oil, water, or other foreign materials do not get into the drive.
• In a location free from radioactive materials and combustible materials (e.g. wood).
• In a location free from harmful gases and liquids.
• In a location free from excessive vibration.
• In a location free from chlorides
• In a location away from direct sunlight.
Controlling the Ambient Temperature
To enhance the reliability of operation, the drive should be installed in an environment free from extreme temperature variation. If the drive is installed in an enclosure, use a cooling fan or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 113 F (45 C .
Protecting the Drive from Foreign Matter
During drive installation and project construction, it is possible to have foreign matter such as metal shavings or wire clippings fall inside the drive. To prevent foreign matter from falling into the drive, place a temporary cover over the drive.
Always remove the temporary cover from the drive before start-up. Otherwise, ventilation will be reduced, causing the drive to overheat.
Installation Orientation and Space
Installation Orientation and Space
Install the drive vertically so as not to reduce the cooling effect. When installing the drive, always provide the following installation space to allow normal heat dissipation.
1.97in * (50mm) minimum
4.72in (120mm) minimum
Air
1.2in
(30.5mm) minimum
1.97in (50mm) minimum
1.2in
(30.5mm) minimum
4.75in (120mm) minimum
Air
Horizontal Clearance Vertical Clearance
* For drive model G7U4300, this clearance dimension is 11.81in (300mm) minimum. All other models require 1.97in (50mm) minimum.
Fig 1.8 Drive Installation Orientation and Space
IMPORTANT
1. The same space is required horizontally and vertically for both Open Chassis (IP00) and Enclosed Wallmounted (IP20, NEMA 1 Type 1) drives.
2. Always remove the protection covers before installing a 200-240 or 380-480 V Class drive with an output of
15 kW or less in a panel.
Always provide enough space for suspension eye bolts and the main circuit lines when installing a 200-240 or 380-480 V Class drive with an output of 18.5 kW or more in a panel.
1-
11
1
-12
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover
Remove the terminal cover to wire cables to the control circuit and main circuit terminals.
Removing the Terminal Cover
Models CIMR-G7U20P4 thru 2015 and 40P4 thru 4015
Loosen the screws at the bottom of the terminal cover, press in on the sides of the terminal cover in the direction indicated by arrow 1, and then lift the terminal cover up to an angle of about 30 degrees in the direction indicated by arrow 2.
Remove the terminal cover in the direction indicated by arrow 3.
1
2
1
Approx. 30
°
3
Fig 1.9 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-G7U23P7 Shown Above)
Models CIMR-G7U2018 thru 2110 and 4018 thru 4300
Loosen the screws on the left and right at the top of the terminal cover, pull out the terminal cover in the direction of arrow 1 and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.
2
1
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover
Fig 1.10 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-G7U2018 Shown Above)
Attaching the Terminal Cover
After wiring the terminal block, attach the terminal cover by reversing the removal procedure.
For Models CIMR-G7U2015/4015 and smaller, insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the groove on the drive, and press in on the bottom of the terminal cover until it clicks into place.
For drives CIMR-G7U2018/4018 and larger, insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the groove on the drive, and secure the terminal cover by lifting it up toward the top of the drive.
1-
13
1
-14
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and
Front Cover
The methods of removing and attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover are described in this section.
Models CIMR-G7U20P4 thru 2015 and 40P4 thru 4015
To attach optional cards or change the terminal card connector, remove the Digital Operator and front cover in addition to the terminal cover. Always remove the Digital Operator from the front cover before removing the terminal cover.
The removal and attachment procedures are given below.
Removing the Digital Operator
Press the lever on the side of the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 1 to unlock the Digital Operator and lift the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the Digital Operator as shown in the following illustration.
2
1
Fig 1.11 Removing the Digital Operator (Model CIMR-G7U43P7 Shown Above)
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover
Removing the Front Cover
Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the directions of arrows 1 and lift the bottom of the cover in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the front cover as shown in Fig. 1.12.
1
1
2
Fig 1.12 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-G7U43P7 Shown Above)
Mounting the Front Cover
After wiring the terminals, mount the front cover to the drive by performing in reverse order to the steps to remove the front cover.
1. Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover; otherwise, Digital
Operator may malfunction due to improper mating with control board connector.
2. Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the drive and press the lower part of the front cover onto the drive until the front cover snaps into place.
1-
15
1
-16
Mounting the Digital Operator
After attaching the front cover, mount the Digital Operator onto theDrive using the following procedure.
1. Hook the Digital Operator at A (two locations) on the left side of the opening on the front cover in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in the following illustration.
2. Press the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 until it snaps in place at B (two locations).
1
2
A
B
Fig 1.13 Mounting the Digital Operator
IMPORTANT
1. Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator or mount or remove the front cover using methods other than those described above, otherwise the drive may break or malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Never attach the front cover to the drive with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover. Imperfect contact can result.
Always attach the front cover to the drive by itself first, and then attach the Digital Operator to the front cover.
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover
Models CIMR-G7U2018 thru 2110 and 4018 thru 4300
For drive models CIMR-G7U2018 thru 2110 and 4018 thru 4300, remove the terminal cover and then use the following procedures to remove the Digital Operator and main cover.
Removing the Digital Operator
Use the same procedure as for drives with an output of 18.5 kW or less.
Removing the Front Cover
Loosen all screws on the front cover. Lift up at the location labelled 1 at the top of the control circuit terminal card and move in the direction of arrow 2.
2
1
Fig 1.14 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-G7U2018 Shown Above)
Attaching the Front Cover
Attach the front cover by reversing the procedure to remove it.
1. Confirm that the Digital Operator is not mounted on the front cover. If the cover is attached while the
Digital Operator is mounted to it, the Digital Operator may malfunction due to improper mating with its connector.
2. Insert the tab on the top of the front cover into the slot on the drive and press in on the cover until it clicks into place on the drive.
Attaching the Digital Operator
Use the same procedure as for drives with an output of 18.5 kW or less.
1-
17
1
-18
Wiring
This chapter describes wiring terminals, main circuit terminal connections, main circuit terminal wiring specifications, control circuit terminals, and control circuit wiring specifications.
Connection Diagram ....................................................2-2
Terminal Block Configuration.......................................2-4
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals......................................2-5
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals ................................2-22
Installing and Wiring Option Cards ............................2-31
2
-2
Connection Diagram
The connection diagram of the drive is shown in Fig 2.1
When using the Digital Operator, the motor can be operated by wiring only the main circuits.
3-Phase
Power Supply
50/60Hz
L1
L2
L3
Digital Inputs
24VDC, 8mA
Multi-function
Digital Inputs
24VDC, 8 mA
Branch circuit
protection supplied
by others.
MCCB
Remove jumpers if using 12 pulse input
Foward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
External Fault
Fault Reset
Multi-Step Reference 1
Multi-Step Reference 2
Jog Reference
Baseblock
Multi-Step Reference 3
Multi-Step Reference 4
Accel / Decel Time 1
Fast-Stop N.O.
DC Link Choke
Standard:
CIMR-G7U2018 to 2110
CIMR-G7U4018 to 4300
Shorting Bar Standard:
CIMR-G7U20P4 to 2015
CIMR-G7U40P4 to 4015
U X
Remove if adding external DC link choke
12 Pulse Input Terminals R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 are standard on CIMR-G7U2018 - 2110 and CIMR-G7U4018 - 4300.
- 2110 and CIMR-G7U4018 - 4300.
Braking Terminals B1, B2 are standard on CIMR-G7U20P4 -
2015 and CIMR-G7U40P4- 4015.
+ 1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R/L11
S/L21
T/L31
+ 2 + 3 -
G7
B1 B2
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
S1
S2
S3
(H1-01)
S4
(H1-02)
S5
(H1-03)
S6
(H1-04)
S7
(H1-05)
S8 (H1-06)
S9 (H1-07)
S10 (H1-08)
S11 (H1-09)
S12
(H1-10)
SN
SC
SP +24VDC
E(G)
(H2-01)
(H2-02)
(H2-03)
(H2-04)
(H2-05)
Motor
T1
T2
T3
M
M4
M5
M6
P3
C3
P4
C4
MA
MB
MC
M1
M2
M3
250VAC, 30VDC, 1A
During Run
Digital Output 1
Zero Speed
Fault Contact
Frequency Agree 1
Inverter Ready
Minor Fault - Alarm
Multi-function
Digital Outputs 2-4
250VAC, 30VDC, 1A
Multi-function
Digital Outputs 5-6
48VDC, 50mA
External
Frequency
Reference
2kΩ
Modbus RTU
Communications
RS-485/422
19.2 Kbps
2kΩ
R+
R-
S+
S-
IG
+V +15VDC +/-10%, 20mA
E(G)
-V -15VDC +/-10%, 20mA
A1 0 to +/-10VDC, 20 kΩ *
(H4-01)
FM
A2 4 to 20mA, 250Ω* (S1-2 ON)
[0 to +/-10VDC, 20kΩ **] (S1-2 OFF)
Multi-function Analog Input 1
(H3-09)
A3 0 to +/-10VDC, 20kΩ *
Multi-function Analog Input 2
(H3-05)
RP 0 to 32kHz, 5 to 12VDC, 3kΩ ***
Multi-function Pulse Input
(H6-01)
AC
(H4-04)
AM
(H6-06)
MP
AC
Terminating
Resistor
110Ω
S1-1
Jumper CN15
CH1
CH2
V
DIP Switch S1
S1-1
S1-2
OFF ON
+
+
-
Output Frequency
-
Output Current
Output Frequency
Multi-function
Analog Output 1 - 2
0 to +/-10VDC, 2mA
4-20mA, 500Ω
+/-9 Bit Resolution
+/- 8% Accuracy
Multi-function
Pulse Output
0 to 32kHz
9VDC @ 3kΩ
+/-1% Accuracy
See Page 2-25 for details.
* +/-11 Bit Resolution, 0.2% Accuracy
** 10 Bit Resolution, 0.2% Accuracy
*** +/-1% Accuracy
Fig 2.1 Connection Diagram (Model CIMR-G7U2018 Shown Above)
Connection Diagram
IMPORTANT
1. Control circuit terminals are arranged as shown below.
E(G)
S9
SN
S1
S10
SC SP
S11
A1
S12
A2
S2 S3 S4
P3
S5
+V
C3
S6
P4
AC
S7
V
C4
S8
R+ R S+ S
A3
FM
MP
AC
AC
AM
RP
IG
M5
M3
M6
M4
MA
M1
MB MC
M2 E(G)
2. The output current capacity of the +V terminal is 20 mA.
3. Disable the stall prevention during deceleration (set parameter L3-04 to 0) when using a Braking Resistor
Unit. If this user parameter is not changed to disable stall prevention, the system may not stop during deceleration.
4. Main circuit terminals are indicated with double circles and control circuit terminals are indicated with single circles.
5. The wiring for a motor with a cooling fan is not required for self-cooling motors.
6. PG circuit wiring (i.e., wiring to the PG-X2 Card) is not required for open-loop vector control.
7. Sequence input signals S1 to S12 are labeled for sequence connections (0 V common and sinking mode) for no-voltage contacts or NPN transistors. These are the default settings.
For PNP transistor sequence connections (+24V common and sourcing mode) or to provide a 24-V external power supply, refer to
.
8. The master speed frequency reference can set to input either a voltage (terminal A1) or current (terminal
A2) by changing the setting of parameter H3-13. The default setting is for a voltage reference input.
9. The multi-function analog output is a dedicated meter output for an analog frequency meter, ammeter, voltmeter, wattmeter, etc. Do not use this output for feedback control or for any other control purpose.
10.DC reactors to improve the input power factor built into 200-240 V Class drives for 18.5 to 110 kW and
380-480 V Class drives for 18.5 to 300 kW. A DC reactor is thus an option only for drives for 15 kW or less.
11.Set parameter L8-01 to 1 when using a breaking resistor (ERF). When using a Braking Resistor Unit, a shutoff sequence for the power supply must be made using a thermal relay trip.
2-
3
2
-4
Terminal Block Configuration
The terminal arrangement for 200-240 V class drives are shown in
.
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Ground terminal
Fig 2.2 Terminal Arrangement (200-240 V Class Drive for 0.4 kW Shown Above)
Charge indicator
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
Ground terminal
Terminal Arrangement(18.5kW or More)
Fig 2.3 Terminal Arrangement (200-240 V Class Drive for 18.5 kW Shown Above)
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors
Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from
to . Refer to instruction manual TOE-C726-2
for wire sizes for Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units.
2-
5
2
-6
Drive Model
CIMR
G7U20P4
Table 2.1 200-240 V Class Wire Sizes
Terminal Symbol
Terminal
Screws
Clamping
Torque lb•in(N•m)
Terminal
Block
Acceptable
Wire Range
AWG(mm
2
)
Recommended
Wire Size
AWG
(mm
2
)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4
10.6 to 13.2
(1.2 to 1.5)
18 to 10
(0.82 to 5.5)
14
(2)
Wire Type
G7U20P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4
10.6 to 13.2
(1.2 to 1.5)
18 to 10
(0.82 to 5.5)
14
(2)
G7U21P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4
10.6 to 13.2
(1.2 to 1.5)
18 to 10
(0.82 to 5.5)
14
(2)
G7U22P2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4
10.6 to 13.2
(1.2 to 1.5)
18 to 10
(0.82 to 5.5)
12
(3.5)
G7U23P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4
10.6 to 13.2
(1.2 to 1.5)
18 to 10
(0.82 to 5.5)
10
(5.5)
G7U25P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M5
20.4 to 22.1
(2.3 to 2.5)
10 to 6
(5.5 to 14)
8
(8)
G7U27P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M5
20.4 to 22.1
(2.3 to 2.5)
10 to 6
(5.5 to 14)
6
(14)
G7U2011
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3
B1, B2
G7U2015
G7U2018
G7U2022
G7U2030
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3
B1, B2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3 r/ 1, / 2
M5
M6
M8
M6
M8
M8
M6
M5
M6
M8
M6
M8
M10
M8
M10
M4
35.2 to 44
(4.0 to 5.0)
20.4 to 22.1
(2.3 to 2.5)
35.2 to 44
(4.0 to 5.0)
79.2 to 88
(9.0 to 10.0)
20.4 to 22.1
(2.3 to 2.5)
35.2 to 44
(4.0 to 5.0)
79.2 to 88
(9.0 to 10.0)
35.2 to 44
(4.0 to 5.0)
79.2 to 88
(9.0 to 10.0)
79.2 to 88
(9.0 to 10.0)
35.2 to 44
(4.0 to 5.0)
79.2 to 88
(9.0 to 10.0)
155 to 198
(17.6 to 22.5)
78 to 95
(8.8 to 10.8)
155 to 198
(17.6 to 22.5)
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
8 to 1
(8 to 50)
12 to 6
(3.5 to 14)
*3
8 to 1
(8 to 50)
12 to 6
(3.5 to 14)
*3
8 to 1/0
(8 to 60)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
*3
8 to 1/0
(50 to 60)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
*3
N/A
4
(22)
Application
Dependent
Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables
*3
3
(30)
Application
Dependent
*3
3
(30)
Application
Dependent
*3
1
(50)
Application
Dependent
*3
2/0
(60)
Application
Dependent
2
(30)
16
(1.25)
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Drive Model
CIMR
G7U2037
G7U2045
G7U2055
G7U2075
G7U2090
G7U2110
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, r/ 1, / 2
,
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75 C
1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21,
T1/L31
3
1
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
, 1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3 r/ 1, / 2 r/ 1, / 2 r/ 1, / 2
3 r/ 1, / 2
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/
L31
3
Terminal Symbol r/ 1, / 2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21,
T1/L31
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
Terminal
Screws
M10
M8
M10
M4
M10
M8
M10
M4
M12
M10
M8
M12
M4
M12
M12
M8
M12
M4
M12
M12
M8
M12
M4
M12
M12
M8
M12
M4
155 to 198
(17.6 to 22.5)
78 to 95
(8.8 to 10.8)
155 to 198
(17.6 to 22.5)
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
155 to 198
(17.6 to 22.5)
78 to 95
(8.8 to 10.8)
155 to 198
(17.6 to 22.5)
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
276 to 345
(31.4 to 39.2)
155 to 198
(17.6 to 22.5)
78 to 95
(8.8 to 10.8)
155 to 198
(17.6 to 22.5)
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
276 to 345
(31.4 to 39.2)
276 to 345
(31.4 to 39.2)
78 to 95
(8.8 to 10.8)
276 to 345
(31.4 to 39.2)
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
Clamping
Torque lb•in(N•m)
276 to 345
(31.4 to 39.2)
276 to 345
(31.4 to 39.2)
78 to 95
(8.8 to 10.8)
276 to 345
(31.4 to 39.2)
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
276 to 345
(31.4 to 39.2)
276 to 345
(31.4 to 39.2)
78 to 95
(8.8 to 10.8)
276 to 345
(31.4 to 39.2)
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
Terminal
Block
Acceptable
Wire Range
AWG(mm 2 )
Recommended
Wire Size
AWG
(mm 2 )
3/0
(80)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Wire Type
Application
Dependent
1
(38)
16
(1.25)
1/0 2P
(50 2P)
Application
Dependent
1/0
(50)
16
(1.25)
3/0 2P
(80 2P)
3/0 2P
(80 2P)
Application
Dependent
2/0
(80)
16
(1.25)
250 2P
(150 2P)
4/0 2P
(100 2P)
Application
Dependent
2/0 2P
(60 2P)
16
(1.25)
350 2P, or
1/0 4P
(200 2P, or
50 4P)
300 2P, or
1/0 4P
(150 2P, or
50 4P)
Application
Dependent
300 2P
(150 2P)
16
(1.25)
350 2P, or
1/0 4P
(200 2P, or
50 4P)
300 2P, or
1/0 4P
(150 2P, or
50 4P)
Application
Dependent
300 2P
(150 2P)
16
(1.25)
Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables
2-
7
2
-8
Drive Model
CIMR
G7U40P4
Table 2.2 380-480 V Class Wire Sizes
Terminal Symbol
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
10.6 to 13.2
(1.2 to 1.5)
Possible Wire
Sizes mm 2 (AWG)
Recommended
Wire Size mm 2 (AWG)
18 to 10
(0.82 to 5.5)
14
(2)
Wire Type
G7U40P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
10.6 to 13.2
(1.2 to 1.5)
18 to 10
(0.82 to 5.5)
14
(2)
G7U41P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
10.6 to 13.2
(1.2 to 1.5)
18 to 10
(0.82 to 5.5)
14
(2)
G7U42P2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
G7U43P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
10.6 to 13.2
(1.2 to 1.5)
18 to 10
(0.82 to 5.5)
10.6 to 13.2
(1.2 to 1.5)
18 to 10
(0.82 to 5.5)
12
(3.5)
14
(2)
12
(3.5)
G7U44P0
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
10.6 to 13.2
(1.2 to 1.5)
18 to 10
(0.82 to 5.5)
12
(3.5)
G7U45P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
10.6 to 13.2
(1.2 to 1.5)
10 to 6
(5.5 to 14)
G7U47P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M5
20.4 to 22.1
(2.3 to 2.5)
10 to 6
(5.5 to 14)
G7U4011
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M5
M5
(M6)
G7U4015
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3
B1, B2
M5
M5
M5
(M6)
M6
G7U4018
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 3, U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
M8
G7U4022
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 3, U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
M6
M8
20.4 to 22.1
(2.3 to 2.5)
20.4 to 22.1
(2.3 to 2.5)
35.2 to 44
(4.0 to 5.0)
35.2 to 44
(4.0 to 5.0)
20.4 to 22.1
(2.3 to 2.5)
35.2 to 44
(4.0 to 5.0)
35.2 to 44
(4.0 to 5.0)
79.2 to 88
(9.0 to 10.0)
35.2 to 44
(4.0 to 5.0)
79.2 to 88
(9.0 to 10.0)
10 to 6
(5.5 to 14)
10 to 6
(5.5 to 14)
10 to 6
(5.5 to 14)
10 to 6
(5.5 to 14)
10 to 6
(5.5 to 14)
12 to 3
(3.5 to 30)
*3
12 to 3
(3.5 to 30)
*3
10
(5.5)
8
(8)
8
(8)
10
(5.5)
*3
4
(22)
*3
8
(8)
8
(8)
8
(8)
6
(14)
Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Drive Model
CIMR
G7U4030
G7U4037
G7U4045
G7U4055
G7U4075
G7U4090
G7U4110
G7U4132 r/ 1, 200/ r/ 1, 200/
2
200, 400/
2
400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
3
2
200, 400/
2
400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
3
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3 r/ 1, 200/
2
200, 400/
2
400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3 r/ 1, 200/
2
200, 400/
2
400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3 r/ 1, 200/
2
200, 400/
2
400
Terminal
Screws
M8
M6
M8
M8
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
79.2 to 88
(9.0 to 10.0)
35.2 to 44
(4.0 to 5.0)
79.2 to 88
(9.0 to 10.0)
79.2 to 88
(9.0 to 10.0)
M8
M6
M8
M10
M8
M10
M4
M10
M8
M10
M4
M10
M8
M12
M4
M10
M8
M12
M4
M12
M8
M12
M4
79.2 to 88
(9.0 to 10.0)
35.2 to 44
(4.0 to 5.0)
79.2 to 88
(9.0 to 10.0)
154.8 to 197.5
(17.6 to 22.5)
78 to 95
(8.8 to 10.8)
154.8 to 197.5
(17.6 to 22.5)
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
154.8 to 197.5
(17.6 to 22.5)
78 to 95
(8.8 to 10.8)
154.8 to 197.5
(17.6 to 22.5)
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
154.8 to 197.5
(17.6 to 22.5)
78 to 95
(8.8 to 10.8)
154.8 to 197.5
(17.6 to 22.5)
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
154.8 to 197.5
(17.6 to 22.5)
78 to 95
(8.8 to 10.8)
154.8 to 197.5
(17.6 to 22.5)
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
276 to 345
(31.4 to 39.2)
78 to 95
(8.8 to 10.8)
276 to 345
(31.4 to 39.2)
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
Possible Wire
Sizes mm 2 (AWG)
8 to 1/0
(8 to 60)
(8 to 4)
8 to 22
*3
Recommended
Wire Size mm 2 (AWG)
2
(38)
Application
Dependent
*3
2 to 1/0
(30 to 60)
8 to 1/0
(8 to 60)
8 to 4
(8 to 22)
*3
N/A
2
(38)
1
(50)
Application
Dependent
*3
Wire Type
1/0
(50)
Application
Dependent
2
(38)
16
(1.25)
4/0
(100)
Application
Dependent
1
(50)
16
(1.25)
1/0 2P
(50 2P)
Application
Dependent
2/0
(60)
16
(1.25)
3/0 2P
(80 2P)
Application
Dependent
4/0
(100)
16
(1.25)
3/0 2P
(80 2P)
Application
Dependent
1/0 2P
(50 2P)
16
(1.25)
Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables
2-
9
2
-10
Drive Model
CIMR
G7U4160
3 r/ 1, 200/
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
2
, 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
200, 400/
2
400
Terminal
Screws
M12
M8
M12
M4
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
276 to 345
(31.4 to 39.2)
78 to 95
(8.8 to 10.8)
276 to 345
(31.4 to 39.2)
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
Possible Wire
Sizes mm 2 (AWG)
Recommended
Wire Size mm 2 (AWG)
4/0 2P
(100 2P)
Application
Dependent
1/0 2P
(50 2P)
16
(1.25)
Wire Type
G7U4185
G7U4220
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 r/ 1, 200/
,
3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/
L31
1
200, 400/
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 r/ 1, 200/
2
2
L31
,
3
1
200, 400/
2
2
400
400
M16
M4
M16
M4
694 to 867
(78.4 to 98.0)
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
694 to 867
(78.4 to 98.0)
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
N/A
250 x 2P
(125 x 2P)
250 x 2P
(125 x 2P)
600 x 2P
(325 x 2P)
Application
Dependent
3/0 x 2P
(80 x 2P)
16
(1.25)
350 x 2P
(185 x 2P)
300 x 2P
(150 x 2P)
250 x 4P
(125 x 4P)
Application
Dependent
4/0 x 2P
(100 x 2P)
16
(1.25)
Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables
G7U4300
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 r/ 1, 200/
2
L31
,
3
1
200, 400/
2
400
M16
M4
694 to 867
(78.4 to 98.0)
11.4 to 12.3
(1.3 to 1.4)
600 x 2P
(325 x 2P)
500 x 2P
(300 x 2P)
400 x 4P
(200 x 4P)
Application
Dependent
250 x 2P
(125 x 2P)
16
(1.25)
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75 C.
*
1
*
*
2
Wire size range provided for drives using insulated screw-type terminal blocks with a single conductor. Refer to applicable codes for proper wire type and size.
Recommended wire sizes are based on the drive current ratings and NEC Article 310 Table 310.16, 75 Degree Celsius copper or equivalent.
3 Uses non-insulated screw-type terminals. Refer to applicable codes for proper wire type and size.
IMPORTANT
Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2% of the rated voltage. Line voltage drop is calculated as follows:
Line voltage drop (V) = 3 x wire resistance ( /km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10
-3
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Specification of Closed-Loop Connectors
The closed-loop connectors must be installed on conductors before installing to terminal blocks. Use UL Listed closed-loop connectors shown below. Use rated 75 °C copper wire. Yaskawa recommends UL-Listed crimp terminals made by JST and
UL Recognized insulation cap by Tokyo DIP.
NOTICE
Damage to Equipment. The insulation cap must be examined for cracking, tearing or other reduction in the integrity of the insulation cap certainly after installation. The appropriate size insulation cap shall be used which does not allow slippage or require undue force to apply.
4018
4022
4030
4037
2055
2075
2090
2110
Drive
Model
CIMR-G7
2015
2018
2022
2030
2037
2045
4045
4055
4075
4090
4110
4132
4160
4185
4220
4300
Input Wire
Size
Input JST Kit P/N
R38–8
Table 2.3 Closed-loop Connector Sizes by Model
Insulation
Cap Model
No.
TP-038
Output Wire
Size
4 AWG
Output JST Kit P/N
R22–8 2 AWG
2 AWG R38–8
1/0 AWG R60–8
TP-038
TP-060
2 AWG
1/0 AWG
R38–8
R60–8
3/0 AWG 80-10
4/0 AWG R100–10
1/0 AWG R60–10 (2 per phase)
TP-080
TP-100
TP-060
3/0 AWG
4/0 AWG
1/0 AWG
80–10
R100–10
R60–10 (2 per phase)
3/0 AWG 80–10 (2 per phase)
250 kcmil R150–12 (2 per phase)
400kcmil
400kcmil
R200–12 (2 per phase)
R200–12 (2 per phase)
6 AWG
4 AWG
2 AWG
2 AWG
R14–6
R22–6
R38–8
R38–8
TP-080
TP-150
TP-200
TP-200
TP-014
TP-022
TP-038
TP-038
3/0 AWG
4/0 AWG
250 kcmil
300 kcmil
6 AWG
4 AWG
4 AWG
2 AWG
80–10 (2 per phase)
R100–12 (2 per phase)
R150–12 (2 per phase)
R150–12 (2 per phase)
R14–6
R22–6
R22–8
R38–8
1/0 AWG R60–8
3/0 AWG 80–10
4/0 AWG R100–10
1/0 AWG R60–10 (2 per phase)
3/0 AWG 80–10 (2 per phase)
3/0 AWG 80–12 (2 per phase)
4/0 AWG R100–12 (2 per phase)
250 kcmil RD150–14 (2 per phase)
400 kcmil RD200–14 (2 per phase)
650 kcmil RD325–14 (2 per phase)
TP-060
TP-080
TP-100
TP-060
TP-080
TP-080
TP-100
TP-150
TP-200
TP-325
1/0 AWG
3/0 AWG
4/0 AWG
1/0 AWG
3/0 AWG
3/0 AWG
4/0 AWG
250 kcmil
300 kcmil
650 kcmil
R60–8
80–10
R100–10
R60–10 (2 per phase)
80–10 (2 per phase)
80–12 (2 per phase)
R100–12 (2 per phase)
RD150–14 (2 per phase)
RD150–14 (2 per phase)
RD325–14 (2 per phase)
TP-080
TP-100
TP-150
TP-150
TP-014
TP-022
TP-022
TP-038
Insulation
Cap Model
No.
TP-022
TP-038
TP-060
TP-080
TP-100
TP-060
TP-060
TP-080
TP-100
TP-060
TP-080
TP-080
TP-100
TP-150
TP-150
TP-325
2-
11
2
-12
Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according to terminal symbols in
. Wire the terminals correctly for the desired purposes.
Table 2.4 Main Circuit Terminal Functions (200-240 V Class and 380-480 V Class)
Purpose Terminal Symbol
Model: CIMR-G7U
208-240 Vac 480 Vac
20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300
Main circuit power input
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 2018 to 2110 4018 to 4300
Drive outputs U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300
20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300 DC power input 1,
Braking Resistor Unit connection
B1, B2 20P4 to 27P5 40P4 to 4015
DC link choke connection 1, 2 20P4 to 2015 40P4 to 4015
Braking Transistor Unit connection
Ground
3, 2018 to 2110
20P4 to 2110
4018 to 4300
40P4 to 4300
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Main Circuit Configurations
The main circuit configurations of the drive are shown in Table 2.5
.
Table 2.5 Drive Main Circuit Configurations
208-240 Vac
CIMR-G7U20P4 to 2015
B1 B2
480 Vac
CIMR-G7U40P4 to 4015
B1 B2
+ 1
+ 2
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
+ 1
+ 2
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Power supply
Control circuits
Power supply
Control circuits
+ 1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
CIMR-G7U2018, 2022
+ 3
Power supply
Control circuits
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
+ 1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
CIMR-G7U4018 to 4045
+ 3
Power supply
Control circuits
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
+ 1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
r/ 1
/ 2
CIMR-G7U2030 to 2110
+ 3
Power supply
Control circuits
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
+ 1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
r/ 1
200/
2
200
400/ 2
400
CIMR-G7U4055 to 4300
+ 3
Power supply
Control circuits
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Note Consult your Yaskawa representative before using 12-phase rectification.
2-
13
2
-14
Standard Connection Diagrams
Standard drive connection diagrams are shown in Fig 2.4.
These are the same for both 208-240 Vac and 480
Vac drives. The connections depend on the drive capacity.
CIMR-G7U20P4 to 2015 and 40P4 to
4015
CIMR-G7U2018, 2022, and 4018 to 4045
DC link choke
(optional)
3-phase 200-240Vac
(380-480 Vac)
+ 1 + 2 B1 B2
R/L1
S/L2
U/T1
V/T2
T/L3 W/T3
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
IM
3-phase 200-240
Vac(380-480 Vac)
+ 1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
+ 3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
IM
Be sure to remove the short-circuit bar before connecting the DC link choke.
The DC link choke is built in.
CIMR-G7U2030 to 2110
3-phase
200-240Vac
+ 1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31 r/ 1
/ 2
+ 3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
IM
CIMR-G7U4055 to 4300
+ 1
R/L1
S/L2
3-phase 380-480 Vac
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31 r/ 1
200/ 2
200
400/ 2 400
+ 3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Control power is supplied internally from the main circuit DC power supply for all drive models.
Fig 2.4 Main Circuit Terminal Connections
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
IM
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Wiring the Main Circuits
This section describes wiring connections for the main circuit inputs and outputs.
Wiring Main Circuit Inputs
Observe the following precautions for the main circuit power supply input.
Installing a Molded-case Circuit Breaker
Always connect the power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) and power supply via a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) suitable for the drive.
•
•
•
Choose an MCCB with a capacity of 1.5 to 2 times the drive's rated current.
For the MCCB's time characteristics, be sure to consider the drive's overload protection (one minute at
150% of the rated output current).
If the same MCCB is to be used for more than one drive, or other devices, set up a sequence so that the power supply will be turned OFF by a fault output, as shown in
.
20P4 to 2030: 3-phase,
200 to 240 Vac, 50/60 Hz
2037 to 2110: 3-phase,
200 to 230 Vac, 50/60 Hz
40P4 to 4300: 3-phase,
380 to 460 Vac, 50/60 Hz
Power supply
Drive
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Fault output
(NC)
* For 380-480 V class drives, connect a 460/230 V transformer.
Fig 2.5 MCCB Installation
Installing a Ground Fault Interrupter
Drive outputs use high-speed switching, so high-frequency leakage current is generated. Therefore, at the drive primary side, use a ground fault interrupter to detect only the leakage current in the frequency range that is hazardous to humans and exclude high-frequency leakage current.
•
•
For the special-purpose ground fault interrupter for drives, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitivity amperage of at least 30 mA per drive.
When using a general ground fault interrupter, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitivity amperage of 200 mA or more per drive and with an operating time of 0.1 s or more.
2-
15
2
-16
Installing a Magnetic Contactor
If the power supply for the main circuit is to be shut off during a sequence, a magnetic contactor can be used.
When a magnetic contactor is installed on the primary side of the main circuit to forcibly stop the drive, however, the regenerative braking does not work and the drive will coast to a stop.
• The drive can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side.
Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor, however, may cause the drive to break down. Start and stop the drive at most once every 30 minutes.
•
•
When the drive is operated with the Digital Operator, automatic operation cannot be performed after recovery from a power interruption.
If the Braking Resistor Unit is used, program the sequence so that the magnetic contactor is turned OFF by the contact of the Unit's thermal overload relay.
Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block
Input power supply can be connected to any terminal R/L1, S/L2, or T/L3 on the terminal block; the phase sequence of input power supply is irrelevant to the phase sequence.
Installing an AC Reactor
If the drive is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kVa or more) or the phase advancing capacitor is switched, an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit, causing the converter unit to break down.
To prevent this, install an optional AC Reactor on the input side of the drive or a DC link choke to the DC link choke connection terminals.
This also improves the power factor on the power supply side.
Installing a Surge Absorber
Always use a surge absorber or diode for inductive loads near the drive. These inductive loads include magnetic contactors, electromagnetic relays, solenoid valves, solenoids, and magnetic brakes.
Installing a Noise Filter on Power Supply Side
Install a noise filter to eliminate noise transmitted between the power line and the drive.
• Correct Noise Filter Installation
Power supply
MCCB
Noise filter
MCCB
Drive
Other controllers
IM
Use a special-purpose noise filter for drives.
Fig 2.6 Correct Power supply Noise Filter Installation
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
• Incorrect Noise Filter Installation
Power supply MCCB
Drive
MCCB
Generalpurpose noise filter
Other controllers
IM
Power supply
MCCB
Generalpurpose noise filter
Drive
IM
MCCB
Other controllers Do not use general-purpose noise filters. Generalpurpose noise filter can not effectively suppress noise generated from the drive.
Fig 2.7 Incorrect Power supply Noise Filter Installation
Wiring the Output Side of Main Circuit
Observe the following precautions when wiring the main output circuits.
Connecting the Drive and Motor
Connect output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 to motor lead wires U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3, respectively.
Check that the motor rotates forward with the forward run command. Switch over any two of the output terminals to each other and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse with the forward run command.
Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals
Never connect a power supply to output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. If voltage is applied to the output terminals, the internal circuits of the drive will be damaged.
Never Short or Ground Output Terminals
If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the drive casing, an electric shock or grounding will occur. This is extremely hazardous. Do not short the output wires.
Do Not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor or Noise Filter
Never connect a phase advancing capacitor or LC/RC noise filter to an output circuit. The high-frequency components of the drive output may result in overheating or damage to these part or may result in damage to the drive or cause other parts to burn.
2-
17
2
-18
Do Not Use an Electromagnetic Switch
Never connect an electromagnetic switch (MC) between the drive and motor and turn it ON or OFF during operation. If the MC is turned ON while the drive is operating, a large inrush current will be created and the overcurrent protection in the drive will operate.
When using an MC to switch to a commercial power supply, stop the drive and motor before operating the
MC. Use the speed search function if the MC is operated during operation. If measures for momentary power interrupts are required, use a delayed release MC.
Installing a Thermal Overload Relay
This drive has an electronic thermal protection function to protect the motor from overheating. If, however, more than one motor is operated with one drive or a multi-pole motor is used, always install a thermal relay
(THR) between the drive and the motor and set L1-01 to 0 (no motor protection). The sequence should be designed so that the contacts of the thermal overload relay turn OFF the magnetic contactor on the main circuit inputs.
NOTICE
Damage to Equipment. This product does not provide motor over-temperature sensing. External motor over-temperature protection is required as defined in NFPA 70 of the National Electrical Code,
Article 430, Section X, Paragraph 430.126.
Installing a Noise Filter on Output Side
Connect a noise filter to the output side of the drive to reduce radio noise and inductive noise.
Power supply
MCCB
Drive
Noise filter IM
Signal line
Inductive noise
Controller
Radio noise
AM radio
Inductive Noise:
Radio Noise:
Electromagnetic induction generates noise on the signal line, causing the controller to malfunction.
Electromagnetic waves from the drive and cables cause the broadcasting radio receiver to make noise.
Fig 2.8 Installing a Noise Filter on the Output Side
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Countermeasures Against Inductive Noise
As described previously, a noise filter can be used to prevent inductive noise from being generated on the output side. Alternatively, cables can be routed through a grounded metal pipe to prevent inductive noise.
Keeping the metal pipe at least 30 cm (approximately 1 foot) away from the signal line considerably reduces inductive noise.
Power supply
MCCB
Drive
Metal pipe
IM
30 cm min.
(1 ft.)
Signal line
Controller
Fig 2.9 Countermeasures Against Inductive Noise
Countermeasures Against Radio Interference
Radio noise is generated from the drive as well as from the input and output lines. To reduce radio noise, install noise filters on both input and output sides, and also install the drive in a totally enclosed steel box.
The cable between the drive and the motor should be as short as possible.
Power supply
MCCB
Steel box
Noise filter
Drive
Noise filter
Metal pipe
IM
Fig 2.10 Countermeasures Against Radio Interference
Cable Length between Drive and Motor
If the cable between the drive and the motor is long, the high-frequency leakage current will increase, causing the drive output current to increase as well. This may affect peripheral devices. To prevent this, adjust the
carrier frequency (set in C6-01, C6-02) as shown in Table 2.6
Parameters .)
Cable length
Carrier frequency
Table 2.6 Cable Length between Drive and Motor
50 m max. (164 ft)
15 kHz max.
100 m max. (328 ft)
10 kHz max.
More than 100 m (> 328 ft)
5 kHz max.
Ground Wiring
Observe the following precautions when wiring the ground line.
• Always use the ground terminal of the 200-240 V drive with a ground resistance of less than 100 and that of the 380-480 V drive with a ground resistance of less than 10 .
• Do not share the ground wire with other devices, such as welding machines or power tools.
2-
19
2
-20
•
•
Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the length of the ground wire.
Leakage current flows through the drive. Therefore, if the distance between the ground electrode and the ground terminal is too long, potential on the ground terminal of the drive will become unstable.
When using more than one drive, be careful not to loop the ground wire.
OK NO
Fig 2.11 Ground Wiring
Connecting the Braking Resistor (ERF)
A Braking Resistor that mounts to the drive can be used with 200-240 V and 380-480 V Class drives with outputs from 0.4 to 3.7 kW.
Connect the braking resistor as shown in Fig 2.12
.
L8-01 (Protect selection for internal DB resistor)
L3-04 (Stall prevention selection during deceleration)
(Select either one of them.)
Table 2.7
1 (Enables overheat protection)
0 (Disables stall prevention function)
3 (Enables stall prevention function with braking resistor)
Drive
Braking resistor
Fig 2.12 Connecting the Braking Resistor
IMPORTANT
The braking resistor connection terminals are B1 and B2. Do not connect to any other terminals. Connecting to any terminals other than B1 or B2 can cause the resistor to overheat, resulting in damage to the equipment.
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Connecting the Braking Resistor Unit (LKEB) and Braking Unit (CDBR)
Use the following settings when using a Braking Resistor Unit. Refer to User Parameters
connection methods for a Braking Resistor Unit.
A Braking Resistor that mounts to the drive can also be used with drives with outputs from 0.4 to 3.7 kW.
Table 2.8
L8-01 (Protect selection for internal DB resistor) 0 (Disables overheat protection)
L3-04 (Stall prevention selection during deceleration)
(Select either one of them.)
0 (Disables stall prevention function)
3 (Enables stall prevention function with braking resistor)
L8-01 is used when a braking resistor without thermal overload relay trip contacts (ERF type mounted to drive) is connected.
The Braking Resistor Unit cannot be used and the deceleration time cannot be shortened by the drive if L3-04 is set to 1 (i.e., if stall prevention is enabled for deceleration).
2-
21
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors
For remote operation using analog signals, keep the control line length between the Digital Operator or operation signals and the drive to 50 m (164 ft) or less, and separate the lines from high-power lines (main circuits or relay sequence circuits) to reduce induction from peripheral devices.
When setting frequencies from an external frequency reference (and not from a Digital Operator), used shielded twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to terminal E (G), as shown in the following diagram.
Shield terminal
2 k
2 k
Speed setting power supply, +15 V 20 mA
Master speed reference, -10 to 10 V
Master speed reference, 4 to 20 mA
2 k
2 k
Auxiliary reference
Pulse input, 32 kHz max.
Analog common
2
-22
Fig 2.13
Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in
.
Terminals
FM, AC, AM, M3, M4,
SC, A1, A2, A3, +V, -V,
S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6,
S7, S8, MA, MB, MC,
M1, M2, P3, C3, P4, C4,
MP, RP, R+, R-, S9, S10,
S11, S12, S+, S-, IG, SN,
SP
Table 2.9 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes (Same for all Models)
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque lb-in (N•m)
Possible Wire
Sizes
AWG (mm 2 )
Recommended
Wire Size AWG
(mm 2 )
Phoenix type
*3
4.2 to 5.3
(0.5 to 0.6)
Stranded wire:
26 to 16
(0.14 to 1.5)
18
(0.75)
Wire Type
•Shielded, twisted-pair wire
•Shielded, polyethylenecovered, vinyl sheath cable
*1
*2
E (G) M3.5
7.0 to 8.8
(0.8 to 1.0)
20 to 14
(0.5 to 2)
12
(1.25)
* 1. Use shielded twisted-pair cables to input an external frequency reference.
* 2. Yaskawa recommends using straight solderless terminals on digital inputs to simplify wiring and improve reliability.
* 3. Yaskawa recommends using a thin-slot screwdriver with a 3.5 mm blade width.
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Control Circuit Terminal Functions
The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in Table 2.10
. Use the appropriate terminals for the correct purposes.
Type
Digital input signals
No.
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
SC
Table 2.10 Control Circuit Terminals
Signal Name
Forward run/stop command
Reverse run/stop command
Function
Forward run when CLOSED; stopped when OPEN.
Reverse run when CLOSED; stopped when OPEN.
Multi-function input 1
*1
Factory setting: External fault when
CLOSED.
Multi-function input 2
*1 Factory setting: Fault reset when CLOSED.
Multi-function input 3
Multi-function input 4
Multi-function input 5
Multi-function input 6
Multi-function input 7
Multi-function input 8
Multi-function input 9
Multi-function input 10
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
Sequence input common
Factory setting: Multi-speed speed reference 1 effective when CLOSED.
Factory setting: Multi-speed speed reference 2 effective when CLOSED.
Factory setting: Jog frequency selected when
CLOSED.
Factory setting: External baseblock when
CLOSED.
Multifunction digital inputs.
Functions set by
H1-01 to
H1-10
Factory setting: Multi-speed speed reference 3 effective when CLOSED.
Factory setting: Multi-speed speed reference 4 effective when CLOSED.
Factory setting: Accel/decel time selected when CLOSED.
Factory setting: Emergency stop
(NO contact) when CLOSED.
-
Signal Level
24 Vdc, 8 mA
Photocoupler isolation
2-
23
2
-24
Type
Analog input signals
Photocoupler outputs
No.
+V
-V
A1
A2
A3
AC
E(G)
P3
C3
P4
C4
Signal Name
Master speed frequency reference
Table 2.10 Control Circuit Terminals (Continued)
+15 V power output
-15 V power output
Multi-function analog input
Multi-function analog input
Function
+15 V power supply for analog input or transmitters
-15 V power supply for analog input or transmitters
-10 to +10 V/-100 to 100%
0 to +10 V/100%
4 to 20 mA/100%, -10 to +10 V/-100 to
+100%, 0 to +10 V/100%
4 to 20 mA/100%, -10 to +10 V/-100 to
+100%, 0 to +10 V/100%
Signal Level
+15 V
(Max. current: 20 mA)
-15 V
(Max. current: 20 mA)
-10 to +10 V, 0 to
+10 V (Input impedance: 20 k )
Multifunction analog input 2.
Function set by
H3-09
Multifunction analog input 3.
Function set by
H3-05
4 to 20 mA (Input impedance: 250 )
4 to 20 mA (Input impedance: 250 )
Analog reference common
Shield wire, optional ground line connection point
Multi-function PHC output 3
0 V
-
Factory setting: Ready for operation when CLOSED.
-
-
50 mA max. at 48
Vdc
*2
Multi-function PHC output 4
Factory setting: FOUT frequency detected when
CLOSED.
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Type
Relay outputs
Analog monitor outputs
Pulse
I/O
No.
MA
MB
MC
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
FM
AM
AC
RP
MP
Signal Name
Fault output signal
(NC contact)
Table 2.10 Control Circuit Terminals (Continued)
Function
Fault output signal
(NO contact)
MA / MC: Closed during fault condition
MB / MC: Open during fault condition
Relay contact output common
-
Multi-function contact output
(NO contact)
Factory setting: Operating
Operating when CLOSED across M1 and
M2.
Multifunction digital output.
Function set by
H2-01
Multi-function contact output 2
Multi-function contact output 3
Multi-function analog monitor 1
Multi-function analog monitor 2
Factory setting: Zero speed
Zero speed level (b2-01) or below when
CLOSED.
Factory setting: Frequency agreement detection
Frequency within 2 Hz of set frequency when CLOSED.
0 to +10Vdc / 100% frequency
-10 to +10Vdc / 100% frequency
4 to 20mA / 100% frequency
0 to +10Vdc / 100% drive's rated output current
-10 to +10Vdc / 100% drive's rated output current
4 to 20mA / 100% drive's rated output current
Multifunction analog output 1.
Function set by
H4-01
Multifunction analog output 2.
Function set by
H4-04
Multifunction digital output.
Function set by
H2-02
Multifunction digital output.
Function set by
H2-03
Analog common -
Multi-function pulse input
Multi-function pulse monitor
*3 Factory setting: Frequency reference
Factory setting: Output frequency
Signal Level
Form C
Dry contacts capacity:
1 A max. at 250 Vac
1 A max. at 30 Vdc
Form A
Dry contacts capacity:
1 A max. at 250 Vac
1 A max. at 30 Vdc
0 to +10 Vdc ±5%
2 mA max.
Function set by
H6-01
Function set by
H6-06
0 to 32 kHz (3 k )
0 to 32 kHz (2.2 k )
2-
25
2
-26
Type
RS-
485/
422
No.
R+
R-
S+
S-
Signal Name
MODBUS
MODBUS
Table 2.10 Control Circuit Terminals (Continued) communications input communications output
Function
For 2-wire RS-485, short R+ and S+ as well as R- and S-.
Signal Level
Differential input,
PHC isolation
Differential output,
PHC isolation
IG Communications shield wire -
* 1. For a 3-wire sequence, the default settings are a 3-wire sequence for S5, multi-step speed setting 1 for S6 and multi-step speed setting 2 for S7.
* 2. When driving a reactive load, such as a relay coil, always insert a flywheel diode as shown in
.
* 3. Pulse input specifications are given in the following table.
-
Low level voltage
High level voltage
H duty
Pulse frequency
0.0 to 0.8 V
3.5 to 13.2 V
30% to 70%
0 to 32 kHz
Flywheel diode
External power:
48 V max.
Coil
50 mA max.
The rating of the flywheel diode must be at least as high as the circuit voltage.
Fig 2.14 Flywheel Diode Connection
Shunt Connector CN15 and DIP Switch S1
The shunt connector CN15 and DIP switch S1 are described in this section.
Analog output switch
Voltage output
Current output
OFF ON
Terminating resistance*
Analog input switch
Factory settings
*Note: Refer to
and Input Signals.
Fig 2.15 Shunt Connector CN15 and DIP Switch S1
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
The functions of DIP switch S1 are shown in the following table.
Name
S1-1
S1-2
RS-485 and RS-422 terminating resistance
Function
Table 2.11 DIP Switch S1
Input method for analog input A2
Setting
OFF: No terminating resistance
ON: Terminating resistance of 110
OFF: 0 to 10 V (internal resistance: 20 k )
ON: 4 to 20 mA (internal resistance: 250 )
The functions and positions of CN15 are shown in the following table.
Table 2.12 Jumper CN15 Configuration Options
Jumper CN15 Configuration Analog Output Monitor Configuration
Voltage Output (0-10Vdc) for terminals FM-AC (CH1) and AM-AC (CH2)
Current Output (4-20mA) for terminals FM-AC (CH1) and AM-AC (CH2)
Voltage Output (0-10Vdc) for terminals FM-AC (CH1)
Current Output (4-20mA) for terminals AM-AC (CH2)
Current Output (4-20mA) for terminals FM-AC (CH1)
Voltage Output (0-10Vdc) for terminals AM-AC (CH2)
2-
27
2
-28
Sinking/Sourcing Mode
The multi-function input terminal logic can be switched between sinking mode (0 Vdc common) and sourcing mode (+24 Vdc common) by using the terminals SN, SC, and SP. An external 24 Vdc power supply is also supported, providing more freedom in signal input methods.
Table 2.13 Sinking/Sourcing Mode and Input Signals
Internal Power Supply External Power Supply
Sinking
Mode
S1
S2
SN
SC
SP
IP24V(+24V)
S1
S2
SN
SC
External +24V
SP
IP24V(+24V)
Sourcing
Mode
S1
S2
SN
SC
SP
IP24V(+24V)
External +24V
S1
S2
SN
SC
SP
IP24V(+24V)
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Control Circuit Terminal Connections
Connections to drive control circuit terminals are shown in
.
3-Phase
Power Supply
50/60Hz
L1
L2
L3
Digital Inputs
24VDC, 8mA
Multi-function
Digital Inputs
24VDC, 8 mA
Branch circuit
protection supplied
by others.
MCCB
Remove jumpers if using 12 pulse input
Foward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
External Fault
Fault Reset
Multi-Step Reference 1
Multi-Step Reference 2
Jog Reference
Baseblock
Multi-Step Reference 3
Multi-Step Reference 4
Accel / Decel Time 1
Fast-Stop N.O.
DC Link Choke
Standard:
CIMR-G7U2018 to 2110
CIMR-G7U4018 to 4300
Shorting Bar Standard:
CIMR-G7U20P4 to 2015
CIMR-G7U40P4 to 4015
U X
Remove if adding external DC link choke
12 Pulse Input Terminals R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 are standard on CIMR-G7U2018 - 2110 and CIMR-G7U4018 - 4300.
- 2110 and CIMR-G7U4018 - 4300.
Braking Terminals B1, B2 are standard on CIMR-G7U20P4 -
2015 and CIMR-G7U40P4- 4015.
S1
S2
S3
(H1-01)
S4 (H1-02)
S5 (H1-03)
S6 (H1-04)
S7
(H1-05)
S8
(H1-06)
S9
(H1-07)
S10
(H1-08)
S11
(H1-09)
S12
(H1-10)
SN
SC
SP +24VDC
E(G)
+ 1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R/L11
S/L21
T/L31
+ 2 + 3 -
G7
B1 B2
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
(H2-01)
(H2-02)
(H2-03)
(H2-04)
M5
M6
P3
C3
P4
C4
M1
M2
M3
M4
MA
MB
MC
250VAC, 30VDC, 1A
During Run
Digital Output 1
Zero Speed
Fault Contact
Frequency Agree 1
Inverter Ready
Minor Fault - Alarm
Multi-function
Digital Outputs 2-4
250VAC, 30VDC, 1A
Multi-function
Digital Outputs 5-6
48VDC, 50mA
(H2-05)
Motor
T1
T2
T3
M
External
Frequency
Reference
2kΩ
Modbus RTU
Communications
RS-485/422
19.2 Kbps
2kΩ
R+
R-
S+
S-
IG
+V +15VDC +/-10%, 20mA
E(G)
-V -15VDC +/-10%, 20mA
A1 0 to +/-10VDC, 20 kΩ *
(H4-01)
FM
A2 4 to 20mA, 250Ω* (S1-2 ON)
[0 to +/-10VDC, 20kΩ **] (S1-2 OFF)
Multi-function Analog Input 1 (H3-09)
A3 0 to +/-10VDC, 20kΩ *
Multi-function Analog Input 2
(H3-05)
RP 0 to 32kHz, 5 to 12VDC, 3kΩ ***
Multi-function Pulse Input
(H6-01)
AC
(H4-04)
AM
(H6-06)
MP
AC
Terminating
Resistor
110Ω
S1-1
Jumper CN15
CH1
CH2
V
DIP Switch S1
OFF
S1-1
S1-2
ON
+
+
-
-
Output Frequency
Output Current
Output Frequency
Multi-function
Analog Output 1 - 2
0 to +/-10VDC, 2mA
4-20mA, 500Ω
+/-9 Bit Resolution
+/- 8% Accuracy
Multi-function
Pulse Output
0 to 32kHz
9VDC @ 3kΩ
+/-1% Accuracy
See Page 2-25 for details.
* +/-11 Bit Resolution, 0.2% Accuracy
** 10 Bit Resolution, 0.2% Accuracy
*** +/-1% Accuracy
Fig 2.16 Control Circuit Terminal Connections
2-
29
2
-30
Control Circuit Wiring Precautions
Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits.
•
•
•
Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, , 1, 2, and 3) and other high-power lines.
Separate wiring for control circuit terminals MA, MB, MC, M1, M2, M3, M4, M5, and M6 (contact outputs) from wiring to other control circuit terminals.
Use twisted-pair or shielded twisted-pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults. Process cable ends as shown in
•
•
Connect the shield wire to terminal E (G).
Insulate the shield with tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment.
Shield sheath Armor
Do not connect here.
Connect to shield sheath terminal at drive
(terminal E (G))
Insulate with tape
Fig 2.17 Processing the Ends of Twisted-pair Cables
Control Circuit Wire Sizes
For remote operation, keep the length of the control wiring to 50m or less. Separate the control wiring from highpower lines (input power, motor leads or relay sequence circuits) to reduce noise induction from peripheral devices.
When setting speed commands from an external speed potentiometer, use shielded twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to terminal E(G), as shown above . Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in Table 2.9.
Wiring Checks
Check all wiring after wiring has been completed. Do not perform a buzzer check on control circuits. Perform the following checks on the wiring.
•
•
Is all wiring correct?
Have any wire clippings, screws, or other foreign material been left?
•
•
Are all screws tight?
Are any wire ends contacting other terminals?
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Option Card Models and Specifications
Up to three Option Cards can be mounted in the drive. You can mount up one card into each of the three places
on the controller card (A, C, and D) shown in Fig 2.18
.
lists the type of Option Cards and their specifications.
Table 2.14 Option Card Specifications
Card Model Specifications
PG Speed Control Cards
Speed Reference Cards
DeviceNet Communications
Card
Profibus-DP Communications Card
SI-N
SI-P
Analog Monitor Card
Digital Output Card
PG-A2
PG-B2
PG-D2
Serial open-collector/complimentary inputs
Phase A/B complimentary inputs
Single line-driver inputs
PG-X2
AI-14U
AI-14B
DI-08
Phase A/B line-driver inputs
Input signal levels
0 to 10 V DC (20 k ), 1 channel
4 to 20 mA (250 ), 1 channel
Input resolution: 14-bit
Input signal levels
0 to 10 V DC (20 k )
4 to 20 mA (250 ), 3 channels
Input resolution: 13-bit with sign bit
8-bit digital speed reference setting
DI-16H2 16-bit digital speed reference setting
AO-08
AO-12
DO-08
DO-02C
DeviceNet communications support
Profibus-DP communications support
8-bit analog outputs, 2 channels
12-bit analog outputs, 2 channels
Six photocoupler outputs and 2 relay outputs
2 relay outputs
Mounting
Location
A
A
A
A
C
C
C
D
D
D
D
C
C
C
2-
31
2
-32
Installation
Before mounting an Option Board, remove power from the drive and wait for the CHARGE LED to go out.
Remove the Digital Operator, front cover, and option clip. Option Clip can be easily removed by squeezing the protruding portions of the clip and then pulling it out. Then, mount the Option Board(s).
The A Option Board uses a mounting spacer to secure the board to the control board. Insert the mounting spacer as shown in Fig 2.18.
After installing an Option Board into slot C or D, insert the Option Clip to prevent the side with the connector from rising.
Refer to documentation provided with the Option Board for detailed mounting instructions for option slots A,
C, and D.
A Option Card mounting spacer hole
4CN
A Option Card connector
2CN
C Option Card connector
A Option Card mounting spacer
(Provided with A Option Card.)
Option Clip
(To prevent raising of
C and D Option Cards)
3CN
D Option Card connector
C Option Card mounting spacer
C Option Card
D Option Card
D Option Card mounting spacer
A Option Card
A Option Card mounting spacer
Fig 2.18 Mounting Option Cards
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
PG Speed Control Card Terminals and Specifications
The terminal specifications for the PG Speed Control Cards are given in the following tables.
PG-A2
The terminal specifications for the PG-A2 are given in the following table.
Terminal
TA1
TA2
No.
1
2
3
4
5
8
(E)
6
7
Table 2.15 PG-A2 Terminal Specifications
Contents
Power supply for pulse generator
Specifications
12 Vdc (±5%), 200 mA max.
0 Vdc (GND for power supply)
+12 V/open collector switching terminal
Terminal for switching between12 Vdc voltage input and open collector input. For open collector input, short across 3 and 4.
Pulse input terminal
Pulse motor output terminal
Shield connection terminal
H: +4 to 12 Vdc; L: +1 Vdc max. (Maximum response frequency: 30 kHz)
Pulse input common
12 Vdc (±10%), 20 mA max.
Pulse monitor output common
-
2-
33
2
-34
PG-B2
The terminal specifications for the PG-B2 are given in the following table.
Terminal
TA1
TA2
TA3
2
3
6
1
4
(E)
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Table 2.16 PG-B2 Terminal Specifications
Contents Specifications
12 Vdc (±5%), 200 mA max.
Power supply for pulse generator
0 Vdc (GND for power supply)
A-phase pulse input terminal
H: +8 to 12 Vdc
L: +1 Vdc max.
(Maximum response frequency: 30 kHz)
B-phase pulse input terminal
Pulse input common
H: +8 to 12 Vdc
L: +1 Vdc max.
(Maximum response frequency: 30 kHz)
A-phase monitor output terminal
B-phase monitor output terminal
Shield connection terminal
Pulse input common
Open collector output, 24 Vdc, 30 mA max.
A-phase monitor output common
Open collector output, 24 Vdc, 30 mA max.
B-phase monitor output common
-
PG-D2
The terminal specifications for the PG-D2 are given in the following table.
Terminal
TA1
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Table 2.17 PG-D2 Terminal Specifications
Contents
Power supply for pulse generator
Specifications
12 Vdc (±5%), 200 mA max.*
0 Vdc (GND for power supply)
5 Vdc (±5%), 200 mA max.*
Pulse input + terminal
Pulse input - terminal
Common terminal -
Line driver input (RS-422 level input)
Maximum response frequency: 300 kHz
7
8
Pulse monitor output + terminal
Pulse monitor output - terminal
TA2 (E) Shield connection terminal
* 5 Vdc and 12 Vdc cannot be used at the same time.
-
Line driver output (RS-422 level output)
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
PG-X2
The terminal specifications for the PG-X2 are given in the following table.
Terminal
TA1
TA2 4
5
2
3
10
1
8
9
6
7
4
5
No.
1
2
3
Table 2.18 PG-X2 Terminal Specifications
Contents
Power supply for pulse generator
A-phase + input terminal
A-phase - input terminal
B-phase + input terminal
B-phase - input terminal
Z-phase + input terminal
Z-phase - input terminal
Common terminal
A-phase + output terminal
A-phase - output terminal
B-phase + output terminal
B-phase - output terminal
Z-phase + output terminal
6
7
Z-phase - output terminal
Control circuit common
TA3 (E) Shield connection terminal
* 5 Vdc and 12 Vdc cannot be used at the same time.
Specifications
12 Vdc (±5%), 200 mA max.*
0 Vdc (GND for power supply)
5 Vdc (±5%), 200 mA max.*
Line driver input (RS-422 level input)
Maximum response frequency: 300 kHz
0 Vdc (GND for power supply)
Line driver output (RS-422 level output)
Control circuit GND
-
2-
35
2
-36
Wiring
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the Control Cards.
Wiring the PG-A2
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-A2.
Three-phase, 200-240
Vac (380-480 Vac)
Drive
R/L1 U/T1
V/T2 V/T2
W/T3 W/T3
4CN
E
PG-A2
E
4CN
TA1
4
5
6
7
TA2 (E)
8
1
2
3
+12 Vdc power supply
0 Vdc power supply
12 Vdc voltage input (A/B phase)
Pulse 0 Vdc
Pulse monitor output
Fig 2.19 Wiring a 12 V Voltage Input
Three-phase, 200-
240 Vac (380-480 Vac)
Drive
R/L1
V/T2
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3 W/T3
4CN
E
PG-A2
E
4CN
3
TA1
4
5
1
2
TA2 (E)
6
7
8
+12 Vdc power supply
0 Vdc power supply
Open collector output (A/B phase)
Pulse 0 Vdc
Pulse monitor output
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
• Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters (328 ft).
Fig 2.20 Wiring an Open-collector Input
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
PG power supply
+12 Vdc
Short for opencollector input
Pulse input
Pulse input
Fig 2.21 I/O Circuit Configuration of the PG-A2
Pulse monitor output
2-
37
2
-38
Wiring the PG-B2
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-B2.
Three-phase
200-240 Vac
(380-480 Vac)
Drive
Power supply +12 Vdc
Power supply 0 Vdc
A-phase pulse output (+)
A-phase pulse output (-)
B-phase pulse output (+)
B-phase pulse output (-)
A-phase pulse monitor output
B-phase pulse monitor output
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
• Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters (328 ft).
• The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user parameter F1-05. The factory preset if for forward rotation, A-phase advancement.
Fig 2.22 PG-B2 Wiring
PG power supply +12
Vdc
A-phase pulse input
B-phase pulse input
A-phase pulses
A-phase pulse monitor output
B-phase pulse monitor output
B-phase pulses
• When connecting to a voltage-output-type PG (encoder), select a PG that has an output impedance with a current of at least 12 mA to the input circuit photocoupler (diode).
• The pulse monitor dividing ratio can be changed using parameter F1-06.
A-phase pulses
B-phase pulses
Fig 2.23 I/O Circuit Configuration of the PG-B2
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Wiring the PG-D2
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-D2.
Three-phase
200-240 Vac
(380-480 Vac)
Drive
Power supply +12 Vdc
Power supply 0 Vdc
Power supply +5 Vdc
Pulse input + (A/B phase)
Pulse input - (A/B phase)
Pulse monitor output
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
• Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
Fig 2.24 PG-D2 Wiring
Wiring the PG-X2
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-X2.
Three-phase
200-240 Vac
(380-480 Vac)
Drive
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2
T/L3
V/T2
W/T3
Power supply +12 Vdc
Power supply 0 Vdc
Power supply +5 Vdc
A-phase pulse input (+)
A-phase pulse input (-)
B-phase pulse input (+)
B-phase pulse input (-)
A-phase pulse monitor output
B-phase pulse monitor output
Z-phase pulse monitor output
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
• Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters (328 ft).
• The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user parameter F1-05 (PG Rotation). The factory preset if for motor forward rotation, A-phase advancement.
Fig 2.25 PG-X2 Wiring
2-
39
2
-40
Wiring Terminal Blocks
Use no more than 100 meters (328 ft) of wiring for PG (encoder) signal lines, and keep them separate from power lines.
Use shielded, twisted-pair wires for pulse inputs and pulse output monitor wires, and connect the shield to the shield connection terminal.
Wire Sizes (Same for All Models)
Terminal wire sizes are shown in Table 2.19
.
Terminal
Pulse generator power supply
Pulse input terminal
Pulse monitor output terminal
Shield connection terminal
Table 2.19 Wire Sizes
Terminal
Screws
Wire Thickness (mm
2
)
-
M3.5
Wire Type
Stranded wire: 0.5 to 1.25
Single wire: 0.5 to 1.25
• Shielded, twisted-pair wire
• Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl sheath cable
0.5 to 2
Straight Solderless Terminals for Control Circuit Terminals
We recommend using straight solderless terminals on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.
Closed-loop Connector Sizes and Tightening Torque
The closed-loop connectors and tightening torques for various wire sizes are shown in
Wire Thickness [mm
2
]
Table 2.20 Closed-loop Connectors and Tightening Torques
Terminal
Screws
Crimp Terminal Size Tightening Torque (N m)
0.5
0.75
1.25 - 3.5
1.25 - 3.5
M3.5
0.8
1.25
2
1.25 - 3.5
2 - 3.5
Wiring Method and Precautions
Observe the following precautions when wiring.
• Separate the control signal lines for the PG Speed Control Card from main circuit lines and power lines.
• Connect the shield when connecting to a PG. The shield must be connected to prevent operational errors
details on connecting the shield.
•
•
•
Connect the shield to the shield terminal (E).
Do not solder the ends of wires. Doing so may cause contact faults.
When not using straight solderless terminals, strip the wires to a length of approximately 5.5 mm (0.2 in).
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Selecting the Number of PG (Encoder) Pulses
The setting for the number of PG pulses depends on the model of PG Speed Control Card being used. Set the correct number for your model.
PG-A2/PG-B2
The maximum response frequency is 32,767 Hz.
Use a PG that outputs a maximum frequency of approximately 20 kHz for the rotational speed of the motor.
f
PG
(Hz) =
Motor speed at maximum frequency output (RPM)
60
PG rating (ppr)
Some examples of PG output frequency (number of pulses) for the maximum frequency output are shown in
1800
1500
Table 2.21 PG Pulse Selection Examples
Motor's Maximum Speed (RPM)
PG Rating
(ppr)
600
800
PG Output Frequency for Maximum
Frequency Output (Hz)
18,000
20,000
1200
900
1000
1200
20,000
18,000
Note 1. The motor speed at maximum frequency output is expressed as the sync rotation speed.
2. The PG power supply is 12 Vdc.
3. A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply capacity is greater than 200 mA. (If momentary power loss must be handled, use a backup capacitor or other method.)
PG power supply
Capacitor for momentary power loss
Signals
Fig 2.26 PG-B2 Connection Example
2-
41
2
-42
PG-D2/PG-X2
There are 5 Vdc and 12 Vdc PG power supplies.
Check the PG power supply specifications before connecting.
The maximum response frequency is 300 kHz.
Use the following equation to computer the output frequency of the PG (f
PG
).
f
PG
(Hz) =
Motor speed at maximum frequency output (RPM)
60
PG rating (ppr)
A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply capacity is greater than 200 mA. (If momentary power loss must be handled, use a backup capacitor or other method.)
PG-X2
TA1
IP12
IG
IP5
A (+)
A (-)
B (+)
B (-)
Z (+)
Z (-)
IG
9
10
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
PG power supply
AC
Capacitor for momentary power loss
0V +12V
+
0 V
+12 V
+
-
+
-
PG
TA3
Fig 2.27 PG-X2 Connection Example (for 12 Vdc PG power supply)
Digital Operator and
Modes
This chapter describes Digital Operator displays and functions, and provides an overview of operating modes and switching between modes.
Digital Operator............................................................3-2
Modes ..........................................................................3-5
3
-2
Digital Operator
The Digital Operator is used for programming, operating, monitoring, and copying the drive’s parameters.
To copy parameters, G7 drives must have the same software version, model, and control method. The various items included on the Digital Operator are described below.
Menu Display -DRIVE- Rdy
Frequency Ref
U101 = 60.00Hz
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U1-02= 60.00Hz
U1-03= 10.05A
Drive Mode Indicators
See Table 3.2
Ready Display
Drive can operate when a drive command is input
Data Display
Displays monitor data, parameter data and settings
1 line x 13 characters
3 lines x 16 characters
Key Descriptions
See Table 3.1
RUN & STOP Indicators
See Tables 3.5 and 3.6
Factory Default
Setting
-QUICK-
---------------------------------
A1-02= 3 *3*
Flux Vector
“2”
Currently Programmed Value
Present Selection (User adjusts)
Digital Operator
Digital Operator Keys
The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in
.
Key Name
LOCAL/REMOTE Key
Table 3.1 Key Functions
Function
Switches between operation via the Digital Operator (LOCAL) and control circuit terminal operation (REMOTE).
This Key can be enabled or disabled by setting user parameter o2-01.
MENU Key Selects menu items (modes).
ESC Key Returns to the status before the DATA/ENTER Key was pressed.
JOG Key
FWD/REV Key
Enables jog operation when the drive is being operated from the Digital Operator.
Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the drive is being operated from the Digital Operator.
Shift/RESET Key
Increment Key
Decrement Key
DATA/ENTER Key
Sets the number of digits for user parameter settings.
Also acts as the Reset Key when a fault has occurred.
Selects menu items, sets user parameter numbers, and increments set values.
Used to move to the next item or data.
Selects menu items, sets user parameter numbers, and decrements set values.
Used to move to the previous item or data.
Pressed to enter menu items, user parameters, and set values.
Also used to switch from one display to another.
RUN Key
Starts the drive operation when the drive is being controlled by the
Digital Operator.
STOP Key
Stops drive operation.
This Key can be enabled or disabled when operating from the control circuit terminal by setting user parameter o2-02.
Note Except in diagrams, Keys are referred to using the Key names listed in the above table.
3-
3
3
-4
Drive Mode Indicators
The definition of the drive mode indicators are shown in Table 3.2.
Table 3.2 Drive Mode Indicators
Indicator Definition
FWD
REV
REMOTE SEQ
REMOTE REF
ALARM
Lit when a forward run command is input.
Lit when a reverse run command is input.
See Table 3.3.
See Table 3.4.
Lit when a fault has occurred. Flashes when an Alarm has occurred.
REMOTE Sequence (SEQ) Indicator
The status of the “REMOTE” Sequence (SEQ) indicator is shown in Table 3.3. This indicator is always “Off” when the drive is in the “LOCAL” mode. When the drive is in the “REMOTE” mode, the SEQ indicator status is dependent on the setting of parameter b1-02 (Run Command Selection). See Table 3.3.
Indicator Status
On
Off
Table 3.3 REMOTE Sequence (SEQ) Indicator
Condition
Parameter b1-02 (Run Command Selection) is set to terminal strip, communications, or an option board as indicated below: b1-02 =1 (Terminals)
=2 (Communications)
=3 (Option PCB)
Parameter b1-02 (Run Command Selection) is set to Digital Operator as indicated below: b1-02=0 (Operator)
REMOTE Reference (REF) Indicator
The status of the “REMOTE” Reference (REF) indicator is shown in Table 3.4. This indicator is always “Off” when the drive is in the “LOCAL” mode. When the drive is in the “REMOTE” mode, the REF indicator status is dependent on the setting of parameter b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection). See Table 3.4.
Indicator Status
On
Off
Table 3.4 REMOTE Reference (REF) Indicator
Condition
Parameter b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection) is set to terminal strip, communications, option board, or pulse train as indicated below: b1-01 =1 (Terminals)
=2 (Communications)
=3 (Option PCB)
=4 (Pulse Train)
Parameter b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection) is set to digital operator as indicated below: b1-01=0 (Operator)
Drive Mode Indicators
Run Indicator
The status of the “RUN” indicator is shown in Table 3.5 when the drive is in either the “LOCAL” or “REMOTE” mode.
Indicator Status
On
Blinking
Off
Table 3.5 RUN Indicator
Condition
Drive is running.
Drive is decelerating to a stop.
Drive is stopped.
Stop Indicator
The status of the “STOP” indicator is shown in Table 3.6 when the drive is in either the “LOCAL” or “REMOTE” mode.
Indicator Status
On
Blinking
Table 3.6 STOP Indicator
Condition
Drive is decelerating to a stop or stopped.
Drive is in a run condition but the frequency reference is less than the minimum output frequency E1-09, or the drive is running in “REMOTE” mode and the
“STOP” key on has been pressed.
Drive is running.
Off
Modes
This section describes the drive's modes and switching between modes.
Drive Modes
The drive's user parameters and monitoring functions are organized in groups called modes that make it easier to read and set user parameters.The drive is equipped with 5 modes.
The 5 modes and their primary functions are shown.
Table 3.7 Modes
Mode
Drive mode
Quick programming mode
Advanced programming mode
Verify mode
Autotuning mode*
Primary function(s)
The drive can be run in this mode.
Use this mode when monitoring values such as frequency references or output current, displaying fault information, or displaying the fault history.
Use this mode to reference and set the minimum user parameters to operate the drive
(e.g., the operating environment of the drive and Digital Operator).
Use this mode to reference and set all user parameters.
Use this mode to read/set user parameters that have been changed from their factory-set values.
Use this mode when running a motor with unknown motor parameters in the vector control mode. The motor parameters are calculated and set automatically.
This mode can also be used to measure only the motor line-to-line resistance.
* Always perform autotuning with the motor before operating using vector control. Autotuning mode will not be displayed during operation or when an error has occurred. The default setting of the drive is for open-loop vector control 1 (A1-02 = 2).
3-
5
Switching Modes
The mode selection display will appear when the MENU Key is pressed from a monitor or setting display.
Press the MENU Key from the mode selection display to switch between the modes. Press the DATA/ENTER
Key from the mode selection key to monitor data and from a monitor display to access the setting display.
Display at Startup
Rdy
U1 01 =60.00Hz
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
Mode Selection
Display
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
MENU
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
MENU
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
MENU
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
MENU
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
MENU
Monitor Display
DATA
ENTER
-DRIVE-
Monitor
Rdy
U1 - 01=60.00Hz
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
RESET
ESC ESC
DATA
ENTER -QUICK-
Control Method
A1-02=2 *2*
Open Loop Vector
ESC
DATA
ENTER -ADV-
Initialization
A1 - 00=1
Select Language
ESC
DATA
ENTER -VERIFY-
None Modified
ESC
DATA
ENTER -A.TUNE-
Tuning Mode Sel
T101 =0 1 *0*
Standard Tuning
"0"
ESC
RESET
ESC
Rdy
U1- 01 =60.00Hz
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
DATA
ENTER
ESC
-ADV-
Select Language
A100 =0 *1*
English
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DATA
ENTER
Setting Display
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DATA
ENTER
ESC
U1- 01= 0 60.00Hz
-QUICK-
Control Method
A1-02= 2 *2*
Open Loop Vector
DATA
ENTER
-ADV-
Select Language
A1- 00= 0 *1*
English
The constant number will be displayed if a constant has been changed. Press the
DATA/ENTER Key to enable the change.
-A.TUNE-
Tuning Mode Sel
T1- 01= 0 *0*
Standard Tuning
"0"
Fig 3.1 Mode Transitions
IMPORTANT
When running the drive after using Digital Operator, press the MENU Key to select the drive mode (displayed on the LCD screen) and then press the DATA/ENTER Key from the drive mode display to bring up the monitor display. Run commands can't be received from any other display. (Monitor display in the drive mode will appear when the power is turned ON.)
3
-6
Drive Mode
Drive mode is the mode in which the drive can be operated. The following monitor displays are possible in drive mode: The frequency reference, output frequency, output current, and output voltage, as well as fault information and the fault history.
When b1-01 (Reference selection) is set to 0, the frequency can be changed from the frequency setting display.
Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to change the frequency. The user parameter will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting.
Drive Mode Indicators
Example Operations
Key operations in drive mode are shown in the following figure.
Display at Startup
Rdy
U1 01 =60.00Hz
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
Mode Selection
Display
MENU Monitor Display
DATA
ENTER
Frequency Setting Display
DATA
ENTER A B 1 2
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
Rdy
U1 - 01=60.00Hz
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
RESET
Rdy
U1- 01 =60.00Hz
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
DATA
ENTER Rdy
U1 -01= 0 60.00Hz
MENU
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
ESC
Rdy
U1 - 02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
U1-04= 2
ESC
RESET
Rdy
U1- 02 =60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
U1-04= 2
ESC
The Frequency Setting
Display will not be displayed when using an analog reference.
ESC
MENU
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
MENU
Rdy
U1 - 40 = 10H
U1-01=60.00Hz
U1-02=60.00Hz
RESET
ESC
Rdy
U1- 40 = 10H
U1-01=60.00Hz
U1-02=60.00Hz
1
3
2
4
The fault name will be displayed if the DATA/ENTER
Key is pressed while a constant is being displayed for which a fault code is being displayed.
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
Rdy
U2 - 01=OC
U2-02= OV
U2-03=60.00Hz
RESET Rdy
U2 01 = OC
U2-02=OV
U2-03=60.00Hz
DATA
ENTER
U2 - 01= OC
Over Current
MENU
ESC ESC
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
-DRIVE-
Fault Trace
Rdy
U2 - 02 = OV
U3-03=60.00Hz
U3-04=60.00Hz
RESET Rdy
U2 02 = OV
U3-03=60.00Hz
U3-04=60.00Hz
DATA
ENTER
U2 - 02= OV
Rdy
DC Bus Overvolt
ESC
ESC
3 4
Rdy
U3 - 01= OC
U3-02= OV
U3-03= OH
RESET
5 6
-DRIVE-
Last Fault
Rdy
U3 01 = OC
U3-02=OV
U3-03=OH
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
U3 - 01= OC
Rdy
Over Current
ESC ESC
Rdy
U3 02 = OV
U3-03= OH
U3-04= UV
RESET
Rdy
U3 02 = OV
U3-03= OH
U3-04= UV
DATA
ENTER
ESC
U3 - 02= OV
Rdy
DC Bus Overvolt
ESC
5 6
A B
Fig 3.2 Operations in Drive Mode
Note When changing the display with the Increment and Decrement Keys, the next display after the one for the last parameter number will be the one for the first parameter number and vise versa. For example, the next display after the one for U1-01 will be U1-40. This is indicated in the figures by the letters
A and B and the numbers 1 to 6.
3-
7
3
-8
IMPORTANT
The display for the first monitor parameter (frequency reference) will be displayed when power is turned ON.
The monitor item displayed at startup can be set in o1-02 (Monitor Selection after Power Up).
Operation cannot be started from the mode selection display.
Quick Programming Mode
In quick programming mode, the parameters required for drive trial operation can be monitored and set.
Parameters can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to change the frequency. The user parameter will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting.
Refer to Chapter 5 User Parameters for details on the parameters displayed in quick programming mode.
Example Operations
Key operations in quick programming mode are shown in the following figure.
Drive Mode Indicators
Mode Selection Display
MENU
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
MENU
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
MENU
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
MENU
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
MENU
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
DATA
ENTER
ESC
Monitor Display
A B
-QUICK-
Control Method
A1-02=2 *2*
Open Loop Vector
-QUICK-
Reference Source
b1-01=1 *1*
Terminals
-QUICK-
Run Source
b1-02=1 *1*
Terminals
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DATA
ENTER
ESC
-QUICK-
Terminal AM Gain
H4-05=0.50
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DATA
ENTER
-QUICK-
MOL Fault Select
L1-01=1 *1*
Std Fan Cooled
ESC
DATA
ENTER
-QUICK-
StallP Decel Sel
L3-04=1 *1*
Enabled
ESC
A B
Fig 3.3 Operations in Quick Programming Mode
Frequency Setting Display
-QUICK-
Control Method
A1-02= 2 *2*
Open Loop Vector
-QUICK-
Reference Source
b1-01= 1 *1*
Terminals
-QUICK-
Run Source
b1-02= 1 *1*
Terminals
-QUICK-
Terminal AM Gain
H4-05= 0 .50
-QUICK-
MOL Fault Select
L1-01= 1 *1*
Std Fan Cooled
-QUICK-
StallP Decel Sel
L3-04= 1 *1*
Enabled
3-
9
3
-10
Advanced Programming Mode
In advanced programming mode, all drive parameters can be monitored and set.
Parameters can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to change the frequency. The user parameter will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting.
Refer to Chapter 5 User Parameters for details on the parameters.
Example Operations
Key operations in advanced programming mode are shown in the following figure.
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
MENU
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
MENU
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
MENU
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
MENU
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
MENU
Mode Selection Display
DATA
ENTER
ESC
Monitor Display
A B
-ADV-
Initialization
A1 -00=1
Select Language
RESET
ESC
RESET -ADV-
Initialization
A1 - 02 =2
Control Method
ESC
-ADV-
PID Control b5 -01=0
PID Mode
RESET
1 2
DATA
ENTER
-ADV-
Select Language
A100 =0
English
*1*
ESC
DATA
ENTER
-ADV-
Control Method
A102 =2 *2*
Open Loop Vector
ESC
1
3
2
4
-ADV-
PID Mode b501 =0
Disabled
*0*
DATA
ENTER
ESC
ESC
RESET -ADV-
PID Control b5 - 14= 1.0Sec
Fb los Det Time
-ADV-
Torque Limit
L7 -01=200%
Fwd Torque Limit
-ADV-
Torque Limit
L704 = 200%
Fwd Torque Limit
ESC
RESET
ESC
RESET
ESC
-ADV-
Fb los Det Time b514 = 1.0Sec
DATA
ENTER
ESC
3
5
4
6
-ADV-
Fwd Torque Limit
L701 = 200%
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DATA
ENTER -ADV-
Fwd Torque Limit
L704 = 200%
ESC
5 6
A B
Fig 3.4 Operations in Advanced Programming Mode
Setting Display
-ADV-
Select Language
A1- 00=
English
0 *1*
-ADV-
Control Method
A1- 02= 2 *2*
Open Loop Vector
-ADV-
PID Mode b5-01= 0
Disabled
*0*
-ADV-
Fb los Det Time b5-14= 0 1.0Sec
-ADV-
Fwd Torque Limit
L7-01= 2 00%
-ADV-
Torq Lmt Rev Rgn
L7-04= 2 00%
Drive Mode Indicators
Setting User Parameters
Here, the procedure is shown to change C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) from 10 s to 20 s.
Step
No.
1
2
Table 3.8 Setting User Parameters in Advanced Programming Mode
Digital Operator Display Description
Rdy
U1 01 =60.00Hz
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
Power supply turned ON.
MENU Key pressed to enter drive mode.
3
4
5
6
7
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
-ADV-
Initialization
A1 -00=1
Select Language
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
C1 -00= 10.0Sec
(0.0
6000.0)
10.0Sec
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
C1-01= 0 010.0Sec
MENU Key pressed to enter quick programming mode.
MENU Key pressed to enter advanced programming mode.
DATA/ENTER pressed to access monitor display.
Increment or Decrement Key pressed to display C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
DATA/ENTER Key pressed to access setting display. The setting of C1-01
(10.00) is displayed.
8
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
C1-01= 0 0 10.0Sec
Shift/RESET Key pressed to move the flashing digit to the right.
9
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
C1-01= 00 1 0.0Sec
Increment Key pressed to change set value to 20.00 s.
10
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
C1-01= 00 2 0.0Sec
11
-ADV-
Entry Accepted
12
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
C1 01 = 20.0Sec
DATA/ENTER Key pressed to enter the set data.
“Entry Accepted” is displayed for 1.0 s after the data setting has been confirmed with the DATA/ENTER Key.
The monitor display for C1-01 returns.
3-
11
3
-12
External Fault Setting Procedure
Examples of the Digital Operator displays that appear when setting an eternal fault for a multi-function contact input in Advanced Programming Mode are shown in the following diagram.
Mode Selection Display
DATA
ENTER
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
MENU
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
MENU
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
MENU
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
MENU
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
MENU
DATA
ENTER
ESC
A B
-ADV-
Digital Inputs
H1 -01=24
Terminal S3 Sel
Monitor Display
RESET
ESC
1 2
-ADV-
Terminal S3 Sel
H101 =24
External Fault
"24"
*24*
Setting Display
3 4
DATA
ENTER
ESC
-ADV-
Terminal S3 Sel
*24*
H1- 01= 24
NO/Always Det
Coast to Stop
-ADV-
Digital Inputs
H1 - 02 =14
Terminal S4 Sel
RESET -ADV-
Terminal S4 Sel
H102 =14 *14*
Fault Reset
"14"
-ADV-
Terminal S3 Sel
H1- 01= 25
Coast to Stop
*24*
ESC
RESET -ADV-
Digital Inputs
H1 - 08 =08
Terminal S8 Sel
-ADV-
Terminal S8 Sel
H108 =08 *08*
Ext BaseBlk N.O.
"08"
-ADV-
Terminal S3 Sel
H1- 01= 26
Coast to Stop
*24*
NO/During RUN
ESC
-ADV-
Digital Inputs
H2 -01= 0
Term M1-M2 Sel
1 2
-ADV-
Terminal S3 Sel
H1- 01= 27
Coast to Stop
*24*
NC/During RUN
-ADV-
Pulse I/O Setup
H6 -01= 0
Pulse Input Sel
A B
Terminal S3 Sel
H1- 01= 2F
Alarm Only
*24*
NC/During RUN
3 4
Fig 3.5 External Fault Function Setting Example
Drive Mode Indicators
Verify Mode
Verify mode is used to display any parameters that have been changed from their default settings in a programming mode or by autotuning. “None” will be displayed if no settings have been changed.
Of the environment mode settings, only A1-02 will be displayed if it has been changed. Other environment modes settings will not be displayed even if they have been changed from their default settings.
Even in verify mode, the same procedures can be used to change settings as are used in the programming modes. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to change the frequency. The user parameter will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting.
Example Operations
An example of key operations is given below for when the following settings have been changed from their default settings: b1-01 (Reference Selection), C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1), E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting), and
E2-01 (Motor Rated Current).
Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display
DATA
ENTER
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
MENU
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
MENU
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
MENU
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
MENU
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
MENU
DATA
ENTER
ESC
A B
-VERIFY-
Reference Source
b1-01=0
"1"
*0*
-VERIFY-
Accel Time 1
C1-01=200.0Sec
E1-01=200VAC
E2-01=2.00A
A B
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DATA
ENTER
ESC
DATA
ENTER
ESC
-VERIFY-
Reference Source
b1-01= 0 *0*
Terminals
"1"
-VERIFY-
Accel Time 1
C1-01= 0 200.0Sec
E1-01= 2 00VAC
E2-01= 2 .00A
Fig 3.6 Operations in Verify Mode
3-
13
3
-14
Autotuning Mode
Autotuning automatically tunes and sets the required motor parameters when operating in the vector control modes. Always perform autotuning before starting operation.
When V/f control has been selected, stationary autotuning for only line-to-line resistance can be selected.
When the motor cannot be disconnected from the load, perform stationary autotuning. Contact your Yaskawa representatives to set motor parameters by calculation.
The drive's autotuning function automatically determines the motor parameters, while a servo system's autotuning function determines the size of a load, the drives autotuning functions are fundamentally different. The default setting of the drive is for open-loop vector control 1.
Example of Operation
Set the motor output power (in kW), rated voltage, rated current, rated frequency, rated speed, and number of poles specified on the nameplate on the motor and then press the RUN Key. The motor is automatically run and the motor parameters measured based on these settings and autotuning will be set.
Always set the above items. Autotuning cannot be started otherwise, e.g., it cannot be started from the motor rated voltage display.
Parameters can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to change the frequency. The user parameter will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting.
The following example shows autotuning for open-loop vector control while operating the motor without switching to motor 2.
Drive Mode Indicators
Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display
DATA
ENTER
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
A
MENU
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
DATA
ENTER -A.TUNE-
Tuning Mode Sel
T1 01 =0 *0*
Standard Tuning
"0"
DATA
ENTER
-A.TUNE-
Tuning Mode Sel
01 = 0
Standard Tuning
"0"
MENU
ESC
ESC
DATA
ENTER
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
Rated Frequency
T1 05 = 60.0Hz
Rated Frequency
T105 = 0 60.0Hz
ESC
DATA
ENTER MENU
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
MENU
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
MENU
-A.TUNE-
Number of Poles
T1 06 = 4
Rdy
0.0Hz/0.0A
Tuning Ready ?
Press RUN key
ESC
RUN
A
The display will automatically change depending on the status of autotuning.
-A.TUNE-
Number of Poles
T1- 06 = 04
-A.TUNE-
Tune Proceeding
48.0Hz/10.5A
START GOAL
STOP
-A.TUNE-
Tune Aborted
STOP key
48.0Hz/10.5A
START GOAL
Tune Successful
* TUn10 will be displayed during rotational autotuning and TUn11 will be displayed during stationary autotuning. The DRIVE indicator will light when autotuning starts.
Fig 3.7 Operation in Autotuning Mode
IMPORTANT
The setting displays in for autotuning depend on the control mode (V/f, V/f with PG, open-loop vector 1, open-
3-
15
3
-16
Trial Operation
This chapter describes the procedures for trial operation of the drive and provides an example of trial operation.
Trial Operation Procedure ...........................................4-2
Trial Operation Procedures..........................................4-3
Adjustment Suggestions ............................................4-17
4
-2
Trial Operation Procedure
Perform trial operation according to the following flowchart.
START
Installation
Wiring
Set power supply voltage.
*1
Turn ON power.
Confirm status.
Basic settings
(Quick programming mode)
Select operating method.
V/f control?
V/f YES
(Default: A1-02 = 0)
PG?
Vector (A1-02 = 2, 3, or 4)*5
V/f with PG
(A1-02 = 1)
Settings according to control mode
Set E1-03.
V/f default: 200 V/60 Hz(400 V/60 Hz)
Set E1-03, E2-04, and F1-01.
V/f default: 200 V/60 Hz (400 V/60 Hz)
*2
Motor cable over
50 m or heavy load possibly causing motor to stall or overload?
NO
YES OK to operate motor during autotuning?
*3
NO
Stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only
*4
YES
Rotational autotuning
*6
Stationary autotuning
*6
Application settings
(Advanced programming mode)
*1 Set for 400 V Class Inverter for 55 kW or more.
No-load operation
*2 If there is a reduction gear between the motor and PG, set
the reduction ratio in F1-12 and F1-13 in advanced
programming mode.
Loaded operation
*3 Use rotational autotuning to increase autotuning accuracy
whenever it is okay for the motor to be operated.
Optimum adjustments and constant settings
Check/record constants.
END
*4 If the motor cable changes to 50 m or longer for the actual
installation, perform stationary autotuning for the line-to-line
resistance only on-site.
*5 The default control mode is open-loop vector control 2
(A1-02 = 2).
*6 If the maximum output frequency and base frequency are different, set the maximum output frequency (E1-
04) after autotuning.
Fig 4.1 Trial Operation Flowchart
Trial Operation Procedures
Trial Operation Procedures
The procedure for the trial operate is described in order in this section.
Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (380-480 V Class Drives of 55 kW or Higher)
Set the power supply voltage jumper after setting E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting) for 380-480 V class drives of 55 kW or higher. Insert the jumper into the voltage connector nearest to the actual power supply voltage.
The jumper is factory-set to 440 V when shipped. If the power supply voltage is not 440 V, use the following procedure to change the setting.
1. Turn OFF the power supply and wait for at least 5 minutes.
2. Confirm that the CHARGE indicator has gone out.
3. Remove the terminal cover.
4. Insert the jumper at the position for the voltage supplied to the drive (see
5. Return the terminal cover to its original position.
Power tab
200-240 V class power supply
380-480V class power supply
Power supply input terminals
Jumper (factory-set position)
CHARGE indicator
Fig 4.2 Power Supply Voltage Jumper
Power ON
Confirm all of the following items and then turn ON the power supply.
• Check that the power supply is of the correct voltage.
200-240 V class: 3-phase 200 to 240 Vdc, 50/60Hz
380-480 V class: 3-phase 380 to 480 Vdc, 50/60Hz
•
•
•
•
•
Make sure that the motor output terminals (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3) and the motor are connected correctly.
Make sure that the drive control circuit terminal and the control device are wired correctly.
Set all drive control circuit terminals to OFF.
When using a PG Speed Control Card, make sure that it is wired correctly.
Make sure that the motor is not connected to the mechanical system (no-load status)
4-
3
4
-4
Checking the Display Status
If the Digital Operator's display at the time the power is connected is normal, it will read as follows:
Display for normal operation
Rdy
Frequency Ref
01
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
The frequency reference monitor is displayed in the data display section.
When an fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed instead of the above display. In that case,
refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting
. The following display is an example of a display for faulty operation.
-DRIVE-
Display for fault operation
DC Bus Undervolt
The display will differ depending on the type of fault.
A low voltage alarm is shown at left.
Trial Operation Procedures
Basic Settings
Switch to the quick programming mode (“QUICK” will be displayed on the LCD screen) and then set the following user parameters. Refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes for Digital Operator operating procedures and to Chapter 5 User Parameters and Chapter 6 Parameter Settings by Function for details on the user parameters.
Parameters that must be set are listed in
and those that are set according to the application are listed
Table 4.1 Parameters that Must Be Set
Parameter
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
A1-02 b1-01 b1-02
C1-01
C1-02
Control method selection
Reference selection
Operation method selection
Set the control method for the drive.
0: V/f control
1: V/f control with PG
2: Open-loop vector control 1
3: Flux vector
4: Open-loop vector control 2
Set the frequency reference input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)
2: MODBUS communications
3: Option Card
4: Pulse train input
Set the run command input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (sequence input)
2: MODBUS communications
3: Option Card
Acceleration time
1
Set the acceleration time in seconds for the output frequency to climb from 0% to 100%.
Deceleration time
1
Set the deceleration time in seconds for the output frequency to fall from 100% to 0%.
0 to 4
0 to 4
0 to 3
0.0 to 6000.0
0.0 to 6000.0
2
1
1
10.0 s
10.0 s
E1-01
E2-01
Input voltage setting
Motor rated current
Set the drive's nominal input voltage in volts.
Set the motor rated current.
155 to 255 V
(200-240 V class)
310 to 510 V
(380-480 V class)
200 V
(200-240
V class)
400 V
(380-480
V class)
10% to 200% of drive's rated current
Setting for generalpurpose motor of same capacity as drive
L1-01
Motor protection selection
Set to enable or disable the motor overload protection function using the electronic thermal relay.
0: Disabled
1: General motor protection
2: Drive motor protection
3: Vector motor protection
0 to 3 1
4-
5
4
-6
Table 4.2 Parameters that Are Set as Required
Parameter
Number b1-03
Name Description
Stopping method selection
Select stopping method when stop command is sent.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: DC braking stop
3: Coast to stop with timer
Setting
Range
0 to 3
Factory
Setting
0
C6-02
C6-11
Carrier frequency selection
Carrier frequency selection for open-loop vector control 2
The carrier frequency is set low if the motor cable is 50 m or longer or to reduce radio noise or leakage current.
1 to F
1 to 4
Depends on capacity, voltage, and control mode.
Depends on kVA setting.
d1-01 to d1-04 and d1-17
Frequency references 1 to 4 and jog frequency reference
Set the required speed references for multi-step speed operation or jogging.
0.00 to
400.00 Hz
H4-02 and H4-
05
FM and AM terminal output gain
Adjust when an instrument is connected to the FM or AM terminal.
0.0 to 1000.0
d1-01 to d1-04:
0.00Hz
d1-17:
6.00Hz
H4-02:
100%
H4-05:
50%
L3-04
Stall prevention selection during deceleration
If using the dynamic brake option (braking resistor, Braking Resistor Units, and Braking Units), be sure to set parameter L3-04 to 0 (disabled) or 3
(enabled with braking resistor).
0 to 3 1
Trial Operation Procedures
Settings for the Control Methods
Autotuning methods depend on the control method set for the drive. Make the settings required by the control method.
Overview of Settings
Make the required settings in quick programming mode and autotuning mode according to the following flowchart.
START
NO
Vector (A1-02 = 2, 3, or 4)*3
V/f control?
YES
V/f
(A1-02 = 0 or 1)
PG?
YES
(A1-02 = 1)
NO
(Default: A1-02 = 0)
Set E1-03.
V/f default: 200 V/60 Hz(400 V/60 Hz)
Set E1-03, E2-04, and F1-01.
V/f default: 200 V/60 Hz(400 V/60 Hz)
*2
Control mode selection
Motor cable over
50 m or heavy load possibly causing motor to stall or overload?
NO
OK to operate motor during autotuning?*1
NO
YES
Stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only
YES
Rotational autotuning*4 Stationary autotuning*4
END
Note If the motor cable changes to 50 m or longer for the actual installation, perform stationary autotuning for the line-to-line resistance only on-site.
* 1. Use rotational autotuning to increase autotuning accuracy whenever it is okay for the motor to be operated. Always perform rotational autotuning when using open-loop vector control 2.
* 2. If there is a reduction gear between the motor and PG, set the reduction ratio in F1-12 and F1-13.
* 3. The default setting of the drive is for open-loop vector control 1 (A1-02 = 2).
* 4. If the maximum output frequency and base frequency are different, set the maximum output frequency (E1-04) after autotuning.
Fig 4.3 Settings According to the Control Method
4-
7
4
-8
Setting the Control Method
Any of the following five control methods can be set.
Control Mode
Parameter
Setting
Basic Control
V/f control A1-02 = 0
V/f control with PG A1-02 = 1
Main Applications
Voltage/frequency ratio fixed control
Voltage/frequency ratio fixed control with speed compensation using a PG
Variable speed control, particularly control of multiple motors with one drive and replacing existing drives
Applications requiring high-precision speed control using a PG on the machine side
Open-loop vector control 1
Flux vector control A1-02 = 3
Open-loop vector control 2
A1-02 = 2
(factory setting)
A1-02 = 4
Current vector control without a PG
Flux vector control
Current vector control without a PG with an ASR (speed controller)
(Always perform rotational autotuning.)
Variable speed control, applications requiring speed and torque accuracy using vector control without a PG
Very high-performance control with a
PG (simple servo drives, high-precision speed control, torque control, and torque limiting)
Very high-performance control without a PG (torque control without a PG, torque limiting, applications requiring a 1:200 speed control range without a
PG)
Note With vector control, the motor and drive must be connected 1:1. The motor capacity for which stable control is possible is 50% to 100% of the capacity of the drive.
PG Control without PG (A1-02 = 0)
• Set either one of the fixed patterns (0 to E) in E1-03 (V/f Pattern Selection) or set F in E1-03 to specify a user-set pattern as required for the motor and load characteristics in E1-04 to E1-13 in advanced programming mode.
Simple operation of a general-purpose motor at 50Hz: E1-03 = 0
Simple operation of a general-purpose motor at 60Hz: E1-03 = F (default) or 1
If E1-03 = F, the default setting in the user setting from
E1-04 to E1-13 are for 60Hz
• Perform stationary autotuning for the line-to-line resistance only if the motor cable is 50 m or longer for the actual installation or the load is heavy enough to produce stalling. Refer to the following section on
Autotuning for details on stationary autotuning.
V/f Control with PG (A1-02 = 1)
• Set either one of the fixed patterns (0 to E) in E1-03 (V/f Pattern Selection) or set F in E1-03 to specify a user-set pattern as required for the motor and load characteristics in E1-04 to E1-13 in advanced programming mode.
Simple operation of a general-purpose motor at 50Hz: E1-03 = 0
Simple operation of a general-purpose motor at 60Hz: E1-03 = F (default) or 1
If E1-03 = F, the default setting in the user setting from
E1-04 to E1-13 are for 60Hz
• Set the number of motor poles in E2-04 (Number of Motor Poles)
Trial Operation Procedures
•
•
Set the number of rotations per pulse in F1-01 (PG Constant). If there is a reduction gear between the motor and PG, set the reduction ratio in F1-12 and F1-13 in advanced programming mode.
Perform stationary autotuning for the line-to-line resistance only if the motor cable is 50 m or longer for the actual installation or the load is heavy enough to produce stalling. Refer to the following section on
Autotuning for details on stationary autotuning.
Open-loop Vector Control 1 (A1-02 = 2)
Perform autotuning. If the motor can be operated, perform rotational autotuning. If the motor cannot be operated, perform stationary autotuning. Refer to the following section on Autotuning for details on autotuning.
Flux Vector Control (A1-02 = 3)
Perform autotuning. If the motor can be operated, perform rotational autotuning. If the motor cannot be operated, perform stationary autotuning. Refer to the following section on Autotuning for details on autotuning.
Open-loop Vector Control 2 (A1-02 = 4)
Perform autotuning. Be sure to perform rotational autotuning. Refer to the following section on Autotuning for details on autotuning.
Autotuning
Use the following procedure to perform autotuning to automatically set motor parameters when using the vector control method, when the cable length is long, etc.
Setting the Autotuning Mode
One of the following three autotuning modes can be set.
• Rotational autotuning
•
•
Stationary autotuning
Stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only
Always confirm the precautions before autotuning before performing autotuning.
Rotational Autotuning (T1-01 = 0)
Rotational autotuning is used only for open-vector control. Set T1-01 to 0, input the data from the nameplate, and then press the RUN Key on the Digital Operator. The drive will stop the motor for approximately 1 minute and then set the required motor parameters automatically while operating the motor for approximately 1 minute.
Stationary Autotuning (T1-01 = 1)
Stationary autotuning is used for open-vector control or flux vector control. Set T1-01 to 1, input the data from the nameplate, and then press the RUN Key on the Digital Operator. The drive will supply power to the stationary motor for approximately 1 minute and some of the motor parameters will be set automatically. The remaining motor parameters will be set automatically the first time operation is started in drive mode.
4-
9
4
-10
Stationary Autotuning for Line-to-Line Resistance Only (T1-01 = 2)
Stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only can be used in any control method. This is the only autotuning possible for V/f control and V/f control with PG modes.
Autotuning can be used to prevent control errors when the motor cable is long (50 m or longer) or the cable length has changed since installation or when the motor and drive have different capacities.
Set T1-01 to 2 for open-loop vector control, and then press the RUN Key on the Digital Operator. The drive will supply power to the stationary motor for approximately 20 seconds and the Motor Line-to-Line Resistance (E2-05) and cable resistance will be automatically measured.
Precautions Before Using Autotuning
Read the following precautions before using autotuning.
• Autotuning the drive is fundamentally different from autotuning the servo system. Drive autotuning automatically adjusts parameters according to detected motor parameters, whereas servo system autotuning adjusts parameters according to the detected size of the load.
•
•
•
•
When speed precision or torque precision is required at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher), use a motor with a rated voltage that is 20 V less than the input power supply voltage of the drive for 200-
240V-class drives and 40 V less for 380-480V-class drives. If the rated voltage of the motor is the same as the input power supply voltage, the voltage output from the drive will be unstable at high speeds and sufficient performance will not be possible.
Use stationary autotuning whenever performing autotuning for a motor that is connected to a load.
Use rotational autotuning whenever performing autotuning for a motor that has fixed output characteristics, when high precision is required, or for a motor that is not connected to a load.
If rotational autotuning is performed for a motor connected to a load, the motor parameters will not be found accurately and the motor may exhibit abnormal operation. Never perform rotational autotuning for a motor connected to a load.
•
•
•
If the wiring between the drive and motor changes by 50 m or more between autotuning and motor installation, perform stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only.
If the motor cable is long (50 m or longer), perform stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only even when using V/f control.
The status of the multi-function inputs and multi-function outputs will be as shown in the following table during autotuning. When performing autotuning with the motor connected to a load, be sure that the holding brake is not applied during autotuning, especially for conveyor systems or similar equipment.
Tuning Mode
Rotational autotuning
Stationary autotuning
Stationary autotuning for lineto-line resistance only
Multi-function Inputs
Do not function.
Do not function.
Do not function.
Multi-function Outputs
Same as during normal operation
Maintain same status as when autotuning is started.
Maintain same status as when autotuning is started.
• To cancel autotuning, always use the STOP Key on the Digital Operator.
IMPORTANT
1. Power will be supplied to the motor when stationary autotuning is performed even though the motor will not turn. Do not touch the motor until autotuning has been completed.
2. When performing stationary autotuning connected to a conveyor or other machine, ensure that the holding brake is not activated during autotuning.
Trial Operation Procedures
Precautions for Rotational and Stationary Autotuning
Lower the base voltage based on Fig 4.4
to prevent saturation of the drive’s output voltage when the rated voltage of the motor is higher than the voltage of the power supply to the drive. Use the following procedure to perform autotuning.
1. Input the voltage of the input power supply to T1-03 (Motor rated voltage).
2. Input the results of the following formula to T1-05 (Motor base frequency):
(Base frequency from the motor’s nameplate setting of T1-03)/(Rated voltage from motor’s nameplate)
3. Perform autotuning.
After completing autotuning, set E1-04 (Max. output frequency) to the base frequency from the motor’s nameplate.
Output voltage
Rated voltage from motor nameplate
T1-03
0
Base frequency from motor nameplate
T1-03
Rated voltage from motor nameplate
Output frequency
Base frequency from motor nameplate
Fig 4.4 Motor Base Frequency and Drive Input Voltage Setting
IMPORTANT
1. When speed precision is required at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher), set T1-03 (Motor rated voltage) to the input power supply voltage 0.9.
2. When operating at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher), the output current will increase as the input power supply voltage is reduced. Be sure to provide sufficient margin in the drive current.
Precautions after Rotational and Stationary Autotuning
If the maximum output frequency and base frequency are different, set the maximum output frequency (E1-
04) after autotuning.
4-
11
4
-12
Parameter Settings for Autotuning
The following parameters must be set before autotuning.
Parameter
Number
T1-00
Name
Display
Table 4.3 Parameter Settings before Autotuning
Display
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting V/f
Data Displays during Autotuning
V/f with
PG
Openloop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Openloop
Vector
2
Motor 1/2 selection
*1
Select
Motor
When switching to motor 2 is selected, set the motor for which autotuning is to be performed. (This parameter is ignored if motor 2 is not selected.)
1: Motor 1
2: Motor 2
1 or 2 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
T1-01
Autotuning mode selection
Tuning
Mode Sel
Set the autotuning mode.
0: Rotational autotuning
1: Stationary autotuning
2: Stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only
0 to 2
2 (V/f)
0 (Vector)
*4
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
T1-02
Motor output power
Mtr Rated
Power
Set the output power of the motor in kilowatts.
*5 *7
0.00 to
650.00 kW
0.40 kW
*2
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
T1-03
Motor rated voltage
Rated
Voltage
Set the rated voltage of the motor in volts.
*5 *6
0 to
255.0 V
(200-240 V class)
0 to
510.0 V
(380-480 V class)
200.0 V
(200-240
V class)
400.0 V
(380-480
V class)
Yes Yes Yes
T1-04
T1-05
Motor rated current
Rated
Current
Motor base frequency
Rated Frequency
Set the rated current of the motor in amps.
*5 *7
Set the base frequency of the motor in hertz.
*3 *4 *5 *6
0.32 to
6.40 A
*3
0 to
400.0 Hz
1.90 A
*2
60.0Hz
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Trial Operation Procedures
Parameter
Number
T1-06
Name
Display
Table 4.3 Parameter Settings before Autotuning(Continued)
Display
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting V/f
Data Displays during Autotuning
V/f with
PG
Openloop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Openloop
Vector
2
Number of motor poles
Set the number of motor poles.
Number of
Poles
2 to 48 poles
4 poles Yes Yes Yes
T1-07
Motor base speed
Set the base speed of the motor in min
1
.
*3 *5
0 to 24000
Rated
Speed
1750 min
1
T1-08
Number of
PG pulses when turning
PG Pulses/
Rev
Set the number of pulses for the PG (pulse generator or encoder). Set the number of pulses per motor revolution without a multiplication factor.
0 to 60000 600 -
-
Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes -
* 1. Not normally displayed. Displayed only when a motor switch command is set for a multi-function digital input (one of H1-01 to H1-05 set to 16).
* 2. The factory setting depends on the drive capacity. Values are given for a 200-240 V class, 0.4 kW drive.
* 3. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the drive capacity.
* 4. For V/f control, the only setting that is possible is 2 (stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only).
* 5. For fixed output motors, set the base speed value.
* 6. For drive motors or for specialized vector motors, the voltage or frequency may be lower than for general-purpose motors. Always confirm the information on the nameplate or in test reports. If the no-load values are known, input the no-load voltage in T1-03 and the no-load current in T1-05 to ensure accuracy.
* 7. The settings that will ensure stable vector control are between 50% and 100% of the drive rating.
Refer to page 3-15 for Digital Operator displays during autotuning.
4-
13
4
-14
Application Settings
User parameters are set as required in advanced programming mode (“ADV” will be displayed on the LCD screen). All the parameters that can be set in quick programming mode can also be displayed and set in advanced programming mode.
Setting Examples
The following are examples of settings for applications.
• When using an drive-mounted braking resistor (ERF), set L8-01 to 1 to enable ERF braking resistor overheating protection.
•
•
To prevent the machine from being operated in reverse, set b1-04 to 1 to disable reverse operation.
To increase the speed of a 60Hz motor by 10%, set E1-04 to 66.0Hz.
•
•
To use a 0 to 10-V analog signal for a 60Hz motor for variable-speed operation between 0 and 54Hz (0% to
90% speed deduction), set H3-02 to 90.0%.
To control speed between 20% and 80% to ensure smooth gear operation and limit the maximum speed of the machine, set d2-01 to 80.0% and set d2-02 to 20.0%.
No-load Operation
To being no-load operation (without connecting the machine and the motor), press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator to change to LOCAL mode (the SEQ and REF indicators on the Digital Operator should be OFF).
Always confirm safety around the motor and machine before starting drive operation from the Digital Operator. Confirm that the motor works normally and that no errors are displayed at the drive.
Jog Frequency Reference (d1-17, default: 6.00Hz) can be started and stopped by pressing and releasing the
JOG Key on the Digital Operator. If the external sequence prevent operation from the Digital Operator, confirm that emergency stop circuits and machine safety mechanisms are functioning, and then start operation in
REMOTE mode (i.e., with a signal from the control signal terminals). The safety precautions must always be taken before starting the drive with the motor connected to the machine.
Both a RUN command (forward or reverse) and a frequency reference (or multi-step speed reference) must be provided to start drive operation.
Input these commands and reference regardless of the operation method (i.e., LOCAL of REMOTE).
INFO
Trial Operation Procedures
Loaded Operation
Connect the machine to the motor and then start operation as described for no-load operation (i.e., from the
Digital Operator or by using control circuit terminal signals).
Connecting the Load
•
•
After confirming that the motor has stopped completely, connect the mechanical system.
Be sure to tighten all the screws when securing the motor shaft to the mechanical system.
Operation using the Digital Operator
•
•
•
Use the Digital Operator to start operation in LOCAL mode in the same way as in no-load operation.
If fault occurs during operation, make sure the STOP Key on the Digital Operator is easily accessible.
At first, set the frequency reference to a low speed of one tenth the normal operating speed.
Checking Operating Status
•
•
•
Having checked that the operating direction is correct and that the machine is operating smoothly at slow speed, increase the frequency reference.
After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction, check that there is no oscillation or abnormal sound from the motor. Check the monitor display to ensure that U1-03 (Output Current) is not too high.
Refer to Adjustment Suggestions
on page 4-17 if hunting, vibration, or other problems originating in the
control system occur.
4-
15
4
-16
Check and Recording User Parameters
Use verify mode (“VERIFY” will be displayed on the LCD screen) to check user parameters that have been changed for trial operation and record them in a user parameter table.
Any user parameters that have been change by autotuning will also be displayed in verify mode.
If required, the copy function in parameters o3-01 and o3-02 displayed in advanced programming mode can be used to copy the changed settings from the drive to a recording area in the Digital Operator. If changed settings are saved in the Digital Operator, they can be easily copied back to the drive to speed up system recovery if for any reason the drive has to be replaced.
The following functions can also be used to manage user parameters.
• Recording user parameters
•
•
Setting access levels for user parameters
Setting a password
Recording User Parameters (o2-03)
If o2-03 is set to 1 after completing trial operation, the settings of user parameters will be saved in a separate memory area in the drive. Later, after drive settings have been changed, the user parameters can be initialized to the settings saved in the separate memory area when o2-03 was set to 1 by setting A1-03 (Initialize) to 1110.
User Parameter Access Levels (A1-01)
A1-01 can be set to 0 (monitoring-only) to prevent user parameters from being changed. A1-01 can also be set to 1 (User-specified Parameters) and used along with A2 parameters to display only parameters required by the machine or application in a programming mode.
Password (A1-04 and A1-05)
When the access level is set to monitoring-only (A1-01 = 0), a password can be set so that user parameters will be displayed only when the correct password is input.
Adjustment Suggestions
Adjustment Suggestions
If hunting, vibration, or other problems originating in the control system occur during trial operation, adjust the parameters listed in the following table according to the control method. This table lists only the most commonly used user parameters.
Control
Method
V/f control
(A1-02 = 0 or 1)
Name
(Parameter Number)
Hunting-prevention gain (N1-02)
Carrier frequency selection
(C6-02)
Torque compensation primary delay time constant (C4-02)
Torque compensation gain
(C4-01)
Table 4.4 Adjusted User Parameters
Performance
Factory
Setting
Recommended
Setting
Controlling hunting and vibration in middle-range speeds
(10 to 40 Hz)
• Reducing motor magnetic noise
• Controlling hunting and vibration at low speeds
• Increasing torque and speed response
• Controlling hunting and vibration
• Improving torque at low speeds (10 Hz or lower)
• Controlling hunting and vibration
1.00
Depends on capacity
Depends on capacity
1.00
Adjustment Method
0.50 to 2.00
0 to default
200 to 1000ms
0.50 to 1.50
• Reduce the setting if torque is insufficient for heavy loads.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs for light loads.
• Increase the setting if motor magnetic noise is high.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs at low to middle-range speeds.
• Reduce the setting if torque or speed response is slow.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
• Increase the setting if torque is insufficient at low speeds.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs for light loads.
Middle output frequency voltage
(E1-08)
Minimum output frequency voltage
(E1-10)
• Improving torque at low speeds
• Controlling shock at startup
Depends on capacity and voltage
Default to
Default + 3 to
5 V
*
• Increase the setting if torque is insufficient at low speeds.
• Reduce the setting if shock at startup is large.
4-
17
4
-18
Control
Method
Open-loop vector control
(A1-02 = 2)
Table 4.4 Adjusted User Parameters (Continued)
Name
(Parameter Number)
Performance
Factory
Setting
Recommended
Setting
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) gain
(N2-01)
• Increasing torque and speed response
• Controlling hunting and vibration in middle-range speeds (10 to 40 Hz)
1.00
0.50 to 2.00
Torque compensation primary delay time constant (C4-02)
Slip compensation
primary delay time
(C3-02)
Slip compensation gain (C3-01)
Carrier frequency selection (C6-02)
Open-loop vector control 1
(A1-02 = 2)
Middle output
frequency voltage
(E1-08)
Minimum output frequency voltage
(E1-10)
• Increasing torque and speed response
• Controlling hunting and vibration
• Increasing speed response
• Improving speed stability
• Improving speed accuracy
• Reducing motor magnetic noise
• Controlling hunting and vibration at low speeds (10Hz or less)
• Improving torque at low speeds
• Controlling shock at startup
20ms
200ms
1.0
Depends on capacity
Depends on capacity and voltage
20 to
100ms
100 to
500ms
0.5 to 1.5
0 to default
Default to
Default + 1 or
2 V
*
Adjustment Method
• Reduce the setting if torque or speed response is slow.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
• Reduce the setting if torque or speed response is slow.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
• Reduce the setting if speed response is slow.
• Increase the setting if the speed is not stable.
• Increase the setting if speed response is slow.
• Reduce the setting if the speed is too fast.
• Increase the setting if motor magnetic noise is high.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs at low speeds.
• Increase the setting if torque or speed response is slow.
• Reduce the setting if shock at startup is large.
Adjustment Suggestions
Control
Method
Flux vector control
(A1-02 = 3)
Table 4.4 Adjusted User Parameters (Continued)
Name
(Parameter Number)
Performance
Factory
Setting
Recommended
Setting
ASR proportional gain 1 (C5-01) and
ASR proportional gain 2 (C5-03)
ASR integral time 1
(high-speed) (C5-02) and
ASR integral time 2
(low-speed) (C5-04)
ASR switching frequency (C5-07)
ASR primary delay time (C5-06)
Carrier frequency selection (C6-02)
• Torque and speed response
• Controlling hunting and vibration
• Torque and speed response
• Controlling hunting and vibration
Switching the ASR proportional gain and integral time according to the output frequency
• Controlling hunting and vibration
• Reducing motor magnetic noise
• Controlling hunting and vibration at low speeds (3Hz or less)
Adjustment Method
20.00
0.500sec
0.0Hz
Depends on the capacity.
10.00 to 50.00
0.300 to
1.000sec
0.0 to max. output frequency
0.004sec
0.004 to 0.020
2.0 kHz to default
• Increase the setting if torque or speed response is slow.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
• Reduce the setting if torque or speed response is slow.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
Set the output frequency at which to change the ASR proportional gain and integral time when the same values cannot be used for both high-speed and low-speed operation.
Increase the setting if machine rigidity is low and the system vibrates easily.
• Increase the setting if motor magnetic noise is high.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs at low to middle-range speeds.
4-
19
4
-20
Control
Method
Open-loop vector control 2
(A1-02 = 4)
Table 4.4 Adjusted User Parameters (Continued)
Name
(Parameter Number)
Performance
Factory
Setting
Recommended
Setting
ASR proportional gain 1 (C5-01) and
ASR proportional gain 2 (C5-03)
ASR integral time 1
(high-speed) (C5-02) and
ASR integral time 2
(low-speed) (C5-04)
ASR switching frequency (C5-07)
ASR primary delay time (C5-06)
Carrier frequency selection (C6-11)
• Torque and speed response
• Controlling hunting and vibration
• Torque and speed response
• Controlling hunting and vibration
Switching the ASR proportional gain and integral time according to the output frequency
• Controlling hunting and vibration
• Reducing motor magnetic noise
• Controlling hunting and vibration at low speeds (3Hz or less)
10.00
0.500sec
0.0Hz
0.010sec
Depends on the capacity.
10.00 to 50.00
0.300 to
1.000sec
0.0 to max. output frequency
0.04 to 0.020
Default value
Adjustment Method
• Increase the setting if torque or speed response is slow.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
• Reduce the setting if torque or speed response is slow.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
Set the output frequency at which to change the ASR proportional gain and integral time when the same values cannot be used for both high-speed and low-speed operation.
Increase the setting if machine rigidity is low and the system vibrates easily.
• Increase the setting if motor magnetic noise is high.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs at low to middle-range speeds.
* The setting is given for 200-240 V class drives. Double the voltage for 380-480V Class drives.
•
•
•
•
Do not change the Torque Compensation Gain (C4-01) from its default setting of 1.00 when using openloop vector control 1.
If speeds are inaccurate during regeneration in open-loop vector control 1, enable Slip Compensation
During Regeneration (C3-04 = 1).
Use slip compensation to improve speed precision during V/f control (A1-02 = 0).
Set the Motor Rated Current (E2-01), Motor Rated Slip (E2-02), and Motor No-load Current (E2-03), and then adjust the Slip Compensation Gain (C3-01) to between 0.5 and 1.5. The default setting for V/f control is C3-01 = 0.0 (slip compensation disabled).
To improve speed response and stability in V/f control with a PG (A1-02 = 1), set the ASR parameters
(C5-01 to C5-05) to between 0.5 and 1.5 times the default. (It is not normally necessary to adjust this setting.) ASR for V/f control with a PG will only control the output frequency; a high gain, such as is possible for open-loop vector control 2 or flux vector control, cannot be set.
The following user parameters will also indirectly affect the control system.
Adjustment Suggestions
Table 4.5 Parameters Indirectly Affecting Control and Applications
Name (Parameter Number)
Dwell function (b6-01 to b6-04)
Application
Used for heavy loads or large machine backlashes.
Droop function (b7-01 to b7-02)
Used to soften the torque or to balance the load between two motors. Can be used when the control mode (A1-02) is set to 3 or 4.
Acceleration/deceleration times
(C1-01 to C1-11)
S-curve characteristics (C2-01 to C2-04)
Jump frequencies (d3-01 to d3-04)
Analog input filter time constant (H3-12)
Stall prevention (L3-01 to L3-06)
Adjust torque during acceleration and deceleration.
Used to prevent shock when completing acceleration.
Used to avoid resonance points during operation.
Used to prevent fluctuations in analog input signals caused by noise.
Used to prevent 0 V (overvoltage errors) and motor stalling for heavy loads or rapid acceleration/deceleration. Stall prevention is enabled by default and the setting does not normally need to be changed. When using a braking resistor, however, disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 to 0.
Torque limits (L7-01 to L7-04)
Feed forward control (N5-01 to N5-03)
Set the maximum torque during vector control. If a setting is increased, use a motor with higher capacity than the drive. If a setting is reduced, stalling can occur under heavy loads.
Used to increase response for acceleration/deceleration or to reduce overshooting when there is low machine rigidity and the gain of the speed controller (ASR) cannot be increased. The inertia ratio between the load and motor and the acceleration time of the motor running alone must be set.
4-
21
4
-22
User Parameters
This chapter describes all user parameters that can be set in the drive.
User Parameter Descriptions.......................................5-2
Digital Operator Display Functions and Levels............5-3
User Parameter Tables..............................................5-10
5
-2
User Parameter Descriptions
This section describes the contents of the user parameter tables.
Description of User Parameter Tables
User parameter tables are structured as shown below. Here, b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection) is used as an example.
Name
Parameter
Number Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
-loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register b1-01
Reference selection
Reference
Source
Selects the frequency reference input source.
0: Operator - Digital preset speed U1-01 or d1-01 to d1-17.
1: Terminals - Analog input terminal A1 (or terminal
A2 based on parameter
H3-09).
2: Serial Com - Modbus RS-
422/485 terminals R+, R-,
S+, and S-.
3: Option PCB - Option board connected on 2CN.
4: Pulse Input (Terminal RP)
0 to 4 1 No Q Q Q Q Q 180H
• Parameter Number:
• Parameter Name:
• Description:
• Setting Range:
• Factory Setting:
• Change during Operation:
• Control Methods:
• MODBUS Address:
• Page:
The number of the user parameter.
The name of the user parameter.
Details on the function or settings of the user parameter.
The setting range for the user parameter.
The factory setting (each control method has its own factory setting.
Therefore the factory setting changes when the control method is changed.)
Refer to page 5-100 for factory settings by control method.
Indicates whether or not the parameter can be changed while the drive is in operation.
Yes: Changes possible during operation.
No: Changes not possible during operation.
Indicates the control methods in which the user parameter can be monitored or set.
Q: Items which can be monitored and set in either quick programming mode or advanced programming mode.
A: Items which can be monitored and set only in advanced programming mode.
No: Items which cannot be monitored or set for the control method.
The register number used for MODBUS communications.
Reference page for more detailed information on the parameter.
Digital Operator Display Functions and Levels
Digital Operator Display Functions and Levels
The following figure shows the Digital Operator display hierarchy for the drive.
MENU
Drive Mode
Drive can be operated and its status can be displayed.
Quick Programming Mode
Minimum parameters required for operation can be monitored or set.
Advanced Programming Mode
All parameters can be monitored or set.
Verify Mode
Parameters changed from the default settings can be monitored or set.
Autotuning Mode
Automatically sets motor parameters if autotuning data
(from motor nameplate) is input for open-loop vector control or to measure the line-toline resistance for V/f control.
No.
U1
U2
U3
Function
Status Monitor Parameters
Fault Trace
Fault History
Display
Monitor
Fault Trace
Fault History n5 o1 o2 o3 n1 n2 n3 n4
L5
L6
L7
L8
L1
L2
L3
L4
H3
H4
H5
H6
F5
F6
H1
H2
F1
F2
F3
F4
E1
E2
E3
E4 d3 d4 d5 d6
C5
C6 d1 d2
A1
A2 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5
Initialize Mode
User-specified Setting Mode
Operation Mode Selections
DC Injection Braking
Speed Search
Timer Function
PID Control
Initialization
User
Parameters
Sequence
DC Braking
Speed Search
Delay Timers
PID Control b6 b7 b8 b9
Dwell Functions
Droop Control
Energy Saving
Zero Servo
PID Control
Droop Control
Energy
Saving
Zero Servo
C1 Acceleration/Deceleration
Accel/Decel
C2 S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration
S-Curve Accel
C3
C4
Motor Slip Compensation
Torque Compensation
Motor-Slip
Comp
Torque Comp
Speed Control (ASR)
Carrier Frequency
Preset Reference
Reference Limits
Jump Frequencies
Reference Frequency Hold
Torque Control
Field Control
ASR Tuning
V/f Pattern
Motor Setup
Motor 2 V/f Pattern
Motor 2 Setup
Fieldweakening
V/f Pattern
Motor Setup
V/f Pattern 2
Motor Setup 2
PG Option Setup
Analog Reference Card
PG Option
Setup
AI-14 Setup
Digital Reference Card
DI-08, 16 Setup
Analog Monitor Cards
Digital Output Card
AO-08, 12
Setup
DO-02,08
Setup
Communications Option Card
CP-916 Setup
Multi-function Contact Inputs
Multi-function Contact Outputs
Analog Inputs
Multi-function Analog Outputs
MODBUS Communications
Pulse Train
Motor Overload
Power Loss Ridethrough
Stall Prevention
Reference Detection
Fault Restart
Torque Detection
Torque Limits
Hardware Protection
Hunting Prevention Function
Speed Feedback Protection Control
Carrier Freq
Preset
Reference
Reference
Limits
Jump
Frequencies
Sequence
Torque Control
Digital Inputs
Digital
Outputs
Analog Inputs
Analog
Outputs
Serial Com
Setup
Pulse I/O Setup
Motor
Overload
PwrLoss
Ridethru
Stall
Prevention
Ref Detection
Fault Restart
Torque
Detection
Torque Limit
Hdwe
Protection
Hunting Prev
AFR
High-slip Braking
Speed Estimation
Feed Forward
Monitor Select
Multi-function Selections
Copy Function
High Slip
Observer
Feedfoward
Cont
Monitor Select
Key
Selections
COPY
Function
T1 Motor Autotuning
Auto-Tuning
5-
3
5
-4
User Parameters Settable in Quick Programming Mode
The minimum user parameters required for drive operation can be monitored and set in quick programming mode. The user parameters displayed in quick programming mode are listed in the following table. These, and all other user parameters, are also displayed in advanced programming mode.
Refer to the overview of modes on page 3-5 for an overview of quick programming mode.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
-loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
A1-02 b1-01 b1-02 b1-03
C1-01
C1-02
Control
Method
Selection
Control
Method
Frequency
Reference
Selection
Reference
Source
Run
Command
Selection
Run
Source
Stopping
Method
Selection
Stopping
Method
Selects the Control Method of the drive.
0: V/F control without PG
1: V/F control with PG
2: Open Loop Vector
3: Flux Vector (Closed Loop Vector)
4: Vector 2 wo/PG
Note: Does not return to factory setting when drive is initialized.
Selects the frequency reference input source.
0: Operator - Digital preset speed U1-
01 or d1-01 to d1-17.
1: Terminals - Analog input terminal
A1 (or terminal A2 based on parameter H3-09).
2: Serial Com - Modbus RS-422/485 terminals R+, R-, S+, and S-.
3: Option PCB - Option board connected on 2CN.
4: Pulse Input (Terminal RP)
Selects the run command input source.
0: Operator - RUN and STOP keys on
Digital Operator.
1: Terminals - Contact closure on terminals S1 or S2.
2: Serial Com - Modbus RS-422/485 terminals R+, R-, S+, and S-.
3: Option PCB - Option board connected on 2CN.
Selects the stopping method when the run command is removed.
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: DC Injection to Stop
3: Coast with Timer (A new run command is ignored if received before the timer expires).
Acceleration
Time 1
Accel
Time 1
Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency.
Deceleration
Time 1
Decel
Time 1
Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero.
0 to 4
0 to 4
0 to 3
0 to 3
*13
0.0 to
6000.0
*1
2
1
1
0
10.0 s
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
102H
180H
181H
182H
200H
201H
Digital Operator Display Functions and Levels
Parameter
Number
C6-02
C6-11 d1-01 d1-02 d1-03 d1-04 d1-17
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
-loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
Carrier
Frequency
Selection
Carrier
Freq Sel
Selects the number of pulses per second of the output voltage waveform. Setting range determined by C6-01 setting.
0: Low noise
1: Fc = 2.0 kHz
2: Fc = 5.0 kHz
3: Fc = 8.0 kHz
4: Fc = 10.0 kHz
5: Fc = 12.5 kHz
6: Fc = 15.0 kHz
OF: Program (Determined by the
settings of C6-03 thru C6-05)
Carrier
Frequency for
Open-loop
Vector
Control 2
Carrier
Freq Sel
Selects the carrier frequency during
Vector Control 2 wo/PG.
1: 2kHz (3-phase modulation)
2: 4kHz (3-phase modulation)
3: 6kHz (3-phase modulation)
4: 8kHz (3-phase modulation)
Frequency
Reference 1 Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Reference 1
Frequency
Reference 2
Reference 2
Frequency
Reference 3
Reference 3
Frequency reference when multi-function input "Multi-step speed reference 1" is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input "Multi-step speed reference 2" is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency
Reference 4
Reference 4
Jog
Frequency
Reference
Jog
Reference
Frequency reference when multi-function input "Multi-step speed reference 1, 2" is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when: "Jog frequency reference" is selected via multi-function input terminals. "Jog frequency reference" has priority over
"multi-step speed reference 1 to 4".
Parameter d1-17 is also the reference for the JOG key on the Digital Operator, and the multi-function inputs
"forward jog" and "reverse jog".
Setting units are affected by o1-03.
0 to F
1 to 4
0 to
400.00
*9
6
*2
4
*2
No
No
0.00Hz
Yes
0.00Hz
Yes
0.00Hz
Yes
0.00Hz
Yes
6.00Hz
Yes
Q
-
*12
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
-
*12
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
-
*12
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
-
*12
A
A
A
A
Q
-
*12
Q
A
A
A
A
Q
224H
22DH
280H
281H
282H
283H
292H
5-
5
5
-6
Name
Parameter
Number Display
E1-01
E1-03
Input
Voltage
Setting
Input
Voltage
V/f
Pattern
Selection
V/F
Selection
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
-loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
Set to the nominal voltage of the incoming line. Sets the maximum and base voltage used by preset V/F patterns (E1-03 = 0 to E), adjusts the levels of drive protective features (e.g.
Overvoltage, braking resistor turn-on, stall prevention, etc.).
NOTE: DRIVE INPUT VOLTAGE
(NOT MOTOR VOLTAGE)
MUST BE SET IN E1-01 FOR
THE PROTECTIVE
FEATURES OF THE DRIVE
TO FUNCTION PROPERLY.
FAILURE TO DO SO MAY
RESULT IN EQUIPMENT
DAMAGE AND/OR
PERSONAL INJURY.
Set to the type of motor being used and the type of application.
The drive operates utilizing a set V/F pattern to determine the appropriate output voltage level for each commanded speed. There are 15 different preset V/F patterns to select from (E1-03 = 0 to E) with varying voltage profiles, base levels (base level = frequency at which maximum voltage is reached), and maximum frequencies. There are also settings for Custom V/F patterns that will use the settings of parameters E1-04 through E1-13. E1-03 = F selects a custom V/F pattern with an upper voltage limit and E1-03 = FF selects a custom V/F pattern without an upper voltage limit.
0: 50Hz
1: 60Hz Saturation
2: 50Hz Saturation
3: 72Hz (60Hz Base)
4: 50Hz VT1
5: 50Hz VT2
6: 60Hz VT1
7: 60Hz VT2
8: 50Hz HST1
9: 50Hz HST2
A: 60Hz HST1
B: 60Hz HST2
C: 90Hz (60Hz Base)
D: 120Hz (60Hz Base)
E: 180Hz (60Hz Base)
F: Custom V/F
FF: Custom w/o limit
155.0 to
255.0
(240V)
*3
0 to FF
230.0 V
*3
F
No
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q Q
No No
Q
No
300H
302H
Digital Operator Display Functions and Levels
Parameter
Number
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
E1-09
E1-13
E2-01
E2-04
E2-11
F1-01
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
-loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
Base
Frequency
(FA)
Base
Frequency
Min.
Output
Frequency
(FMIN)
Min
Frequency
Base
Voltage
(VBASE)
Max.
Output
Frequency
(FMAX)
Max
Frequency
Max.
Output
Voltage
(VMAX)
Max
Voltage
These parameters are only applicable when V/f Pattern Selection is set to
Custom (E1-03 = F or FF). To set V/f characteristics in a straight line, set the same values for E1-07 and E1-09. In this case, the setting for E1-08 will be disregarded. Be sure that the four frequencies are set in the following manner or else an OPE10 fault will occur:
E1-04 E1-11 E1-06 > E1-07 E1-09
Note: Setting parameter E1-01 to zero is also acceptable.
Base
Voltage
Set only when the V/F pattern is finely adjusted in the constant power (HP) area above base speed. Adjustment is not normally required. If E1-13 = 0.0, then value in E1-05 is used for E1-13.
Auto-Tuning sets this value.
Motor
Rated
Current
Motor
Rated FLA
Number of
Motor
Poles
Number of
Poles
Motor
Rated
Output
Mtr Rated
Power
PG
Parameter
PG
Pulses/Rev
Sets the motor nameplate full load current in amperes (A). This value is automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
Sets the number of motor poles. This value is automatically set during
Autotuning.
Sets the motor rated power in kilowatts
(kW). This value is automatically set during Auto-Tuning. 1HP = 0.746kW
Sets the number of pulses per revolution of the encoder (pulse generator).
(Do not set as a multiple.)
40.0 to
400.0
*9
0.0 to
255.0
*3
0.0 to
400.0
*9
0.0 to
400.0
*9
0.0 to
255.0
(240V)
*3
0.32 to
6.40
*7
2 to 48
0.00 to
650.000
0 to
60000
60.0Hz
*4
230.0 V
*3*4
60.0Hz
*4
0.5Hz
*4
0.0 V
*5
1.90 A
*6
4
0.40
*10
600
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
A
Q
No Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
A
Q
Q
No Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
No
Q
No
Q
Q
Q
A
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
No
303H
304H
305H
308H
30CH
30EH
311H
318H
380H
5-
7
5
-8
Parameter
Number
H4-02
H4-05
L1-01
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
-loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
Terminal
FM Gain
Setting
Terminal
FM Gain
Terminal
AM Gain
Setting
Terminal
AM Gain
Sets terminal FM output level when selected monitor is at 100%.In order to adjust the meter, 100% of the appropriate output is multiplied for the gain setting, the bias amount is added and then output.
See H4-02 when stopped in Quick,
Advanced, or Verify mode. If 03 appears on the setting screen, then terminal FM is used.
See H4-04 when stopped in Quick,
Advanced, or Verify mode. If 06 appears on the setting screen, then terminal AM is used.
Sets terminal AM output voltage (in percent of 10Vdc) when selected monitor is at 100% output. In order to adjust the meter, 100% of the appropriate output is multiplied for the gain setting, the bias amount is added and then output.
See H4-02 when stopped in Quick,
Advanced, or Verify mode. If 03 appears on the setting screen, then terminal FM is used.
See H4-04 when stopped in Quick,
Advanced, or Verify mode. If 06 appears on the setting screen, then terminal AM is used.
Motor
Overload
Protection
Selection
MOL Fault
Select
Sets the motor thermal overload protection (OL1) based on the cooling capacity of the motor.
0: Disabled
1: Standard Fan Cooled (< 10:1 motor)
2: Standard Blower Cooled ( 10:1 motor)
3: Vector Motor ( 1000:1 motor)
0.00 to
1000.0
0.00 to
1000.0
0 to 3
100%
50%
1
Yes
Yes
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
41EH
421H
480H
Digital Operator Display Functions and Levels
Parameter
Number
L3-04
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
-loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
Stall
Prevention
Selection
During
Deceleration
StallP
Decel Sel
When using a braking resistor, use setting "0". Setting "3" is used in specific applications.
0: Disabled - The drive decelerates at the active deceleration rate. If the load is too large or the deceleration time is too short, an OV fault may occur.
1: General Purpose - The drive decelerates at the active deceleration rate, but if the main circuit DC bus voltage reaches the stall prevention level (380/760Vdc), deceleration will stop. Deceleration will continue once the DC bus level drops below the stall prevention level.
2: Intelligent - The active deceleration rate is ignored and the drive decelerates as fast as possible w/o hitting OV fault level. Range:
C1-02 / 10.
3: Stall Prevention w/ Braking Resistor -
Stall prevention during deceleration is enabled in coordination with dynamic braking.
0 to 3
*11
1 No Q Q Q Q Q 492H
* 1. The setting ranges for acceleration/deceleration times depends on the setting of C1-10 (Acceleration/deceleration Time Setting Unit). If C1-10 is set to
0, the setting range is 0.00 to 600.00 (s).
* 2. The factory setting depends on the drive capacity.
* 3. These are values for a 200-240V class drive. Values for a 380-480V class drive are double.
* 4. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open-loop vector 1 factory settings are given.)
* 5. After autotuning, E1-13 will contain the same value as E1-05.
* 6. The factory setting depends on the drive capacity. (The value for a 200-240V class drive for 0.4 kW is given.)
* 7. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the drive rated output current. (The value for a 200-240V class drive for 0.4 kW is given.)
* 8. L3-04 cannot be set to 3 for flux vector control or open-loop vector control 2.
* 9. The setting range is 0 to 66.0 for open-loop vector control 2. The upper limit for the setting range also depends on the upper limit in E1-04.
The maximum setting is 400.00.
* 10. The same capacity as the drive will be set by initializing the parameters.
* 11. The setting range is 0 to 2 for flux vector control and open-loop vector control 2.
* 12. Quick Settings are used if Multi-Function Input is set for two motors.
* 13. Setting range changes to {1,2} when operating in Flux Vector and in Open Loop Vector.
5-
9
5
-10
User Parameter Tables
A: Setup Settings
The following settings are made with the environment parameters (A parameters): Language displayed on the
Digital Operator, access level, control method, initialization of parameters.
Initialize Mode: A1
User parameters for the environment modes are shown in the following table.
Name
Parameter
Number Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
A1-00
A1-01
A1-02
Language
Selection
Select
Language
Access
Level
Selection
Access
Level
Control
Method
Selection
Control
Method
Language selection for the
Digital Operator.
This parameter is not reset to the factory setting by A1-03.
0: English
1: Japanese
2: German
3: French
4: Italian
5: Spanish
6: Portuguese
Selects which parameters are accessible via the Digital
Operator.
0: Operation Only
1: User Level (only available if A2 parameters have been set)
2: Advanced Level
Selects the Control Method of the drive.
0: V/F control without PG
1: V/F control with PG
2: Open Loop Vector
3: Flux Vector (Closed Loop
Vector)
4: Vector 2 wo/PG
Note: Does not return to factory setting when the drive is initialized.
0 to 6
0 to 2
0 to 4
0
2
2
Yes
Yes
No
A A
A A
Q Q
A
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
Q
100H
101H
102H
User Parameter Tables
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
A1-03
A1-04
A1-05
Initialize
Parameters
Init
Parameters
Used to return all parameters to their factory or user default settings. (Initializes and then returns A1-03 to zero.)
0: No Initialize
1110: User Initialize (The user must first set their own parameter values and then store them using parameter o2-03.)
2220: 2-Wire Initialization
3330: 3-Wire Initialization
Password 1 When the value set into
A1-04 does NOT match the value set into A1-05, parameters A1-01 thru A1-03
Enter
Password and A2-01 thru A2-32 cannot be changed. All other parameters as determined by
A1-01 can be changed.
Parameter A1-05 can be accessed by pressing the
MENU key while holding the
RESET key.
Password 2 When the value set into
A1-04 does NOT match the value set into A1-05, parameters A1-01 thru A1-03
Select
Password and A2-01 thru A2-32 cannot be changed. All other parameters as determined by
A1-01 can be changed.
Parameter A1-05 can be accessed by pressing the
MENU key while holding the
RESET key.
0 to
3330
0 to
9999
0 to
9999
0
0
0
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
103H
104H
105H
User-set Parameters: A2
The parameters set by the user are listed in the following table.
Name
Parameter
Number Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A2-01 to
A2-32
User Parameter
1 to 32
User Param
1 to 32
Selects the parameters to be available in the User Access
Level (A1-01 = 1). These parameters are not related to the User Initialize function.
b1-01 to o2-08
No A A A A A
MODBUS
Register
106H to
125H
5-
11
5
-12
Application Parameters: b
The following settings are made with the application parameters (b parameters): Operation method selection,
DC injection braking, speed searching, timer functions, dwell functions, and energy saving functions.
Operation Mode Selections: b1
User parameters for operation mode selection are shown in the following table.
Name
Parameter
Number Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register b1-01 b1-02 b1-03
Frequency
Reference
Selection
Reference
Source
Run
Command
Selection
Run Source
Stopping
Method
Selection
Stopping
Method
Selects the frequency reference input source.
0: Operator - Digital preset speed U1-01 or d1-01 to d1-17.
1: Terminals - Analog input terminal A1 (or terminal
A2 based on parameter
H3-09).
2: Serial Com - Modbus
RS-422/485 terminals R+,
R-, S+, and S-.
3: Option PCB - Option board connected on 2CN.
4: Pulse Input (Terminal RP)
Selects the run command input source.
0: Operator - RUN and STOP keys on Digital Operator.
1: Terminals - Contact closure on terminals S1 or S2.
2: Serial Com - Modbus RS-
422/485 terminals R+, R-,
S+, and S-.
3: Option PCB - Option board connected on 2CN.
Selects the stopping method when the run command is removed.
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: DC Injection to Stop
3: Coast with Timer (A new run command is ignored if received before the timer expires).
0 to 4
0 to 3
0 to 3
*
1
1
0
No
No
No
Q Q
Q Q
Q Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
180H
181H
182H b1-04
Reverse
Operation
Selection
Reverse
Oper
Determines the forward rotation of the motor, and if reverse operation is disabled.
0: Reverse enabled
1: Reverse disabled
0 or 1 0 No A A A A A 183H
User Parameter Tables
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register b1-05 b1-06 b1-07 b1-08
Minimum
Output
Frequency
(E1-09) or
Less
Operation
Selection
Zero-Speed
Oper
Digital
Input Scan
Time
Cntl Input
Scans
Local/
Remote
Run
Selection
LOC/REM
RUN Sel
Run
Command
Selection
During
Program
RUN CMD at PRG
Used to set the method of operation when the frequency reference input is less than the minimum output frequency (E1-09).
0: Run at frequency reference
(E1-09 not effective).
1: STOP (Frequencies below
E1-09 in the coast to stop state.)
2: Run at min. frequency.
(E1-09)
3: Run at zero speed
(Frequencies below E1-09 are zero)
Sets the scan rate of digital input terminals.
0: 2ms - 2 scans (for quick response)
1: 5ms - 2 scans (for noisy environments)
0: Cycle External RUN - If the run command is closed when switching from local mode to remote mode, the drive will not run.
1: Accept External RUN - If the run command is closed when switching from local mode to remote mode, the drive WILL run. (same as setting "0" except drive will not run)
0: Disabled - Run command accepted only in the operation menu.
1: Enabled - Run command accepted in all menus
(except when b1-02 = 0).
2: Cannot operate. (Cannot be in programming mode during operation.)
*1
0 to 3
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0
1
0
0 b1-10
Zero-speed
Operation
Selection
ModeSel
@ZeroSpd
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Should be enabled when using devices that require motor speed reference as well as both forward and reverse rotation.
Allows for more stability related controls at zero speed.
0 or 1 0
* The setting range is 1 or 2 for flux vector control and open-loop vector control 2.
* 1. Applicable for G7 series Inverters with software versions PRG 1039 and later.
No
No
No
No
No
No No No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No No No No
No
A
A
A
A
184H
185H
186H
187H
1DEH
5-
13
5
-14
DC Injection Braking: b2
User parameters for injection braking are shown in the following table.
Parameter
Number b2-01 b2-02 b2-03 b2-04 b2-08
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
DC Injection
Braking Start
Frequency
DCInj Start
Freq
Sets the frequency at which
DC injection braking starts when ramp to stop
(b1-03 = 0) is selected.
If b2-01< E1-09, DC Injection braking starts at E1-09.
Note: Zero Speed restrictions are active in Flux Vector Mode.
DC Injection
Braking
Current
DCInj
Current
Sets the DC injection braking current as a percentage of the drive rated current.
Note: The DC excitation current is determined by the setting in E2-03 when operating in flux loop vector control mode.
DC Injection
Braking
Time/DC
Excitation
Time at Start
DCInj
Time@Start
Sets the time of DC injection braking at start in units of
0.01 seconds.
DC Injection
Braking Time at Stop
DCInj
Time@Stop
Sets the time length of DC injection braking at stop in units of 0.01 seconds.
1: When b1-03 = 2, actual
DC Injection time is calculated as follows:
(b2-04) x 10 x
(OutputFreq) / (E1-04)
2: When b1-03 = 0, this parameter determines the amount of time DC
Injection is applied to the motor at the end of the decel ramp.
3: This should be set to a minimum of 0.50 seconds when using HSB. This will activate DC injection during the final portion of HSB and help ensure that the motor stops completely.
Magnetic
Flux
Compensation
Capacity
Sets the magnetic flux compensation as a percentage of the no-load current value
(E2-03).
Field Comp
0.0
to
10.0
0 to
100
0.00
to
10.00
0.00
to
10.00
0 to
1000
0.5Hz
50%
0.00 s
0.50 s
0%
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No No A
A
No No
A
A
A
A
A
No No
189H
18AH
18BH
18CH
190H
User Parameter Tables
Speed Search: b3
User parameters for the speed search are shown in the following table.
Name
Parameter
Number Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register b3-01 b3-02 b3-03
Speed
Search
Selection
SpdSrch at
Start
Enables/disables and selects the speed search function at start.
0: Speed Estimation Speed
Search Disable - Speed search at start is disabled
(however the estimated speed method is used for multi-function input, power loss ridethrough, auto fault retry)
1: Speed Estimation Speed
Search Enable - The speed estimation method of speed search is enabled at run command.
2: Current Detection Speed
Search Disable - Speed search at start is disabled
(however the current detection method is used for multi-function input, power loss ride through, auto fault retry)
3: Current Detection Speed
Search Enable - The current detection method of speed search is enabled at run command.
Speed Estimation Method:
Motor speed and direction are measured using residual motor flux.
Current Detection Method:
Motor speed is measured using current feedback levels
(unidirectional only).
Speed
Search
Deactivation
Current
SpdSrch
Current
Used only when b3-01 = 2 or
3. Sets speed search operating current in units of percent, with drive rated current as 100%.
Note: Normally not necessary to change. If the drive won't run after a restart, lower this value.
Speed
Search
Deceleration
Time
Used only when b3-01 = 2 or
3. Sets the deceleration time during speed search.
SpdSrch
Dec Time
0 to 3
0 to
200
0.1 to
10.0
2
*
100%
**
2.0 s
No
No
No
A A
A No
A No
A
A
A
No
No
A
A
No No
191H
192H
193H
5-
15
5
-16
Parameter
Number b3-05 b3-10 b3-13 b3-14 b3-17
*** b3-18
*** b3-19
***
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
Speed
Search
Delay Time
Search
Delay
Delays the speed search operation after a momentary power loss to allow time for an external output contactor to re-energize.
Speed Sarch
Detection
Compensation
Gain
Srch Detect
Comp
Sets the gain for the frequency at which the drive starts speed estimation speed search. Use only when b3-01 = 0 or 1.
Proportional
Gain of
Observer
During
Speed
Search
Srch Est P
Gain
Sets n4-08 in units of 1.0 for
P-gain (PI Controls) as the
Observer during Speed Search.
Note: Normally this parameter need not be changed, although a low setting is needed when
OV occurs during speed search with a large amount of load inertia. Set larger values when working with speed agree.
Bi-directional
Speed
Search
Selection
Bidir Search
Sel
This parameter enables the drive to detect the direction of rotation of the motor during speed search.
0: Disable - drive uses frequency reference direction.
1:Enable - drive uses detected direction
Speed search retrial current level
(speed estimation)
SrchRestart
Lv1
Sets the current level to retry a speed search as a percentage, taking the Inverter rated current as 100%.
0.0 to
20.0
1.00
to
1.20
0.1
to
2.0
0 to 1
0 to
200
Speed search retrial detection time
(speed estimation)
Sets the time for detection in a speed search retrial in units of seconds.
SrchRestart
Time
0.00 to
1.00
Number of speed search retrials
Sets the number of times that a speed search can be retried.
Num of
SrchRestr
0 to 10
0.2 s
1.10
1.0%
1
150%
0.10 s
0
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A No
A
A No
A No
A No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
No No No No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
195H
19AH
19DH
19EH
1F0H
1F1H
1F2H
* Factory settings will change when the control method is changed. (Open-loop vector 1 factory settings are given.) Set to “3” in V/f w/PG.
User Parameter Tables
** Factory settings will change when the control method is changed.
*** Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1039 and later.
Timer Function: b4
User parameters for timer functions are shown in the following table.
Name
Parameter
Number b4-01 b4-02
Display
Timer
Function
ON-delay
Time
Delay-ON
Timer
Timer
Function
OFF-delay
Time
Delay-OFF
Timer
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Used in conjunction with a multi-function digital input and a multi-function digital output programmed for the timer function. This sets the amount of time between when the digital input is closed, and the digital output is energized.
Used in conjunction with a multi-function digital input and a multi-function digital output programmed for the timer function. This sets the amount of time the output stays energized after the digital input is opened.
0.0 to
3000.0
0.0 to
3000.0
0.0 s
0.0 s
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
MODBUS
Register
1A3H
1A4H
PID Control: b5
User parameters for PID control are shown in the following table.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register b5-01 b5-02 b5-03 b5-04
PID Function
Setting
PID Mode
This parameter determines the function of the PID control.
0: Disabled
1: D= Feedback
2: D= Feed-Forward
3: Freq. Ref. + PID output
(D = Feedback)
4: Freq. Ref. + PID output
(D = Feed-Forward)
Proportional
Gain Setting
PID Gain
Sets the proportional gain of the PID controller.
Integral Time
Setting
PID I Time
Sets the integral time for the
PID controller. A setting of zero disables integral control.
Integral Limit
Setting
PID I Limit
Sets the maximum output possible from the integrator.
Set as a percentage (%) of maximum frequency.
0 to 4
0.00
to
25.00
0.0 to
360.0
0.0 to
100.0
0
1.00
1.0 s
No
Yes
Yes
100.0% Yes
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
1A5H
1A6H
1A7H
1A8H
5-
17
5
-18
Parameter
Number b5-05 b5-06 b5-07 b5-08 b5-09 b5-10 b5-11 b5-12
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
Derivative
Time
PID D Time
PID Output
Limit
PID Limit
PID Offset
Adjustment
PID Offset
Sets D-control derivative time. A setting of 0.00 disables derivative control.
0.00 to
10.00
Sets the maximum output possible from the entire PID controller. Set as a percentage
(%) of maximum frequency.
Sets the amount of offset of the output of the PID controller.
Set as a percentage (%) of maximum frequency.
The offset is summed with the
PID output. This can be used to artificially kick-start a slow starting PID loop.
0.0 to
100.0
-100.0
to
+100.0
PID Primary
Delay Time
Constant
PID Delay
Time
PID Output
Level
Selection
Output Level
Sel
Sets the amount of time for the filter on the output of the
PID controller.
Note: The offset is summed with the PID output.
This can be used to artifically kick-start a slow starting PID loop.
Note: Normally, change is not required.
Determines whether the PID controller will be direct or reverse acting.
0: Normal Output (direct acting)
1: Reverse Output (reverse acting)
0.00 to
10.00
0 or 1
PID Output
Gain Setting
Output Gain
Sets the output gain of the
PID controller.
PID Output
Reverse
Selection
Output Rev
Sel
PID
Feedback
Reference
Missing
Detection
Selection
Fb los Det Sel
0: Zero Limit (when PID output goes negative, drive stops). Zero Limit is automatic when reverse prohibit is selected using b1-
04.
1: Reverse (when PID goes negative, drive reverses).
0: Disabled (no detection of loss of PID feedback)
1: Alarm (detection of loss of PID feedback, operation continues during detection with the fault contact not energized)
2: Fault (detection of loss of
PID feeedback, coast to stop during detection and fault contact energizes)
0.0
to
25.0
0 or 1
0 to 2
0.00 s
0.0%
0.00 s
0
1.0
0
0
Yes
100.0% Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
A A
A A
A A
A A
A A
A A
A A
A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
1A9H
1AAH
1ABH
1ACH
1ADH
1AEH
1AFH
1B0H
User Parameter Tables
Parameter
Number b5-13 b5-14 b5-15 b5-16 b5-17 b5-18 b5-19
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
PID
Feedback Loss
Detection
Level
Fb los Det
Lvl
Sets the PID feedback loss detection level as a percentage (%) of maximum frequency (E1-04).
PID
Feedback
Loss
Detection
Time
Sets the PID feedback loss detection delay time in terms of seconds.
Fb los Det
Time
PID Sleep
Function
Start level
PID Sleep
Level
PID Sleep
Delay Time
Sets the sleep function start frequency.
Note: Enabled even when
PID control mode has not been selected.
PID Sleep
Time
Sets the sleep function delay time in terms of 0.1 seconds.
PID
Accel/decel
Time
PID Acc/Dec
Time
Applies an accel/decel time to the PID setpoint reference. The drive's standard softstarter
(C1-xx and S-curve) still affects the output of the PID algorithm.
PID
Setpoint
Selection
Allows the b5-19 setting to be the PID target setpoint value.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
PID
Setpoint Sel
PID Setpoint
PID Setpoint
Sets the PID target value.
Use only when b5-18 = 1
0 to
100
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 to
25.5
0 to 1
0.0 to
100.0
0%
1.0 s
0.0Hz
0.0 s
0.0 s
0
0.0 %
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
1B1H
1B2H
1B3H
1B4H
1B5H
1DCH
1DDH
5-
19
5
-20
Dwell Functions: b6
User parameters for dwell functions are shown in the following table.
Name
Parameter
Number Display
Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 b6-01 b6-02 b6-03 b6-04
Dwell
Reference at Start
Dwell Ref
@Start
Dwell
Time at
Start
Run command ON
OFF
Output frequency
Dwell
Time
@Start
Dwell
Frequency at Stop
Dwell Ref
@Stop
The dwell function is used to temporarily hold the frequency when driving a motor with heavy load.
Dwell
Time at
Stop b6-02 b6-01 b6-03 b6-04
Time
Dwell
Time
@Stop
0.0
to
400.0
0.0
to
10.0
0.0
to
400.0
0.0
to
10.0
0.0Hz
0.0 s
0.0Hz
0.0 s
No
No
No
No
A A
A A
A A
A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
MODBUS
Register
1B6H
1B7H
1B8H
1B9H
DROOP Control: b7
User parameters for droop functions are shown in the following table.
Parameter
Number b7-01 b7-02
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
Droop
Control Level
Droop
Quantity
Sets the speed decrease as a percentage of motor base speed (E1-06) when the motor is at 100% load torque.
Setting of 0.0 disables droop control.
Droop
Control
Delay Time
Determines the droop control delay time in response to a load change.
Droop Delay
Time
0.0
to
100.0
0.03
to
2.00
0.0%
0.05 s
Yes
Yes
No No No
No No No
A
A
A
A
1CAH
1CBH
User Parameter Tables
Energy Saving: b8
User parameters for energy-saving control functions are shown in the following table.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register b8-01 b8-02 b8-03 b8-04 b8-05 b8-06
Energy Saving
Control
Selection
Energy Save
Sel
Energy Savings function enable/disable selection.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Energy
Saving Gain
Energy Save
Gain
Sets energy savings control gain when in vector control mode.
Energy Saving
Control
Filter Time
Constant
Sets energy saving control filter time constant when in vector control mode.
Energy
Saving F.T
Energy Saving
Coefficient
Value
Used to fine-tune the energy savings function when in V/f
Control Mode.
Energy Save
COEF
Power Detection
Filter Time kW Filter Time
Used to fine-tune the energy savings function when in V/f
Control Mode.
Search
Operation
Voltage Limit
Search V Limit
Used to fine-tune the energy savings function when in V/f
Control Mode.
* 1. The factory setting is 1.0 when using V/f control with PG.
* 2. Initial settings vary based on drive capacity and control mode.
* 3. Caution: Initial settings will vary based on motor capacity.
0 or 1
0.0 to
10.0
0.00 to
10.0
0.0
to
655.00
0 to
2000
0 to
100
0
0.7
*1
0.50 s
*2
*3
20ms
0%
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
No No
No No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No No No
No No No
No No No
1CCH
1CDH
1CEH
1CFH
1D0H
1D1H
Zero Servo: b9
User parameters for dwell functions are shown in the following table.
Name
Parameter
Number Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 b9-01
Zero-servo
Gain
Zero Servo
Gain
Sets the position loop gain for
Zero Servo command. This function is effective when multi-function input
"zero- servo command" is set.
0 to
100
5 No No No No A No b9-02
Zero-servo
Completion
Width
Zero Servo
Count
Sets number of pulses used for the multi-function output of "zero servo completion".
0 to
16383
10 No No No No A No
MODBUS
Register
1DAH
1DBH
5-
21
5
-22
Autotuning Parameters: C
The following settings are made with the autotuning parameters (C parameters): Acceleration/deceleration times, s-curve characteristics, slip compensation, torque compensation, speed control, and carrier frequency functions.
Acceleration/Deceleration: C1
User parameters for acceleration and deceleration times are shown in the following table.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
C1-01
C1-02
C1-03
C1-04
C1-05
C1-06
C1-07
C1-08
C1-09
C1-10
Acceleration
Time 1
Accel Time 1
Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency.
Deceleration
Time 1
Decel Time 1
Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero.
Acceleration
Time 2
Accel Time 2
Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency when selected via a multi-function input.
Deceleration
Time 2
Decel Time 2
Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero when selected via a multi-function input.
Acceleration
Time 3
Accel Time 3
Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency when selected via a multi-function input.
Deceleration
Time 3
Decel Time 3
Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero when selected via a multi-function input.
0.0
to
6000.0
*
Acceleration
Time 4
Accel Time 4
Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency when selected via a multi-function input.
Deceleration
Time 4
Decel Time 4
Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero when selected via a multi-function input.
Emergency
Stop Time
Fast Stop
Time
Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero for the multi-function input "Fast Stop" function.
Note: This parameter is also used by selecting "Fast
Stop" as a Stop Method when a fault is detected.
Accel/decel
Time Setting
Unit
Acc/Dec Units
Sets the setting resolution of
C1-01 to C1-09:
0: 0.01sec (0.00 to 600.00sec)
1: 0.1sec (0.0 to 6000.0sec)
0 or 1
10.0 s
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
MODBUS
Register
200H
201H
202H
203H
204H
205H
206H
207H
208H
209H
User Parameter Tables
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
Accel/decel
Switch
Frequency
Sets the frequency for automatic switching of accel / decel times.
Fout < C1-11: Accel/Decel
Time 4
C1-11
Fout C1-11: Accel/Decel
Time 1
Acc/Dec SW
Freq
Multi-function inputs
"Multi-Acc/Dec 1" and
"Multi-Acc/Dec 2" have priority over C1-11.
0.0 to
400.0
**
0.0Hz
No A A A A A 20AH
Note: With Multi-Function
Input, Accel/Decel
Time 1 and 2 will take precedence.
* The setting range for accel/decel time will differ depending on C1-10 (Accel/Decel Time Units). If C1-10 is set to "0", then the setting range will change to
0.00sec to 600.00sec.
** Varies by Duty Rating.
S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration: C2
User parameters for S-curve characteristics are shown in the following table.
Name
Parameter
Number Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vec-tor
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
C2-01
C2-02
C2-03
C2-04
S-curve
Characteristic at Decel
Start
SCrv Dec
@ Start
S-curve
Characteristic at Decel
End
SCrv Dec
@ End
S-curve
Characteristic at Accel
Start
SCrv Acc
@ Start
S-curve
Characteristic at Accel
End
SCrv Acc
@ End
S-curve is used to further soften the starting and stopping ramp. The longer the S-curve time, the softer the starting and stopping ramp.
Note:With this setting, accel/decel times will be exactly half of the start and finish times of the
S-curve characteristic time.
Run command
Output frequency
ON
C2-02
C2-01
OFF
C2-03
C2-04
Time
0.00
to
2.50
0.00
to
2.50
0.00
to
2.50
0.00
to
2.50
0.20 s
0.20 s
0.20 s
0.00 s
No
No
No
No
A A
A A
A A
A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
20BH
20CH
20DH
20EH
5-
23
5
-24
Motor Slip Compensation: C3
User parameters for slip compensation are shown in the following table.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
C3-01
C3-02
C3-03
C3-04
C3-05
Slip
Compensation
Gain
Slip Comp
Gain
This parameter is used to increase motor speed to account for motor slip by boosting the output frequency. If the speed is lower than the frequency reference, increase C3-01. If the speed is higher than the frequency reference, decrease
C3-01.
Note: Adjustment is not normally required. When operating in Open Loop
Vector, this parameter works as a function to set the proper amount of gain.
Slip
Compensation
Primary
Delay Time
Slip Comp
Time
This parameter adjusts the filter on the output of the slip compensation function.
Increase to add stability, decrease to improve response.
Slip
Compensation
Limit
Slip Comp
Limit
This parameter sets the upper limit for the slip compensation function. It is set as a percentage of motor rated slip
(E2-02).
Slip
Compensation
Selection
During
Regeneration
Slip Comp
Regen
Determines whether slip compensation is enabled or disabled during regenerative operation.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Output
Voltage Limit
Operation
Selection
V/f Slip Cmp
Sel
Determines if the motor magnetic flux is automatically decreased when output voltage saturation occurs.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0.0
to
2.5
0 to
10000
0 to
250
0 or 1
0 or 1
1.0*
200ms*
200%
0
0*
Yes
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
No
No
A
* The display shows the factory settings for Open Loop Vector. Default settings will change in accordance with the control mode.
A
No
No
No
A
MODBUS
Register
20FH
210H
211H
212H
213H
User Parameter Tables
Torque Compensation: C4
User parameters for are torque compensation shown in the following table.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
C4-01
C4-02
C4-03
C4-04
C4-05
Torque
Gain
Gain
Compensation
Torq Comp
This parameter sets the gain for the drive's automatic torque boost function to match the drive's output voltage to the motor load.
This parameter helps to produce better starting torque.
It determines the amount of torque or voltage boost based upon motor current, motor resistance, and output frequency.
Note: Adjustment is not normally required.
Torque
Compensation
Primary
Delay Time
Torq Comp
Time
This parameter adjusts the filter on the output of the torque compensation function. Increase to add stability, decrease to improve response.
Note: Adjustment is not normally required.
Torque
Compensation at Forward
Start
Sets torque compensation at forward start as a percentage of motor torque.
F TorqCmp@ start
Torque
Compensation at Reverse
Start
Sets torque compensation at reverse start as a percentage of motor torque.
R TorqCmp@ start
Torque
Compensation
Time
Constant
TorqCmp
Delay T
Sets the time constant for torque compensation at forward start and reverse start
(C4-03 and C4-04). The filter is disabled if the time is set to
4ms or less.
0.00 to
2.50
0 to
10000
0.0 to
200.0
-200.0 to
0.0
0 to
200
1.00
20ms*
0.0%
0.0%
10ms
Yes
No
No
No
No
A
A
No
No
No
A
A
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
* The display shows the factory settings for Open loop vector 1 (OLV1). Default settings will change in accordance with the control mode.
MODBUS
Register
215H
216H
217H
218H
219H
5-
25
5
-26
Speed Control (ASR): C5
User parameters for speed control are shown in the following table.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
C5-01
C5-02
C5-03
C5-04
C5-05
C5-06
C5-07
ASR
Proportional
Gain 1
Sets the proportional gain of the speed control loop (ASR.)
ASR P Gain 1
0.00 to
300.00
*2
ASR Integral
Time 1
Sets the integral time of the speed control loop (ASR)
ASR I Time 1
0.000 to
10.000
ASR
Proportional
Gain 2
Usually setting is not necessary.
Set to change the rotational speed gain.
P, I
ASR P Gain 2 P=C5-01
I=C5-02
ASR Integral
Time 2
P=C5-03
I=C5-04
0 E1-04 Motor speed (Hz)
ASR I Time 2
0.00 to
300.00
*2
0.000 to
10.000
ASR Limit Sets the upper limit for the speed control loop (ASR) as a percentage of the
ASR Limit maximum output frequency (E1-04).
0.0 to
20.0
ASR Primary
Delay Time
Constant
Sets the filter time constant for the time from the speed loop to the torque command output.
ASR Delay
Time
0.000 to
0.500
ASR
Switching
Frequency
ASR Gain
SW Freq
Sets the frequency for switching between Proportional Gain 1, 2 and
Integral Time 1, 2.
0.0 to
400.0
20.00
*
0.500s
*
20.00
*
*
1
1
1
0.500s
1
5.0%
0.004s
*
1
0.0Hz
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
No No
No No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
C5-08
C5-10
ASR Integral
Limit
ASR I Limit
Sets the ASR integral upper limit and rated load as a percentage of maximum output frequency (E1-04).
0 to
400
400% No No No No A A
ASR Primary
Delay Time
Constant 2
ASR Delay
Time2
Sets the Filter Time Constant when the torque command is output from the Speed
Control Loop (ASR). Enabled only with a speed range of max 35Hz while in Vector
Control 2 Mode without PG.
Note: Adjustment is not normally required.
0.000 to
0.500
0.010 s No No No No No A
* 1. Factory settings will change depending on the control mode.
* 2. The setting range becomes 1.00 to 300.0 when using controls modes Flux Vector or Open Loop Vector 2.
21BH
21CH
21DH
21EH
21FH
220H
221H
222H
231H
User Parameter Tables
Carrier Frequency: C6
User parameters for the carrier frequency are shown in the following table.
Name
Parameter
Number Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
C6-02
C6-03
*6
C6-04
*6
C6-05
*6
Carrier
Frequency
Selection
Carrier
Freq Sel
Selects the number of pulses per second of the output voltage waveform. Setting range determined by C6-01 setting.
0: Low noise
1: Fc = 2.0 kHz
2: Fc = 5.0 kHz
3: Fc = 8.0 kHz
4: Fc = 10.0 kHz
5: Fc = 12.5 kHz
6: Fc = 15.0 kHz
OF: Program (Determined by the settings of C6-03 thru C6-05)
Carrier
Frequency
Upper
Limit
Carrier
Freq Max
Sets the relationship of output frequency to carrier frequency when C6-02 = OF.
Note: Carrier frequency is set to C6-03
(upper limit) when operating in Vector
Control Mode.
Carrier
Frequency
Lower
Limit
Carrier frequency
Carrier
Freq Min
Output frequency x (C6-05) x K
Output frequency
(Max. output frequency)
Carrier
Frequency
Proportional
Gain
Carrier
Freq Gain
K is a coefficient that depends on the setting of C6-03.
C6-03 10.0 kHz: K = 3
10.0 kHz > C6-03 5.0 kHz: K = 2
5.0 kHz > C6-03: K = 1
0 to F
2.0 to
15.0
*3 *4
0.4 to
15.0
*3 *4
0 to
99
*4
6
*2
15.0 kHz
*2
15.0 kHz
*2
0
C6-11
Carrier
Frequency
Selection for
Open-loop
Vector 2
Selects the carrier frequency during
Vector Control 2 wo/PG.
1: 2kHz (3-phase modulation)
2: 4kHz (3-phase modulation)
3: 6kHz (3-phase modulation)
4: 8kHz (3-phase modulation)
Carrier
Freq Sel
1 to 4
4
*2
* 1. The setting range depends on the control method of the drive.
* 2. Initial values vary depending on drive capacity.
* 3. Setting range varies based on drive capacity.
* 4. This parameter can be monitored or set only when 1 is set for C6-01 and F is set for C6-02.
* 5. Quick Settings are used if Multi-Function Input is set for two motors.
* 6. This parameter can be monitored or set only when F is set for C6-02.
No
No
No
No
No
Q Q Q
A A A
No
*5
No
*5
No
*5
Q
No
*5
A No 225H
A A No No No 226H
A A No No No 227H
No
*5
Q
224H
22DH
5-
27
5
-28
Reference Parameters: d
The following settings are made with the reference parameters (d parameters): Frequency references.
Preset Reference: d1
User parameters for frequency references are shown in the following table.
Name
Parameter
Number Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register d1-01
Frequency
Reference 1
Reference 1
Frequency
Reference 2
Setting units are affected by o1-03.
0.00Hz
Yes Q Q Q Q Q 280H d1-02 d1-03 d1-04 d1-05 d1-06 d1-07 d1-08 d1-09
Reference 2
Frequency
Reference 3
Reference 3
Frequency
Reference 4
Reference 4
Frequency
Reference 5
Reference 5
Frequency
Reference 6
Reference 6
Frequency
Reference 7
Reference 7
Frequency
Reference 8
Reference 8
Frequency
Reference 9
Reference 9
Frequency reference when multi-function input
"Multi-step speed reference 1" is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input
"Multi-step speed reference 2" is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input
"Multi-step speed reference 1, 2" is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input
"Multi-step speed reference 3" is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input
"Multi-step speed reference 1, 3" is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input
"Multi-step speed reference 2, 3" is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input
"Multi-step speed reference 1, 2, 3" is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input
"Multi-step speed reference 4" is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
0 to
400.00
*
0.00Hz
Yes
0.00Hz
Yes
0.00Hz
Yes
0.00Hz
Yes
0.00Hz
Yes
0.00Hz
Yes
0.00Hz
Yes
0.00Hz
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
281H
282H
283H
284H
285H
286H
287H
288H
User Parameter Tables
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register d1-10 d1-11 d1-12 d1-13 d1-14 d1-15 d1-16 d1-17
Frequency
Reference 10
Reference 10
Frequency
Reference 11
Reference 11
Frequency
Reference 12
Reference 12
Frequency
Reference 13
Reference 13
Frequency
Reference 14
Reference 14
Frequency
Reference 15
Reference 15
Frequency
Reference 16
Reference 16
Jog
Frequency
Reference
Jog
Reference
Frequency reference when multi-function input
"Multi-step speed reference 1, 4" is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input
"Multi-step speed reference 2, 4" is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input
"Multi-step speed reference 1, 2, 4" is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input
"Multi-step speed reference 3, 4" is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input
"Multi-step speed reference 1, 3, 4" is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input
"Multi-step speed reference 2, 3, 4" is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when multi-function input
"Multi-step speed reference 1, 2, 3, 4" is ON. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Frequency reference when:
"Jog frequency reference" is selected via multi-function input terminals. "Jog frequency reference" has priority over "multi-step speed reference 1 to 4".
Parameter d1-17 is also the reference for the JOG key on the Digital Operator, and the multi-function inputs
"forward jog" and "reverse jog". Setting units are affected by o1-03.
0 to
400.00
*
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
6.00Hz
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
28BH
28CH
28DH
28EH
28FH
290H
291H
292H
Note The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor). The default for o1-03 is 0 (increments of 0.01Hz).
* Setting range changes to 0 thru 66.0 when operating in Open-loop Vector 2 . The upper limit for the setting range also depends on the upper limit in E1-04.
The max setting is 400.00.
5-
29
5
-30
Reference Limits: d2
User parameters for frequency reference limits are shown in the following table.
Name
Parameter
Number Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register d2-01 d2-02 d2-03
Frequency
Reference
Upper Limit
Ref Upper
Limit
Determines maximum frequency reference, set as a percentage of maximum output frequency (E1-04). If the frequency reference is above this value, actual drive speed will be limited to this value. This parameter applies to all frequency reference sources.
Frequency
Reference
Lower Limit
Ref Lower
Limit
Sets the output frequency lower limit as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
Master Speed
Reference
Lower Limit
Ref1 Lower
Limit
Set the master speed reference lower limit as a percent, taking the max. output frequency to be 100%.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0 to
110.0
0.0 to
110.0
100.0% No
0.0%
0.0%
No
No
A A
A A
A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
289H
28AH
293H
Jump Frequencies: d3
User parameters for jump frequencies are shown in the following table.
Name
Parameter
Number Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register d3-01 d3-02 d3-03 d3-04
Jump
Frequency 1
Jump Freq 1
Jump
Frequency 2
Jump Freq 2
Jump
Frequency 3
Jump Freq 3
Jump
Frequency
Width
Jump
Bandwidth
This parameter allow programming of up to three prohibited frequency reference points for eliminating problems with resonant vibration of the motor / machine. This feature does not actually eliminate the selected frequency values, but will accelerate and decelerate the motor through the prohibited bandwidth.
This parameter determines the width of the deadband around each selected prohibited frequency reference point. A setting of
"1.0" will result in a deadband of +/- 1.0Hz.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 to
20.0
0.0Hz
0.0Hz
0.0Hz
1.0Hz
No
No
No
No
A A
A A
A A
A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
294H
295H
296H
297H
User Parameter Tables
Reference Frequency Hold: d4
User parameters for the reference frequency hold function are shown in the following table.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register d4-01 d4-02
Frequency
Reference
Hold
Function
Selection
MOP Ref
Memory
This parameter is used to retain the held frequency reference in U1-01 (d1-01) when power is removed. This function is available when the multi-function inputs “accel/ decel ramp hold” or
“up/down” commands are selected (H1-XX = A or 10 and 11).
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Trim Control
Lvl
Trim Control
Lvl
Sets the amount of frequency reference to be added or subtracted as a percentage of maximum output frequency
(E1-04) when multi-function inputs “trim control increase” and “trim control decrease” are selected (H1-XX = 1C and 1D).
0 or 1
0 to
100
0
10%
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
298H
299H
Torque Control: d5
User parameters for the torque control are shown in the following table.
Name
Parameter
Number Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 d5-01 d5-02
Torque
Control
Selection
Torq Control
Sel
Torque
Reference
Delay Time
Torq Ref
Filter
Selects speed or torque control.
The torque reference is set via analog input A2 or A3 when it is set for "torque reference"
(H3-05 or H3-09 = 13). Torque reference is set as a percentage of motor rated torque. To use this function for switching between speed and torque control, set to 0 and set a multifunction input to "speed/torque control change" (H1-xx = 71).
0: Speed Control (controlled by C5-01 to C5-07)
1: Torque Control
Sets the torque reference delay time in milliseconds.
This function can be used to correct for noise in the torque control signal or the responsiveness with the host controller. When oscillation occurs during torque control, increase the set value.
0 or 1
0 to
1000
0
0ms *
No
No
No No No
No No No
A
A
A
A
MODBUS
Register
29AH
29BH
5-
31
5
-32
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 d5-03 d5-04 d5-05 d5-06 d5-07
Speed Limit
Selection
Speed Limit
Sel
Speed Limit Sets the speed limit during torque control as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04).
Speed Lmt
Value
This function is enabled when d5-03 is set to 2. Directions are as follows.
+: run command direction
-: run command opposite
direction
Speed Limit
Bias
Speed Lmt
Bias
Speed/torque
Control
Switchover
Timer
Ref Hold
Time
Set the speed limit bias as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04).
Bias is given to the specified speed limit. It can be used to adjust the margin for the speed limit.
Set the delay time from inputting the multi-function input “speed/torque control change” (from On to OFF or
OFF to ON) until the control is actually changed, inms units.
This function is enabled when the multi-function input
“speed/torque control change” is set. While in the speed/torque control switching timer, the analog inputs hold the value present when the "speed/torque control change" is received.
Rotational
Direction
Limit
Selection
Drctn
SpdLmt Sel
Sets the speed limit command method for the torque control method.
1: Analog Input - Limited by the output of the soft starter (b1-01 selection and active acceleration/ deceleration and S-curve settings).
2: Program Setting -
Limited by d5-04 setting value.
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Normally set to "1" (enabled).
This parameter should be enabled when motor control values are set the same for both rotational directions
(such as machinery for winding or rewinding).
1 or 2
-120 to
+120
0 to
120
0 to
1000
0 to 1
1
0%
10%
0ms
1
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
* Factory setting will change according to the control mode (factory settings for Flux Vector Control are shown here).
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
MODBUS
Register
29CH
29DH
29EH
29FH
2A6H
User Parameter Tables
Field Control: d6
User parameters for the field weakening command are shown in the following table.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register d6-01 d6-02 d6-03
Magnetic
Field
Weakening
Level
Field-Weak
Lvl
Magnetic
Field
Frequency
Field-Weak
Freq
Sets the drive output voltage when the multi-function input
"field weakening command" is input (H1-xx = 63). Sets as a percentage taking the voltage set in the V/f pattern as 100%.
Sets the lower limit (in Hz) of the frequency range where field weakening control is valid. The field weakening command is valid only at frequencies above this setting and only when output frequency is in agreement with the current output frequency (speed agree).
Magnetic
Field Forcing
Function
Selection
Set the magnetic field forcing function.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Field Force
Sel
A R Time
Constant
Sets the A-phase-R time constant in relation to the motor secondary circuit time constant by the amount of increase.
0 to
100
0.0 to
400.0
0 or 1
80%
0.0HzH
z
0
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
No No
No No No
No No No
A A A
2A0H
2A1H
2A2H d6-05 d6-06
A PHI R
Filter
Note: A-phase-R Time
Constant = (Secondary
Circuit Time Constant) x (d6-05).
When d6-05 = 0, then
A-phase-R is inactive.
When d6-05 = 0, it becomes the lower limit for 200ms internal to the drive.
Magnetic
Field Forcing
Limit
Field Force
Limit
Sets the upper limit of the excitation current command during magnetic field forcing.
A setting of 100% is equal to motor no-load current, E2-03.
0.00 to
10.00
100 to
400
1.00
400%
No
No
No No No No
No No A A
A
A
2A4H
2A5H
5-
33
5
-34
Motor Setup Parameters: E
The following settings are made with the motor setup parameters (E parameters): V/f characteristics and motor setup parameters.
V/f Pattern: E1
User parameters for V/f characteristics are shown in the following table.
Parameter
Number
E1-01
E1-03
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
Input
Voltage
Setting
Input
Voltage
V/f Pattern
Selection
V/F
Selection
Set to the nominal voltage of the incoming line. Sets the maximum and base voltage used by preset V/F patterns (E1-03 = 0 to E), adjusts the levels of drive protective features (e.g.
Overvoltage, braking resistor turn-on, stall prevention, etc.).
NOTE: DRIVE INPUT VOLTAGE
(NOT MOTOR VOLTAGE) MUST
BE SET IN E1-01 FOR THE
PROTECTIVE FEATURES OF THE
DRIVE TO FUNCTION PROP-
ERLY. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY
RESULT IN EQUIPMENT DAM-
AGE AND/OR PERSONAL
INJURY.
155.0 to
255.0
(240V)
310.0 to
510.0
(480V)
230.0V
or
460.0 V
Set to the type of motor being used and the type of application.
The drive operates utilizing a set
V/F pattern to determine the appropriate output voltage level for each commanded speed. There are
15 different preset V/F patterns to select from (E1-03 = 0 to E) with varying voltage profiles, base levels (base level = frequency at which maximum voltage is reached), and maximum frequencies. There are also settings for Custom V/F patterns that will use the settings of parameters
E1-04 through E1-13. E1-03 = F selects a custom V/F pattern with an upper voltage limit and
E1-03 = FF selects a custom V/F pattern without an upper voltage limit.
0: 50Hz
1: 60Hz Saturation
2: 50Hz Saturation
3: 72Hz (60Hz Base)
4: 50Hz VT1
5: 50Hz VT2
6: 60Hz VT1
7: 60Hz VT2
8: 50Hz HST1
9: 50Hz HST2
A: 60Hz HST1
B: 60Hz HST2
C: 90Hz (60Hz Base)
D: 120Hz (60Hz Base)
E: 180Hz (60Hz Base)
F: Custom V/F
FF: Custom w/o limit
0 to FF F
No
No
Q Q Q Q Q
Q Q No No No
300H
302H
User Parameter Tables
Parameter
Number
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
E1-11
E1-12
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
Maximum
Output
Frequency
Max
Frequency
Maximum
Output
Voltage
Max
Voltage
Mid.
Output
Frequency B
Mid
Frequency
B
Mid.
Output
Voltage B
Set only when the V/F pattern is finely adjusted in the constant power (HP) area above base speed.
Adjustment is not normally required.
Mid
Voltage B
Output voltage (V)
40.0
to
400.0
*5
0.0 to
255.0
(240V)
0.0 to
510.0
(480V)
60.0Hz
*2
Base
Frequency
Base
Frequency
Mid.
Output
Frequency A
Mid
Frequency
A
Mid.
Output
Voltage A
Frequency (Hz)
These parameters are only applicable when V/f Pattern Selection is set to
Custom (E1-03 = F or FF). To set V/f characteristics in a straight line, set the same values for E1-07 and E1-09.
In this case, the setting for E1-08 will be disregarded. Be sure that the four frequencies are set in the following manner or else an OPE10 fault will occur:
Mid
Voltage A E1-04 (FMAX) E1-11 E1-06 (FA)
> E1-07 (FB) E1-09 (FMIN)
Minimum
Output
Frequency
Note: Setting parameter E1-01 to zero is also acceptable
Min
Frequency
Minimum
Output
Voltage
Min
Voltage
0.0
to
400.0
*5
0.0
to
400.0
0.0 to
255.0
(240V)
0.0 to
510.0
(480V)
0.0 to
400.0
*5
60.0Hz
*2
3.0Hz
*2
12.6
Vac or
25.3
Vac
*2
0.5Hz
*2
0.0 to
255.0
(240V)
0.0 to
510.0
(480V)
2.3 Vac or
4.6 Vac
*2
0.0 to
400.0
*5
0.0 to
255.0
(240V)
0.0 to
510.0
(480V)
230.0V
or
460.0V
0.0Hz
*3
0.0
Vac
*3
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Q Q
Q Q
Q Q
A A
A A
Q Q
A A
A A
A A
Q
Q
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
A
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
No No
No No
A Q
No No
A
A
A
A
303H
304H
305H
306H
307H
308H
309H
30AH
30BH
5-
35
5
-36
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
E1-13
Base
Voltage
Base
Voltage
Set only when the V/F pattern is finely adjusted in the constant power (HP) area above base speed.
Adjustment is not normally required.If E1-13 = 0.0, then value in E1-05 is used for E1-13.
Auto-Tuning sets this value.
0.0 to
255.0
(240V)
0.0 to
510.0
(480V)
0.0
Vac
*4
No A A Q Q Q 30CH
* 2. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open-loop vector 1 factory settings are given.)
* 3. E1-11 and E1-12 are disregarded when set to 0.0.
* 4. E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by Autotuning.
* 5. Setting range changes to 0 thru 66.0 when operating in Vector 2 wo/PG . The upper limit for the setting range also depends on the upper limit in E1-04.
Motor Setup: E2
Parameter
Number
E2-01
E2-02
E2-03
E2-04
E2-05
E2-06
E2-07
E2-08
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
Motor Rated current
Motor Rated
FLA
Motor Rated
Slip
Motor Rated
Slip
Motor Noload Current
No-Load
Current
Number of
Motor Poles
Number of
Poles
Motor
Line-to-line
Resistance
Term
Resistance
Motor Leak
Inductance
Leak
Inductance
Motor
Iron-core
Saturation
Coefficient 1
Saturation
Comp1
Motor
Iron-core
Saturation
Coefficient 2
Saturation
Comp2
Sets the motor nameplate full load current in amperes (A).
This value is automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
Sets the motor rated slip in hertz (Hz). This value is automatically set during rotational Auto-Tuning.
Sets the magnetizing current of the motor as a percentage of full load amps (E2-01).
This value is automatically set during rotational Auto-
Tuning.
Sets the number of motor poles.
This value is automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
Sets the phase-to-phase motor resistance in ohms.
This value is automatically set by Auto-Tuning.
Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage of the motor rated voltage.
This parameter is automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 50% of magnetic flux.
This value is automatically set during rotational
Auto-Tuning.
Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 75% of magnetic flux.
This value is automatically set during rotational
Auto-Tuning.
0.32 to
6.40
*2
0.00 to
20.00
0.00 to
1.89
*3
2 to 48 4 poles
0.000
to
65.000
0.0 to
40.0
0.00 to
0.50
0.5 to
0.75
1.90 A
*1
2.90Hz
*1
1.20 A
*1
9.842
*1
18.2%
*1
0.50
0.75
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
No Q
A A
Q
A
A
No
A
No No A
No No A
No No A
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
30EH
30FH
310H
311H
312H
313H
314H
315H
User Parameter Tables
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
E2-09
Motor
Mechanical
Loss
Mechanical
Loss
Sets the motor mechanical loss as a percentage of motor rated power (kW) capacity.
Adjust in the following circumstances:
-when torque loss is large due to motor bearing friction.
-when the torque loss in the load is large.
0.0 to
10.0
0.0% No No No A A A
E2-10
Motor Iron
Loss for
Torque
Compensation
Tcomp Iron
Loss
Motor Rated
Output
Sets the motor iron loss in watts (W).
0 to
65535
14 W
*1
No A A No No No
E2-11
E2-12
Mtr Rated
Power
Motor
Iron-core
Saturation
Coefficient 3
Saturation
Comp3
Sets the motor rated power in kilowatts (kW). This value is automatically set during
Auto-Tuning.
1HP = 0.746kW
Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 130% of magnetic flux.
This value is automatically set during rotational
Auto-Tuning.
0.00 to
650.00
1.30 to
5.00
0.40 kW
*1
1.30
No
No
Q Q
No No
Q
A
Q
A
User parameters for motor 1 are shown in the following table.
* 1. The factory setting depends upon the drive capacity. The value for a 200-240V class drive of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the drive's rated output current. The value for a 200-240V class drive of 0.4 kW is given.
* 3. The factory setting depends upon the drive capacity. The value for a 200-240V class drive of 0.4 kW is given.
Q
A
316H
317H
318H
328H
Motor 2 V/f Pattern: E3
User parameters for motor 2 V/f characteristics are shown in the following table.
Name
Parameter
Number Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
E3-01
Motor 2
Control
Method
Selection
Control
Method
0: V/f control
1: V/f control with PG
2: Open-loop vector control
3: Flux vector control
4: Open-loop vector control 2
0 to 4 2 No A A A A A 319H
5-
37
5
-38
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
E3-02
E3-03
E3-04
E3-05
E3-06
E3-07
E3-08
Motor 2
Maximum
Output
Frequency
(FMAX)
Max
Frequency
Motor 2
Maximum
Output Voltage
(VMAX)
Max
Voltage
Motor 2
Base
Frequency
(FA)
Base
Frequency
Motor 2
Mid.
Output
Frequency 1
(FB)
Output voltage (V)
Frequency (Hz)
Mid
Frequency
Motor 2
Mid.
Output Voltage 1 (VA)
Mid
Voltage
To set V/f characteristics in a straight line, set the same values for E3-05 and E3-07.
In this case, the setting for E3-06 will be disregarded.
Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following manner or else an OPE10 fault will occur:
E3-02 (FMAX) E3-04 (FA)
E3-05 (FB) E3-07 (FMIN) Motor 2
Minimum
Output
Frequency
(FMIN)
Min
Frequency
Motor 2
Minimum
Output
Voltage
(VMIN)
Min
Voltage
40.0 to
400.0
*3
0.0 to
255.0
(240V)
0.0 to
510.0
(480V)
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 to
255.0
(240V)
0.0 to
510.0
(480V)
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 to
255.0
(240V)
0.0 to
510.0
(480V)
60.0Hz
230.0V
or
460.0V
*2
60.0Hz
3.0Hz
*2
12.6
Vac or
25.3
Vac
*1
0.5Hz
*2
2.3 Vac or
4.6 Vac
*1
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
* 1. These are values for a 200-240V class drive. Values for a 380-480V class drive are double.
* 2. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
* 3. The setting range is 0 to 66.0 for open-loop vector control 2.
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
31AH
31BH
31CH
No No 31DH
No No 31EH
A
No No
31FH
320H
User Parameter Tables
Motor 2 Setup: E4
User parameters for motor 2 are shown in the following table.
Name
Parameter
Number Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
E4-01
E4-02
E4-03
E4-04
E4-05
E4-06
E4-07
E4-08
Motor 2
Rated Current
Motor Rated
FLA
Sets the motor 2 name plate full load current in amperes
(A). This value is automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
Motor 2
Rated Slip
Motor Rated
Slip
Sets the rated slip of motor 2 in hertz (Hz). This value is automatically set during rotational Auto-Tuning.
0.32
to
6.40
*2
0.00 to
20.00
1.90 A
*1
2.90Hz
*1
Motor 2 Noload Current
No-Load
Current
Sets the magnetizing current of motor 2 in percentage of full load current (E4-01). This value is automatically set during rotational Auto-Tuning.
Motor 2
Number of Poles
(number of poles)
Sets the number of poles of motor 2. This value is automatically set during
Auto-Tuning.
Number of
Poles
0.00 to
1.89
*3
1.20 A
*1
2 to 48 4 poles
Motor 2
Line-to-line
Resistance
Term
Resistance
Sets the phase-to-phase resistance of motor 2 in ohms.
This value is automatically set by the Auto-Tuning.
Motor 2 Leak
Inductance
Leak
Inductance
Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage of rated voltage of motor 2. This value is automatically set during
Auto-Tuning.
0.000 to
65.000
0.0 to
40.0
Motor 2
Rated
Output
Mtr Rated
Power
Sets the rated power of motor
2 in kilowatts (kW). This value is automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
Slip
Compensation
Gain - Motor 2
SlpCmp Gain
Mtr2
This parameter can help to increase speed precision when working on a load, although normally adjustment is not required.
- When speed is less than that desired value, increase the set value.
- When speed is higher than the desired value, decrease the set value
*This parameter functions as gain suppression when in flux vector mode.
0.00 to
650.00
0.0
to
2.5
9.842
*1
18.2%
*1
0.40kW
*1
1.0
*1
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
A
No A
A A
No No
A A
A No
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
321H
322H
323H
324H
325H
326H
327H
33EH
5-
39
5
-40
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
E4-09
E4-10
E4-11
ASR
Proportional
Gain - Motor 2 Sets the proportional gain for the speed control loop (ASR.)
ASR P Gain
Mtr2
0.00 to
300.00
*2
ASR Integral
Time - Motor 2 Sets the speed control loop
ASR I Time
Mtr2
(ASR) integral time in seconds.
Torque
Compensation
Gain – Motor 2
TrqCmp Gain
Mtr2
Magnifies the torque compensation gain.
Normally this parameter does not require change, however adjustments can be made as follows:
- When the motor cable is long, increase the setting.
- When using a motor with a smaller capacity than the drive (the largest motor being used), increase this setting.
If the motor begins to vibrate, adjust the value set so that the output current doesn't exceed the drive's rated output current when operating at low speeds.
0.000 to
10.000
0.00 to
2.50
20.00
*
3
0.500s
*
1
3
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
A
A
A
A
No
No
A
A
A
No
A
A
No
33FH
340H
341H
* 1. The factory setting depends upon the drive capacity. The value for a 200-240V class drive of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the drive's rated output current. The values for a 200-240V class drive of 0.4 kW is given.
* 3. If a multi-function input is set for motor 2 (H1 = 16), the factory setting will depend upon the drive capacity. The value for a 200-240V class drive of 0.4 kW is given.
User Parameter Tables
Option Parameters: F
The following settings are made with the option parameters (F parameters): Settings for Option Cards.
PG Option Setup: F1
User parameters for the PG Speed Control Card are shown in the following table.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
F1-01
F1-02
F1-03
F1-04
PG Parameter Sets the number of pulses per
PG Pulses/ revolution (PPM) of the
Rev encoder (pulse generator).
Operation
Selection at
PG Open
Circuit
(PGO)
PG Fdbk
Loss Sel
Sets stopping method when a
PG open circuit fault (PGO) occurs. See parameter F1-14.
0: Ramp to stop - Decelerate to stop using the active deceleration time.
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast - Stop - Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.
3: Alarm Only - drive continues operation.
Operation
Selection at
Overspeed
(OS)
PG
Overspeed
Sel
Operation
Selection at
Deviation
PG
Deviation Sel
Sets the stopping method when an overspeed (OS) fault occurs. See F1-08 and
F1-09.
0: Ramp to stop - Decelerate to stop using the active deceleration time.
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast - Stop - Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.
3: Alarm Only - drive continues operation.
Sets the stopping method when a speed deviation
(DEV) fault occurs.
See F1-10 and F1-11.
0: Ramp to stop - Decelerate to stop using the active deceleration time.
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast - Stop - Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.
3: Alarm Only - drive continues operation.
0 to
60000
0 to 3
0 to 3
0 to 3
1024
1
1
3
No
No
No
No
No Q
No A
No A
No A
No
No
No
No
Q
A
A
A
No
No
A
A
380H
381H
382H
383H
5-
41
5
-42
Parameter
Number
F1-05
F1-06
F1-07
F1-08
F1-09
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
PG Rotation
Selection
PG Rotation
Sel
PG division rate (PG pulse monitor)
0: Fwd=C.C.W. - Phase A leads with forward run command. (Phase B leads with reverse run command.)
1: Fwd=C.W. - Phase B leads with forward run command. (Phase A leads with reverse run command.)
Sets the division ratio for the pulse monitor of the PG-B2 encoder feedback option board. This function is not available with the PG-X2 option board.
Division ratio = (1+ n) /m
(where n=0 or 1 & m=1 to 32)
0 or 1
PG Output
Ratio
Integral
Function
During
Accel/decel
Selection
PG Ramp PI/I
Sel
The first digit of the value of
F1-06 stands for n, the second and the third stand for m.
(from left to right).
The possible division ratio settings are: 1/32 F1-06 1.
Sets integral control during acceleration/deceleration to either enabled or disabled.
0: Disabled (The integral function is not used while accelerating or decelerating.)
1: Enabled (The integral function is used at all times.)
Overspeed
Detection
Level
PG Overspd
Level
Overspeed
Detection
Delay Time
PG Overspd
Time
Configures the overspeed fault (OS) detection.
OS fault will occur, if the motor speed feedback is greater than the F1-08 setting for a time longer than F1-09.
F1-08 is set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04).
See F1-03.
1 to
132
0 or 1
0 to
120
0.0 to
2.0
0
1
0
115%
0.0 s
*
No
No
No
No
No
No A
No A
No A
No A
No A
No
No
No
No
A
A
No No
A
A
No
No
No
A
A
384H
385H
386H
387H
388H
User Parameter Tables
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
F1-10
F1-11
F1-12
F1-13
F1-14
F1-21
F1-22
Excessive
Speed
Deviation
Detection
Level
PG Deviate
Level
Excessive
Speed
Deviation
Detection
Delay Time
PG Deviate
Time
Number of
PG Gear
Teeth 1
PG # Gear
Teeth1
Number of
PG Gear
Teeth 2
PG # Gear
Teeth2
Configures the speed deviation fault (DEV) detection.
DEV fault will occur if the speed deviation is greater than the F1-10 setting for a time longer than F1-11. F1-10 is set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency
(E1-04).
Speed deviation is the difference between actual motor speed and the frequency reference command. See F1-04.
Sets the gear ratio between the motor shaft and the encoder (PG).
A gear ratio of 1 will be used if either of these parameters is set to 0. This function is not available in flux vector control.
PG
Open-circuit
Detection Time
PGO Detect
Time
Configures the PG open
(PGO) function. PGO will be detected if no PG pulses are detected for a time longer than F1-14. See F1-02.
PG
Parameter 2
PG Pulses/
Rev 2
PG
Rotational
Direction
Setting 2
PG Rotation
Sel2
Sets the PG pulse count for
Motor-2 (pulse selector, encoder). Set a value that is not significantly less than the pulse count per rotation in
Motor-1.
Sets the direction of rotation for the PG connected to
Motor-2.
0: From phase-A when rotating forwards (from phase-B when in reverse).
1: From phase-B when rotating forwards (from phase-A when in reverse).
0 to 50 10%
0.0 to
10.0
0 to
1000
0.0 to
10.0
0 to
60000
0 to 1
0.5 s
0
0
2.0 s
1024
*1
0
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Flux vector control factory settings are given.)
*1 Default settings changed based on the initialization mode (o2-09).
A
A
No
No
A
Q
Q
A
A
No
No
No
No
No
389H
38AH
38BH
38CH
38DH
3B0H
3B1H
5-
43
5
-44
Parameter
Number
F1-23
F1-24
F1-25
F1-26
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
PG Gear Teeth
Count 1
PG Gear
Teeth1
PG Gear Teeth
Count 2
PGO Gear
Teeth2
Sets the number of gear teeth
(deceleration ratio) between
Motor-2 and the pulse generator.
[(RPMs x 60)/PGpulseCount] x (F1-24)/(F1-23)
If either value is zero, then the decleration ratio will equal "1".
Hardware
Disconnected
Detection
Selection CH1
HW PGO ch1
Hardware
Disconnected
Detection
Selection CH2
Enables or disables the drive from detecting when the PG option on CH1 has been disconnected.
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When using PG-T2 or Z2, this setting is enabled.
HW PGO ch2
0 to
1000
0 to
1000
0 to 1
0 to 1
0
0
1
1
No
No
No
No
No A
No A
No A
No A
No No No
No No No
No
No
A
A
No
No
3B2H
3B3H
3B4H
3B5H
Analog Reference Card: F2
User parameters for the Analog Reference Card are shown in the following table.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
F2-01
AI-14 Input
Selection
AI-14 Input
Sel
Sets the function for channel
1 to 3 of the AI-14B analog input reference option board.
0: 3-channel individual
(Channel 1: terminal A1,
Channel 2: terminal A2,
Channel 3: terminal A3)
1: 3-channel addition
(Summed values of channels 1 to 3 is the frequency reference)
When set to 0, select 1 for b1-01. In this case, the multi-function input "Option/
Inverter selection" cannot be used.
0 or 1 0 No A A A A
2
A
MODBUS
Register
38FH
User Parameter Tables
Digital Reference Card: F3
User parameters for the Digital Reference Card are shown in the following table.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
F3-01
DI-08 /
DI-16H2
Input
Selection
DI Input
Sets the function of the DI-08 or the DI-16H2 digital input option board.
0: BCD 1% unit
1: BCD 0.1% unit
2: BCD 0.01% unit
3: BCD 1Hz unit
4: BCD 0.1Hz unit
5: BCD 0.01Hz unit
6: BCD (5-digit) 0.01Hz unit
(only effective when
DI-16H2 is used.)
7: Binary input
When o1-03 is set to 2 or higher, the input will be BCD, and the units will change to the o1-03 setting.
0 to 7 0 No A A A A A
MODBUS
Register
390H
Analog Monitor Cards: F4
User parameters for the Analog Monitor Card are shown in the following table.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
F4-01
F4-02
F4-03
AO-08/
AO-12
Channel 1
Monitor
Selection
AO Ch1 Sel
Sets the number of the monitor item to be output.
(U1-oo). The following settings cannot be used:
4, 10 to 14, 25, 28, 29, 30, 34,
35, 39, 40, 41.
AO-08/
AO-12
Channel 1
Gain
AO Ch1 Gain
Sets the channel 1 gain.
Ex: Set F4-02 = 50% to output 100% at 5.0V output.
AO-08/
AO-12
Channel 2
Monitor
Selection
AO Ch2
Select
Sets the number of the monitor item to be output.
(U1-xx). The following settings cannot be set:
4, 10 to 14, 25, 28, 29, 30,
34, 39, 40, 41.
1 to 45
0.0 to
1000.0
1 to 45
2
100%
3
No
Yes
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
391H
392H
393H
5-
45
5
-46
Parameter
Number
F4-04
F4-05
F4-06
F4-07
F4-08
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
AO-08/
AO-12
Channel 2
Gain
AO Ch2 Gain
Sets the channel 2 gain.
In order to adjust the meter, 100% of the appropriate output is multiplied for the gain setting, and the bias amount is added and then output.
See F4-02 when stopped in Quick, Advanced, or
Verify mode.
-If 05 appears on the setting screen, then CH1 is used.
See F4-04 when stopped in Quick, Advanced, or
Verify mode.
-If 06 appears on the setting screen, then CH2 is used.
Ex: Set F4-04 = 50% to output 100% at 5.0V output.
0.0 to
1000.0
AO-08/AO-
12 Channel 1
Output Bias
AO Ch1 Bias
Sets the channel 1 bias
(100%/10V).
Ex: Set F4-05 = 50% to output 0% at 5.0V output.
AO-08/AO-
12 Channel 2
Output Bias
AO Ch2 Bias
Sets the channel 2 bias
(100%/10V).
Ex: Set F4-06 = 50% to output 0% at 5.0V output.
AO-12
Channel 1
Signal Level
Sets the range of the voltage output.
AO Opt
Level Ch1
AO-12
Channel 2
Signal Level
0: 0 to 10Vdc
1: -10 to +10Vdc
AO Opt
Level Ch2
-110.0 to
110.0
-110.0 to
110.0
0 or 1
0 or 1
50.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0
0
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
A A
A A
A A
A A
A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
394H
395H
396H
397H
398H
User Parameter Tables
Digital Output Card (DO-02 and DO-08): F5
User parameters for the Digital Output Card are shown in the following table.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
F5-01
F5-02
F5-03
F5-04
F5-05
F5-06
F5-07
DO-08
Channel 5
Output
Selection
DO Ch5
Select
DO-08
Channel 6
Output
Selection
DO Ch6
Select
DO-08
Channel 7
Output
Selection
DO Ch7
Select
DO Ch2
Select
DO-08
Channel 3
Output
Selection
DO Ch3
Select
DO-08
Channel 4
Output
Selection
DO Ch4
Select
DO-02/
DO-08
Channel 1
Output
Selection
DO Ch1
Select
DO-02/
DO-08
Channel 2
Output
Selection
Sets the digital output function number for channel 1.
See the H2 parameter group for possible selections.
Enabled when digital output card DO-02 or DO-08 is used.
Sets the digital output function number for channel 2.
See the H2 parameter group for possible selections.
Enabled when digital output card DO-02 or DO-08 is used.
Sets the digital output function number for channel 3.
See the H2 parameter group for possible selections.
Enabled when digital output card DO-02 or DO-08 is used.
Sets the digital output function number for channel 4.
See the H2 parameter group for possible selections.
Enabled when digital output card DO-02 or DO-08 is used.
Sets the digital output function number for channel 5.
See the H2 parameter group for possible selections.
Enabled when digital output card DO-02 or DO-08 is used.
Sets the digital output function number for channel 6.
See the H2 parameter group for possible selections.
Enabled when digital output card DO-02 or DO-08 is used.
Sets the digital output function number for channel 7.
See the H2 parameter group for possible selections.
Enabled when digital output card DO-02 or DO-08 is used.
0 to 37
0 to 37
0 to 37
0 to 37
0 to 37
0 to 37
0 to 37
0
1
2
4
6
37
0F
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
399H
39AH
39BH
39CH
39DH
39EH
39FH
5-
47
5
-48
Parameter
Number
F5-08
F5-09
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
DO-08
Channel 8
Output
Selection
DO Ch8
Select
DO-08
Output Mode
Selection
DO-08
Selection
Sets the digital output function number for channel 8.
See the H2 parameter group for possible selections.
Enabled when digital output card DO-02 or DO-08 is used.
Sets the function of the DO-08 digital output option board.
0: 8-channel individual outputs.
1: Binary code output.
2: 8-channel Selected -
Output according to F5-01 to F5-08 settings.
0 to 37
0 to 2
0F
0
No
No
A A
A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
3A0H
3A1H
Communications Option Cards: F6
User parameters for a Communications Option Card are shown in the following table.
Name
Parameter
Number Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
F6-01
F6-02
F6-03
Operation
Selection after
Communication
Error
Comm BUS
Flt Sel
Selection of
External
Fault from
Communication
Option Board
EF0
Detection
Stopping
Method for
External
Fault from
Communication
Option Board
EF0 Fault
Action
Selects the stopping method for a communication option board fault (BUS). Active only when a communication option board is installed and b1-01 or b1-02 = 3.
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop
3: Alarm Only
Selects the condition in which an EF0 fault is detected from a communication option board. Active only when a communication option board is installed and b1-01 or b1-02 = 3.
0: Always detected.
1: Detected only during operation.
Selects the stopping method for an external fault from a communication option board
(EF0). Active only when a communication option board is installed and b1-01 or b1-02 = 3.
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop
3: Alarm Only
0 to 3
0 or 1
0 to 3
1
0
1
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
3A2H
3A3H
3A4H
User Parameter Tables
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
F6-04
F6-05
F6-06
Trace
Sampling from
Communication
Option Board
Sets the sample trace for the
CP-916 option board.
Trace
Sample Tim
Current
Monitor Unit
Display
Selection
Current Unit
Sel
Selects the current monitor scaling when using a communication option board.
0: Displayed in Amps
1: 100% / 8192
(12 bit binary number with 8192=100% drive’s rated current)
Torque
Reference/ torque Limit
Selection from
Communication
Option
Torq Ref/Lmt
Sel
Selects torque reference/ limit when using communications option board.
0: Disabled - Torque reference/limit from option board disabled
1: Enabled - Torque reference/limit from option board enabled.
0 to
60000
0 or 1
0 or 1
0
0
0
No
No
No
A
A
No
A
A
No
A
A
No
F6-08
Operation selection after
SI-T WDT error
SI-T
WDTErr Sel
Set the stopping method for
SI-T WDT errors (E5).
0: Deceleration stop using deceleration time in C1-
02
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using deceleration time in C1-
09
3: Continue operation
0 to 3 1 No A A A
F6-09
Number of
SI-T BUS error detection
Set the number which SI-T detects BUS errors.
2 to 10 2 No A A A
SI-T BUS
DET Ctr
* Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1038 and later.
Refer to MECHATROLINK COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE CARD INSTRUCTIONS (TOBPC73060008) for details.
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
MODBUS
Register
3A5H
3A6H
3A7H
3B6H
3B7H
5-
49
5
-50
Terminal Function Parameters: H
The following settings are made with the terminal function parameters (H parameters): Settings for external terminal functions.
Multi-function Contact Inputs: H1
User parameters for multi-function contact inputs are shown in the following tables.
Name Control Methods
Parameter
Number Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
H1-01
Multi-
Function
Digital Input
Terminal S3
Function
Selection
0 to 79 24 No A A A A A
H1-02
H1-03
H1-04
H1-05
H1-06
Terminal S6 Sel
Multi-
Function
Digital Input
Terminal S7
Function
Selection
Terminal S7 Sel
Multi-
Function
Digital Input
Terminal S8
Function
Selection
Terminal S8 Sel
Terminal S3 Sel
Multi-
Function
Digital Input
Terminal S4
Function
Selection
Terminal S4 Sel
Multi-
Function
Digital Input
Terminal S5
Function
Selection
Terminal S5 Sel
Multi-
Function
Digital Input
Terminal S6
Function
Selection
[Refer to table " Multi-function
Contact Input Functions " for multi-function selections]
0 to 79 14
0 to 79 3 (0) *
0 to 79 4 (3) *
0 to 79 6 (4) *
0 to 79 8 (6)*
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
MODBUS
Register
400H
401H
402H
403H
404H
405H
User Parameter Tables
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
H1-07
H1-08
H1-09
H1-10
Multi-
Function
Digital Input
Terminal S9
Function
Selection
Multi-Function Relay Input 7 0 to 79
Terminal S9 Sel
Multi-
Function
Digital Input
Terminal S10
Function
Selection
Multi-Function Relay Input 8 0 to 79
Terminal S10 Sel
Multi-
Function
Digital Input
Terminal S11
Function
Selection
Multi-Function Relay Input 9 0 to 79
Terminal S11 Sel
Multi-
Function
Digital Input
Terminal S12
Function
Selection
Multi-Function Relay Input 10 0 to 79
Terminal S12 Sel
* Number in parenthesis indicates the initial value when using a 3-wire sequence.
5
32
7
15
No
No
No
No
A A
A A
A A
A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
MODBUS
Register
406H
407H
408H
409H
Multi-function Contact Input Functions
6
7
4
5
8
9
Setting
Value
0
1
2
3
A
B
Function
3-wire sequence (Forward/Reverse Run command)
Local/Remote selection (ON: Operator, OFF: Parameter setting)
Option/Inverter selection (ON: Option Card)
Multi-step speed reference 1
When H3-05 is set to 2, this function is combined with the master/auxiliary speed switch.
Multi-step speed reference 2
Multi-step speed reference 3
Jog frequency command (higher priority than multi-step speed reference)
Accel/decel time 1
External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON)
External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF)
Acceleration/deceleration ramp hold (ON: Acceleration/deceleration stopped, frequency on hold)
OH2 alarm signal input (ON: OH2 will be displayed)
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
5-
51
5
-52
60
61
62
63
31
32
34
35
64
65
66
Setting
Value
Function
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
E
F
C
D
Multi-function analog input selection (ON: Enable)
No V/f control with PG (ON: Speed feedback control disabled,) (normal V/f control)
Speed control integral reset (ON: Integral control disabled)
Not used (Set when a terminal is not used)
Up command (Always set with the down command)
Down command (Always set with the up command)
FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17)
RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-17)
No Yes No No No
No Yes No Yes Yes
-
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 10
11
12
13
14
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
15
16
Fault reset (Reset when turned ON)
Emergency stop. (Normally open condition: Deceleration to stop in deceleration time set in C1-09 when ON.)
Motor switch command (Motor 2 selection)
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
17
18
19
1A Accel/Decel time 2
1B
Parameters write enable (ON: All parameters can be written-in. OFF: All parameters other than frequency monitor are write protected.)
1C
1D
Emergency stop (Normally closed condition: Deceleration to stop in deceleration time set in C1-09 when OFF)
Timer function input (Functions are set in b4-01 and b4-02 and the timer function outputs are set in H1 and H2 .)
PID control disable (ON: PID control disabled)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Trim control increase (ON: d4-02 frequency is added to analog frequency reference.) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Trim control decrease (ON: d4-02 frequency is subtracted from analog frequency reference.)
Analog frequency reference sample/hold
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes 1E
20 to
2F
30
External fault (Desired settings possible)
Input mode: NO contact/NC contact, Detection mode: Normal/during operation
PID control integral reset (reset when reset command is input or when stopped during PID control)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
67
68
69
6A
PID control integral hold (ON: Hold)
Multi-step speed reference 4
PID soft starter
PID input characteristics switch
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
DC injection braking command (ON: Performs DC injection braking) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
External search command 1 (ON: Speed search from maximum output frequency) Yes No Yes No Yes
External search command 2 (ON: Speed search from set frequency) Yes No Yes No Yes
Field weakening command (ON: Field weakening control set for d6-01 and d6-02) Yes Yes No No No
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
External speed search command 3
KEB (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NO contact)
KEB (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NO contact)
Communications test mode (“Pass” is displayed when the communications test is passed.)
High-slip braking (HSB)
Jog 2
Closed = Drive runs at frequency reference entered into parameter d1-17.
Direction is determined by FWD/REV input. Three-wire control only
Drive Enable
Closed = Drive will accept run command.
Open = Drive will not run. If running , drive will stop per b1-03.
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
User Parameter Tables
Setting
Value
71
72
77
78
79
Function
Speed/torque control change (ON: Torque control)
Zero-servo command (ON: Zero-servo)
Speed control (ASR) proportional gain switch (ON: C5-03)
Polarity reversing command for external torque reference
Closed Brake Signal*
Closed = Reverse polarity.
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No No No Yes Yes
No No No Yes No
No No No Yes Yes
No No No Yes Yes
No No No
* If the multi-function input is set to 79 and the input value is “closed,” operation will be performed with a speed specification of 0.
No Yes
Multi-function Contact Outputs: H2
User parameters for multi-function outputs are shown in the following tables.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
H2-01
H2-02
H2-03
H2-04
H2-05
Terminal
M1-M2
Function
Selection
(relay)
Term M1-M2
Sel
Terminal
M3-M4
Function
Selection
(relay)
Term M3-M4
Sel
Terminal
M5-M6
Function
Selection
(Relay)
Term M5-M6
Sel
[Refer to table
"H2-01 thru H2-05 Settings" for multi-function selections]
Terminal P3
Function
Selection
(Open
Collector)
Term P3 Sel
Terminal P4
Function
Selection
(Open
Collector)
Term P4 Sel
0 to 38
0 to 38
0 to 38
0 to 38
0 to 38
0
1
2
6
10
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
MODBUS
Register
40BH
40CH
40DH
40EH
40FH
5-
53
5
-54
Multi-function Contact Output Functions
Setting
Value
Function
0
1
2
9
A
7
8
3
4
5
6
B
During run (ON: run command is ON or voltage is being output)
Zero-speed
Frequency agree 1 (L4-02 used.)
Desired frequency agree 1 (ON: Output frequency = ±L4-01, L4-02 used and during frequency agree)
Frequency (FOUT) detection 1 (ON: +L4-01 output frequency -L4-01, L4-02 used)
Frequency (FOUT) detection 2 (ON: Output frequency +L4-01 or output frequency -L4-01, L4-02 used)
Drive operation ready
READY: After initialization, no faults
During DC bus undervoltage (UV) detection
During baseblock (ON: during baseblock)
Frequency reference selection (ON: Frequency reference from Operator)
Run command selection status (ON: Run command from Operator)
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NO (NO contact: Overtorque/undertorque detection at ON)
C
D
E
F
10
11
12
Loss of frequency reference (Effective when 1 is set for L4-05)
Braking resistor fault (ON: Resistor overheat or braking transistor fault)
Fault (ON: Digital Operator communications error or fault other than CPF00 and
CPF01 has occurred.)
Not used. (Set when the terminals are not used.)
Minor fault (ON: Alarm displayed)
Fault reset command active
Timer function output
13
14
15
16
Frequency agree 2 (L4-04 used)
Desired frequency agree 2 (ON: Output frequency = L4-03, L4-04 used, and during frequency agree)
Frequency detection 3 (ON: Output frequency -L4-03, L4-04 used)
Frequency detection 4 (ON: Output frequency -L4-03, L4-04 used)
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF) 17
18
19
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NO (NO Contact: Torque detection at ON)
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF)
1A During reverse run (ON: During reverse run)
1B
1C
During baseblock 2 (OFF: During baseblock)
Motor selection (Motor 2 selected)
1D During regenerative operation (ON: During regenerative operation)
1E Restart enabled (ON: Restart enabled)
1F Restart enabled (ON: Restart enabled)
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
-
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
User Parameter Tables
Setting
Value
1F
2F
*1
Function
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level)
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Maintenance Time
ON: The operation time of either the electrolytic capacitors or the cooling fan has
reached the specified maintenance time.
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
20
30
31
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
No No Yes Yes Yes
No No No Yes Yes
32
33
36
*2
37
38
Drive overheat (OH) pre-alarm (ON: Temperature exceeds L8-02 setting)
During torque limit (current limit) (ON: During torque limit)
During speed limit (ON: During speed limit)
Speed control circuit operating for torque control (except when stopped).
The external torque reference will be limited if torque control is selected (internal torque reference < external torque reference).
Output when the motor is rotating at the speed limit.
Zero-servo end (ON: Zero-servo function completed)
Frequency (FOUT) detection 5 (ON: Output frequency + L4-01 or output frequency L4-01, L4-02 used, OFF: during baseblock
During run 2 (ON: Frequency output, OFF: Base block, DC injection braking, initial excitation, operation stop)
Drive is Enabled
Closed = During drive enable, when the drive Enable input is closed.
No No No Yes Yes
No No No Yes No
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
3D
*2 Inverter's Cooling Fan Fault detected
* 1. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1039 and later.
* 2. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1038 and later.
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Analog Inputs: H3
User parameters for analog inputs are shown in the following table.
Name
Parameter
Number Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
H3-01
H3-02
H3-03
Terminal A1
Signal Level
Selection
Term A1
Signal
Terminal A1
Gain Setting
Terminal A1
Gain
Terminal A1
Bias Setting
Terminal A1
Bias
Sets the signal level of terminal A1.
0: 0 to 10Vdc
1: -10 to +10Vdc
[11-bit plus polarity sign]
Sets the output level when
10V is input, as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04).
Sets the output level when 0V is input, as a percentage of the maximum output frequency
(E1-04).
0 to 1
0.0 to
1000.0
-100.0
to
+100.0
0
100.0% Yes
0.0%
No
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
MODBUS
Register
410H
411H
412H
5-
55
5
-56
Parameter
Number
H3-04
H3-05
H3-06
H3-07
H3-08
H3-09
H3-10
H3-11
H3-12
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Terminal A3
Signal Level
Selection
Term A3
Signal
Sets the signal level of terminal A3.
0: 0 to 10Vdc
1: -10 to +10Vdc
0 to 1
Terminal A3
Function
Selection
[Refer to table "H3-05, H3-09
Settings" for multi-function selections]
Terminal A3
Sel
Terminal A3
Gain Setting
Terminal A3
Gain
Sets the output level when
10V is input.
0 to 1F
0.0 to
1000.0
Terminal A3
Bias Setting
Terminal A3
Bias
Sets the frequency reference when 0V is input.
Terminal A2
Signal Level
Selection
Term A2
Signal
Selects the signal level of terminal A2.
0: 0 to 10Vdc (switch S1-2 must be in the OFF position).
1: -10 to +10Vdc (switch S1-2 must be in the OFF position).
2: 4 to 20mA (switch S1-2 must be in the ON position)
Note:Switch between current or voltage inputs by using (S1-2) switch on the terminal board.
-100.0 to
+100.0
0 to 2
Terminal A2
Function
Selection
Selects the function of terminal A2.
Same choices as Terminal A3
Function Selection (H3-05).
Terminal A2
Sel
Terminal A2
Gain Setting
Terminal A2
Gain
Sets the output level when
10V is input.
0 to 1F
0.0 to
1000.0
Terminal A2
Bias Setting
Terminal A2
Bias
Sets the output level when 0V is input.
Analog Input
Filter Time
Constant
Filter Avg
Time
This parameter adjusts the filter on all 3 analog inputs.
Increase to add stability, decrease to improve response.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.00
to
2.00
0
2
100.0% Yes
0.0%
2
0
Yes
No
No
100.0% Yes
0.0%
0.03sec
No
No
Yes
No
A A
A A
A A
A A
A A
A A
A A
A A
A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
MODBUS
Register
413H
414H
415H
416H
417H
418H
419H
41AH
41BH
User Parameter Tables
H3-05,H3-09 Settings
Setting
Value
Function Contents (100%)
V/f
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
Frequency Bias
Frequency Reference Gain
(FGAIN)
Aux Frequency Reference 1
Aux Frequency Reference 2
Output Voltage Bias
100% = Maximum output frequency (E1-04)
100% = Frequency reference command value A1
Total gain = Internal gain (H3-02) x FGAIN
Used in conjunction with multi-function inputs
"multi-step frequency reference 1-4" (d1-16).
100% = Maximum output frequency (E1-04)
Used in conjunction with multi-function inputs
"multi-step frequency reference 1-4" (d1-16).
100% = Maximum output frequency (E1-04)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
100% = Motor rated voltage (E1-05).
Voltage boost after V/F pattern
Yes
100% = Active accel / decel time (C1-01 thru C1-08) Yes Accel / Decel Time Coefficient
DC Injection Braking Current
Overtorque / Undertorque
Detection Level
100% = Drive rated current.
Parameter b2-02 is disabled.
Used for multi-function digital output for
"overtorque/undertorque".
100% = motor rated torque (OLV, FV) or drive rated current (V/F, V/F w/PG).
Internal overtorque detection level (C6-02) disabled.
Stall Prevention Level During Run 100% = L3-06.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Frequency Reference Lower Limit
100% = Maximum output frequency (E1-04).
Either the setting in d2-02 or the A3 input level is enabled, whichever is larger.
Jump Frequency
PID Feedback
100% = Maximum output frequency (E1-04).
100% = Maximum output frequency (E1-04).
Yes
Yes
Yes
C
D
E
10
11
PID Set Point
Frequency Reference Bias 2
Motor Temperature Input
100% = Maximum output frequency (E1-04).
Frequency reference no longer acts as a PID setpoint.
100% = Maximum output frequency
(E1-04).
Total bias = Internal bias (H3-03) + FBIAS (H3-07) +
A3 input level
10V = 100%
See parameters L1-03 and L1-04
FWD Torque Limit (Quadrant 1) 100% = Motor rated torque.
REV Torque Limit (Quadrant 3) 100% = Motor rated torque.
12
13
Regenerative Torque Limit (Quadrants 2 and 4)
100% = Motor rated torque.
Torque Reference (in Torque Control); Torque Limit (in Speed Control)
100% = Motor rated torque.
14
15
Torque Compensation
FWD / REV Torque Limit
1F Analog input not used.
16 to 1E Not used
100% = Motor rated torque.
100% = Motor rated torque.
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Yes Yes Yes
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
5-
57
5
-58
Multi-function Analog Outputs: H4
User parameters for multi-function analog outputs are shown in the following table.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
H4-01
Terminal
FM
Monitor
Selection
Terminal
FM Sel
Selects the monitor output
(U1-xx) function for terminals
FM and FC. Refer to "U1-xx" monitors for available settings.
Unavailable settings:
4, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 25, 28, 29,
30, 31, 34, 35, 39, 40, 41, 42,
47, 49, 50
1 to 48 2 No A A A A A
H4-02
H4-03
H4-04
H4-05
H4-06
Terminal
FM Gain
Setting
Terminal
FM Gain
Terminal
FM Bias
Setting
Terminal
FM Bias
Terminal
AM
Monitor
Selection
Terminal
AM Sel
Terminal
AM Gain
Setting
Terminal
AM Gain
Terminal
AM Bias
Setting
Terminal
AM Bias
Terminal
FM Signal
Level
Selection
Sets terminal FM output level when selected monitor is at
100%.*
Sets terminal FM output level when selected monitor is at
0%.*
Selects which monitor will be the output on terminals AM and
FC. Same function choices as
H4-01.
Sets terminal AM output voltage (in percent of 10Vdc) when selected monitor is at
100% output.*
Sets terminal AM output voltage (in percent of 10Vdc) when selected monitor is at 0% output.*
0.00 to
2.50
-10.0 to
10.0
1 to 48
0.00 to
2.50
-10.0 to
10.0
1.00
0.0%
3
0.50
0.0%
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Q
A
A
Q
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
H4-07
H4-08
AO Level
Select1
Terminal
AM Signal
Level
Selection
AO Level
Select 2
Selects the signal level of terminal FM.
0: 0 to 10Vdc
1: -10 to +10Vdc
2: 4 to 20mA*
*Set the analog output jumper
CN15 in the proper position.
Selects the signal level of terminal AM.
0: 0 to 10Vdc
1: -10 to +10Vdc
2: 4 to 20mA*
*Set the analog output jumper
CN15 in the proper position.
0 to 2
0 to 2
0
0
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
* In order to adjust the meter, 100% of the appropriate output is multiplied for the gain setting, the bias amount is added and then output.
See H4-02 when stopped in Quick, Advanced, or Verify mode. If 03 appears on the setting screen, then terminal FM is used.
See H4-04 when stopped in Quick, Advanced, or Verify mode. If 06 appears on the setting screen, then terminal AM is used.
MODBUS
Register
41DH
41EH
41FH
420H
421H
422H
423H
424H
User Parameter Tables
MODBUS Communications: H5
User parameters for MODBUS communications are shown in the following table.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
H5-01
H5-02
H5-03
H5-04
H5-05
H5-06
H5-07
Drive Node
Address
Serial
Comm Adr
Selects drive station node number (address) for Modbus terminals R+, R-, S+, S-. The drive's power must be cycled for the setting to take effect.
Communication
Speed
Selection
Serial Baud
Rate
Selects the baud rate for
Modbus terminals R+, R-, S+ and S-. The drive's power must be cycled for the setting to take effect.
0: 1200 bps
1: 2400 bps
2: 4800 bps
3: 9600 bps
4: 19200 bps
Communication
Parity
Selection
Serial Com
Sel
Selects the communication parity for Modbus terminals
R+, R-, S+ and S-. The drive's power must be cycled for the setting to take effect.
0: No Parity
1: Even Parity
2: Odd Parity
Stopping
Method
After
Communication
Error
Serial Fault
Sel
Selects the stopping method when a communication timeout fault (CE) is detected.
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop
3: Alarm Only
Communication
Fault
Detection
Selection
Serial Flt
Dtct
Enables or disables the communications timeout fault
(CE).
0: Disabled - A communication loss will not cause a communication fault.
1: Enabled - If communication is lost for more than 2 seconds, a CE fault will occur.
Drive
Transmit
Wait Time
Transmit
WaitTIM
Set the delay time from when the drive receives data to when the drive sends data.
RTS
Control
Selection
RTS
Control Sel
Enables or disables "request to send" (RTS) control:
0: Disabled - RTS is always on
1: Enabled - RTS turns on only when sending
0 to 20
*1
0 to 4
0 to 2
0 to 3
0 to 1
0 to 1
1F
3
0
3
1
5 to 65 5ms
1
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A A
A A
A A
A A
A A
A A
A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
MODBUS
Register
425H
426H
427H
428H
429H
42AH
42BH
5-
59
5
-60
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
H5-10
*2
Unit Selection for
MEMO-
BUS Register 0025H
MEMO-
BUS 25H
UNIT
Selects the units used for
MEMOBUS registry 0025H
(monitors the output voltage reference).
0: 0.1 V units
1: 1 V units
0 or 1 0 No
* 1. If H5-01 is set to zero, then the drive will be unable to respond to Modbus communication.
* 2. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1039 and later.
A A A A A
MODBUS
Register
436H
User Parameter Tables
Pulse Train I/O: H6
User parameters for pulse I/O are shown in the following table.
Name
Parameter
Number Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
H6-01
H6-02
H6-03
H6-04
H6-05
H6-06
H6-07
Terminal
RP Pulse
Train Input
Function
Selection
Pulse Input
Sel
Selects the function of pulse train terminal RP.
0: Frequency reference
1: PID feedback value
2: PID setpoint value
0 to 2
Pulse Train
Input
Scaling
Pulse In
Scaling
Sets the number of pulses (in
Hz) that is equal to the maximum output frequency
E1-04.
Pulse Train
Input Gain
Pulse Input
Gain
Sets the output level when the pulse train input is at 100% as a percentage of maximum output frequency E1-04.
1000 to
32000
0.0 to
1000.0
0
1440Hz
100.0%
No
Yes
Yes
Pulse Train
Input Bias
Pulse Input
Bias
Sets the output level when the pulse train input is 0Hz as a percentage of maximum output frequency E1-04.
Pulse Train
Input Filter
Time
Pulse In
Filter
Sets the pulse train input filter time constant in seconds.
Pulse Train
Monitor
Scaling
Pulse Moni
Scale
Sets the number of output pulses when the monitor is
100% (in Hz). Set H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to 0, to make the pulse train monitor output synchronous to the output frequency.
-100.0 to
100.0
0.00
to
2.00
Terminal
MP Pulse
Train
Monitor
Selection
Pulse Moni
Sel
Select the pulse train monitor output terminal MP function
(value of the xx part of U1-xx).
See Table A2 for the list of U1 monitors.
1, 2, 5,
20, 24,
36
0 to
32000
0.0% Yes
0.10sec
Yes
2
1440Hz
Yes
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
MODBUS
Register
42CH
42DH
42EH
42FH
430H
431H
432H
5-
61
5
-62
Protection Function Parameters: L
The following settings are made with the protection function parameters (L parameters): Motor selection function, power loss ridethrough function, stall prevention function, frequency detection, torque limits, and hardware protection.
Motor Overload: L1
User parameters for motor overloads are shown in the following table.
Name
Parameter
Number Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
L1-01
L1-02
L1-03
L1-04
L1-05
Motor
Overload
Protection
Selection
MOL Fault
Select
Sets the motor thermal overload protection (OL1) based on the cooling capacity of the motor.
0: Disabled
1: Standard Fan Cooled
(< 10:1 motor)
2: Standard Blower Cooled
10:1 motor)
3: Vector Motor
( 1000:1 motor)
Motor
Overload
Protection
Time
MOL Time
Const
Sets the motor thermal overload protection (OL1) time. A larger L1-02 time will increase the time before an
OL1 fault will occur.
Motor
Overheat
Alarm
Operation
Selection
Mtr OH
Alarm Sel
Motor
Overheat
Fault
Operation
Selection
Mtr OH
Fault Sel
Sets operation selection when the motor temperature analog input (H3-09 = E) exceeds the
OH3 alarm level (1.17V)
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop
3: Alarm Only
Sets stopping method when the motor temperature analog input
(H3-09 = E) exceeds the OH4 fault level (2.34V).
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop
Motor
Temperatur e Input
Filter Time
Mtr Temp
Filter
This parameter adjusts the filter on the motor temperature analog input (H3-09 = E).
Increase to add stability, decrease to improve response.
0 to 3
0.1
to
5.0
0 to 3
0 to 2
0.00
to
10.00
1
3
1
0.20sec
No
1.0 min No
No
No
No
Q Q
A A
A A
A A
A A
Q
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
480H
481H
482H
483H
484H
User Parameter Tables
Power Loss Ridethrough: L2
User parameters for power loss ridethroughs are shown in the following table.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
L2-01
L2-02
L2-03
L2-04
L2-05
L2-06
Momentary
Power Loss
Detection
Selection
PwrL
Selection
Enables and disables the momentary power loss function.
0: Disabled - Drive trips on
(UV1) fault when power is lost.
1: Power Loss Ride Thru Time
- Drive will restart if power returns within the time set in L2-02.*
2: CPU Power Active - Drive will restart if power returns prior to control power supply shut down.*
* In order for a restart to occur, the run command must be maintained throughout the ride thru period.
Momentary
Power Loss
Ride-thru
Time
Sets the power loss ride-thru time. This value is dependent on the capacity of the drive.
Only effective when L2-01 = 1.
PwrL
Ridethru t
Momentary
Power Loss
Minimum
Base Block
Time
PwrL
Baseblock t
Sets the minimum time to wait to allow the residual motor voltage to decay before the drive output turns back on during power loss ride thru.
After a power loss, if L2-03 is greater than L2-02, operation resumes after the time set in
L2-03.
Momentary
Power Loss
Voltage
Recovery
Ramp Time
Sets the time it takes the output voltage to return to the preset
V/f pattern after speed search
(current detection mode) is complete.
PwrL V/F
Ramp t
Undervoltage
Detection
Level
PUV Det
Level
Sets the drive's DC Bus undervoltage trip level. If this is set lower than the factory setting, additional AC input reactance or DC bus reactance may be necessary. Consult the factory before changing this parameter setting.
KEB
Deceleration
Rate
KEB Decel
Time
Sets the time required to decelerate to zero speed when a
KEB command is input from a multi-function input.
0 to 2
0 to
25.5
0.1
to
5.0
0.0
to
5.0
150 to
210
*2
0.0 to
200.0
0
0.1sec
*1
0.2sec
*1
0.3sec
*1
190 V
*2
0.0sec
No
No
No
No
No
No
A A
A A
A A
A A
A A
A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
MODBUS
Register
485H
486H
487H
488H
489H
48AH
5-
63
5
-64
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
L2-07
L2-08
Momentary
Recovery
Time
UV Return
Time
Set the time (in seconds) to accelerate to the set speed after recovery from a momentary power loss. If setting = 0.0, then active acceleration time is used instead.
Frequency
Reduction
Gain at
KEB Start
KEB
Frequency
Sets the percentage of output frequency reduction at the beginning of deceleration when a KEB command is input from multi-function input.
Reduction =
(SlipFreqBeforeKEB) x L2-08 x 2
0.0 to
25.5
0 to
300
0.0sec
*3
100%
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
48BH
48CH
* 1. Factory settings will vary based on drive capacity (values given here are for 208-240Vac, 0.4kW).
* 2. Setting value for 208-240Vac. Double the value when working with 380-480Vac drives.
* 3. When set to zero, the motor will accelerate to the speed set acceleration time (C1-01 thru C1-08).
Note Attach a Backup Capacitor Unit for Momentary Power Loss if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 200 V/400V
Class Inverters with outputs of 0.4 to 7.5 kW.
Stall Prevention: L3
User parameters for the stall prevention function are shown in the following table.
Name
Parameter
Number Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
L3-01
Stall
Prevention
Selection
During
Accel
StallP
Accel Sel
Selects the stall prevention method used to prevent excessive current during acceleration.
0: Disabled - Motor accelerates at active acceleration rate. The motor may stall if load is too heavy or accel time is too short.
1: General Purpose - When output current exceeds
L3-02 level, acceleration stops. Acceleration will continue when the output current level falls below the
L3-02 level.
2: Intelligent - The active acceleration rate is ignored.
Acceleration is completed in the shortest amount of time without exceeding the current value set in L3-02.
0 to 2 1 No A A A No No 48FH
User Parameter Tables
Parameter
Number
L3-02
L3-03
L3-04
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
Stall
Prevention
Level
During
Acceleration
StallP
Accel Lvl
This function is enabled when
L3-01 is "1" or "2".
Drive rated current is 100%.
Decrease the set value if stalling or excessive current occurs with factory setting.
Stall
Prevention
Limit
During
Acceleration
StallP CHP
Lvl
Sets the lower limit for stall prevention during acceleration, as a percentage of the drive's rated current, when operation is in the frequency range above
E1-06 (constant power region).
Stall
Prevention
Selection
During
Deceleration
StallP
Decel Sel
When using a braking resistor, use setting "0". Setting "3" is used in specific applications.
0: Disabled - The drive decelerates at the active deceleration rate. If the load is too large or the deceleration time is too short, an OV fault may occur.
1: General Purpose - The drive decelerates at the active deceleration rate, but if the main circuit DC bus voltage reaches the stall prevention level (380/760Vdc), deceleration will stop.
Deceleration will continue once the DC bus level drops below the stall prevention level.
2: Intelligent - The active deceleration rate is ignored and the drive decelerates as fast as possible w/o hitting
OV fault level.
Range: C1-02 / 10.
3: Stall Prevention w/ Braking
Resistor - Stall prevention during deceleration is enabled in coordination with dynamic braking.
0 to
200
0 to
100
0 to 3
*1
150%
50%
1
No
No
No
A
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
Q
No No
No No
Q Q
490H
491H
492H
5-
65
5
-66
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
L3-05
L3-06
L3-11
L3-12
Stall
Prevention
Selection
During
Running
StallP Run
Sel
Selects the stall prevention method to use to prevent drive faults during run.
0: Disabled - Drive runs a set frequency. A heavy load may cause the drive to trip on an OC or OL fault.
1: Decel Time 1 - In order to avoid stalling during heavy loading, the drive will decelerate at Decel time 1
(C1-02) if the output current exceeds the level set by
L3-06. Once the current level drops below the L3-06 level, the drive will accelerate back to its frequency reference at the active acceleration rate.
2: Decel Time 2 - Same as setting 1 except the drive decelerates at Decel Time 2
(C1-04).
When output frequency is 6Hz or less, stall prevention during run is disabled regardless of the setting in L3-05.
Stall
Prevention
Level
During
Running
StallP Run
Level
This parameter is enabled when
L3-05 is set to "1" or "2". drive rated current is set as 100%.
Decrease the set value if stalling or excessive current occurs with the factory settings.
OV
Suppression
Function
Selection
OV Inhibit
Sel
Enables or disables OV suppression function, which allows the drive to change the output frequency as the load changes, to prevent an OV fault.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
OV
Suppression
Function
Voltage
Level
OV Inhbt
VoltLvl
Sets the DC bus voltage level at which the OV suppression function is active.
Normally, this setting does not require adjustment. Decrease the value if overvoltage occurs even when OV suppression is enabled.
0 to 2
30 to
200
0 to 1
350 to
390
*2
1
160%
0
380V
*2
No
No
No
No
A
A
No
No
* 1. In Flux Vector or in Open Loop Vector 2, the setting range becomes 0 to 2.
* 2. Values shown here are for 208-240V drives. Double the value when working with 380-480V drives.
A
A
No
No
No No No
No No No
A
A
A
A
A
A
493H
494H
4C7H
4C8H
User Parameter Tables
Reference Detection: L4
User parameters for the reference detection function are shown in the following table.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
L4-01
L4-02
L4-03
L4-04
L4-05
Speed
Agreement
Detection
Level
Spd Agree
Level
Speed
Agreement
Detection
Width
Spd Agree
Width
Speed
Agreement
Detection
Level (+/-)
Spd Agree
Lvl+-
Speed
Agreement
Detection
Width (+/-)
Spd Agree
Wdth+-
Frequency
Reference
Loss
Detection
Selection
Ref Loss
Sel
These parameters configure the multi-function output (H2-oo) settings "Fref/Fout Agree 1",
"Fref/Set Agree 1", "Frequency
Detection 1," and "Frequency detection 2". Parameter L4-01 sets the level while parameter
L4-02 sets the hysteresis for the
Speed Detection Output
Function.
These parameters configure the multi-function output (H2-oo) settings "Fref/Fout Agree 1",
"Fref/Set Agree 1", "Frequency
Detection 1," and "Frequency detection 2". Parameter L4-01 sets the level while parameter
L4-02 sets the hysteresis for the
Speed Detection Output
Function.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 to
20.0
These parameters configure the
Multi-Function Output (H2-oo) settings "Fref/Fout Agree 2",
"Fref/Set Agree 2", "Frequency
Detection 3," or "Frequency
Detection 4". Parameter L4-03 sets the level while parameter
L4-04 sets the hysteresis for the
Speed Detection Output
Function.
-400.0 to
+400.0
These parameters configure the
Multi-Function Output (H2-oo) settings "Fref/Fout Agree 2",
"Fref/Set Agree 2", "Frequency
Detection 3," or "Frequency
Detection 4". Parameter L4-03 sets the level while parameter
L4-04 sets the hysteresis for the
Speed Detection Output
Function.
Determines how the drive will react when the frequency reference is lost. The frequency reference is considered lost when reference drops 90% or more of its current value for
400ms.
0: Stop - Drive will stop.
1: Run at L4-06 PrevRef -
Drive will run at the percentage set in L4-06 of the frequency reference level at the time frequency reference was lost.
0.0 to
20.0
0 to 1
0.0Hz
2.0Hz
0.0Hz
2.0Hz
0
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
MODBUS
Register
499H
49AH
49BH
49CH
49DH
5-
67
5
-68
Parameter
Number
L4-06
L4-07
Name
Display
Frequency
Reference at
Reference
Loss
Fref at
Floss
Torque
Limit
Control
Method
During
Accel/
Decel
Torque
Limit Sel
Description
If the frequency reference loss function is enabled (L4-05=1) and frequency reference is lost, the drive will run at a reduced frequency reference determined by the following formula: Fref = Fref at time of loss * L4-06.
Selects the control method for the torque limit during acceleration and deceleration.
0: Proportional Control
(integral control at fixed speeds)
1: Normal integral control, no need to change settings.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
0.0 to
100.0%
0 to 1
80%
0
No
No
A A A
No No A
A A
No No
4C2H
4C9H
Fault Restart: L5
User parameters for restarting faults are shown in the following table.
Name
Parameter
Number
L5-01
L5-02
Display
Number of
Auto
Restart
Attempts
Num of
Restarts
Auto
Restart
Operation
Selection
Restart Sel
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Sets the counter for the number of times the drive will perform an automatic restart on the following faults: GF, LF, OC,
OV, PF, PUF, RH, RR, OL1,
OL2, OL3, OL4, UV1. Auto restart will check to see if the fault has cleared every 5ms.
When no fault is present, the drive will attempt an auto restart. If the drive faults after an auto restart attempt, the counter is incremented. When the drive operates without fault for 10 minutes, the counter will reset to the value set in L5-01.
0 to 10
Determines if the fault contact activates during an automatic restart attempt.
0: No Fault Relay - fault contact will not activate during an automatic restart attempt.
1: Fault Relay Active - fault contact will activate during an automatic restart attempt.
0 to 1
0
0
No
No
A A
A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
MODBUS
Register
49EH
49FH
User Parameter Tables
Torque Detection: L6
User parameters for the torque detection function are shown in the following table.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
L6-01
Torque
Detection
Selection 1
Torq Det 1
Sel
Determines the drive's response to an Overtorque/
Undertorque condition.
Overtorque and Undertorque are determined by the settings in parameters L6-02 and L6-03. The multi-function output settings "B" and "17" in the H2-oo parameter group are also active if programmed.
0: Disabled
1: OL3 at Speed Agree -
Alarm (Overtorque
Detection only active during Speed Agree and
Operation continues after detection).
2: OL3 at RUN - Alarm
(Overtorque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection).
3: OL3 at Speed Agree - Fault
(Overtorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault).
4: OL3 at RUN - Fault
(Overtorque Detection is always active and drive output will shut down on an
OL3 fault).
5: UL3 at Speed Agree -
Alarm (Undertorque
Detection is only active during Speed Agree and operation continues after detection).
6: UL3 at RUN - Alarm
(Undertorque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection).
7: UL3 at Speed Agree - Fault
(Undertorque Detection only active during Speed
Agree and drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault).
8: UL3 at RUN - Fault
(Undertorque Detection is always active and drive output will shut down on an
OL3 fault).
0 to 8 0 No A A A A A
MODBUS
Register
4A1H
5-
69
5
-70
Parameter
Number
L6-02
L6-03
L6-04
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Torque
Detection
Level 1
Torq Det 1
Lvl
Sets the Overtorque/
Undertorque detection level as a percentage of drive rated current or torque for Torque
Detection 1. Current detection for A1-02 = 0 or 1. Torque detection for A1-02 = 2 or 3.
Torque detection time 1
Torq Det 1
Time
Torque
Detection
Selection 2
Sets the length of time an
Overtorque/Undertorque condition must exist before
Torque Detection 1 is recognized by the drive.
Torq Det 2
Sel
Determines the drive's response to an Overtorque/Undertorque condition. Overtorque and
Undertorque are determined by the settings in parameters L6-
05 and L6-06. The multifunction output settings "18" and "19" in the H2-oo parameter group are also active if programmed.
0: Disabled
1: OL4 at Speed Agree - Alarm
(Overtorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Operation continues after detection).
2: OL4 at RUN - Alarm
(Overtorque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection).
3: OL4 at Speed Agree - Fault
(Overtorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and drive output will shut down on an OL4 fault).
4: OL4 at RUN - Fault
(Overtorque Detection is always active and drive output will shut down on an
OL4 fault).
5: UL4 at Speed Agree - Alarm
(Undertorque Detection is only active during Speed
Agree and operation continues after detection).
6: UL4 at RUN - Alarm
(Undertorque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection).
7: UL4 at Speed Agree - Fault
(Undertorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and drive output will shut down on an OL4 fault).
8: UL4 at RUN - Fault
(Undertorque Detection is always active and drive output will shut down on an
OL4 fault).
0 to
300
0.0 to
10.0
0 to 8
150%
0.1sec
0
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
MODBUS
Register
4A2H
4A3H
4A4H
User Parameter Tables
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
L6-05
L6-06
Torque
Detection
Level 2
Torq Det 2
Lvl
Sets the Overtorque/
Undertorque detection level as a percentage of drive rated current or torque for Torque
Detection 2. Current detection for A1-02 = 0 or 1. Torque detection for A1-02 = 2 or 3.
Torque
Detection
Time 2
Torq Det 2
Time
Sets the length of time an
Overtorque/Undertorque condition must exist before torque detection 2 is recognized by the drive.
0 to
300
0.0 to
10.0
150%
0.1sec
No
No
A A
A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
4A5H
4A6H
Torque Limits: L7
User parameters for torque limits are shown in the following table.
Parameter
Number
L7-01
L7-02
L7-03
L7-04
L7-06
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Forward
Torque
Limit
Torq Limit
Fwd
Reverse
Torque
Limit
Sets the torque limit value as a percentage of the motor rated torque.
Four individual quadrants can be set.
Torq Limit
Rev Output torque
Positive torque
Forward
Regenerative
Torque
Limit
Reverse
Regenerative state
Regenerative state
No. of motor rotations
Forward
Torq Lmt
Fwd Rgn
Negative torque
0 to
300
0 to
300
0 to
300
Reverse
Regenerative
Torque
Limit
Torq Lmt
Rev Rgn
0 to
300
Torque
Limit
Integral
Time
Constant
Torq Det 2
Time
Sets the torque limit value as a percentage of the motor rated torque. Four individual quadrants can be set.
5 to
10000
200%
200%
200%
200%
No
No
No
No
200ms No
No No A
No No A
No No A
No No A
No No A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No No
MODBUS
Register
4A7H
4A8H
4A9H
4AAH
4ACH
5-
71
5
-72
Parameter
Number
L7-07
Name
Torque
Limit
Control
Method
Selection
During
Accel/
Decel
Torq Lmt
Sel
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Selects the method of torque limit controls during accel/decel
0: Proportional Controls (uses integral controls at fixed speeds).
1: Integral Controls
Adjustment is not normally required. With applications that require torque limits during accel/decel, integral controls (setting value = 1) are used when torque controls take precedence. When torque limit is applied to the motor, accel/decel time may increase and motor speed may not run at the indicated speed reference.
0 to 1 0 No No No A No No
MODBUS
Register
4C9H
User Parameter Tables
Hardware Protection: L8
User parameters for hardware protection functions are shown in the following table.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
L8-01
L8-02
L8-03
L8-05
L8-07
L8-09
Internal
Dynamic
Braking
Resistor
Protection
Selection
DB Resistor
Prot
Overheat
Alarm Level
OH Pre-
Alarm Lvl
Overheat
Pre-Alarm
Operation
Selection
OH Pre-
Alarm Sel
Input Phase
Loss
Protection
Selection
Ph Loss In
Sel
Selects the DB protection only when using 3% duty cycle heatsink mount
Yaskawa braking resistor.
This parameter does not enable or disable the DB function of the drive.
0: Not Provided
1: Provided
When the cooling fin temperature exceeds the value set in this parameter, an
Overheat Alarm (OH) will occur.
Selects the drive operation upon an OH pre-alarm detection.
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop
3: Alarm Only
Selects the detection of input current phase loss, power supply voltage imbalance, or main circuit electrostatic capacitor deterioration.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Output Phase
Loss
Protection
Ph Loss Out
Sel
Selects the detection method for output phase loss.
When applied motor capacity is too small for drive capacity, output phase loss may be detected inadvertently. In this case, set to 0.
0: Disabled
1: Single Phase Loss
Detection
2: 2/3-phase Loss Detection
Output
Ground Fault
Detection
Selection
Ground Fault
Sel
Enables and disables the drive's output ground fault detection.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 to 1
50 to
130
*1
0 to 3
0 to 1
0 to 2
0 to 1
0
95 C
*2
3
0
0
1
No
No
No
No
No
No
A A
A A
A A
A A
A A
A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
MODBUS
Register
4ADH
4AEH
4AFH
4B1H
4B3H
4B5H
5-
73
5
-74
Parameter
Number
L8-10
L8-11
L8-12
L8-15
L8-18
L8-22
*7
L8-32
*3
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Heatsink
Cooling Fan
Operation
Selection
Fan On/Off
Sel
Controls the heatsink cooling fan operation.
0: Fan On-Run Mode - Fan will operate only when the drive is running and for
L8-11 seconds after RUN is removed.
1: Fan always on - Cooling fan operates whenever the drive is powered up.
Heatsink
Cooling Fan
Operation
Delay Time
Fan Delay
Time
Ambient
Temperature
Setting
Ambient
Temp
This parameter sets the delay time for the cooling fan turn off after the run command is removed when L8-10 = 0.
When the drive is installed in an ambient temperature exceeding its rating, the drive overload (OL2) protection level is adjusted.
OL2
Characteristic
Selection at
Low Speeds
OL2 Sel @
L-Spd
This parameter assists in protecting the output transistors from overheating when output current is high and output frequency is low
(6Hz and less).
0: Disabled - L8-16 and
L8-17 are disabled.
1: Enabled - L8-16 and
L8-17 are active.
Soft CLA
Selection
Soft CLA Sel
Enables and disables the software current limit function. Consult the factory before disabling.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Neutral point voltage control selection
Vcn Ctrl Sel
Enable or disable neutral point voltage control for the
400 V Class.
Usually, there is no need to change this setting.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
OH1 detection of
Inverter’s cooling fan
OH1 Detect
Sel
0: Disabled (FAN minor fault detection)
1: Enabled (OH1 major fault detection)
0 to 1
0 to
300
45 to
60
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0
60sec
45 C
1
1
1
1
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
MODBUS
Register
4B6H
4B7H
4B8H
4BBH
4BFH
4C3H
4E2H
User Parameter Tables
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
L8-38
*4
L8-39
*4
Carrier frequency reduction selection
Prtct@L-Spd
Reduced carrier frequency
L-Spd
Carrier F
0: Disabled (No carrier frequency reduction.)
1: Enabled (Carrier frequency is reduced accordingly.)
Sets the reduced carrier frequency.
0 or 1
0, 4 to
2.0
*6
1
*5
2.0 kHz
*2 *5
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
No
No
No
4EFH
4F0H
L8-41
*4
Current alarm Allows or restricts an alarm from being triggered when the relative output current rises above 150%.
HC Alarm
Sel
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled (alarm will be output).
0 or 1 0 No A A A A A 4F2H
* 1. The setting range depends on the setting of L8-32.
L8-32 = 1: 50°C to 130°C
L8-32 = 0: 50°C to 104°C
* 2. Factory settings will vary based on drive capacity.
* 3. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1038 and later.
* 4. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1039 and later
* 5. If a current exceeding 110% of the Inverter rated current flows through the unit, the carrier frequency will automatically decrease and electromagnetic noise will occur.
* 6. The lower limits are 0.4 kHz for V/f control and 1.0 kHz for flux vector control. The upper limit is the same value as that of the factory setting for L8-
39.
* 7. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1043 and later.
5-
75
5
-76
n: Special Adjustments
The following settings are made with the special adjustments parameters (n parameters): Hunting prevention and speed feedback detection control.
Hunting Prevention Function: n1
User parameters for hunting prevention are shown in the following table.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 n1-01
Hunting
Prevention
Selection
Hunt Prev
Select
Hunting
Prevention
Gain Setting
If the motor vibrates while lightly loaded, hunting prevention may reduce the vibration.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Sets the gain for the Hunting
Prevention Function.
- If the motor vibrates while lightly loaded and n1-01=1, increase the gain by 0.1 until vibration ceases.
0 to 1 1 No A A No No n1-02
0.00 to
2.50
1.00
No A A No No
Hunt Prev
Gain
- If the motor stalls while n1-01=1, decrease the gain by 0.1 until the stalling ceases.
n1-03
*1
Hunting-prevention time constant
Set the hunting-prevention primary delay time in units of ms.
0 to
500
10 ms
*2
No A A
Hunt Prev
Time
* 1. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software version PRG 1034 and later.
* 2. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
No No
No
No
No
MODBUS
Register
580H
581H
582H
User Parameter Tables
Speed Feedback Protection Control Functions: n2
User parameters for speed feedback protection control functions are shown in the following table.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register n2-01
Speed
Feedback
Detection
Control
(AFR) Gain
AFR Gain
Sets the internal speed feedback detection control gain in the automatic frequency regulator (AFR).
Normally, there is no need to change this setting. Adjust this parameter as follows:
- If hunting occurs, increase the set value.
- If response is low, decrease the set value.
Adjust the setting by 0.05 units at a time, while checking the response.
0.00 to
10.00
1.00
No No No A No No 584H n2-02 n2-03
Speed
Feedback
Detection
Control
(AFR) Time
Constant
AFR Time
Speed
Feedback
Detection
Control
(AFR) Time
Constant 2
AFR Time 2
Sets the time constant to control the rate of change in the speed feedback detection control.
Sets the time constant to control the amount of change in the speed at low speed.
0 to
2000
0 to
2000
50ms
750ms
No
No
No No
No No
A
A
No No
No No
585H
586H
High-slip Braking: n3
User parameters for high-slip braking are shown in the following table.
Name
Parameter
Number Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 n3-01 n3-02
High Slip
Braking
Deceleration
Frequency
Width
HSB Down
Freq
Sets how aggressively the drive decreases the output frequency as it stops the motor using high slip braking
(HSB). If Overvoltage (OV) faults occur during HSB, this parameter may need to be increased.
High Slip
Braking
Current Limit
HSB Current
Sets the maximum current to be drawn during an HSB stop.
Higher n3-02 settings will shorten motor stopping times but cause increased motor current, and therefore increased motor heating.
1 to 20
100 to
200
5%
150%
No
No
A
A
A
A
No No No
No No No
MODBUS
Register
588H
589H
5-
77
5
-78
Parameter
Number n3-03 n3-04
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
High Slip
Braking
Dwell Time at Stop
HSB Dwell
Time
High Slip
Braking
Overload
Time
HSB OL
Time
Sets the amount of time the drive will dwell at E1-09
(Minimum Frequency) at the end of deceleration. If this time is set too low, the machine inertia can cause the motor to rotate slightly after the HSB stop is complete and the drive output is shut off.
Sets the time required for an
HSB overload fault (OL7) to occur when the drive output frequency does not change for some reason during an HSB stop. Normally this does not need to be adjusted.
0.0 to
10.0
30 to
1200
1.0sec
40sec
No
No
A A
A A
No No No
No No No
MODBUS
Register
58AH
58BH
Speed Estimation: n4
User parameters for speed estimation are shown in the following table.
Parameter
Number n4-07 n4-08 n4-10 n4-11 n4-15
Name
Display
Description
Observer
Integral Time Set the integral time of the speed estimator for PI
SPD EST I control.
Time
Observer
Proportional
Gain
SPD EST P
GAIN
High-speed
Observer
Proportional
Gain
OBS Gain H-
SPD
Observer
Switching
Frequency
Speed
Change F
Lo-Speed +
Regen
Stability
Coefficient
PH Comp
Lim Gain
Set the proportional gain of the speed estimator for PI control.
Sets the P-gain on the hispeed side of the Observer (PI
Controls). Operates at the same proportional gain as n4-07 when set to zero.
0.0
to
1000.0
Sets the switching frequency for the high and low speed
Observer.
Use a large setting if load tolerance needs to be increased during low-speed regeneration. If the setting is too high, then torque command monitor and the actual torque system will be weakened.
0 to
1000
40 to
70
0.0
to
3.0
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
0.000 to
9.999
0.030 ms
0.030
ms
No No No No No A
15
15
70Hz
0.3
No
No
No
No
No No No No
No No No No
No No No No
No No No No
A
A
A
A
MODBUS
Register
59AH
59BH
59DH
59EH
5A2H
User Parameter Tables
Parameter
Number n4-17 n4-18 n4-28 n4-29 n4-30 n4-32 n4-33 n4-34
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Observer
Gain
Modulation
Frequency
SpdEst Gain
Frq1
Observer
Gain
Modulation
Frequency 2
SpdEst Gain
Frq2
Observer
Gain
Modulation
Rate
SpdEst Gain
Rate
Torque
Adjustment
Gain
TRQ adjust gain
Sets the torque adjustment gain for low-speed power.
Gain for
Feeder
Resistance
Adjustment
Feeder R gain
Sets the gain for the feeder resistance in the speed estimator.
Observer
Switching
Frequency 2
Speed
Change F 2
Sets the frequency at which the Observer switches between high and low speeds during deceleration.
Torque
Adjustment
Gain 2
TRQ adjust gain2
Slowly increase the setting value when load tolerance rises at low speeds. If set too high, the load tolerance will be reduced.
Note: Adjustment is not normally required.
Low Speed +
Regen
Stability
Coefficient 2
LowSpd Rgn
Coef2
Set to a larger value to stabilize the motor when running at extremely low speeds and/or regen. When the setting is increased, the motor will accelerate as the regen load increases. When tuning, adjust in units as large as 0.2.
Set the lower limit of the Pgain modulation frequency on the low-speed side of the
Observer (PI Controls) in
Hertz.
Set the upper limit of the
P-gain modulation frequency on the low-speed side of the
Observer (PI Controls) in
Hertz.
Sets the percentage of modulation allowed for
P-gain on the low-speed side of the Observer (PI Controls).
0.0 to
5.0
0.90
to
1.30
20 to
70
Hz
0.00
to
0.40
0.00
to
10.00
0.0
to
60.0
Hz
0.0
to
60.0
Hz
1.0
1.00
50Hz
0.10
1.00
5.0Hz
20.0Hz
50.0
to
100.0%
100.0%
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No No No
No No No
No No No
No No No
No No No
No No No
No No No
No No No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
MODBUS
Register
5A4H
5A5H
5AFH
5B4H
5B5H
5B7H
5B8H
5B9H
5-
79
5
-80
Parameter
Number n4-35 n4-39 n4-40 n4-43
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
U1-48 Gain
Reduction
Coefficient
U1-48
Reduce Gain
Setting this parameter to a low value can improve operation when acceleration during low speeds or regeneration needs to be suppress. Be sure to keep this setting high enough to avoid causing a CF error.
Flux Level at
Low
Frequency
Flux Lvl
@LowFrq
Set this parameter to a small value if the torque value is relatively high compared to the actual load that has been set. Used during low speed operation. (The magnitude of the rated flux level as 100% )
Current
Stability
Coefficient at
Low Speed
I Stabilize
Gain
Reduce this setting if the motor oscillates when stopped with torque reference at zero. Do not adjust this setting more than is necessary, verify the results as changes are made.
Speed
Estimation
Compensation
Gain
SpdEst Comp
Gain
Adjust this parameter to improve accuracy of speed estimation under these conditions.
1. Drive in torque control
mode.
2. Speed control is set to
d5-07.
3. Set b1-10=0
4. Make the following adjustment:
Increase the value when attempting to estimate the speed of the motor.
0.50
to
1.50
50 to
150%
0.01
to
1.00
0.00
to
2.00
1
90%
0.5
0
No
No
No
No
No No No No
No No No No
No No No No
No No No No
A
A
A
A
MODBUS
Register
5BAH
5BEH
5BFH
5C2H
Caution: The motor may have difficulty stopping with small friction loads. (even if the torque reference is set to zero).
User Parameter Tables
Feed Forward: n5
User parameters for the feed forward control are shown in the following table.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register n5-01 n5-02
Feed Forward
Control
Selection
Feedfoward
Sel
Motor
Acceleration
Time
Motor Accel
Time
Selects the feed forward controls.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Sets the time required to accelerate the motor at the rated torque (T100) to the rated speed (Nr).
J: (GO^2) / 4
P: Motor rated output
0 or 1
0.000 to
10.000
0
*1
0.178 s
*2
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
5B0H
5B1H n5-03
Feedfoward
Gain
Feedfoward
Gain
Sets the proportional gain for feed forward controls.
Response to the speed reference will increase as the setting of n5-03 is increased.
0.00 to
100.00
1.0
No No No No A A 5B2H
* 1. Initial values differ based on the control mode (when operating in Vector Mode w/PG, the initial value is set to zero (disabled), and in Vector 2 wo/PG the initial value is 1, or "enabled").
* 2. Factory settings will vary based on drive capacity (values given here are for 208-240Vac, 0.4kW).
5-
81
5
-82
Digital Operator Parameters: o
The following settings are made with the Digital Operator parameters (o parameters): Multi-function selections and the copy function.Monitor Select: o1
User parameters for Digital Operator Displays are shown in the following table.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register o1-01 o1-02
User Monitor
Selection
User Monitor
Sel
Selects which monitor will be displayed in the operation menu upon power-up when o1-02 = 4.
4 to 48
4 to 99
User Monitor
Selection
After
Power-Up
Power-On
Monitor
Digital
Operator
Display
Selection
Selects which monitor will be displayed upon power-up.
1: Frequency Reference
(U1-01)
2: Output Frequency
(U1-02)
3: Output Current (U1-03)
4: User Monitor
(set by o1-01)
Sets the units of the
Frequency References (d1-01 to d1-17), the Frequency
Reference Monitors
(U1-01, U1-02, U1-05), and the Modbus communication frequency reference.
0: Hz
1 to 4
6
1
Yes
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
500H
501H
1: % (100% = E1-04) o1-03
Display
Scaling to number of motor
39: poles).
to Set the number
39999:desired at maximum output frequency. 4 digit number. Number of digits from the right of the decimal point.
0 to
39999
Example 1: o1-03 = 12000, will result in frequency reference from 0.0 to 200.0
(200.0 = Fmax).
Example 2: o1-03 = 21234, will result in frequency reference from 0.00 to 12.34
(12.34 = Fmax).
0 No A A A A A 502H
User Parameter Tables
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register o1-04 o1-05
Setting unit for frequency parameters related to V/F characteristics
V/f Display
Unit
LCD
Brightness
Adjustment
LCD Contrast
Sets the setting units related to V/F pattern frequency related parameters
(E1-04, -06, -09, -11)
0: Hertz
1: RPM
Sets the contrast of the
Digital Operator LCD. A setting of "1" is the lightest contrast and a setting of "5" is the darkest contrast.
0 or 1
0 to 5
0
3
No
Yes
No No No
A A A
A
A
A
A
503H
504H
Multi-function Selections: o2
User parameters for Digital Operator key functions are shown in the following table.
Name
Parameter
Number Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register o2-01 o2-02 o2-03
Local/
Remote Key
Function
Selection
Local/
Remote Key
Determines if the Digital
Operator Local/Remote key is functional.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
STOP Key
Function
Selection
Oper STOP
Key
Determines if the STOP key on the Digital Operator will stop the drive when drive is operating from external terminals or serial communication.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
User
Parameter
Default Value
User Defaults
Allows storing of parameter settings as a User
Initialization
Selection.
0: No Change
1: Set Defaults - Saves current parameter
settings as user
initialization. A1-03 now allows selecting <1110> for user initialization and returns o2-03 to zero.
2: Clear All - Clears the currently saved user initialization. A1-03 no longer allows selecting
<1110> and returns o2-03 to zero.
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 2
1
1
0
No
No
No
A A
A A
A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
505H
506H
507H
5-
83
5
-84
Parameter
Number o2-04 o2-05 o2-06 o2-07 o2-08 o2-10
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Drive/kVA
Selection
Drive Model
#
Frequency
Reference
Setting
Method
Selection
Operator
M.O.P.
Operation
Selection when Digital
Operator is
Disconnected
Oper
Detection
Sets the kVA of the drive.
Enter the number based on drive model number. Use the last four digits of the model number. CIMR-G7Uxxxx.
This parameter only needs to be set when installing a new control board. Do not change for any other reason. Refer to
Table B.1.
0 to FF
Determines if the Data/Enter key must be used to input a frequency reference from the
Digital Operator.
0: Disabled - Data/Enter key must be pressed to enter a frequency reference.
1: Enabled - Data/Enter key is not required. The frequency reference is adjusted by the up and down arrow keys on the Digital Operator without having to press the data/enter key.
Determines if the drive will stop when the Digital
Operator is removed when in
LOCAL mode or b1-02=0.
0: Disabled - The drive will not stop when the Digital
Operator is removed.
1: Enabled - The drive will fault (OPR) and coast to stop when the Digital
Operator is removed.
0 to 1
0 to 1
Cumulative
Operation
Time Setting
Elapsed Time
Set
Sets the initial value of the elapsed operation timer
U1-13.
Cumulative
Operation
Time
Selection
Elapsed Time
Run
Sets how time is accumulated for the elapsed operation timer U1-13.
0: Power-On Time - Time accumulates when the drive is powered.
1: Running Time - Time accumulates only when the drive is running.
Cumulative
Cooling Fan
Operation
Time Setting
Fan ON Time
Set
Sets the initial value of the heatsink fan operation time monitor U1-40.
0 to
65535
0 to 1
0 to
65535
0
*1
0
0
0 hr
0
0 hr
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
MODBUS
Register
508H
509H
50AH
50BH
50CH
50EH
User Parameter Tables
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 o2-12 o2-14 o2-18
*2
Fault Trace/
Fault History
Clear
Function
Fault Trace
Init kWh User
Monitor
Initialization kWH
MonitorClear
Capacitor maintenance setting
C MaintenanceSet
Clears the fault memory contained in the U2 and U3 monitors.
0: Disabled - no effect
1: Enabled - resets U2 and
U3 monitors, and returns o2-12 to zero.
Used to reset the kilowatthour monitor U1-29 to zero.
0: Disabled - no change
1: Enabled - Resets U1-29 to zero and returns o2-14 to zero.
Allows the user to set the maintenance time for the electrolytic capacitors (U1-
61). The user can reset the accumulated operation time back to zero, or to some other desired value.
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to
150
0
0
0%
No
No
No
A
A
A
* 1. Factory settings will vary based on drive capacity (values given here are for 208-240Vac, 0.4kW).
* 2. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1039 and later.
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
MODBUS
Register
510H
512H
51DH
Copy Function: o3
User parameters for the copy function are shown in the following table.
Name
Parameter
Number Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 o3-01
Copy
Function
Selection
Copy
Function Sel
This parameter controls the copying of parameters to and from the Digital Operator.
0: COPY SELECT (no function)
1: INV --> OP READ - All parameters are copied from the drive to the
Digital Operator.
2: OP --> INV WRITE - All parameters are copied from the Digital Operator to the drive.
3: OP<-->INV VERIFY -
Parameter settings in the drive are compared to those in the Digital
Operator.
Note:When using the copy function, the drive model number (o2-04), software number
(U1-14), and control method (A1-02) must match or an error will occur.
0 to 3 0 No A A A A A
MODBUS
Register
515H
5-
85
5
-86
Name
Parameter
Number Display
Copy
Allowed
Selection o3-02
Copy
Allowable
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
Enables and disables the
Digital Operator copy functions.
0: Disabled - No Digital
Operator copy functions are allowed.
1: Enabled - Copying allowed.
0 to 1 0 No A A A A A 516H
User Parameter Tables
T: Motor Autotuning
The following settings are made with the motor autotuning parameters (T parameters): Settings for autotuning.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
T1-00
T1-01
T1-02
T1-03
T1-04
T1-05
T1-06
Motor
Selection 1/2
Select Motor
Auto-Tuning
Mode
Selection
Tuning Mode
Sel
Motor Rated
Power
Mtr Rated
Power
Selects which set of motor parameters are to be used and set during Auto-Tuning.
If Motor 2 selection
(H1-xx=16) is not selected, this parameter will not be displayed.
1: 1st Motor - E1 to E2
2: 2nd Motor - E3 to E4
Selects the Auto-Tuning mode.
0: Rotational Auto-Tuning
(A1-02 = 2 or 3)
1: Stationary Auto-Tuning
(A1-02 = 2 or 3)
2: Terminal resistance only,
(stationary) Auto-Tuning
(A1-02 = 0, 1, 2, or 3)
3: Auto-tuning for the amount of On-Delay
Compensation (open loop vector 2 and flux vector modes are enabled).
*6
4: Stationary autotuning 2
*9
Sets the motor rated power in kilowatts (kW).
Note: If motor power is given in horsepower, power in kW can be calculated using the following formula: kW = Hp X 0.746
Motor Rated
Voltage
Rated Voltage
Sets the motor rated voltage in Volts (V).
1 to 2
0 to 2
*1
0.00 to
650.00
0 to
255.0
*2
0.32 to
6.40
*4
Motor Rated
Current
Rated Current
Sets the motor rated current in
Amperes (A).
Motor Base
Frequency
Rated
Frequency
Number of
Motor Poles
Number of
Poles
Sets the base frequency of the motor in Hertz (Hz).
Sets the number of motor poles.
0 to
400.0
*5
2 to 48 poles
1
0
0.40 kW
200.0 V
*2
1.90 A
*3
60.00H
z
4 poles
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
No No Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
No No Yes Yes Yes
No No Yes Yes Yes
700H
701H
702H
703H
704H
705H
706H
5-
87
5
-88
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
T1-07
Motor Base
Speed
Rated Speed
Sets the base speed of the motor in revolutions per minute (RPM).
0 to
24000
1750 min
1
No No No Yes Yes Yes 707H
T1-08
T1-09
*7
Number of
PG Pulses
PG Pulses/
Rev
Motor noload current
No-Load
Current
Sets the number of pulses per revolution (PPR) for the encoder (pulse generator) being used without any multiplication factor.
0 to
60000
Set the current value recorded in the motor’s test results for a motor without a load.
Displayed only when Stationary autotuning 2 is selected
(T1-01 = 4).
0.00 to
1.89
*8
600
1.20A
*3
No
No
No Yes
No No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
708H
709H
* 1. Set T1-02 and T1-04 when 2 is set for T1-01. Only set value 2 is possible for V/f control or V/f control with PG.
* 2. Setting value for 208-240Vac. Double the value when working with 380-480Vac drives.
* 3. Factory settings will vary based on drive capacity (values given here are for 208-240Vac, 0.4kW).
* 4. Setting range is 10% to 200% of the drive's rated output current (values given here are for 208-240Vac, 0.4kW).
* 5. The upper setting limit will be 150.0Hz when C6-01 is set to 0.
* 6. Use this type of auto-tuning only if having problems with precision when tuning.
* 7. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1039 and later.
* 8. The setting range depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 208-240Vac 0.4 kW Inverter is given. The upper limit depends on the setting of E2-01.
* 9. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1039 and later.
User Parameter Tables
U: Monitor Parameters
The following settings are made with the monitor parameters (U parameters): Setting parameters for monitoring in drive mode.
Status Monitor Parameters: U1
The parameters used for monitoring status are listed in the following table.
Parameter
Number
U1-01
U1-02
U1-03
U1-04
U1-05
U1-06
U1-07
U1-08
Name
Display
Description
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
Min.
Unit
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Output
Voltage
Output
Voltage
DC bus
Voltage
DC Bus
Voltage
Output
Power
Output kWatts
Frequency
Reference
Frequency
Ref
Frequency reference
(speed command) monitor when in REMOTE mode, frequency reference (speed command) setting location when in local mode or b1-01 = 0.
10V: Maximum Frequency
(possible for -10V thru +10V)
Output
Frequency
Output Freq
Output
Current
Output
Current
Output frequency.
Output current
Control
Method
Control
Method
Control method set in
A1-02.
0 = V/F without PG
1 = V/F with PG
2 = Open Loop Vector
3 = Flux Vector
4 = Open Loop Vector 2
Motor Speed
Motor Speed
Motor speed feedback
10V: Maximum Frequency
(possible for -10V thru +10V)
10V: Drive Rated Output Current
(output of absolute value of
0V thru +10V possible)
No output possible.
10V: Maximum Frequency
(possible for -10V thru +10V)
0.01
Hz
*
*
-
1
0.01
Hz
1
0.1 A
*
2
0.01
Hz
*
1
Output voltage
DC Bus Voltage
Output power
10V: AC200V (AC400V)
(output of 0V thru +10V)
10V: DC400V (DC800V)
(output of 0V thru +10V)
10V: Drive Capacity in kW
(Largest Application Motor
Capacity)
(possible for -10V thru +10V)
0.1 V
1 V
0.1 kW
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
MODBUS
Register
40H
41H
42H
43H
44H
45H
46H
47H
5-
89
5
-90
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
Min.
Unit
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
U1-09
Torque
Reference
Torque
Reference
Torque reference
10V: Motor Rated Torque
(possible for -10V thru +10V)
0.1% No No A A A 48H
* 1. The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor).
* 2. The unit differs according to the Inverter capacity. (The unit is 0.01 A for an Inverter capacity of 0.4 to 7.5 kW, and 0.1 A for an Inverter capacity of
11 kW and larger.)
Name
Parameter
Number Display
Description
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
Min.
Unit
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
U1-10
Input Terminal
Status
Input Term Sts
Input terminal status.
U1-10= 00000000
1: FWD command
(S1) is ON.
1: REV command
(S2) is ON.
1: Multi input 1
(S3) is ON.
1: Multi input 2
(S4) is ON.
1: Multi input 3
(S5) is ON.
1: Multi input 4
(S6) is ON.
1: Multi input 5
(S7) is ON.
1:Multi input 6
(S8) is ON.
No output possible.
A A A A A 49H
U1-11
Output
Terminal Status
Output terminal status.
Output Term Sts
U1-11= 00000000
1: Multi-function
contact output 1
(M1-M2) is ON.
1: Multi-funtion
contact output 2
(P1) is ON.
1: Multi-funtion
contact output 3
(P2) is ON.
Not used (always 0).
1: Error output
(MA/AB-MC) is ON.
No output possible.
A A A A A 4AH
User Parameter Tables
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
Min.
Unit
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
U1-12
Drive Operation
Status
Int Ctl Sts 1
Input terminal status..
U1-12= 00000000
1: Run
1: Zero speed
1: Reverse
1: Reset signal input
1: Speed agree
1: Inverter ready
1: Minor fault
No output possible.
A A A A A 4BH
1: Major fault
U1-13
U1-14
U1-15
U1-16
U1-17
U1-18
U1-19
U1-20
U1-21
U1-22
Cumulative
Operation Time Total operating or power-on time of the drive.
Elapsed Time
Software
Number
FLASH ID
Last 5 digits of the drive's software number.
Terminal A1
Input Voltage
Term A1 Level
Terminal A2
Input Voltage
Term A2 Level
Input voltage on Terminal A1, as a percentage of ±10Vdc.
Displays the input current (or voltage) on Terminal A2, as a percentage of ±10Vdc.
Terminal A3
Input Voltage
Term 16 Level
Motor
Secondary
Current (Iq)
Mot SEC
Current
Input voltage on Terminal A3, as a percentage of ±10Vdc.
Current being used by the motor to produce torque (Iq).
Motor
Excitation
Current (Id)
Mot EXC
Current
Current being used by the motor for excitation (Id).
Output
Frequency After
Soft Start
Frequency reference (speed command) after the accel and decel ramps and S-curve.
SFS Output
ASR Input
ASR Input
Input error to the speed control loop (ASR).
The maximum output frequency
E1-04 corresponds to 100%.
ASR Output
ASR Output
Output from the speed control loop (ASR).
The motor rated secondary current corresponds to 100%.
No output possible.
No output possible.
10V: 100% (when input is
10V)
(possible for -10V thru +10V)
10V: 100% (when input is
10V)
(possible for -10V thru +10V)
10V: 100% (when input is
10V)
(possible for -10V thru +10V)
10V: Motor Rated
Secondary Current
(possible for -10V thru +10V)
10V: Motor Rated
Secondary Current
(possible for -10V thru
+10V)
10V: Maximum Frequency
(possible for -10V thru +10V)
10V: Maximum Frequency
(possible for -10V thru +10V)
10V: Motor Rated
Secondary Current
(possible for -10V thru +10V)
1 hr
-
0.1%
0.01
Hz
0.01
%
0.01
%
A
A
N o
A
N o
N o
A
A
0.1% A A
0.1% A A
0.1% A A
0.1% A A
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
4CH
4DH
4EH
4FH
050H
51H
52H
53H
54H
55H
5-
91
5
-92
Parameter
Number
U1-24
U1-25
U1-26
U1-27
U1-28
U1-29
Name
Display
Description
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
Min.
Unit
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
PI Feedback
Value
PID Feedback
DI-16H2 Input
Status
DI-16
Reference
Feedback signal level when PID control is used.
Reference value from a DI-
16H2 Digital Reference Card.
The value will be displayed in binary or BCD depending on user constant F3-01.
Output Voltage
Reference (Vq)
Voltage Ref
(Vq)
Output Voltage
Reference (Vd)
Voltage Ref
(Vd)
CPU Number
CPU ID kWh kWh Lower 4 dig
MWh
Internal voltage reference for motor secondary current control.
Internal voltage reference for motor excitation current control.
Control board hardware revision.
Accumulated kilowatt-hours.
Accumulated megawatt-hours.
The display is split into upper digits and lower digits in the following way.
10V: Maximum Frequency
(possible for -10V thru
+10V)
No output possible.
10V: AC200V (AC400)
(possible for -10V thru
+10V)
10V: AC200V (AC400)
(possible for -10V thru
+10V)
No output possible.
No output possible.
0.01
%
-
0.1 V
0.1 V
-
0.1
KWH
A A
A A
N o
N o
No
No
A A
A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
57H
58H
59H
5AH
5BH
5CH
U1-30
U1-32
U1-33
U1-34
U1-35
U1-36 kWh Upper 5 dig
U1-30
.
kWH
U1-29
Example: If the output power is
12345678.9 kWh, the display will be as follows:
U1-29: 678.9 kWH
U1-30: 12345 MWH
Range: 0.0 to 32767999.9
No output possible.
ACR Output of q Axis
ACR(q) Output
ACR Output of d Axis
ACR(d) Output
First Parameter
Causing an
OPE
OPE Detected
Zero Servo
Pulse Count
Zero Servo
Pulse
PID Input
Current control output value for the motor secondary current.
Current control output value for the motor excitation current.
Parameter number causing an
"OPE" fault.
Number of PG pulses times 4 for the movement range when stopped at zero servo.
10V: 100%
(possible for -10V thru
+10V)
10V: 100%
(possible for -10V thru
+10V)
No output possible.
PID Input
Input error to the PID regulator
(PID Setpoint - PID Feedback).
10V: Maximum Frequency
(possible for -10V thru
+10V)
MW
H
0.1
%
0.1
%
-
1
0.01
%
A A
N o
N o
N o
No
No
A A
No No
A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
5DH
5FH
60H
61H
62H
63H
User Parameter Tables
Parameter
Number
U1-37
U1-38
U1-39
U1-40
U1-42
U1-43
U1-44
U1-45
U1-48
Name
Display
Description
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
Min.
Unit
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
PID Output
PID Output
Motor Flux
Calculation
Values
Mot Flux EST
Output of the PID regulator as a percentage of maximum frequency (E1-04).
PID Setpoint
PID Setpoint
Setpoint of the PID regulator
(PID reference + PID bias).
Modbus
Communication Error
Code
Transmit Err
Modbus serial communication error codes.
U1-40= 00000000
1: CRC error
1: Data length error
Not used (always 0).
1: Parity error
1: Overrun
error
1: Framing
error
1: Timeout
Not used (always 0).
Heatsink
Cooling Fan
Operation Time Total operating time of the heatsink cooling fan.
FAN Elapsed
Time
Monitors the calculated motor flux.
Motor Flux
Current
Compensa-tion
Id Comp Value
ASR Output without Filter
Shows 100% when the motor rated secondary current monitor for motor flux current compensation is active.
ASR Output w
Fil
Feed Forward
Control Output
FF Cout Output
Output from the speed control loop (ASR) before the ASR primary delay filter (C5-06).
100% is displayed for rated secondary current of the motor.
Output from feed forward control. 100% is displayed for rated secondary current of the motor.
Stable speed for regeneration
StableSpd
@Regen
Monitors the minimum speed for which the speed will not exceed the speed reference in a steady state during 100% load regeneration.
10V: Maximum Frequency
(possible for -10V thru
+10V)
10V: Maximum
Frequency
No output possible.
No output possible.
10V: Monitor rated flux.
10V: Motor Rated
Secondary Current
(0V to ±10V)
10V: Motor Rated
Secondary Current
(0V to ±10V)
10V: Motor Rated
Secondary Current
(0V to ±10V)
0.00 to 20.00
0.01
%
0.01
%
-
1 hr
0.1%
0.1%
0.01
%
0.01
%
0.01
Hz
A A
A A
A A
A A
N o
N o
N o
N o
N o
A
A
A
A
No No
No No
A
A
A
A
No No No
No No No
A
A
No No No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
64H
65H
66H
68H
69H
6AH
6BH
6CH
6FH
5-
93
5
-94
Parameter
Number
U1-50
U1-61
*3
U1-63
*3
U1-83
*3
U1-84
*3
U1-85
*4
U1-86
*4
Name
Display
Description
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
Min.
Unit
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
CF Fault Error
Code
CF Error Code
Electrolytic capacitor maintenance
C Maintenance-
Fan
Cooling fan maintenance
Maintenance
Displays the code for a CF fault:
00: No deceleration for 3sec after reaching the stop frequency.
01: Flux estimation fault.
02: Start status error.
04: Observer gain adjustment error.
08: Regeneration error at low speeds.
10: Zero Speed error.
20: Rotational Direction Limit error.
80: Vector control status error
For maintenance purposes, this timer shows the amount of time the electrolytic capacitors have been operating. Capacitors should be replaced when the monitor reaches 100%.
This monitor displays the amount of time the cooling fan has been operating. Replace the cooling fan when the display reads 100%.
Setting Range
(0 thru FFFFFH)
(Cannot be output.)
(Cannot be output.)
Displays the peak value of the current during run. “Peak Hold” refers to the moment that the peak value is saved.
10V: Inverter rated output
current
(-10 to 10 V absolute value output)
Peak hold current
Current Peak-
Hold
Output frequency during peak hold
Freq@ I Peak-
Hold
Frequency reference source selection
Reference
Source
Run
Command source selection
Run
Cmd Source
Displays the frequency value when the output current reached its peak value.
Displays where the frequency reference source currently is.
(Refer to page 5-95 for details
on the setting.)
Displays where the Run Command source currently is.
(Refer to page 5-95 for details
on the setting.)
10V: Max frequency
(-10 to 10 V)
(Cannot be output.)
(Cannot be output.)
-
1%
1%
0.01
A
*1
0.01
Hz
*2
–
–
N o
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
71H
7CH
7EH
A 7CFH
A 7DOH
A 7DAH
A 7DDH
* 1. The minimum unit differs depending on the Inverter capacity. (0.01 A for Inverter of 0.4 kW to 7.5 kW, and 0.1 A for Inverter of 11 kW or more)
* 2. The setting unit can be selected in o1-03.
* 3. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1039 and later.
* 4. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1041 and later.
User Parameter Tables
Details on U1-85 and U1-86 Settings
U1-85 = Y-nn
Y-nn
0-01
1-01
1-02
1-03
2-02 to 2-17
3-01
4-01
5-01
6-01
Table 5.1 Frequency Reference Source
Description
LED/LCD Digital Operator
Analog input terminal (A1 terminal)
Analog input terminal (A2 terminal)
Analog input terminal (A3 terminal)
Multi-step speed reference (d1-02 to d1-17)
MEMOBUS communications
Option board
Pulse reference input
CASE
U1-86 = Y-nn
1
3
Y
0
4
6
Table 5.2 Run Command Source
Description
LED/LCD Digital Operator
Control circuit terminal (sequence input)
MEMOBUS communications
Option board
CASE
03
04
05
06 nn
00
01
02
07
08
09
Table 5.3 Run Command Restrictions
Description
Not restricted.
Run Command turned ON while stopped in a programming mode.
Run Command turned ON after switching from LOCAL to REMOTE.
Waiting for MCON after the power supply was turned ON (UV1 or UV will flash after 10 seconds).
Restarting is prohibited after stopping.
Emergency stop (multi-function contact input or Digital Operator (LED/LCD))
Not used
Restarting is prohibited after coasting to stop with timer.
Baseblock because frequency reference is less than E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency).
Waiting for ENTER command.
5-
95
5
-96
Fault Trace: U2
User parameters for error tracing are shown in the following table.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Output Signal
Level During
Multi-Function
Analog Output
U2-01
U2-02
U2-03
U2-04
U2-05
U2-06
U2-07
U2-08
U2-09
Current Fault
Current Fault
Previous
Fault
Last Fault
Description of current fault.
Desscription of most recent fault.
Frequency
Reference at
Previous
Fault
Frequency
Ref
Gives the frequency reference at the most recent fault.
Output
Frequency at
Previous
Fault
Output Freq
Shows the output frequency at the most recent fault.
Output
Current at
Previous
Fault
Output
Current
Gives the output current at the most recent fault.
Motor Speed at Previous
Fault
Motor Speed
Shows the motor speed at the most recent fault.
Output
Voltage at
Previous
Fault
Output
Voltage
DC Bus
Voltage at
Previous
Fault
DC Bus
Voltage
Gives the output voltage at the most recent fault.
Shows the DC BUS voltage at the most recent fault.
Output Power at Previous
Fault
Gives the output power at the most recent fault.
Output kWatts
No output possible.
Min.
Unit
-
-
0.01
Hz
0.01
Hz
0.1 A A A
0.01
Hz
No A
0.1 V A A
1 V
0.1 kW
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A A
A A
A A
A A
A A
A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
MODBUS
Register
80H
81H
82H
83H
84H
85H
86H
87H
88H
User Parameter Tables
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Output Signal
Level During
Multi-Function
Analog Output
Min.
Unit
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
U2-10
U2-11
U2-12
U2-13
U2-14
U2-21
*2
U2-22
*2
Drive
Operation
Status at
Previous
Fault
Inverter
Status
Cumulative
Operation
Time at
Previous
Fault
Elapsed time
Peak hold current at fault
Current
PeakHold
Peak hold output frequency at fault
Freq@ I
PeakHold
Torque
Reference at
Previous
Fault
Torque
Reference
Input
Terminal
Status at
Previous
Fault
Input Term
Sts
Gives the torque reference at the most recent fault.
Shows the input terminal status at the most recent fault.
Output
Terminal
Status at
Previous
Fault
Output Term
Sts
Gives the output terminal status at the most recent fault.
Displays the drive Operation
Status at the most recent fault.
Gives the cumulative operation time at the previous fault.
Displays the peak hold current when the last fault occurred.
Displays the frequency value at the moment the current reached its peak value when the last fault occurred.
No output possible.
0.1%
-
-
-
1 hr
0.01
A
*1
0.01
Hz
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Note 1. The following errors are not included in the error trace: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.
2. If the PUF fault is already indicated in U2 or U3 , even if the PUF fault is detected again, the fault trace is not updated.
* 1. The minimum unit differs depending on the Inverter capacity. (0.01 A for Inverter of 0.4 kW to 7.5 kW, and 0.1 A for Inverter of 11 kW or more)
* 2. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1039 and later.
89H
8AH
8BH
8CH
8DH
7E6H
7E7H
5-
97
5
-98
Fault History: U3
User parameters for the error log are shown in the following table.
Name
Parameter
Number Display
Description
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
Min.
Unit
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
U3-01
U3-02
U3-03
U3-04
U3-05
U3-06
U3-07
U3-08
U3-09
U3-10
Most Recent
Fault
Last Fault
2nd Most
Recent Fault
Fault
Message 2
Shows the most recent fault.
Shows the second most recent fault.
3rd Most
Recent Fault
Fault
Message 3
4th Most
Recent Fault
Fault
Message 4
Shows the third most recent fault.
Shows the fourth most recent fault.
Cumulative
Operation
Time at Most
Recent Fault
Gives the cumulative operation time at the most recent fault.
Elapsed Time 1
Cumulative
Operation
Time at 2nd
Most Recent
Fault
Elapsed Time 2
Gives the cumulative operation time at the second most recent fault.
Cumulative
Operation
Time at 3rd
Most Recent
Fault
Elapsed Time 3
Gives the cumulative operation time at the third most recent fault.
Cumulative
Operation
Time at 4th
Most Recent
Fault
Gives the cumulative operation time at the fourth most recent fault.
Elapsed Time 4
5th Most
Recent Fault
Shows the fifth most recent fault.
Fault
Message 5
6th Most
Recent Fault
Fault Message 6
Shows the sixth most recent fault.
No output possible.
-
-
-
-
1 hr
1 hr
1 hr
1 hr
-
-
A A
A A
A A
A A
A A
A A
A A
A A
A A
A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
90H
91H
92H
93H
94H
95H
96H
97H
804H
805H
User Parameter Tables
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
Min.
Unit
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MODBUS
Register
U3-11
U3-12
U3-13
U3-14
U3-15
U3-16
U3-17
U3-18
U3-19
U3-20
7th Most
Recent Fault
Fault Message 7
Shows the seventh most recent fault.
8th Most
Recent Fault
Fault Message 8
Shows the eighth most recent fault.
9th Most
Recent Fault
Fault Message 9
Shows the ninth most recent fault.
10th Most
Recent Fault
Fault Message 10
Shows the tenth most recent fault.
Cumulative
Operation
Time at 5th
Most Recent
Fault
Elapsed Time 5
Gives the cumulative operation time at the fifth most recent fault.
Cumulative
Operation
Time at 6th
Most Recent
Fault
Elapsed Time 6
Gives the cumulative operation time at the sixth most recent fault.
Cumulative
Operation
Time at 7th
Most Recent
Fault
Elapsed Time 7
Gives the cumulative operation time at the seventh most recent fault.
Cumulative
Operation
Time at 8th
Most Recent
Fault
Elapsed Time 8
Gives the cumulative operation time at the eighth most recent fault.
Cumulative
Operation
Time at 9th
Most Recent
Fault
Elapsed Time 9
Gives the cumulative operation time at the ninth most recent fault.
Cumulative
Operation
Time at 10th
Most Recent
Fault
Elapsed Time 10
Gives the cumulative operation time at the tenth most recent fault.
No output possible.
Note The following errors are not recorded in the error log: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.
-
-
-
-
1 hr
1 hr
1 hr
1 hr
1 hr
1 hr
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
806H
807H
808H
809H
80EH
80FH
810H
811H
812H
813H
5-
99
5
-100
Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02)
The factory settings of the following user parameters will change if the control method (A1-02) is changed.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Setting Range Unit
V/f
Control
Factory Setting
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 b3-01 b3-02 b8-02 b8-03
C3-01
C3-02
C4-02
C5-01
C5-02
C5-03
C5-04
C5-06
C6-02
C6-03 d5-02
E1-04
E3-02
Speed Search Selection
SpdSrch at Start
Speed Search Deactivation Current
SpdSrch Current
Energy Saving Gain
Energy Save Gain
Energy Saving Control Filter Time
Constant
Energy Save F.T
Slip Compensation Gain
Slip Comp Gain
Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time
Slip Comp Time
Torque Compensation Primary Delay
Time
Torq Comp Time
ASR Proportional Gain 1
ASR P Gain 1
ASR Integral Time 1
ASR I Time 1
ASR Proportional Gain 2
ASR P Gain 2
ASR Integral Time 2
ASR I Time 2
ASR Primary Delay Time Constant
ASR Delay Time
Carrier frequency selection
Carrier Freq Sel
Carrier frequency upper limit
Carrier Freq Max
Torque Reference Delay Time
Torq Ref Filter
Maximum Output Frequency
Max Frequency
0 to 3
0 to 200
0.0 to 10.0
0.0 to 10.00
0.0 to 2.5
0 to 10000
0 to 10000
0.00 to 300.00
0.000 to 10.000
0.00 to 300.00
0.000 to 10.000
0.000 to 0.500
1 to F *6
0.4 to 15.0
*6
0 to 1000
0.0 to 400.0
1
1%
0.1
0.01 s
0.1
1ms
1ms
0.01
0.001sec
0.01
0.001sec
0.001
–
0.1 kHz 15.0
*7
1ms
0.1Hz
2
120
-
-
0.0
2000
200
*5
-
-
-
-
-
6 *7
-
60.0
*3
3
-
-
-
-
-
200
*5
0.20
0.200
0.02
0.050
-
6 *7
15.0
*7
-
60.0
*3
2
100
0.7
0.50
1.0
200
20
-
-
-
-
-
6 *7
15.0
*7
-
60.0
-
-
1.0
0.01
1.0
-
-
0.004
1 *8
2.0
0
60.0
2
10
0.7
0.50
1.0
-
-
20.00
10.00
0.500
0.500
20.00
10.00
0.500
0.500
0.010
0.035
6 *7
–
10
60.0
User Parameter Tables
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Setting Range Unit
V/f
Control
Factory Setting
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
E1-05
E3-03
E1-06
E3-04
E1-07
E3-05
Maximum Output Voltage
Max Voltage
Base Frequency
Base Frequency
Mid Output Frequency A
Mid Frequency A
0.0 to 255.0
0.0 to 400.0
0.0 to 400.0
0.1 V
0.1Hz
0.1Hz
200.0
*3
60.0
*3
3.0
*3
200.0
*3
60.0
*3
3.0
*3
200.0
60.0
3.0
200.0
60.0
0.0
200.0
60.0
0.0
E1-08
E3-06
Mid Output Voltage A
*2
0.0 to 255.0
(0.0 to 510.0)
0.1 V
15.0
*3
15.0
*3
11.0
0.0
0.0
Mid Voltage A
Minimum Output Frequency
E1-09
E3-07
0.0 to 400.0
0.1Hz
1.5
*3
1.5
*3
0.5
0.0
0.3
Min Frequency
Minimum Output Voltage
*2
E1-10
E3-08
0.0 to 255.0
(0.0 to 510.0)
0.1 V
9.0
*3
9.0
*3
2.0
0.0
1.0
Min Voltage
Overspeed Detection Delay Time
F1-09 0.0 to 2.0
0.1 s 1.0
0.0
0.0
PG Overspd Time
Feed Forward Control Selection n5-01 0, 1 1 0 1
Feedfoward Sel
* 1. The settings will be 0.05 (Flux vector)/2.00 (Open-loop vector) for drives of 55kW or larger.
* 2. The settings shown are for 208-240Vac drives. The values will double for 380-480Vac drives.
* 3. Settings vary as shown in the following tables depending on the drive capacity and E1-03.
* 4. The setting range is 0 to 66.0 for open-loop vector control 2 (0 to 132.0 for PRG 103 ). For the 400 V Class Inverters, there are limitations on the maximum output frequency depending on the setting for the carrier frequency and capacity. The maximum output frequency for 400 V, 90 to 110 kW is
250 Hz. The maximum output frequency for 400 V, 132 to 300 kW is 166 Hz.1000 ms for Inverters of 200 V Class 30 to 110 kW and 400 V Class 55 to
300 kW.
* 5. 1000 ms for Inverters of 200 V Class 30 to 110 kW and 400 V Class 55 to 300 kW.
* 6. The setting ranges depend on the control method and capacity of the Inverter. (The values for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW are given.)
* 7. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.)
* 8. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1040 and later.
5-
101
5
-102
208-240Vac and 380-480 Vac Drives of 0.4 to 1.5 kW
Table 5.1 V/F Pattern for Drive Capacities G7U20P4 - 21P5 for 208-240V Class
Parameter
No.
Name Unit Factory Setting
E1-03 V/F Pattern Selection — 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
Max. Output
Frequency
Max. Output Voltage
Base Frequency
Mid. Output
Frequency
Hz
V
Hz
V
50.0
230.0
50.0
2.5
60.0
230.0
60.0
3.0
60.0
230.0
50.0
3.0
E1-08
E1-09
Mid. Output Voltage
Min. Output
Frequency
Min. Output Voltage
V
Hz
17.2
1.3
17.2
1.5
17.2
1.5
E1-10 V 10.3
10.3
10.3
1. The setting shown are for 208-240Vac drives. The values will double for 380-480Vac drives.
.
2. These default values are for V/F or V/F with PG control methods (A1-02 = 0 or 1)
72.0
230.0
60.0
3.0
17.2
1.5
10.3
50.0
230.0
50.0
25.0
40.2
1.3
9.2
50.0
230.0
50.0
25.0
57.5
1.3
10.3
60.0
230.0
60.0
30.0
40.2
1.5
9.2
60.0
230.0
60.0
30.0
57.5
1.5
10.3
208-240Vac and 380-480 Vac Drives of 0.4 to 1.5 kW
Table 5.3 V/F Pattern for Drive Capacity G7U20P4 - 21P5 for 208-240V Class (continued)
Parameter
No.
Name Unit Factory Setting
E1-03 V/F Pattern Selection — 8 9 A B C D E
F &
FF
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
Max. Output
Frequency
Max. Output Voltage
Base Frequency
Mid. Output
Frequency
Mid. Output Voltage
Min. Output
Frequency
Hz
V
Hz
V
V
Hz
50.0
230.0
50.0
2.5
21.8
1.3
50.0
230.0
50.0
2.5
27.6
1.3
60.0
230.0
60.0
3.0
21.8
1.5
E1-10 Min. Output Voltage V 12.6
14.9
12.6
1. The setting shown are for 208-240Vac drives. The values will double for 380-480Vac drives.
.
2. These default values are for V/F or V/F with PG control methods (A1-02 = 0 or 1)
60.0
230.0
60.0
3.0
27.6
1.5
17.2
90.0
230.0
60.0
3.0
17.2
1.5
10.3
120.0
230.0
60.0
3.0
17.2
1.5
10.3
180.0
230.0
60.0
3.0
17.2
1.5
10.3
60.0
230.0
60.0
3.0
17.2
1.5
10.3
User Parameter Tables
208-240Vac and 380-480 Vac Drives of 2.2 to 45 kW
Table 5.4 V/F Pattern for Drive Capacity G7U22P2 - 2045 for 208-240V Class
Parameter
No.
Name Unit Factory Setting
E1-03 V/F Pattern Selection — 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
Max. Output Frequency
Max. Output Voltage
Base Frequency
Mid. Output Frequency
Mid. Output Voltage
Min. Output Frequency
Hz
V
Hz
V
V
Hz
50.0
60.0
60.0
72.0
16.1
1.5
8.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
230.0
230.0
230.0
230.0
230.0
230.0
230.0
230.0
50.0
60.0
50.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
25.0
25.0
30.0
30.0
16.1
1.3
16.1
1.5
16.1
1.5
E1-10 Min. Output Voltage V 8.0
8.0
1. The setting shown are for 208-240Vac drives. The values will double for 380-480Vac drives.
2. These default values are for V/F or V/F with PG control methods (A1-02 = 0 or 1)
8.0
40.2
1.3
6.9
57.5
1.3
8.0
40.2
1.5
6.9
57.5
1.5
8.0
Table 5.4 V/F Pattern for Drive Capacity G7U22P2 - 2045 for 208-240 V Class (continued)
Parameter
No.
Name Unit Factory Setting
E1-03 V/F Pattern Selection — 8 9 A B C D E
F &
FF
E1-04 Max. Output Frequency Hz 50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
90.0
120.0
180.0
60.0
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
Max. Output Voltage
Base Frequency
Mid. Output Frequency
Mid. Output Voltage
Min. Output Frequency
V
Hz
V
V
Hz
230.0
230.0
230.0
230.0
230.0
230.0
230.0
230.0
50.0
2.5
50.0
2.5
60.0
3.0
60.0
3.0
60.0
3.0
60.0
3.0
60.0
3.0
60.0
3.0
20.7
1.3
26.4
1.3
20.7
1.5
E1-10 Min. Output Voltage V 10.3
12.6
1. For 400V class units, the voltage values are twice that of 200V class units.
2. These default values are for V/F or V/F with PG control methods (A1-02 = 0 or 1)
10.3
26.4
1.5
14.9
16.1
1.5
8.0
16.1
1.5
8.0
16.1
1.5
8.0
16.1
1.5
8.0
5-
103
5
-104
208-240 Vac Drives of 55 to 110 kW and 380-480 Vac Drives of 55 to 300 kW
Table 5.5 V/F Pattern for Drive Capacity G7U2055 and higher for 208-240V Class
Parameter
No.
Name Unit
E1-03
E1-04
E1-05
V/F Pattern
Selection
Max. Output
Frequency
Max. Output
Voltage
–
Hz
V
0
50.0
230.0
1
60.0
230.0
2
60.0
230.0
E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
Max. Voltage
Frequency
Mid. Output
Frequency
Mid. Output
Voltage
Hz
V
V
50.0
2.5
13.8
60.0
3.0
13.8
50.0
3.0
13.8
E1-09
E1-10
Min. Output
Frequency
Min. Output
Voltage
Hz
V
1.3
6.9
1.5
6.9
1.5
6.9
1. The setting shown are for 208-240 Vac drives. The values will double for 380-480Vac drives.
.
2. These default values are for V/F or V/F with PG control methods (A1-02 = 0 or 1)
Factory Setting
3
72.0
230.0
60.0
3.0
13.8
1.5
6.9
4
50.0
230.0
50.0
25.0
40.2
1.3
5.7
5
50.0
230.0
50.0
25.0
57.5
1.3
6.9
6
60.0
230.0
60.0
30.0
40.2
1.5
5.7
Table 5.5 V/F Pattern for Drive Capacity G7U2055 and higher for 208-240V Class (continued)
Parameter
No.
Name Unit Factory Setting
E1-03
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
V/F Pattern
Selection
Max. Output
Frequency
Max. Output
Voltage
Base Frequency
Mid. Output
Frequency
Mid. Output
Voltage
Min. Output
Frequency
–
Hz
V
Hz
V
V
Hz
8
50.0
230.0
50.0
2.5
17.2
1.3
9
50.0
230.0
50.0
2.5
23.0
1.3
A
60.0
230.0
60.0
3.0
17.2
1.5
B
60.0
230.0
60.0
3.0
23.0
1.5
E1-10
Min. Output
Voltage
V 8.0
10.3
8.0
1. The setting shown are for 208-240Vac drives. The values will double for 380-480Vac drives.
2. These default values are for V/F or V/F with PG control methods (A1-02 = 0 or 1)
12.6
C
90.0
230.0
60.0
3.0
13.8
1.5
6.9
D
120.0
230.0
60.0
3.0
13.8
1.5
6.9
E
180.0
230.0
60.0
3.0
13.8
1.5
6.9
F & FF
60.0
230.0
60.0
3.0
13.8
1.5
6.9
7
60.0
230.0
60.0
30.0
57.5
1.5
6.9
User Parameter Tables
Table 5.6 lists the factory settings of V/F patterns when open loop vector or flux vector control method is selected
(A1-02 = 2 or 3).
Table 5.6 V/F Pattern for 208-240V Class Drives
Factory Setting
Parameter No.
Name Unit
Open Loop Vector
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
Max. Output Frequency
Max. Output Voltage
Base Frequency
Hz
V
Hz
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
Mid. Output Frequency
Mid. Output Voltage
Min. Output Frequency
Min. Output Voltage
V
V
Hz
V
1. The setting shown are for 208-240Vac drives. The values will double for 380-480Vac drives.
2. These default values are for open loop vector or flux vector control methods (A1-02 = 2 or 3)
60.0
230.0
60.0
3.0
12.6
0.5
2.3
Flux Vector
60.0
230.0
60.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Voltage
Max Voltage E1-05
Mid Voltage B E1-12
Base Voltage E1-13
Mid Voltage A E1-08
Min Voltage E1-10
Min
Freq
E1-11
Mid
Freq
Base
Freq
A
Mid
Freq B
E1-04
Max
Freq
Frequency
Fig 5.9 V/F Pattern Parameters
Parameters E1-07, E1-08, E1-10, E1-11, and E1-12 are accessible through the Programming Menu.
To set up a custom V/F pattern, program the points shown in the diagram below using parameters E1-04 through
E1-13. Be sure that the following condition is true: E1-09
5-
105
5
-106
Factory Settings that Change with the Drive Capacity (o2-04)
The factory settings of the following user parameters will change if the drive capacity (o2-04) is changed.
208-240Vac Drives
Parameter
Number
o2-04 b8-03
Name
Drive Capacity kVA selection
Energy Saving Control
Filter Time Constant
Unit kW 0.4
0.75
1.5
s b8-04
C6-02
C6-11
-
Energy Saving Coefficient
Value
Carrier Frequency Selection
*1
Carrier Frequency Selection for Open Loop Vector 2
*2
Carrier frequency selection upper limit
-
-
-
-
E2-01
(E4-01)
E2-02
(E4-02)
E2-03
(E4-03)
E2-05
(E4-05)
E2-06
(E4-06)
Motor Rated Current
Motor Rated Slip
Motor No-Load Current
Motor Line-to-Line
Resistance
Motor Leakage Inductance
A
Hz
A
%
E2-10
L2-02
Motor Iron Loss for Torque
Compensation
Momentary Power Loss
Ride-thru Time
W s
L2-03
Momentary Power Loss
Minimum Base Block Time s
L2-04
Momentary Power Loss
Voltage Recovery Ramp
Time s
L8-02 Overheat Alarm Level C
L8-39 Reduced carrier frequency kHz n1-03 n5-02
Hunting-prevention time constant
Motor Acceleration Time ms s
0
288.20
223.70
169.40
156.80
122.90
94.75
72.69
70.44
63.13
6
3
6
1.90
2.90
1.20
6
3
6
3.30
2.50
1.80
6
3
6
6.20
2.60
2.80
6
3
6
8.50
2.90
3.00
6
3
6
2.73
4.50
19.6
112
1.0
0.6
0.3
10
6
3
6
1.50
5.10
18.2
172
1.0
0.7
0.3
10
6
3
6
14.00
19.60
26.60
1.30
8.00
6
3
6
39.7
1.70
11.2
6
3
6
53.0
1.60
15.2
9.842
5.156
1.997
1.601
0.771
0.399
0.288
0.230
0.138
18.2
14
0.1
0.2
0.3
95
2.0
10
1
13.8
26
0.2
0.3
0.3
95
2.0
10
2
18.5
53
0.3
0.4
0.3
100
2.0
10
3
77
10
Factory Setting
2.2
0.50 (Open-loop vector control)
18.4
0.5
0.5
0.3
95
2.0
3.7
4
95
2.0
5.5
5
95
2.0
7.5
6
15.5
262
1.0
0.8
0.3
95
2.0
10
11
7
19.5
245
2.0
0.9
0.3
90
2.0
10
15
8
17.2
272
2.0
1.0
0.6
100
2.0
10
0.178
0.142
0.166
0.145
0.154
0.168
0.175
0.265
0.244
User Parameter Tables
Parameter
Number
o2-04 b8-03
Name
Drive Capacity kVA selection
Energy Saving Control
Filter Time Constant
Unit kW 18.5
s
9
22
A
30
B C
Factory Setting
37
0.50 (Open-loop vector control)
45
D
55
E
75
F
90
10
110
11
2.00 (Open-loop vector control) b8-04
C6-02
C6-11
-
Energy Saving Coefficient
Value
Carrier Frequency Selection
*1
Carrier Frequency Selection for Open Loop Vector 2
*2
Carrier frequency selection upper limit
-
-
-
-
57.87
6
3
6
51.79
4
3
6
46.27
4
3
4
38.16
4
3
4
35.78
4
3
4
31.35
4
3
4
23.10
4
3
4
20.65
1
1
1
18.12
1
1
1
E2-01
(E4-01)
E2-02
(E4-02)
E2-03
(E4-03)
E2-05
(E4-05)
E2-06
(E4-06)
Motor Rated Current
Motor Rated Slip
Motor No-Load Current
Motor Line-to-Line
Resistance
Motor Leakage Inductance
A
Hz
A
%
65.8
1.67
15.7
0.101
20.1
77.2
1.70
18.5
0.079
19.5
105.0
1.80
21.9
0.064
20.8
131.0
1.33
38.2
0.039
18.8
160.0
1.60
44.0
0.030
20.2
190.0
1.43
45.6
0.022
20.5
260.0
1.39
72.0
0.023
20.0
260.0
1.39
72.0
0.023
20.0
260.0
1.39
72.0
0.023
20.0
E2-10
L2-02
Motor Iron Loss for Torque
Compensation
Momentary Power Loss
Ride-thru Time
W s
L2-03
L2-04
Momentary Power Loss
Voltage Recovery Ramp
Time s
L8-02 Overheat Alarm Level C
L8-39 Reduced carrier frequency kHz n1-03
Momentary Power Loss
Minimum Base Block Time
Hunting-prevention time constant s ms
505
2.0
1.0
0.6
90
2.0
10
538
2.0
1.1
0.6
90
2.0
10
699
2.0
1.1
0.6
95
2.0
10
823
2.0
1.2
0.6
100
2.0
10
852
2.0
1.2
1.0
100
2.0
10
960
2.0
1.3
1.0
110
2.0
10
1200
2.0
1.5
1.0
100
2.0
10
1200
2.0
1.7
1.0
95
2.0
100
1200
2.0
1.7
1.0
95
2.0
100 n5-02 Motor Acceleration Time s 0.317
0.355
0.323
0.320
0.387
0.317
0.533
0.592
0.646
Note Attach a Momentary Power Interruption Compensation Unit if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 208-240Vac drives with outputs of 0.4 to 7.5 kW.
* 1. The initial settings for C6-02 are as follows: 0: Low noise PWM, 1: 2.0 kHz, 2: 5.0 kHz, 3: 8.0 kHz, 4: 10 kHz, 5: 12.5 kHz, and 6: 15 kHz. If the carrier frequency is set higher than the factory setting for drives with outputs of 5.5 kW or more, the drive rated current will need to be reduced.
* 2. The initial settings for C6-11 are as follows: 1: 2.0 kHz, 2: 4.0 kHz, 3: 6.0 kHz, 4: 8.0 kHz.
5-
107
5
-108
380-480Vac Drives
Parameter
Number
o2-04 b8-03
Name
Drive Capacity kVA selection
Energy Saving Control
Filter Time Constant b8-04
C6-02
C6-11
-
Energy Saving
Coefficient Value
Carrier Frequency
Selection *1
Carrier Frequency
Selection for Open Loop
Vector 2
*2
Carrier frequency selection upper limit
E2-01
(E4-01)
E2-02
(E4-02)
E2-03
(E4-03)
E2-05
(E4-05)
E2-06
(E4-06)
Motor Rated Current
Motor Rated Slip
Motor No-Load Current
E2-10
L2-02
L2-03
L2-04
Motor Line-to-Line
Resistance
Motor Leakage
Inductance
Motor Iron Loss for
Torque Compensation
Momentary Power Loss
Ride-thru Time
Momentary Power Loss
Minimum Base Block
Time
Momentary Power Loss
Voltage Recovery Ramp
Time
L8-02 Overheat Alarm Level
L8-39
Reduced carrier frequency n1-03
Hunting-prevention time constant n5-02 Motor Acceleration Time
Unit Factory Setting kW 0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
4.0
5.5
7.5
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 s 0.50 (Open-loop vector control)
-
-
-
-
A
Hz
A
%
W s s s
C kHz ms s
11
28
15
29
576.40 447.40 338.80 313.60 245.80 236.44 189.50 145.38 140.88 126.26
3
3
3
1.00
2.90
0.60
18.2
14
0.1
0.2
0.3
95
2.0
10
3
3
3
1.60
2.60
0.80
14.3
26
0.2
0.3
0.3
95
2.0
10
3
3
3
3.10
2.50
1.40
18.3
53
0.3
0.4
0.3
95
2.0
10
3
3
3
4.20
3.00
1.50
18.7
77
0.5
0.5
0.3
95
2.0
10
3
3
3
7.00
2.70
2.30
19.3
130
0.5
0.6
0.3
95
2.0
10
3
3
3
7.00
2.70
2.30
19.3
130
0.8
0.6
0.3
95
2.0
10
3
3
3
1.50
2.60
18.2
193
0.8
0.7
0.3
95
2.0
10
3
3
3
1.30
4.00
15.5
263
1.0
0.8
0.3
90
2.0
10
3
3
3
9.80
13.30
19.9
1.70
5.6
19.6
385
2.0
0.9
0.3
95
2.0
10
3
3
3
26.5
1.60
7.6
38.198 22.459 10.100 6.495
3.333
3.333
1.595
1.152
0.922
0.550
17.2
440
2.0
1.0
0.6
95
2.0
10
0.178
0.142
0.166
0.145
0.154
0.154
0.168
0.175
0.265
0.244
Parameter
Number
o2-04 b8-03
Name
Drive Capacity kVA selection
Energy Saving Control
Filter Time Constant b8-04
C6-02
C6-11
-
Energy Saving Coefficient
Value
Carrier Frequency Selection
*1
Carrier Frequency Selection for Open Loop Vector 2
*2
Carrier frequency selection upper limit
E2-01
(E4-01)
E2-02
(E4-02)
E2-03
(E4-03)
E2-05
(E4-05)
E2-06
(E4-06)
Motor Rated Current
Motor Rated Slip
Motor No-Load Current
Motor Line-to-Line
Resistance
Motor Leakage Inductance
E2-10
L2-02
L2-03
L2-04
Motor Iron Loss for Torque
Compensation
Momentary Power Loss
Ride-thru Time
Momentary Power Loss
Minimum Base Block Time
Momentary Power Loss
Voltage Recovery Ramp
Time
L8-02 Overheat Alarm Level n5-02 Motor Acceleration Time
Unit kW 18.5
2A s
-
-
-
-
A
Hz
A
%
W s s s
C s
3
3
3
32.9
1.67
7.8
20.1
508
2.0
1.0
0.6
3
3
3
Factory Setting
22
2B
38.6
1.70
9.2
23.5
586
2.0
1.1
0.6
30
2C
3
3
3
52.3
1.80
10.9
20.7
750
2.0
1.1
0.6
37
2D
0.50 (Open-loop vector control)
3
3
3
65.6
1.33
19.1
18.8
925
2.0
1.2
0.6
45
2E
115.74
103.58
92.54
76.32
71.56
3
3
3
79.7
1.60
22.0
0.403
0.316
0.269
0.155
0.122
19.9
1125
2.0
1.2
1.0
95 95 95 95 95
0.317
0.355
0.323
0.320
0.387
User Parameter Tables
5-
109
5
-110
Parameter
Number
o2-04 b8-03
Name
Drive Capacity kVA selection
Energy Saving Control
Filter Time Constant
Unit kW 55
s
2F
75
30
90
31
Factory Setting
110 132
32 33
160
34
2.00 (Open-loop vector control)
185
35
220
36
300
37 b8-04
C6-02
C6-11
-
Energy Saving Coefficient
Value
Carrier Frequency Selection
*1
Carrier Frequency Selection for Open Loop Vector 2
*2
Carrier frequency selection upper limit
-
-
-
-
67.20
2
2
5.0
46.20
2
2
5.0
38.91
F
1
3.0
*1
36.23
F
1
3.0
*1
32.79
1
1
2.0
30.13
1
1
2.0
30.57
1
*1
1
1
27.13
1
*1
1
1
21.76
1
1
1
E2-01
(E4-01)
E2-02
(E4-02)
E2-03
(E4-03)
E2-05
(E4-05)
E2-06
(E4-06)
Motor Rated Current
Motor Rated Slip
Motor No-Load Current
Motor Line-to-Line
Resistance
Motor Leakage Inductance
E2-10
L2-02
L2-03
L2-04
Motor Iron Loss for Torque
Compensation
Momentary Power Loss
Ride-thru Time
Momentary Power Loss
Minimum Base Block Time
Momentary Power Loss
Voltage Recovery Ramp
Time
L8-02 Overheat Alarm Level
L8-39
Reduced carrier frequency
Hz
W
A
A
% s s s
C kHz
95.0
1.46
24.0
0.088
20.0
1260
2.0
1.3
1.0
100
1.0
130.0
1.39
36.0
0.092
20.0
1600
2.0
1.5
1.0
105
1.0
156.0
1.40
40.0
0.056
20.0
1760
2.0
1.7
1.0
105
1.0
190.0
1.40
49.0
0.046
20.0
2150
2.0
1.7
1.0
120
1.0
223.0
1.38
58.0
0.035
20.0
2350
2.0
1.8
1.0
115
1.0
270.0
1.35
70.0
0.029
20.0
2850
2.0
1.9
1.0
115
1.0
310.0
1.30
81.0
0.025
20.0
3200
2.0
2.0
1.0
100
1.0
370.0
1.30
96.0
0.020
20.0
3700
2.0
2.1
1.0
110
1.0
500.0
1.25
130.0
0.014
20.0
4700
2.0
2.1
1.0
115
1.0
n1-03
Hunting-prevention time constant ms 30 30 30 30 30 30 100 100 100 n5-02 Motor Acceleration Time s 0.317
0.533
0.592
0.646
0.673
0.777
0.864
0.910
1.392
* 1. The initial settings for C6-02 are as follows: 1: 2.0 kHz, 2: 5.0 kHz, 3: 8.0 kHz, 4: 10 kHz, 5: 12.5 kHz, 6: 15 kHz, and F: User-set (Initial setting for
400-V drives with a capacity of 90-kW or 110-kW: 3 kHz.).
* 2. This setting is for software versions PRG 1039 and earlier.
The carrier frequencies for the settings of C6-11 are as follows:
1: 2.0 kHz, 2: 4.0 kHz, 3: 6.0 kHz, 4: 8.0 kHz.
Parameter Settings by
Function
Frequency Reference ..................................................6-2
Run Command.............................................................6-7
Stopping Methods........................................................6-9
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics ..........6-15
Adjusting Frequency References...............................6-24
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function) ........ 6-30
Improved Operating Efficiency...................................6-32
Machine Protection ....................................................6-39
Continuing Operation.................................................6-57
Drive Protection .........................................................6-67
Input Terminal Functions ...........................................6-69
Monitor Parameters ...................................................6-79
Individual Functions ...................................................6-84
Digital Operator Functions .......................................6-139
Options ....................................................................6-151
6
-2
Frequency Reference
This section explains how to input the frequency reference.
Selecting the Frequency Reference Source
Set parameter b1-01 to select the frequency reference source.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
V/f with
PG
Control Methods
Open loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 b1-01
H6-01
H6-02
Frequency
Reference
Selection
Reference
Source
Selects the frequency reference input source.
0: Operator - Digital preset speed U1-01 or d1-01 to d1-17.
1: Terminals - Analog input terminal A1
(or terminal A2 based on parameter
H3-09).
2: Serial Com - Modbus RS-422/485 terminals R+, R-, S+, and S-.
3: Option PCB - Option board connected on 2CN.
4: Pulse Input (Terminal RP)
Terminal RP
Pulse Train
Input
Function
Selection
Pulse Input
Sel
Selects the function of pulse train terminal RP.
0: Frequency reference
1: PID feedback value
2: PID setpoint value
Pulse Train
Input
Scaling
Pulse In
Scaling
Sets the number of pulses (in Hz) that is equal to the maximum output frequency
E1-04.
0 to 4
0 to 2
1
0
1000 to
32000
1440Hz
No
No
Yes
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
Input the Reference Frequency from the Digital Operator
When b1-01 is set to 0, you can input the reference frequency from the Digital Operator.
Input the reference frequency from the Digital Operator's reference frequency setting display.
For details on setting the reference frequency, refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes .
Rdy
"0.00Hz"
Fig 6.1 Frequency Setting Display
Frequency Reference
Inputting the Frequency Reference Using Voltage (Analog Setting)
When b1-01 is set to 1, you can input the frequency reference from control circuit terminal A1 (voltage input), or control circuit terminal A2 (voltage or current input).
Inputting Master Speed Frequency Reference Only
When inputting a voltage for the master speed frequency reference, input the voltage to control circuit terminal A1.
2 k
Inverter
+V Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA
A1
A2
Master speed frequency reference
(voltage input)
Master speed frequency reference
(current input)
A3 Auxiliary speed frequency reference 1
AC Analog common
Fig 6.2 Voltage Input for Master Speed Frequency Reference
When inputting a current for the master speed frequency reference, input the current to control circuit terminal
A2, input 0Vto terminal A1, set H3-08 (Multi-function analog input terminal A2 signal level selection) to 2
(current input), and set H3-09 (Multi-function analog input terminal A2 function selection) to 0 (add to terminal A1).
Inverter
4 to 20-mA input
+V Power supply: 15 V,
A1
A2
A3
20 mA
Master speed frequency reference
(voltage input)
Master speed frequency reference
(current input)
Auxiliary speed frequency reference 1
AC Analog common
1
2
V I
DIP switch
S1
Fig 6.3 Current Input for Master Speed Frequency Reference
Turn ON pin 2 of DIP switch SW1 (toward I), the voltage/current switch, when inputting a current to terminal A2. Turn OFF pin 2 of DIP switch SW1 (toward V), the voltage/current switch, when inputting a voltage to terminal A2. Set H3-08 to the correct setting for the type of input signal being used.
INFO
6-
3
6
-4
Switch between 2 Step Speeds: Master/Auxiliary Speeds
When switching between the master and auxiliary speeds, connect the master speed frequency reference to control circuit terminal A1 or A2 and connect the auxiliary speed frequency reference to terminal A3. The reference on terminal A1 or A2 will be used for the drive frequency reference when the multi-function input allocated to multi-speed command 1 is OFF and the reference on terminal A3 will be used when it is ON. When switching between the master and auxiliary speeds, set H3-05 (Multi-function analog input terminal A3) to 2
(auxiliary frequency reference, 2nd step analog) and set on of the multi-function input terminals to multi-step speed reference 1.
When inputting a current to terminal A2 for the master speed frequency reference, set H3-08 (Multi-function analog input terminal A2 signal level selection) to 2 (current input), and set H3-09 (Multi-function analog input terminal A2 function selection) to 0 (add to terminal A1).
Inverter
S5 Multi-step speed reference 1
+V Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA
2 k
2 k
4 to 20 mA
A1
A2
Master speed frequency reference
(voltage input)
Master speed frequency reference
(current input)
A3 Auxiliary speed frequency reference 1
AC Analog common
Fig 6.4 Switching between Master and Auxiliary Frequencies
Setting Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Signals
When b1-01 is set to 4, the pulse train input to control circuit terminal RP is used as the frequency reference.
Set H6-01 (Pulse Train Input Function Selection) to 0 (frequency reference), and then set the 100% reference pulse frequency to H6-02 (Pulse Train Input Scaling).
Drive
Pulse Input Specifications
Low level voltage 0.0 to 0.8 V
High level voltage 3.5 to 13.2 V
Heavy duty
Pulse frequency
30 to 70%
0 to 32 kHz
32 kHz max.
3.5 to 13.2 V
Pulse input
RP(Pulse train input terminal)
AC (Analog common)
Fig 6.5 Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Input
Frequency Reference
Using Multi-Step Speed Operation
With Varispeed-G7 series drives, you can change the speed to a maximum of 17 steps, using 16 frequency references, and one jog frequency reference.
The following example of a multi-function input terminal function shows a 9-step operation using multi-step references 1 to 3 and jog frequency selection functions.
Related Parameters
To switch frequency references, set multi-step speed references 1 to 3 and the jog reference selection in the multi-function contact inputs.
Multi-function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-10)
Terminal
S5
S6
S7
S8
Parameter
Number
H1-03
H1-04
H1-05
H1-06
Set Value
3
4
5
6
Details
Multi-step speed reference 1 (Also used for master speed/auxiliary speed switching when multi-function analog input H3-09 is set to 2 (auxiliary frequency reference).)
Multi-step speed reference 2
Multi-step speed reference 3
Jog frequency selection (given priority over multi-step speed reference)
Combining Multi-Function References and Multi-Function Contact Inputs
You can change the selected frequency reference by combining the ON/OFF status of S4 to S7 (multi-function contact input terminals) to set multi-step speed references 1 to 3 and the jog frequency selection. The following table shows the possible combinations.
Speed
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TerminalS5
Multi-step
Speed
Reference 1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
TerminalS6
Multi-step
Speed
Reference 2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
TerminalS7
Multi-step
Speed
Reference 3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
TerminalS8
Jog
Frequency
Selection
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Selected Frequency
Frequency reference 1 d1-01, master speed frequency
Frequency reference 2 d1-02, auxiliary frequency 1
Frequency reference 3 d1-03, auxiliary frequency 2
Frequency reference 4 d1-04
Frequency reference 5 d1-05
Frequency reference 6 d1-06
Frequency reference 7 d1-07
Frequency reference 8 d1-08
9 ON * Jog frequency d1-17
* Terminal S8's jog frequency selection is given priority over multi-step speed references.
6-
5
6
-6
Setting Precautions
When setting analog inputs to step 1 to step 3, observe the following precautions.
•
•
When setting terminal A1's analog input to step 1, set b1-01 to 1, and when setting d1-01 (Frequency Reference 1) to step 1, set b1-01 to 0.
When setting terminal A2's analog input to step 2, set H3-09 to 2 (auxiliary frequency reference). When setting d1-02 (Frequency Reference 2) to step 2, set H3-09 to 1F (do not use analog inputs).
• When setting terminal A3's analog input to step 3, set H3-05 to 3 (auxiliary frequency reference 2). When setting d1-03(Frequency Reference 3) to step 3, set H3-05 to 1F (Analog input not used).
Connection Example and Time Chart
The following diagram shows a time chart and control circuit terminal connection example during a 9-step operation.
Drive
S1 Forward/stop
S2 Reverse/stop
S3 External fault
S4 Fault reset
S5 Multi-step speed reference 1
S6 Multi-step speed reference 2
S7 Multi-step speed reference 3
S8 Jog frequency
SC Sequence common
Fig 6.6 Control Circuit Terminal During 9-step Operation
Frequency reference
Frequency reference 2:
Auxiliary speed frequency
Frequency reference 1:
Master speed frequency
Frequency reference 5
Frequency reference 4
Frequency reference 3
Frequency reference 8
Frequency reference 7
Frequency reference 6
Forward/stop
Multi-step speed reference 1
Multi-step speed reference 2
Multi-step speed reference 3
Jog frequency selection
Jog frequency
Fig 6.7 Multi-step speed reference/Jog Frequency Selection Time Chart
Run Command
Run Command
This section explains input methods for the run command.
Selecting the Run Command Source
Set parameter b1-02 to select the source for the run command.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Openloop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 b1-02
Run
Command
Selection
Run Source
Selects the run command input source.
0: Operator - RUN and STOP keys on
Digital Operator.
1: Terminals - Contact closure on terminals S1 or S2.
2: Serial Com - Modbus RS-422/485 terminals R+, R-, S+, and S-.
3: Option PCB - Option board connected on 2CN.
0 to 3 1 No Q Q Q Q Q
Performing Operations Using a Digital Operator
When b1-02 is set to 0, you can perform drive operations using the Digital Operator keys (RUN, STOP, JOG,
and FWD/REV). For details on the Digital Operator, refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes .
Performing Operations Using Control Circuit Terminals
When b1-02 is set to 1, you can perform drive operations using the control circuit terminals.
Performing Operations Using a 2-wire Sequence
The factory setting is set to a 2-wire sequence. When control circuit terminal S1 is set to ON, forward operation will be performed, and when S1 is turned OFF, the drive will stop. In the same way, when control circuit terminal S2 is set to ON, reverse operation will be performed, and when S2 is turned OFF, the drive will stop.
Drive
Forward/stop
Reverse/stop
Sequence common
Fig 6.8 2-wire Sequence Wiring Example
6-
7
6
-8
Performing Operations Using a 3-wire Sequence
When any parameter from H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S12) is set to 0, terminals S1 and S2 are used for a 3-wire sequence, and the multi-function input terminal that has been set functions as a forward/reverse run command terminal.
When the drive is initialized for 3-wire sequence control with A1-03, multi-function input 3 becomes the input terminal for the forward/reverse run command.
Stop switch
(NC contact)
Operation switch
(NO contact)
Run command
(operates when ON)
Stop command
(stopped when ON)
Forward/reverse command
(multi-function input)
Sequence input common
Run command
Stop command
Forward/reverse command
Fig 6.9 3-wire Sequence Wiring Example
50ms min.
Can be either ON or OFF
OFF
(stopped)
OFF (forward) ON (reverse)
Motor speed
Stop Forward Reverse
Fig 6.10 Three-wire Sequence Time Chart
Stop Forward
Use a sequence that turns ON terminal S1 for 50ms or longer for the run command. This will make the run command self-holding in the drive.
INFO
Stopping Methods
Stopping Methods
This section explains methods of stopping the drive.
Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Sent
There are four methods of stopping the drive when a stop command is sent:
• Deceleration to stop
•
•
•
Coast to stop
DC braking stop
Coast to stop with timer
Set parameter b1-03 to select the drive stopping method. A DC braking stop and coasting to a stop with a timer cannot be set for flux vector control.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
V/f with
PG
Control Methods
Open-
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 b1-03 b1-05 b2-01
Stopping
Method
Selection
Stopping
Method
Minimum
Output
Frequency
(E1-09) or
Less
Operation
Selection
Zero-Speed
Oper
Selects the stopping method when the run command is removed.
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: DC Injection to Stop
3: Coast with Timer (A new run command is ignored if received before the timer expires).
Operation method when frequency reference is less than minimum output frequency set in E1-09.
0: Operates according to frequency reference (E1-09 is disabled).
1: Output shuts off (coast to stop if less than E1-09).
2: Operates according to E1-09
(frequency reference set to E1-09).
3: Zero speed (frequency reference becomes zero when less than E1-09).
DC
Injection
Braking
Start
Frequency
DCInj Start
Freq
Sets the frequency at which DC injection braking starts when ramp to stop
(b1-03 = 0) is selected. If b2-01< E1-09,
DC Injection braking starts at E1-09.
Note: Zero Speed restrictions are active in Flux Vector Mode.
0 to 3 *
0 to 3
0.0 to
10.0
0
0
0.5Hz
No
No
No
Q
No
A
Q
No
A
Q
No
A
Q
A
A
Q
No
A
6-
9
6
-10
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
V/f with
PG
Control Methods
Open-
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 b2-02 b2-03
DC
Injection
Braking
Current
DCInj
Current
Sets the DC injection braking current as a percentage of the drive rated current.
Note: The DC excitation current is determined by the setting in E2-03 when operating in flux loop vector control mode
DC
Injection
Braking
Time/DC
Excitation
Time at
Start
DCInj
Time@Start
Sets the time of DC injection braking at start in units of 0.01 seconds.
0 to
100
0.00
to
10.00
b2-04
DC
Injection
Braking
Time at
Stop
DCInj
Time@Stop
Sets the time length of DC injection braking at stop in units of 0.01 seconds.
1: When b1-03 = 2, actual DC Injection time is calculated as follows: (b2-04) x
10 x (OutputFreq) / (E1-04)
2: When b1-03 = 0, this parameter determines the amount of time DC
Injection is applied to the motor at the end of the decel ramp.
3: This should be set to a minimum of
0.50 seconds when using HSB. This will activate DC injection during the final portion of HSB and help ensure that the motor stops completely.
* The setting range is 0 or 1 for flux vector control and open-loop vector control 2.
0.00
to
10.00
50%
0.00sec
0.50sec
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
No
A
A
Deceleration to Stop
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 0, the motor decelerates to a stop according to the deceleration time that has been set. (Factory setting: C1-02 (Deceleration Time
1))
If the output frequency when decelerating to a stop falls below b2-01, the DC injection brake will be applied using the DC current set in b2-02 only for the time set in b2-04.
For deceleration time settings, refer to
page 6-16 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times
.
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
C1-01= 0 010.0Sec
Fig 6.11 Deceleration to Stop
Stopping Methods
The operation after stopping depends on the setting of b1-05 when flux vector control is selected (A1-02 = 3).
Run command OFF ON OFF
Frequency reference via analog input
0
E1-09 b1-05=0
(frequency reference)
Injection brake time at start
Baseblock b2-03 b1-05=1
(Coast)
Injection brake time at start
Baseblock b1-05=2
(Run on E1-09) Injection brake time at start b2-03
Run command turns OFF and zero speed control start when motor speed drops to b2-01.
Zero speed control
Zero speed control b2-04
Baseblock
Frequency reference drops to less than E1-09 and zero speed control starts when motor speed drops to b2-01.
b2-04
Baseblock
Run command turns OFF and zero speed control start when motor speed drops to b2-01.
Zero speed control
Baseblock b2-03 b1-05=3
(Zero speed) Injection brake time at start
Baseblock b2-04
Run command turns OFF and zero speed control start when motor speed drops to b2-01.
Zero speed control
Baseblock b2-03 b2-04
Baseblock
Fig 6.12 Deceleration to Stop (for Flux Vector Control)
Coast to Stop
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 1, the drive output voltage is interrupted. The motor coasts to a stop at the deceleration rate that counterbalances damage to the machine and inertia including the load.
Run command
ON OFF
Output frequency
Inverter output freqeuencty interrupted.
Fig 6.13 Coast to Stop
After the stop command is input, run commands are ignored until the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03) has elapsed.
INFO
6-
11
6
-12
DC Braking Stop
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 2, a wait is made for the time set in L2-03 (Minimum Baseblock (BB) Time) and then the DC injection brake current set in b2-02 is sent to the motor to apply a DC injection brake to stop the motor. The DC injection brake time is determined by the set value in b2-04 and the output frequency when the stop command is input.
DC injection brake time
Run command
Output frequency
ON OFF
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03)
Inverter output voltage interrupted
DC injection brake b2-04
DC injection brake time
10%
Fig 6.14 DC Injection Braking (DB) Stop
Output frequency at stop command input
100% (maximum output frequency)
Lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03) when an overcurrent (OC) occurs during stopping.
INFO
Coast to Stop with Timer
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 3, the drive output is interrupted to coast the motor to a stop. After the stop command is input, run commands are ignored until the time T has elapsed. The time T depends upon the output frequency when the stop command is input and the deceleration time.
Run command
ON
Output frequency
Inverter output voltage interrupted
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Operation wait time T
Deceleration time
(e.g., C1-02)
Operation wait time T
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03)
Minimum output frequency
Fig 6.15 Coast to Stop with Timer
Output frequency at stop command input
100% (Maximum output frequency)
Stopping Methods
Using the DC Injection Brake
Set parameter b2-03 to apply the DC injection brake voltage to the motor while it is coasting to a stop, to stop the motor and then restart it.
Set b2-03 to 0 to disable the DC injection brake at start.
Set the DC injection brake current using b2-02. DC injection braking is used at startup for flux vector control with the current set in E2-03 (Motor no-load current).
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 b2-02 b2-03
DC Injection
Braking
Current
DCInj Current
Sets the DC injection braking current as a percentage of the drive rated current.
Note: The DC excitation current is determined by the setting in E2-
03 when operating in flux loop vector control mode.
DC Injection
Braking Time/
DC Excitation
Time at Start
DCInj
Time@Start
Sets the time of DC injection braking at start in units of 0.01 seconds.
0 to
100
0.00
to
10.00
50%
0.00sec
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
No
A
Inputting the DC Injection Brake Command from Control Circuit Terminals
If you set a multi-function contact input terminal (H1 ) to 60 (DC injection brake command), you can apply the DC injection brake to the motor by turning ON the terminal for which the DC injection brake command has been set when the drive is being stopped. DC injection braking is used at startup for flux vector control.
The time chart for the DC injection brake is shown below.
DC injection brake command
FRUN
Output frequency
DC injection brake
(DC injection braking at startup is used for flux vector control.)
E1-09 b2-01
DC injection brake
(DC injection braking at startup is used for flux vector control.)
If you input the DC injection brake command from an external terminal, or if the run command and jog command are input, the DC injection brake will be disabled, and operation will resume.
Fig 6.16 DC Injection Brake Time Chart
6-
13
6
-14
Changing the DC Injection Brake Current Using an Analog Input
If you set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function
Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to 6 (DC injection brake current), you can change the DC injection brake current level using the analog input.
At 10Vinput (voltage) or 20mA input (current), 100% of the drive rated current will be applied.
DC injection brake voltage level
Drive rated current
Fig 6.17 DC Injection Brake Current Using an Analog Input
Using an Emergency Stop
Set a multi-function input terminal (H1 ) to 15 or 17 (emergency stop) to decelerate to a stop at the deceleration time set in C1-09. If inputting the emergency stop with an NO contact, set the multi-function input terminal (H1 ) to 15, and if inputting the emergency stop with an NC contact, set the multi-function input terminal (H1 ) to 17.
After the emergency stop command has been input, operation cannot be restarted until the drive has stopped.
To cancel the emergency stop, turn OFF the run command and emergency stop command.
Related parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
C1-09
Fast Stop Time Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero for the multi-function input "Fast
Stop" function.
Fast Stop Time
Note: this parameter is also used by selecting "Fast Stop" as a Stop
Method when a fault is detected.
0.0 to
6000.0
*
10.0sec
No A A A A A
* The setting range for accel/decel time will differ depending on C1-10 (Accel/Decel Time Units). If C1-10 is set to "0", then the setting range will change to 0.00sec to 600.00sec.
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
This section explains the acceleration and deceleration characteristics of the drive.
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times
Acceleration time indicates the time taken for the output frequency to climb from 0% to 100%. Deceleration time indicates the time taken for the output frequency to reduce to 0%. The factory setting of the acceleration time is C1-01, and the factory setting of the deceleration time is C1-02.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
C1-01
C1-02
C1-03
C1-04
C1-05
C1-06
C1-07
C1-08
C1-10
Acceleration
Time 1
Accel Time 1
Deceleration
Time 1
Decel Time 1
Acceleration
Time 2
Accel Time 2
Deceleration
Time 2
Decel Time 2
Acceleration
Time 3
Accel Time 3
Deceleration
Time 3
Decel Time 3
Acceleration
Time 4
Accel Time 4
Deceleration
Time 4
Decel Time 4
Accel/Decel
Time Setting
Units
Acc/Dec Units
Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency.
Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero.
Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency when selected via a multi-function input.
Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero when selected via a multi-function input.
0.0 to
6000.0
* Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency when selected via a multi-function input.
Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero when selected via a multi-function input.
Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency when selected via a multi-function input.
Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero when selected via a multi-function input.
Sets the setting resolution of
C1-01 to C1-09
0: 0.01sec (0.00 to 600.00sec)
1: 0.1sec (0.0 to 6000.0sec)
0 or 1
10.0sec
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
6-
15
6
-16
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
C1-11
Accel/Decel
Switch
Frequency
Acc/Dec SW
Freq
Sets the frequency for automatic switching of accel / decel times.
Fout < C1-11:
Accel/Decel Time 4
Fout C1-11: Accel/Decel Time 1
Multi-function inputs
"Multi-Acc/Dec 1" and
"Multi-Acc/Dec 2" have priority over C1-11.
Note: with Multi-Function Input,
Accel/Decel Time 1 and 2 will take precedence.
0.0 to
400.0
*1
0.0Hz
No A A A A A
C2-01
C2-02
C2-03
C2-04
S-Curve
Characteristic at Accel Start
SCrv Acc @
Start
S-Curve
Characteristic at Accel End
SCrv Acc @
End
S-Curve
Characteristic at Decel Start
SCrv Dec @
Start
S-Curve
Characteristic at Decel End
SCrv Dec @
End
S-curve is used to further soften the starting and stopping ramp. The longer the Scurve time, the softer the starting and stopping ramp.
Note: With this setting, accel/ decel times will be exactly half of the start and finish times of the Scurve characteristic time.
Run command
Output frequency
ON
C2-02
C2-01
OFF
C2-03
C2-04
Time
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 to
2.50
0.20sec
0.20sec
0.20sec
0.00sec
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
* The setting range for accel/decel time will differ depending on C1-10 (Accel/Decel Time Units). If C1-10 is set to "0", then the setting range will change to 0.00sec to 600.00sec.
* 1. Varies by Duty Rating
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Time Units
Set the acceleration/deceleration time units using C1-10. Parameter C1-10 is set to 1 at the factory.
Set value
0
1
Details
The acceleration/deceleration time settings range is 0.00 to 600.00 in units of 0.01 s.
The acceleration/deceleration time settings range is 0.00 to 600.00 in units of 0.1 s.
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using Multi-Function Input Terminal
Commands
Using the drive, you can set four acceleration times and four deceleration times. When the multi-function input terminals (H1 ) are set to 7 (acceleration/deceleration time selection 1) and 1A (acceleration/deceleration time selection 2), you can switch the acceleration/deceleration time even during operation by combining the ON/OFF status of the terminals.
The following table shows the acceleration/deceleration time switching combinations.
Acceleration/Deceleration Time Selection 1
Terminal
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Acceleration/Deceleration Time Selection 2
Terminal
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Acceleration Time
C1-01
C1-03
C1-05
C1-07
Deceleration Time
C1-02
C1-04
C1-06
C1-08
Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Automatically
Use this setting when you want to switch acceleration/deceleration time automatically using the set frequency.
When the output frequency reaches the set value in C1-11, the drive switches the acceleration/deceleration time automatically as shown in the following diagram.
Set C1-11 to a value other than 0.0Hz. If C1-11 is set to 0.0Hz, the function will be disabled.
Output frequency
Acceleration/ deceleration time switching frequency
(C1-11)
C1-07 rate C1-01 rate C1-02 rate C1-08 rate
When output frequency C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using
Acceleration/deceleration Time 1 (C1-01, C1-02).
When output frequency < C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using
Acceleration/deceleration Time 4 (C1-07, C1-08).
Fig 6.18 Acceleration/deceleration Time Switching Frequency
Adjusting Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using an Analog Input
If you set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function
Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to 5 (acceleration/deceleration time gain), you can adjust the acceleration/deceleration time using terminal A2's input voltage.
The drive's acceleration time when the acceleration time has been set in C1-01 is as follows:
Acceleration time = C1-01 set value x acceleration/deceleration time gain
6-
17
6
-18
Acceleration/deceleration time gain (set value: 5)
(Acceleration/deceleration gain from 1 to
10 V) = 10 V/Input voltage (V) x 10 (%)
INFO
Fig 6.19 Acceleration/Deceleration Time Gain Using an Analog Input
Entering S-curve Characteristics in the Acceleration and Deceleration Time
By performing acceleration and deceleration using an S-curve pattern, you can reduce shock when starting and stopping the machine.
Using the drive, you can set an S-curve characteristic time for each of the following: Acceleration start time, deceleration start time, acceleration end time, and deceleration end time.
Set the S-curve characteristic time to lengthen acceleration/deceleration time as follows:
Acceleration time = Selected acceleration time + (Acceleration start time S-curve characteristic time +
Acceleration end time S-curve characteristic time) / 2
Deceleration time = Selected deceleration time + (Deceleration start time S-curve characteristic time +
Deceleration end time S-curve characteristic time) / 2
Setting Example
The S-curve characteristic when switching operation (forward/reverse) is shown in the following diagram.
Forward
Reverse
C2-02 C2-03 C2-04
Output frequency
C2-01
C2-01
C2-02
Fig 6.20 S-curve Characteristic during Operation Switching
C2-03
C2-04
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Accelerating and Decelerating Heavy Loads (Dwell Function)
The dwell function stores the output frequency when starting or stopping heavy loads. By temporarily storing the output frequency, you can prevent the motor from stalling. When using the dwell function, you must select a deceleration stop. Set b1-03 (Stopping Method Selection) to 0.
Related Parameters
Name
Parameter
Number Display
Description b6-01 b6-02 b6-03 b6-04
Dwell
Reference at
Start
Dwell Ref
@Start
Dwell Time at Start
Run command ON
OFF
Output frequency
Dwell
Time@Start
Dwell
Frequency at
Stop b6-02 b6-01 b6-03 b6-04
Time
Dwell Ref
@Stop
Dwell Time at Stop
Dwell Time
@Stop
The dwell function is used to temporarily hold the frequency when driving a motor with heavy load.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
0.0 to
400.0
0.0Hz
0.0 to
10.0
0.0sec
0.0 to
400.0
0.0Hz
0.0 to
10.0
0.0sec
No
No
No
No
A A A
A A A
A A A
A A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
6-
19
6
-20
Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration (Stall Prevention
During Acceleration Function)
The Stall Prevention During Acceleration function prevents the motor from stalling if a heavy load is placed on the motor, or sudden rapid acceleration is performed.
If you set L3-01 to 1 (enabled) and the drive output current exceeds the -15% level of the set value in L3-02, the acceleration rate will begin to slow down. When L3-02 is exceeded, acceleration will stop.
If you set L3-01 to 2 (optimum adjustment), the motor current accelerates to the value set in L3-02. With this setting, the acceleration time setting is ignored.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
L3-01
L3-02
L3-03
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Stall
Prevention
Selection
During Accel
StallP Accel
Sel
Selects the stall prevention method used to prevent excessive current during acceleration.
0: Disabled - Motor accelerates at active acceleration rate. The motor may stall if load is too heavy or accel time is too short.
1: General Purpose - When output current exceeds L3-02 level, acceleration stops. Acceleration will continue when the output current level falls below the
L3-02 level.
2: Intelligent - The active acceleration rate is ignored.
Acceleration is completed in the shortest amount of time without exceeding the current value set in L3-02.
Stall
Prevention
Level During
Acceleration
StallP Accel
Lvl
This function is enabled when
L3-01 is "1" or "2".
Drive rated current is 100%.
Decrease the set value if stalling or excessive current occurs with factory setting.
0 to 2 1
0 to 200 150%
Stall
Prevention
Limit During
Acceleration
StallP CHP
Lvl
Sets the lower limit for stall prevention during acceleration, as a percentage of the drive's rated current, when operation is in the frequency range above E1-06
(constant power region).
0 to 100 50%
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
No
No
No
No
No
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Time Chart
The following figure shows the frequency characteristics when L3-01 is set to 1.
Output current
Stall level during acceleration
Time
Output frequency
Output frequency is controlled to prevent the motor stalling.
Time
Fig 6.21 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration
Setting Precautions
• If the motor capacity is small compared to the drive capacity, or if the motor is operated using the factory settings, resulting in the motor stalling, lower the set value of L3-02.
•
•
If using the motor in the constant output range, L3-02 will be automatically lowered to prevent stalling.
L3-03 is the limit value to prevent the stall prevention level in the constant output range from being reduced more than necessary.
Set the parameters as a percent taking the drive rated voltage to be 100%.
Stall prevention level during acceleration
L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration)
L3-02 x L3-03 (Stall Prevention Limit during Acceleration)
Output frequency
E1-06
Base Frequency (FA)
Fig 6.22 Stall Prevention Level and Limit During Acceleration
6-
21
6
-22
Preventing Overvoltage During Deceleration (Stall Prevention During
Deceleration Function)
The Stall Prevention During Deceleration function makes the rate of deceleration more gentle to suppress increases in DC bus voltage when the DC bus voltage exceeds the set value during motor deceleration.
This function automatically lengthens the deceleration time with respect to the bus voltage, even if the deceleration time has been set to a considerably small value.
If L3-04 is set to 1 or 2, when the main circuit DC voltage approaches the stall prevention level during deceleration, deceleration stops, and when deceleration falls below the level, is restarted. Using this operation, deceleration time is automatically lengthened. If L3-04 is set to 1, deceleration time returns to the set value, and if L3-04 is set to 2, deceleration is automatically adjusted to a faster deceleration time within the range of the stall prevention level during deceleration.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
L3-04
Stall
Prevention
Selection
During
Deceleration
StallP Decel
Sel
When using a braking resistor, use setting "0". Setting "3" is used in specific applications.
0: Disabled - The drive decelerates at the active deceleration rate. If the load is too large or the deceleration time is too short, an
OV fault may occur.
1: General Purpose - The drive decelerates at the active deceleration rate, but if the main circuit DC bus voltage reaches the stall prevention level (380/
760Vdc), deceleration will stop.
Deceleration will continue once the DC bus level drops below the stall prevention level.
2: Intelligent - The active deceleration rate is ignored and the drive decelerates as fast as possible w/o hitting OV fault level. Range: C1-02 / 10.
3: Stall Prevention w/ Braking
Resistor - Stall prevention during deceleration is enabled in coordination with dynamic braking.
0 to 3
* In Flux Vector or in Open Loop Vector 2, the setting range becomes 0 to 2.
* 1 No Q Q Q Q Q
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Setting Example
An example of stall prevention during deceleration when L3-04 is set to 1 as shown below.
Output frequency Deceleration time controlled to prevent overvoltage
Time
Deceleration time
(set value)
Fig 6.23 Stall Prevention During Deceleration Operation
Setting Precautions
• The stall prevention level during deceleration differs depending on the drive capacity. Refer to the following table for details.
200-240Vclass
Drive Capacity Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration (V)
380
760
380-480Vclass
E1-01 400 V
E1-01 < 400 V 660
•
•
•
When using the braking option (braking resistor, Braking Resistor Units, and Braking Units), be sure to set parameter L3-04 to 0 or 3.
To decelerate at a shorter time than the deceleration time set when L3-04 is set to 0 with the braking option enabled, set L3-04 to 3.
The setting of L3-04 is ignored for flux vector control or open-loop vector control 2.
6-
23
6
-24
Adjusting Frequency References
This section explains methods of adjusting frequency references.
Adjusting Analog Frequency References
Gain and bias are among the parameters used to adjust analog inputs.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
H3-01
H3-02
H3-03
H3-04
H3-05
H3-06
H3-07
Terminal A3
Function
Selection
Terminal A3
Sel
Terminal A3
Gain Setting
Terminal A3
Gain
Terminal A3
Bias Setting
Terminal A3
Bias
Terminal A1
Signal Level
Selection
Term A1 Lvl
Sel
Terminal A1
Gain Setting
Terminal A1
Gain
Terminal A1
Bias Setting
Terminal A1
Bias
Terminal A3
Signal Level
Selection
Term A3 Signal
Sets the signal level of terminal
A1.
0: 0 to 10Vdc
1: -10 to +10Vdc
[11-bit plus polarity sign]
Sets the output level when 10V is input, as a percentage of the maximum output frequency
(E1-04).
Sets the output level when 0V is input, as a percentage of the maximum output frequency
(E1-04).
Sets the signal level of terminal
A3.
0: 0 to 10Vdc
1: -10 to +10Vdc
[Refer to table "H3-05, H3-09
Settings" for multi-function selections]
Sets the output level when 10V is input.
Sets the frequency reference when 0V is input.
0 or 1
0.0 to
1000.0
-100.0 to
100.0
0 or 1
0 to 1F
0.0 to
1000.0
-100.0 to
100.0
0
100.0%
0.0%
0
2
100.0%
0.0%
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Adjusting Frequency References
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
H3-08
H3-09
H3-10
H3-11
H3-12
Terminal A2
Signal Level
Selection
Term A2 Signal
Selects the signal level of terminal A2.
0: 0 to 10Vdc (switch S1-2 must be in the OFF position).
1: -10 to +10Vdc (switch S1-2 must be in the OFF position).
2: 4 to 20mA (switch S1-2 must be in the ON position)
Note: Switch between current or voltage inputs by using (S1-2) switch on the terminal board.
Terminal A2
Function
Selection
Selects the function of terminal
A2.
Same choices as Terminal A3
Function Selection (H3-05).
Terminal A2
Sel
Terminal A2
Gain Setting
Terminal A2
Gain
Terminal A2
Bias Setting
Sets the output level when 10V is input.
Terminal A2
Bias
Sets the output level when 0V is input.
Analog Input
Filter Time
Constant
Filter Avg Time
This parameter adjusts the filter on all 3 analog inputs. Increase to add stability, decrease to improve response.
0 to 2
0 to 1F
0.0 to
1000.0
-100.0
to
100.0
0.00 to
2.00
2
0
100.0%
0.0%
0.03sec
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Adjusting Analog Frequency Reference Using Parameters
The frequency reference is input from the control circuit terminals using analog voltage and current.
If using frequency reference terminal A1 as an input terminal, perform adjustments using parameters H3-02 and H3-03. If using multi-function analog input terminal A2 as a frequency reference terminal, perform adjustments using H3-10 and H3-11.
Adjustment can be made using H3-06 and H3-07 when multi-function analog input terminal A3 is used as a frequency reference terminal.
Frequency reference Frequency reference
(H3-06)
(H3-07)
Terminal A1 (A3) input voltage
Terminal A1, A3 input
Fig 6.24 Terminals A1 and A2 Inputs
Terminal A2 input
Terminal A2 input voltage (current)
6-
25
6
-26
Adjusting Frequency Gain Using an Analog Input
When H3-09 or H3-05 is set to 1 (frequency gain), you can adjust the frequency gain using the analog input terminal A2 or A3.
Frequency gain
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 input level
Fig 6.25 Frequency Gain Adjustment (Terminal A2 Input)
The frequency gain for terminal A1 is the sum of H3-02 and terminal A2 gain. For example, when H3-02 is set to 100% and terminal A2 is set to 5 V, the terminal A1 frequency reference will be 50%.
Frequency reference
100% H3-02
50%
Terminal A1 input voltage
0 10 V
Setting Precautions
H3-05 cannot be set to 0.
Adjusting Frequency Bias Using an Analog Input
When parameter H3-09 or H3-05 is set to 0 (add to terminal A1), the frequency equivalent to the terminal A2 or A3 input voltage is added to A1 as a bias.
Frequency bias
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 or A3 input level
Fig 6.26 Frequency Bias Adjustment (Terminal A2 or A3 Input)
Adjusting Frequency References
For example, if H3-02 is 100%, H3-03 is 0%, and terminal A2 is set to 1 V, the frequency reference from terminal A1 when 0Vis input to A1 will be 10%.
Frequency reference
H3-02
10%
Bias
0 V 10 V
Terminal A1 input voltage
Operation Avoiding Resonance (Jump Frequency Function)
The jump frequency function operates the motor while avoiding resonance caused by characteristic frequencies in the machinery.
This function is effective in creating a frequency reference dead band.
During constant-speed operation, operation within the jump frequency range is prohibited. Smooth operation still used during acceleration and deceleration, i.e., jumps are not performed.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 d3-01 d3-02 d3-03 d3-04
Jump
Frequency 1
Jump Freq 1
Jump
Frequency 2
Jump Freq 2
Jump
Frequency 3
Jump Freq 3
Jump
Frequency
Width
Jump
Bandwidth
This parameter allows programming of up to three prohibited frequency reference points for eliminating problems with resonant vibration of the motor / machine. This feature does not actually eliminate the selected frequency values, but will accelerate and decelerate the motor through the prohibited bandwidth.
This parameter determines the width of the deadband around each selected prohibited frequency reference point. A setting of "1.0" will result in a deadband of +/- 1.0Hz..
0.0 to
400.0
0.0
to
20.0
0.0Hz
0.0Hz
0.0Hz
1.0Hz
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
The relationship between the output frequency and the jump frequency reference is as follows:
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
6-
27
6
-28
Output frequency
Frequency reference descending
Jump frequency width d3-04
Frequency reference ascending
Jump frequency width d3-04
Jump frequency width d3-04
Jump frequency reference
Jump frequency
3 (d3-03)
Jump frequency
2 (d3-02)
Jump frequency
1 (d3-01)
Fig 6.27 Jump Frequency
Setting Jump Frequency Reference Using an Analog Input
When parameter H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) is set to A (jump frequency), you can change the jump frequency using the terminal A2 input level.
Jump frequency
Max. output frequency
E1-04
0 V
(4 mA)
10 V
(20 mA)
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 or A3 input level
Fig 6.28 Jump Frequency Setting Using an Analog Input
Setting Precautions
• Set the jump frequency according to the following formula: d3-01 d3-02 d3-03 > Analog input.
• When parameters d3-01 to d3-03 are set to 0Hz, the jump frequency function is disabled.
Adjusting Frequency References
Adjusting Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Inputs
The frequency reference can be adjusted when b1-01 (Reference Selection) is set to 4 (Pulse Train Input). Set the pulse frequency in parameter H6-02 to 100% reference, and then adjust the gain and bias accordingly using H6-03 and H6-04.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
H6-01
H6-02
H6-03
H6-04
H6-05
Terminal RP
Pulse Train
Input
Function
Selection
Selects the function of pulse train terminal RP.
0: Frequency reference
1: PID feedback value
2: PID setpoint value
Pulse Input
Sel
Pulse Train
Input Scaling Sets the number of pulses (in Hz) that is equal to the maximum output
Pulse In frequency E1-04.
Scaling
Pulse Train
Input Gain
Pulse Input
Gain
Pulse Train
Input Bias
Pulse Input
Bias
Sets the output level when the pulse train input is at 100% as a percentage of maximum output frequency E1-04.
Sets the output level when the pulse train input is 0Hz as a percentage of maximum output frequency E1-04.
Pulse Train
Input Filter
Time
Pulse In Filter
Sets the pulse train input filter time constant in seconds.
0 to 2
1000 to
32000
0.0 to
1000.0
-100.0 to
100.0
0.00 to
2.00
0
1440Hz
100.0%
0.0%
0.10sec
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
The following diagram shows the method for adjusting the frequency reference using pulse inputs.
Pulse
RP
Cycle measurement
Filter
1
1+sT
H6-05
Gain and bias
H6-03
H6-04
0% 100%
=0
=1
=2
H6-01
Scaling using H6-02
Fig 6.29 Frequency Reference Adjustments Using Pulse Train Inputs
Master speed frequency
PID feedback
PID target value
6-
29
6
-30
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit
Function)
This section explains how to limit the motor speed.
Limiting Maximum Output Frequency
If you do not want the motor to rotate above a given frequency, use parameter d2-01.
Set the upper limit value of the drive output frequency as a percent, taking E1-04 (Maximum Output Frequency) to be 100%.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 d2-01
Frequency Reference Upper
Limit
Ref Upper
Limit
Determines maximum frequency reference, set as a percentage of maximum output frequency
(E1-04). If the frequency
reference is above this value, actual drive speed will be limited to this value. This parameter applies to all frequency reference sources.
0.0
to
110.0
100.0% No A A A A A
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function)
Limiting Minimum Frequency
If you do not want the motor to rotate at below a given frequency, use parameters d2-02 or d2-03.
There are two methods of limiting the minimum frequency, as follows:
• Adjust the minimum level for all frequencies.
• Adjust the minimum level for the master speed frequency (i.e., the lower levels of the jog frequency, multistep speed frequency, and auxiliary frequency will not be adjusted).
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 d2-02 d2-03
Frequency
Reference
Lower Limit
Ref Lower
Limit
Master Speed
Reference
Lower Limit
Ref1 Lower
Limit
Determines maximum frequency reference, set as a percentage of maximum output frequency
(E1-04). If the frequency reference is above this value, actual drive speed will be limited to this value. This parameter applies to all frequency reference sources.
Determines maximum frequency reference, set as a percentage of maximum output frequency (E1-
04). If the frequency reference is above this value, actual drive speed will be limited to this value.
This parameter applies to all frequency reference sources.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
0.0%
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Adjusting Frequency Lower Limit Using an Analog Input
If you set parameter H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multifunction Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to 9 (output frequency lower level), you can adjust the frequency lower level using the terminal A2 input level.
Output frequency lower level
Max. output frequency
E1-04
INFO
0 V
(4 mA)
10 V
(20 mA)
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 or A3 input level
Fig 6.30 Output Frequency Lower Level for Multi-function Analog Input
If parameter d2-02 and terminal A2 output frequency lower level have been set at the same time, the larger set value will become the frequency lower limit.
6-
31
Improved Operating Efficiency
This section explains functions for improving motor operating efficiency.
6
-32
Reducing Motor Speed Fluctuation (Slip Compensation Function)
When the load is large, the amount of motor slip also grows large and the motor speed decreases. The slip compensation function controls the motor at a constant speed, regardless of changes in load. When the motor is operating at the rated load, parameter E2-02 (Motor Rated Slip) the frequency in parameter C3-01 is added to the output frequency.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
C3-01
C3-02
C3-03
C3-04
C3-05
Slip
Compensation
Gain
Slip Comp Gain
This parameter is used to increase motor speed to account for motor slip by boosting the output frequency. If the speed is lower than the frequency reference, increase C3-01. If the speed is higher than the frequency reference, decrease C3-01.
Note: Adjustment is not normally required. When operating in
Open Loop Vector, this parameter works as a function to set the proper amount of gain.
Slip
Compensation
Primary Delay
Time
Slip Comp
Time
This parameter adjusts the filter on the output of the slip compensation function. Increase to add stability, decrease to improve response.
• Reduce the setting when slip compensation response is slow.
• When speed is not stabilized, increase the setting.
Slip
Compensation
Limit
Slip Comp
Limit
Slip
Compensation
Selection
During
Regeneration
Slip Comp
Regen
Output Voltage
Limit Operation
Selection
Output V limit
This parameter sets the upper limit for the slip compensation function. It is set as a percentage of motor rated slip (E2-02).
Determines whether slip compensation is enabled or disabled during regenerative operation.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Determines if the motor magnetic flux is automatically decreased when output voltage saturation occurs.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0.0
to
2.5
0 to
10000
0 to
250
0 or 1
0 or 1
1.0*
200ms
*
200%
0
0 *1
Yes
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
No
No
No
No
No
No
* The display shows the factory settings for Open Loop Vector. Default settings will change in accordance with the control mode.
* 1. Factory default changes based on motor control mode.
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
No
No
A
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
No
No
No
A
Improved Operating Efficiency
Adjusting Slip Compensation Gain
You can switch the C3-01 parameter settings as shown below by changing the control method.
• V/f control without PG: 0.0
•
•
Open-loop vector control: 1.0
Flux vector control: 1.0
Set C3-01 to 1.0 to compensate the rated slip set using the rated torque output status.
Adjust the slip compensation gain using the following procedure.
1. Set E2-02 (Motor Rated Slip) and E2-03 (Motor No-load Current) correctly.
You can calculate the motor rated slip from the values on the motor nameplate using the following formula.
Amount of motor rated slip (Hz) = Motor rated frequency (Hz) - No. of rated rotations (min
1 .) No. of motor poles / 120
Set the values for rated voltage, rated frequency, and no-load current in the motor unladen current. The motor rated slip is set automatically in the vector control using autotuning.
2. In V/f control, set C3-01 to 1.0. Setting this parameter to 0.0 disables slip compensation.
3. Apply a load, and measure the speed to adjust the slip compensation gain. Adjust the slip compensation gain by 0.1 at a time. If the speed is less than the target value, increase the slip compensation gain, and if the speed is greater than the target value, reduce the slip compensation gain.
For flux vector control, the slip compensation gain is used as the motor temperature compensation gain. When the motor temperate increases, the motor’s internal constant increases, resulting in an increase in slip. If C3-01 is set, the amount of slip is adjusted as the temperature rises. Set C3-01 if the amount of torque varies with the temperature when using torque control or a torque limit. The larger the value of C3-01, the larger the compensation.
Adjusting Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant
Set the slip compensation primary delay time constant in ms.
You can switch the factory settings as follows by changing the control method.
• V/f control without PG: 2000ms
• Open-loop vector control: 200ms
Normally, there is no need to make these settings. When the slip compensation response is low, lower the set value. When the speed is unstable, increase the set value.
Adjusting Slip Compensation Limit
Set the upper limit for the slip compensation amount as a percent, taking the motor rated slip amount as 100%.
If the speed is lower than the target value but does not change even when you adjust the slip compensation gain, the motor may have reached the slip compensation limit. Increase the limit, and check the speed again.
Make the settings, however, to make sure that the value of the slip compensation limit and reference frequency does not exceed the tolerance of the machine.
The following diagram shows the slip compensation limit for the constant torque range and fixed output range.
6-
33
6
-34
Slip compensation limit
Output frequency
E1-06: Base frequency
E1-04: Maximum output frequency
Fig 6.31 Slip Compensation Limit
Selecting Slip Compensation Function During Regeneration
Set whether to enable or disable the slip compensation function during regeneration.
If the slip compensation function operates during regeneration, you might have to use the braking option
(braking resistor, Braking Resistor Unit, and Braking Unit) to momentarily increase the regenerative amount.
Selecting Output Voltage Limit Operation
If output voltage saturation occurs while the output voltage limit operation is disabled, the output current will not change, but torque control accuracy will be lost. If torque control accuracy is required, change the settings to enable the output voltage limit operation.
If the output voltage limit operation is enabled, motor magnetic flux current is controlled automatically, and torque control accuracy is maintained to limit the output voltage references. Consequently, the output current will increase by approximately 10% maximum (with rated load) compared with when the output voltage limit operation is disabled, so check the drive current margin.
Setting Precautions
• If using the device at medium to low speed only, if the power supply voltage is 10% or more higher than the motor rated voltage, or if the torque control accuracy at high speeds is insufficient, it is not necessary to change the output voltage limit operation.
• If the power supply voltage is too low compared with the motor rated voltage, torque control accuracy may be lost even if the output voltage limit operation is enabled.
Improved Operating Efficiency
Compensating for Insufficient Torque at Startup and Low-speed Operation (Torque Compensation)
The torque compensation function detects that the motor load has increased, and increases the output torque.
V/f control calculates and adjusts the motor primary loss voltage according to the output voltage (V), and compensates for insufficient torque at startup and during low-speed operation. Calculate the compensation voltage as follows: Motor primary voltage loss parameter C4-01.
Vector control separates the motor excitation current and the torque current by calculating the motor primary current, and controlling each of the two separately.
Calculate the torque current as follows: Calculated torque reference C4-01
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
C4-01
C4-02
Torq Comp
Gain
Torq Comp
Gain
This parameter sets the gain for the drive's automatic torque boost function to match the drive's output voltage to the motor load.
This parameter helps to produce better starting torque. It determines the amount of torque or voltage boost based upon motor current, motor resistance, and output frequency.
Note: Adjustment is not normally required.
Torque
Compensation
Primary Delay
Time
Torq Comp
Time
This parameter adjusts the filter on the output of the torque compensation function. Increase to add stability, decrease to improve response.
Note: Adjustment is not normally required.
0.00 to
2.50
0 to
10000
1.00
20ms
*
Yes
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
* The display shows the factory settings for Open loop vector 1 (OLV1). Default settings will change in accordance with the control mode.
No
No
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
No
6-
35
6
-36
Adjusting Torque Compensation Gain
Normally, there is no need to make this adjustment. Do not adjust the torque compensation gain when using open-loop vector control.
Adjust the torque compensation gain using V/f control in the following circumstances.
• If the cable is very long, increase the set value.
•
•
If the (maximum applicable) motor capacity is smaller than the drive capacity, increase the set value.
If the motor is vibrating, reduce the set value.
Adjust this parameter so that the output current during low-speed rotation does not exceed the drive rated output current range.
Adjusting the Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant
Set the torque compensation function primary delay in ms.
You can switch the factory settings as follows by changing the control method settings:
• V/f control without PG: 200ms
•
•
V/f control with PG: 200ms
Open-loop vector control: 20ms
Normally, there is no need to make this setting. Adjust the parameter as shown below.
• If the motor is vibrating, increase the set value.
• If the motor response is low, decrease the set value.
Improved Operating Efficiency
Hunting-prevention Function
The hunting-prevention function suppresses hunting when the motor is operating with a light load. This function can be used in V/f without PG and V/f with PG.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 n1-01 n1-02
Hunting
Prevention
Selection
Hunt Prev
Select
Hunting
Prevention
Gain Setting
Hunt Prev Gain
If the motor vibrates while lightly loaded, hunting prevention may reduce the vibration.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Sets the gain for the Hunting
Prevention Function.
If the motor vibrates while lightly loaded and n1-01=1, increase the gain by 0.1 until vibration ceases.
If the motor stalls while n1-01=1, decrease the gain by 0.1 until the stalling ceases.
0 or 1
0.00 to
2.50
1
1.00
No
No
A
A
A
A
No
No
No
No
No
No
6-
37
6
-38
Stabilizing Speed (Speed Feedback Detection Function)
The speed feedback detection control (AFR) function measures the stability of the speed when a load is suddenly applied, by calculating the amount of fluctuation of the torque current feedback value, and compensating the output frequency with the amount of fluctuation.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 n2-01 n2-02
Speed
Feedback
Detection
Control (AFR)
Gain
AFR Gain
Sets the internal speed feedback detection control gain in the automatic frequency regulator
(AFR).
Normally, there is no need to change this setting. Adjust this parameter as follows:
- If hunting occurs, increase the set value.
- If response is low, decrease the set value.
Adjust the setting by 0.05 units at a time, while checking the response.
Speed
Feedback
Detection
Control (AFR)
Time Constant
AFR Time
Sets the time constant to control the rate of change in the speed feedback detection control.
0.00 to
10.00
0
to
2000
1.00
50ms
No
No
No No
No No
A
A
No
No
No
No
Machine Protection
Machine Protection
This section explains functions for protecting the machine.
Reducing Noise and Leakage Current
The switching frequency of the drive’s output transistor can be changed to reduce carrier noise and leakage current from the motor.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
C6-02
C6-03
C6-04
C6-05
Carrier
Frequency
Selection
CarrierFreq
Sel
Selects the number of pulses per second of the output voltage waveform. Setting range determined by C6-01 setting.
0: Low noise
1: Fc = 2.0 kHz
2: Fc = 5.0 kHz
3: Fc = 8.0 kHz
4: Fc = 10.0 kHz
5: Fc = 12.5 kHz
6: Fc = 15.0 kHz
OF: Program (Determined by the settings of
C6-03 thru C6-05)
Sets the carrier frequency upper limit and lower limit in kHz units.
The carrier frequency gain is set as follows:
Carrier
Frequency
Upper Limit
CarrierFreq
Max
Carrier frequency
Carrier
Frequency
Lower Limit
CarrierFreq
Min
Output frequency x (C6-05) x K
Output frequency
(Max. output frequency)
Carrier
Frequency
Proportional
Gain
CarrierFreq
Gain
K is a coefficient that depends on the setting of C6-03.
C6-03 10.0 kHz: K = 3
10.0 kHz > C6-03 5.0 kHz: K = 2
5.0 kHz > C6-03: K = 1
Maximum carrier frequency allowed when
C6-02 = F.
Note: Carrier frequency is set to C6-03
(upper limit) when operating in Vector
Control Mode.
C6-05 Sets the relationship of output frequency to carrier frequency when
C6-02 = OF.
1 to F
2.0 to
15.0
*3 *4
0.4
to
15.0
*3 *4
00 to
99
*4
6
*2
15.0
kHz
*2
15.0
kHz
*2
00
No
No
No
No
Q Q
A A
A A
A A
Q
A
No
No
A No *5
A
No
No
No
No
No
C6-11
Carrier
Frequency
Selection for
Open Loop
Vector 2
Carrier Freq
Sel
Selects the carrier frequency during Vector
Control 2 wo/PG.
1: 2kHz (3-phase modulation)
2: 4kHz (3-phase modulation)
3: 6kHz (3-phase modulation)
4: 8kHz (3-phase modulation)
1 to 4
* 1. The setting range depends on the control method of the drive.
* 2. The factory setting depends on the capacity of the drive.
* 3. The setting range depends on the capacity of the drive.
* 4. This parameter can be monitored or set only when 1 is set for C6-01 and F is set for C6-02.
* 5. Displayed in Quick Programming Mode when motor 2 is set for a multi-function input.
4
*2
No
No
*5
No
*5
No
*5
No
*5
Q
6-
39
6
-40
Control Mode and Carrier Frequency Settings
Carrier frequency settings are restricted as listed in the following table according to the control mode selection.
Control Mode Carrier Frequency
V/f control with or without a PG
Open-loop vector control 1 or
Flux vector control
Open-loop vector control 2
1: 2.0 kHz
2: 5.0 kHz
3: 8.0 kHz
4: 10.0 kHz
5: 12.5 kHz
6: 15.0 kHz
F: Any setting*
Detailed settings are available in C6-03, C6-04, and C6-05.
1: 2.0 kHz
2: 5.0 kHz
3: 8.0 kHz
4: 10.0 kHz
5: 12.5 kHz
6: 15.0 kHz
F: Any setting*
The upper limit of the carrier frequency is determined by C6-03.
1: 2.0 kHz
2: 4.0 kHz
3: 6.0 kHz
4: 8.0 kHz
* The upper limit of the carrier frequency depends on the drive capacity.
Carrier Frequency Setting Precautions
When selecting the carrier frequency, observe the following precautions.
• Adjust the carrier frequency according to the cases shown below.
If the wiring distance between drive and motor is long: Set the carrier frequency low. (Use the following values as guidelines.)
50 m or less 100 m or less Over 100 m Wiring Length
C6-02 (carrier frequency selection) setting
1 to 6 (15 kHz) 1 to 4 (10 kHz) 1 to 2 (5 kHz)
If speed and torque are inconsistent at low speeds: Set the carrier frequency low.
If leakage current from the drive is large: Set the carrier frequency low.
If metallic noise from the motor is large: Set the carrier frequency high.
• When using V/f control or V/f control with PG, you can vary the carrier frequency according to the output frequency, as shown in the following diagram, by setting C6-03 (Carrier Frequency Upper Limit), C6-04
(Carrier Frequency Lower Limit), and C6-05 (Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain).
Carrier Frequency
C6-03
C6-04
*
Output frequency C6-05
K*
K is the coefficient determined by the set value in C6-03.
C6-03 10.0 kHz: K=3
10.0 kHz > C6-03 5.0 kHz: K=2
5.0 kHz > C6-03: K=1
Output frequency
E1-04
Max. Output Frequency
Fig 6.32
Machine Protection
•
•
•
•
With vector control, the carrier frequency is fixed to the Carrier Frequency Upper Limit in C6-03 if userset or by the carrier frequency set in C6-02.
To fix the carrier frequency, set C6-03 and C6-04 to the same value, or set C6-05 to 0.
If the settings are as shown below, OPE11 (Parameter setting error) will occur.
If Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain (C6-05) > 6 and C6-03 < C6-04.
Depending on the carrier frequency setting, the drive’s overload level may be reduced. Even when the overload current falls to below 150%, OL2 (Drive overload) will be detected. The drive overload current reduction level is shown below.
Overload reduction level
100%
80%
50%
0 10kH z 15kH z
Carrier frequency
Fig 6.33 Overload Reduction Level for V/f Control, V/f Control with PG, Open-loop Vector Control 1, and Flux Vector Control
Overload reduction level
100%
87%
200-240 V, 30 to 75 kW
50%
0 4kHz 8kHz
Carrier frequency
Fig 6.34 Overload Reduction Level for Open-loop Vector Control 2
6-
41
6
-42
Limiting Motor Torque (Torque Limit Function)
The motor torque limit function is enabled only with open-loop torque control.
In the open-loop vector control method, the user-set value is applied to the torque limit by calculating internally the torque output by the motor. Enable this function if you do not want a torque above a specified amount to be applied to the load, or if you do not want a regeneration value above a specified amount to occur.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
L7-01
L7-02
L7-03
L7-04
Forward
Torque
Limit
Torq Limit
Fwd
Reverse
Torque
Limit
Torq Limit
Rev
Forward
Regenerative Torque
Limit
Torq Lmt
Fwd Rgn
Reverse
Regenerative Torque
Limit
Torq Lmt
Rev Rgn
Sets the torque limit value as a percentage of the motor rated torque. Four individual quadrants can be set.
Output torque
Positive torque
Reverse
Regenerative state
Regenerative state
No. of motor rotations
Forward
Negative torque
0 to 300 200%
0 to 300 200%
0 to 300 200%
0 to 300 200%
No
No
No
No
No No
No No
No No
No No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Multi-function Analog Input (H3-05, H3-09)
Setting
Value
Function Contents (100%)
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No Yes Yes Yes 10
11
12
15
Positive torque limit
Negative torque limit
Regenerative torque limit
Positive/negative torque limit
Motor's rated torque
Motor's rated torque
Motor's rated torque
Motor's rated torque
No
No
No
No
No Yes Yes Yes
No Yes Yes Yes
No Yes Yes Yes
Note The forward torque limit is the limit value when the analog input signal generates forward torque. This torque limit setting is enabled even when the analog input signal generates forward torque while the motor is operating (regeneration).
Machine Protection
Setting the Torque Limit in Parameters
Using L7-01 to L7-04, you can set individually four torque limits in the following directions: Forward drive, reverse drive, forward regeneration, and reverse regeneration.
Set the Torque Limit Value Using an Analog Input
You can change the analog input level torque limit value by setting the torque limit in multi-function analog input terminals A2 and A3.
The analog input terminal signal level is factory-set as follows:
Multi-function analog input terminal A2: 4 to 20mA
Multi-function analog input terminal A3: 0 to 10
The following diagram shows the relationship between the torque limits.
Output torque
Positive
Positive/negative torque limits
Forward torque limit
Regenerative torque limit
Reverse operation
Negative torque limit
Negative
Fig 6.35 Torque Limit by Analog Input
No. of motor rotations
Forward operation
Regenerative torque limit
Positive/negative torque limits
Setting Torque Limits Using Parameters and an Analog Input
The following block diagram shows the relationship between torque limit using parameters and torque limit using an analog input.
Terminal
A2 or A3
Multi-function analog input
Forward torque limit
(set value = 10)
Negative torque limit
(set value = 11)
Regenerative torque limit
(set value = 12)
Positive/negative torque limit
(set value = 15)
Positive forward drive torque
Reverse drive reverse torque
Parame-
Forward torque limit
(L7-01)
Reverse torque limit
(L7-02)
Forward regenerative torque limit (L7-03)
Reverse regenerative torque limit (L7-04)
Reverse positive regenerative torque
Forward negative regenerative torque
175% of drive rated current
Min: Minimum value priority circuit
Forward torque limit
Reverse torque limit
Forward regenerative torque limit
Reverse regenerative torque limit
Fig 6.36 Torque Limit Using Parameters and an Analog Input
6-
43
Setting Precautions
•
•
•
•
When the torque limit function is operating, control and compensation of the motor speed is disabled because torque control is given priority.
When using the torque limit to raise and lower loads, do not carelessly lower the torque limit value, as this may result in the motor falling or slipping.
Torque limits using an analog input are the upper limit value (during 10Vor 20mA input) of 100% of the motor rated torque. To make the torque limit value during 10Vor 20mA input 150% of the rated torque, set the input terminal gain to 150.0 (%). Adjust the gain for multi-function analog input terminal A2 using H3-
10 and for multi-function analog input terminal A3 using H3-06.
The torque limit accuracy is ±5% at the output frequency of 10Hz or above. When output frequency is less than 10Hz, accuracy is lowered.
6
-44
Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation
Stall prevention during operation prevents the motor from stalling by automatically lowering the drive's output frequency when a transient overload occurs while the motor is operating at a constant speed.
Stall prevention during operation is enabled only during V/f control. If the drive output current continues to exceed the setting in parameter L3-06 for 100ms or longer, the motor speed is reduced. Set whether to enable or disable deceleration time using parameter L3-05. Set the deceleration time using C1-02 (Acceleration time
1) or C1-04 (Acceleration Time 2).
If the drive output current reaches the set value in L3-06 - 2% (Drive Rated Output Current), the motor will accelerate again at the frequency set or the acceleration time set.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
L3-05
L3-06
Stall
Prevention
Selection
During
Running
StallP Run
Sel
Selects the stall prevention method to use to prevent drive faults during run.
0: Disabled - drive runs a set frequency. A heavy load may cause the drive to trip on an OC or OL fault.
1: Decel Time 1 - In order to avoid stalling during heavy loading, the drive will decelerate at Decel time 1 (C1-02) if the output current exceeds the level set by
L3-06. Once the current level drops below the L3-06 level, the drive will accelerate back to its frequency reference at the active acceleration rate.
2: Decel Time 2 - Same as setting 1 except the drive decelerates at
Decel Time 2 (C1-04).
When output frequency is 6Hz or less, stall prevention during run is disabled regardless of the setting in
L3-05.
Stall
Prevention
Level During
Running
StallP Run
Level
This parameter is enabled when L3-
05 is set to "1" or "2". drive rated current is set as 100%.
Decrease the set value if stalling or excessive current occurs with the factory settings.
0 to 2
30 to
200
1
160%
No
No
A
A
A
A
No
No
No
No
No
No
Machine Protection
Changing Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input
If you set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function
Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to 8 (stall prevention level during run), you can change the stall level during operation by setting H3-10 (Gain (Terminal A2)) and H3-11 (Bias (Terminal A2)) or H3-06 (Gain
(Terminal A3)) and H3-07 (Bias (Terminal A3).
The stall prevention level during operation enabled is the multi-function analog input terminal A2 or A3 input level or the set value in parameter L3-06, whichever is the smaller.
Stall prevention level during operation
Multi-function analog input terminal A2, A3 input level
(4 mA) (8.8 mA) (20 mA)
Fig 6.37 Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input
If the motor capacity is smaller than the drive capacity or the motor stalls when operating at the factory settings, lower the stall prevention level during operation.
INFO
Detecting Motor Torque
If an excessive load is placed on the machinery (overtorque) or the load is suddenly lightened (undertorque), you can output an alarm signal to multi-function output terminal M1-M2, M3-M4, M5-M6, P3-C3, or P4-C4.
To use the overtorque/undertorque detection function, set B, 17, 18, 19 (overtorque/undertorque detection NO/
NC) in one of the following parameters: H2-01 to H2-05 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, P1-PC, P2-
PC, P3-C3, and P4-C4 function selection).
The overtorque/undertorque detection level is the current level (Drive rated output current 100%) in V/f control, and the motor torque (motor rated torque 100%) in vector control.
6-
45
6
-46
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
L6-01
Name
Display
Torque
Detection
Selection 1
Torq Det 1
Sel
L6-02
Torque
Detection
Level 1
Torq Det 1
Lvl
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Determines the drive's response to an Overtorque/Undertorque condition. Overtorque and
Undertorque are determined by the settings in parameters L6-02 and
L6-03. The multi-function output settings "B" and "17" in the H2-oo parameter group are also active if programmed.
0: Disabled
1: OL3 at Speed Agree - Alarm
(Overtorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and
Operation continues after detection).
2: OL3 at RUN - Alarm
(Overtorque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection).
3: OL3 at Speed Agree - Fault
(Overtorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault).
4: OL3 at RUN - Fault (Overtorque
Detection is always active and drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault).
5: UL3 at Speed Agree - Alarm
(Undertorque Detection is only active during Speed Agree and operation continues after detection).
6: UL3 at RUN - Alarm
(Undertorque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection).
7: UL3 at Speed Agree - Fault
(Undertorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault).
8: UL3 at RUN - Fault
(Undertorque Detection is always active and drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault).
0 to 8 0
Sets the Overtorque/Undertorque detection level as a percentage of drive rated current or torque for
Torque Detection 1. Current detection for A1-02 = 0 or 1. Torque detection for
A1-02 = 2 or 3.
0 to 300 150%
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Machine Protection
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
L6-03
Torque
Detection
Time 1
Torq Det 1
Time
Torque
Detection
Selection 2
L6-04
L6-05
Torq Det 2
Sel
Torque
Detection
Level 2
Torq Det 2
Lvl
Sets the length of time an
Overtorque/Undertorque condition must exist before Torque Detection
1 is recognized by the drive.
0.0
to
10.0
Determines the drive's response to an Overtorque/Undertorque condition. Overtorque and
Undertorque are determined by the settings in parameters L6-05 and
L6-06. The multi-function output settings "18" and "19" in the H2-oo parameter group are also active if programmed.
0: Disabled
1: OL4 at Speed Agree - Alarm
(Overtorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and
Operation continues after detection).
2: OL4 at RUN - Alarm
(Overtorque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection).
3: OL4 at Speed Agree - Fault
(Overtorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and drive output will shut down on an
OL4 fault).
4: OL4 at RUN - Fault (Overtorque
Detection is always active and drive output will shut down on an
OL4 fault).
5: UL4 at Speed Agree - Alarm
(Undertorque Detection is only active during Speed Agree and operation continues after detection).
6: UL4 at RUN - Alarm
(Undertorque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection).
7: UL4 at Speed Agree - Fault
(Undertorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and drive output will shut down on an
OL4 fault).
8: UL4 at RUN - Fault
(Undertorque Detection is always active and drive output will shut down on an OL4 fault).
Sets the Overtorque/Undertorque detection level as a percentage of drive rated current or torque for
Torque Detection 2. Current detection for A1-02 = 0 or 1. Torque detection for
A1-02 = 2 or 3.
0 to 8
0
to
300
0.1sec
0
150%
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
6-
47
6
-48
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
L6-06
Torque
Detection
Time 2
Torq Det 2
Time
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Sets the length of time an
Overtorque/Undertorque condition must exist before torque detection 2 is recognized by the drive.
0.0
to
10.0
0.1sec
No A A A A A
Multi-function Output (H2-01 to H2-05)
B
17
18
19
Setting
Value
Function
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NO (NO contact: Overtorque/undertorque detection at ON)
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF)
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NO (NO Contact: Torque detection at ON)
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF)
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
L6-01 and L6-04 Set Values and LCD Indications
The relationship between alarms displayed by the Digital Operator when overtorque or undertorque is detected, and the set values in L6-01 and L6-04, is shown in the following table.
Set
Value
0
Function
LCD Indications
Overtorque/
Undertorque
Detection 1
Overtorque/
Undertorque
Detection 2
-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Overtorque/undertorque detection disabled.
Overtorque detection only with speed matching; operation continues after overtorque (warning).
Overtorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues after overtorque (warning).
Overtorque detection only with speed matching; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
Overtorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
Undertorque detection only with speed matching; operation continues after overtorque (warning).
Undertorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues after overtorque (warning).
Undertorque detection only with speed matching; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
Undertorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
OL3 flashes
OL3 flashes
OL3 lit
OL3 lit
UL3 flashes
UL3 flashes
UL3 lit
UL3 lit
OL4 flashes
OL4 flashes
OL4 lit
OL4 lit
UL4 flashes
UL4 flashes
UL4 lit
UL4 lit
Setting Example
The following diagram shows the time chart for overtorque and undertorque detection.
• Overtorque Detection
Motor current (output torque)
* *
L6-02 or L6-05
Machine Protection
Overtorque detection 1 NO or overtorque detection 2 NO
L6-03 or
L6-06
L6-03 or
L6-06
ON ON
* Overtorque detection disabled band is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated output
current (or motor rated torque).
• Undertorque Detection
Motor current (output torque)
*
L6-02 or L6-05
Undertorque detection 1 NO or Undertorque detection 2 NO
L6-03 or
L6-06
L6-03 or
L6-06 ON ON
* The undertorque detection disabled margin is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated output
current (or motor rated torque)
6-
49
6
-50
Changing Overtorque and Undertorque Detection Levels Using an Analog Input
If you set parameter H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multifunction Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to 7 (overtorque/undertorque detection level), you can change the overtorque/undertorque detection level.
If you change the overtorque/undertorque detection level using the multi-function analog input, only overtorque/undertorque detection level 1 will be enabled.
The following diagram shows the overtorque/undertorque detection level using an analog input.
Detection level
Multi-function analog input terminal A2, A3 input level
(4 mA) (20 mA)
Fig 6.38 Overtorque/Undertorque Detection Level Using an Analog Input
Multi-Function Analog Input (H3-05, H3-09)
Setting
Value
7
Function Contents (100%)
Overtorque/undertorque detection level
Motor rated torque for vector control
Drive rated output current for V/f control
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Machine Protection
Motor Overload Protection
You can protect the motor from overload using the drive's built-in electronic thermal overload relay.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
E2-01
E4-01
L1-01
L1-02
Motor Rated
Current
Motor Rated
FLA
Motor 2 Rated
Current
Motor Rated
FLA
Motor Overload
Protection
Selection
MOL Fault
Select
Motor Overload
Protection Time
MOL Time
Const
Sets the motor nameplate full load current in amperes (A). This value is automatically set during Auto-
Tuning.
Sets the motor 2 name plate full load current in amperes (A). This value is automatically set during
Auto-Tuning.
Sets the motor thermal overload protection (OL1) based on the cooling capacity of the motor.
0: Disabled
1: Standard Fan Cooled
(< 10:1 motor)
2: Standard Blower Cooled
( 10:1 motor)
3: Vector Motor
( 1000:1 motor)In some applications when the drive power supply is turned off, the thermal value is reset, so even if this parameter is set to 1, protection may not be effective.
When several motors are connected to one drive, set to 0 and ensure that each motor is installed with a protection device.
Sets the motor thermal overload protection (OL1) time. A larger
L1-02 time will increase the time before an OL1 fault will occur.
0.32 to
6.40
*2
0.32
to
6.40
*2
0 to 3
0.1 to
5.0
1.90 A
*1
1.90 A
*1
1
1.0 min
No
No
No
No
Q
A
Q
A
* 1. Factory settings will vary based on drive capacity (values given here are for 200-240V class, 0.4kW).
* 2. Setting range is 10% to 200% of the drive's rated output current (values given here are for 200-240V class, 0.4kW).
Q
A
Q
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Q
A
Q
A
Q
A
Q
A
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Q
A
Q
A
Multi-Function Outputs (H2-01 to H2-05)
Setting
Value
1F
Function
Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level)
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
6-
51
6
-52
Setting Motor Rated Current
Set the rated current value on the motor nameplate in parameters E2-01 (for motor 1) and E4-01 (for motor 2).
This set value is the electronic thermal base current.
Setting Motor Overload Protection Characteristics
Set the overload protection function in L1-01 according to the applicable motor.
The induction motor's cooling abilities differ according to the speed control range. Consequently, you must select the electronic thermal protection characteristics to match the applicable motor's tolerance load characteristics.
The following table shows the motor type and tolerance load characteristics.
L1-01
Set
Value
Motor Type Tolerance Load Characteristics Cooling Ability
Electronic Thermal
Operation (at 100%
Motor Load)
1
General-purpose motor (standard motor)
Short time 60 s.
Rated rotation speed
= 100% speed
3.7 kW max.
5.5 to 15 kW
18.5 kW min.
80% ED or Frame number Max.
30 min. speed of 200 LJ min.
50% ED or 30 min.
Continuous
Frame number
Max. speed of
200 LJ min.
Frame number Max. speed of 160 MJ to 160 LJ
Frame number Max. speed of 132 MJ
Use this motor for operations using a commercial power supply. This motor construction yields best cooling effect when operating at 50/
60 Hz.
When operating continuously at 50/60Hz or less, motor overload detection
(OL1) is detected. The drive outputs the error contact, and the motor coasts to a stop.
Rotation speed (%)
2
Drive motor
(constant torque)
(1:10)
3
Vector motor
(1:100)
Short time 60
Rated rotation speed
= 100% speed
Continuous
Frame number Max. speed of 200 LJ min.
Frame number Max. speed of 160 MJ to 180 LJ
Frame number Max. speed of 132 MJ
This motor yields a cooling effect even when operating at low speeds (approx.
6 Hz).
Operates continuously at 6 to 50/60Hz.
Rotation speed (%)
Short time 60 s.
Rated rotation speed
= 100% speed
Continuous
Frame number
Max. speed of
200 LJ min.
Frame number Max. speed of 160 MJ to 180 LJ
Frame number Max. speed of 132 MJ
This motor yields a cooling effect even when operating at extremely low speeds
(approx. 0.6Hz).
Operates continuously at
0.6 to 60Hz.
Rotation speed (%)
Machine Protection
Setting Motor Protection Operation Time
Set the motor protection operation time in L1-02.
If, after operating the motor continuously at the rated current, a 150% overload is experienced, set the (hot start) electronic thermal protection operation time. The factory setting is resistance to 150% for 60 seconds.
The following diagram shows an example of the characteristics of the electronic thermal protection operation time (L1-02 = 1.0 min., operation at 60Hz, general-purpose motor characteristics, when L1-01 is set to 1)
Operating time (min.)
Cold start
Hot start
Motor current (%)
E2-01 is set to 100%
Fig 6.39 Motor Protection Operation Time
Setting Precautions
• If multiple motors are connected to one drive, set parameter L1-01 to 0 (disabled). To protect the motor, install a thermal relay in the motor power cable, and perform overload protection on each motor.
• With applications where the power supply is often turned ON and OFF, there is a risk that the circuit cannot be protected even if this parameter has been set to 1 (enabled), because the thermal value will be reset.
• To detect overloads in good time, set the set value in parameter L1-02 to a low setting.
• When using a general-purpose motor (standard motor), the cooling ability will be lowered by f 1/4 (frequency). Consequently, the frequency may cause motor overload protection (OL1) to occur, even below the rated current. If operating using the rated current at a low frequency, use a special motor.
Setting the Motor Overload Pre-Alarm
If the motor overload protection function is enabled (i.e., L1-01 is set to other than 0) and you set H2-01 to
H2-05 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, M5-M6, P3-C3, and P4-C4 function selection) to
1F (motor overload OL1 pre-alarm), the motor overload pre-alarm will be enabled. If the electronic thermal value reaches minimum 90% of the overload detection level, the output terminal that has been set will be turned ON.
6-
53
6
-54
Motor Overheating Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs
Perform motor overheating protection using the thermistor temperature resistance characteristics of the PTC
(Positive Temperature Coefficient) built into the windings of each motor phase.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
L1-03
L1-04
L1-05
Motor
Overheat
Alarm
Operation
Selection
MOL Thm
Input
Sets operation selection when the motor temperature analog input
(H3-09 = E) exceeds the OH3 alarm level (1.17V)
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop
3: Alarm Only
Motor
Overheat
Fault
Operation
Selection
MOL Filter
Time
Motor
Temperature
Input Filter
Time
MOL Filter
Time
Sets stopping method when the motor temperature analog input
(H3-09 = E) exceeds the OH4 fault level (2.34V).
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop
This parameter adjusts the filter on the motor temperature analog input
(H3-09 = E). Increase to add stability, decrease to improve response.
0 to 3
0 to 2
0.00
to
10.00
3
1
0.20sec
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Machine Protection
PTC Thermistor Characteristics
The following diagram shows the characteristics of the PTC thermistor temperature to the resistance value.
Resistance (ohms)
Class F
150 C
Class H
180 C
1330
Tr: Temperature threshold value
550
Temperature
Tr Tr+5
Fig 6.40 PTC Thermistor Temperature-Resistance Value Characteristics
Operation during Motor Overheating
Set the operation if the motor overheats in parameters L1-03 and L1-04. Set the motor temperature input filter time parameter in L1-05. If the motor overheats, the OH3 and OH4 error codes will be displayed on the Digital Operator.
Error Codes If the Motor Overheats
Error Code
OH3
Details
Drive stops or continues to operate, according to the setting in L1-03.
OH4 Drive stops according to the setting in L1-04.
By setting H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function
Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to E (Motor temperature input), you can detect alarm OH3 or
OH4 using the PTC temperature-resistance characteristics, and protect the motor. The terminal connections are shown in the following diagram.
NOTICE
Damage to Equipment. This product does not provide motor over-temperature sensing . External motor over-temperature protection is required as defined in NFPA 70 of the National Electrical
Code, Article 430, Section X, Paragraph 430.126.
6-
55
6
-56
Drive
Multi-function contact input
Branch resistance
18 k
PTC thermistor
Multi-function contact output
Fault contact output
P3
C3
Multi-function
PHC output
P4
C4
Fig 6.41 Mutual Connections During Motor Overheating Protection
Limiting Motor Rotation Direction
If you set motor reverse rotation prohibited, a reverse run command will not be accepted even if it is input.
Use this setting for applications in which reverse motor rotation can cause problems (e.g., fans, pumps, etc.)
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 b1-04
Reverse
Operation
Selection
Reverse Oper
Determines the forward rotation of the motor, and if reverse operation is disabled.
0: Reverse enabled.
1: Reverse disabled.
0 to 1 0 No A A A A A
Continuing Operation
Continuing Operation
This section explains functions for continuing or automatically restarting drive operation even if an error occurs.
Restarting Automatically After Power Is Restored
Even if a temporary power loss occurs, you can restart the drive automatically after power is restored to continue motor operation.
To restart the drive after power is restored, set L2-01 to 1 or 2.
If L2-01 is set to 1, when power is restored within the time set in L2-02, the drive will restart. If the time set in
L2-02 is exceeded, alarm UV1 (main circuit undervoltage) will be detected.
If L2-01 is set to 2, when the main power supply is restored while the control power supply (i.e., power supply to the control panel) is backed up, the drive will restart. Consequently, alarm UV1 (main circuit undervoltage) will not be detected.
6-
57
6
-58
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
L2-01
L2-02
L2-03
L2-04
L2-05
Momentary
Power Loss
Detection
Selection
PwrL
Selection
Enables and disables the momentary power loss function.
0: Disabled - Drive trips on (UV1) fault when power is lost.
1: Power Loss Ride Thru
Time - Drive will restart if power returns within the time set in
L2-02.* 1
2: CPU Power Active - Drive will restart if power returns prior to control power supply shut down.* 1
0 to 2
Momentary
Power Loss
Ride-thru
Time
PwrL
Ridethru t
Momentary
Power Loss
Minimum
Base Block
Time
PwrL
Baseblock t
Sets the power loss ride-thru time.
This value is dependent on the capacity of the drive. Only effective when L2-01 = 1.
Sets the minimum time to wait to allow the residual motor voltage to decay before the drive output turns back on during power loss ride thru.
After a power loss, if L2-03 is greater than L2-02, operation resumes after the time set in L2-03.
Momentary
Power Loss
Voltage
Recovery
Ramp Time
PwrL V/F
Ramp t
Sets the time it takes the output voltage to return to the preset V/f pattern after speed search (current detection mode) is complete.
Undervoltage
Detection
Level
PUV Det
Level
Sets the drive's DC Bus undervoltage trip level. If this is set lower than the factory setting, additional AC input reactance or
DC bus reactance may be necessary.
Consult the factory before changing this parameter setting.
0 to 25.5
0.1
to
5.0
0.0 to
5.0
150
to
210
*3
0
0.1sec
*2
0.2sec
*2
0.3sec
*2
190Vdc
*3
*
1
In order for a restart to occur, the run command must be maintained throughout the ride thru period.
*2 Factory settings will vary based on drive capacity (values given here are for 200-240V class, 0.4kW).
*3 Setting value for 200-240V class. Double the value when working with 380-480V class drives
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
.
Setting Precautions
•
•
•
Error output signals are not output during momentary power loss recovery.
To continue drive operation after power has been restored, make settings so that run commands from the control main circuit terminal are stored even while power is suspended.
If the momentary power loss operation selection is set to 0 (Disabled), when the momentary power loss exceeds 15ms during operation, alarm UV1 (main circuit undervoltage) will be detected.
Continuing Operation
Speed Search
The speed search function finds the actual speed of the motor that is rotating using inertia, and then starts smoothly from that speed. When restoring power after a temporary power loss, the speed search function switches connection from the commercial power supply, and then restarts the fan that is rotating using inertia.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 b3-01 b3-02 b3-03 b3-05
Speed search selection (current detection or speed calculation)
Enables/disables the speed search function for the run command and sets the speed search method.
0:Disabled, speed calculation
1: Enabled, speed calculation
2: Disabled, current detection
3: Enabled, current detection
Speed Calculation:
When the search is started, the motor speed is calculated and acceleration/deceleration is performed from the calculated speed to the specified frequency
(motor direction is also searched).
SpdSrch at
Start
Current Detection:
The speed search is started from the frequency when power was momentarily lost and the maximum frequency, and the speed is detected at the search current level.
Speed search operating current (current detection)
SpdSrch Current
Sets the speed search operation current as a percentage, taking the drive rated current as 100%.
Not usually necessary to set. When restarting is not possible with the factory settings, reduce the value.
Speed search deceleration time (current detection)
SpdSrch Dec
Time
Sets the output frequency deceleration time during speed search in
1-second units.
Set the time for deceleration from the maximum output frequency to the minimum output frequency.
Speed search wait time
(current detection or speed calculation)
Search Delay
Sets the contactor operating delay time when there is a contactor on the output side of the drive. When a speed search is performed after recovering from a momentary power loss, the search operation is delayed by the time set here.
0 to 3
0 to
200
0.1 to
10.0
0.0 to
20.0
2
*1
100%
*2
2.0sec
0.2sec
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
No
No
No
A
A
A
No
A
6-
59
6
-60
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
L2-03
L2-04
Min. baseblock time
PwrL Baseblock t
Sets the drive's minimum baseblock time in units of one second, when the drive is restarted after power loss ridethrough.
Sets the time to approximately 0.7 times the motor secondary circuit time parameter.
When an overcurrent or overvoltage occurs when starting a speed search or DC injection braking, increase the set values.
Voltage recovery time
PwrL V/F
Ramp t
Sets the time required to return the drive output voltage to normal voltage at the completion of a speed search, in units of one second.
Sets the time required to recover from 0Vto the maximum voltage.
0.1 to
5.0
0.0 to
5.0
0.5sec
*3
0.3sec
*3
No
No
A
A
A
A
* 1. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed (Open-loop vector control 1 factory settings are given).
* 2. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. Set to “3” in V/f with PG.
* 3. Factory settings depend on drive capacity (The values shown are for a 200-240V Class drive for 0.4kW).
A
A
A
A
A
A
Multi-function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-10)
Setting
Value
Function
61
62
External search command 1 (ON: Speed search from maximum output frequency)
External search command 2 (ON: Speed search from set frequency)
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes No Yes No Yes
Yes No Yes No Yes
Continuing Operation
Setting Precautions
•
•
•
•
•
•
When both external search commands 1 and 2 are set for the multi-function contact terminals, an OPE03
(invalid multi-function input selection) operation error may occur. Set either external search command 1 or external search command 2.
If speed search during startup is selected when using V/f control with PG, the Unit will start from the frequency detected by PG.
If performing speed search using external search commands, add an external sequence so that the period when the run command and external search command are both ON is at the very least the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03).
If the drive output is equipped with a contact, set the contact operation delay time in the Speed Search Wait
Time (b3-05). The factory setting is 0.2 s. When not using the contact, you can reduce the search time by making the setting 0.0 s. After waiting for the speed search wait time, the drive starts the speed search.
Parameter b3-02 is a current detection speed search (current detection level for search completion). When the current falls below the detection level, the speed search is viewed as completed, and the motor accelerates or decelerates to the set frequency. If the motor cannot restart, lower the set value.
If an overcurrent (OC) is detected when using speed search after recovery following a power loss, lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03).
Application Precautions for Speed Searches Using Estimated Speed
•
•
•
When using V/f control with or without a PG, always perform stationary autotuning for only line-to-line resistance before using speed searches based on estimated speeds.
When using open-loop vector control, always perform rotational autotuning before using speed searches based on estimated speeds.
If the cable length between the motor and drive is changed after autotuning has been performed, perform stationary autotuning for only line-to-line resistance again.
The motor will not operate when stationary autotuning or stationary autotuning only for line-to-line resistance is performed.
6-
61
6
-62
Speed Search Selection
Set whether to enable or disable speed search at startup, and set the type of speed search (estimated speed or current detection) using setting b3-01. To perform speed search when inputting the run command, set b3-01 to
1 or 3.
Search Name
Search Method
Application Precautions
Estimated Speed
Estimates the motor speed when the search starts, and accelerates and decelerates from the estimated speed to the set frequency. You can also search including direction of motor rotation.
Current Detection
Starts speed search from the frequency when the temporary power loss was detected, or from the highest frequency, and performs speed detection at the current level during the search.
External Speed Search
Command
External search command 1 and external search command 2 become the same operation, estimating the motor speed and starting the search from the estimated speed.
External speed search command 1:
Starts speed search from the maximum output frequency.
External speed search command 2:
Starts speed search from the frequency reference set before the search command.
Cannot be used multi-motor drives, motors two or more frames smaller than the drive capacity, and high-speed motors (130Hz min.)
In control method without PG, the motor may accelerate suddenly with light loads.
Estimated Speed Search
The time chart for estimated speed searches is shown below.
Search at Startup
The time chart for when speed search at startup and speed search to multi-function input terminals us shown below.
Run command
OFF ON
Start using speed detected
Set frequency reference
Output frequency b3-02
Output current
1.0 s
* Lower limit set using Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05).
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) 0.7*
Note: If the stopping method is set to coast to stop, and the run command turns ON in a short time,
the operation may be the same as the search in case 2.
Fig 6.42 Speed Search at Startup (Estimated Speed)
Continuing Operation
Speed Search after Short Baseblock (during Power Loss Recovery, etc.)
• Loss Time Shorter Than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)
AC power supply
Output frequency
ON OFF
Start using speed detected
Set frequency reference
Output current
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) x 0.75*1
*2
10 ms
*1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency
immediately before the baseblock.
*2 After AC power supply recovery, motor waits for the
minimum Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05).
Fig 6.43 Speed Search after Baseblock (When Estimated Speed: Loss Time Is Set in L2-03)
• Loss Time Longer Than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)
AC power supply
Output frequency
ON OFF
Start using speed detected
Set frequency reference
Output current
Minimum baseblock time
(L2-03)
10 ms
Speed Search Wait Time
(b3-05)
Fig 6.44 Speed Search After Baseblock (Estimated Speed: Loss Time > L2-03)
Current Detection Speed Search
The time charts for current detection speed search is shown below.
Speed Search at Startup
The time chart when speed search at startup or external speed search command is selected is shown below.
6-
63
6
-64
Run command
OFF ON
Maximum output frequency or set frequency
Output frequency
Deceleration time set in b3-03
Set frequency reference b3-02
Output current
Minimum baseblock time
*
(L2-03)
* Lower limit is set using Speed Search Time (b3-05).
Fig 6.45 Speed Search at Startup (Using Current Detection)
Speed Search after Short Baseblock (during Power Loss Recovery, etc.)
• Loss Time Shorter Than Minimum Baseblock Time
AC power supply
Output frequency
ON OFF Output frequency before power loss Set frequency
Deceleration reference time set in b3-03 b3-02 speed search operating current
Output current
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03)
*1
*1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency
immediately before baseblock.
*2 After AC power supply recovery, motor waits for the minimum
Speed Search Wait Time (b2-03).
*2
Fig 6.46 Speed Search After Baseblock (Current Detection: Loss Time < L2-03)
• Loss Time Longer Than Minimum Baseblock Time
AC power supply ON OFF Output frequency before power loss
Deceleration speed set in b3-03
Set frequency reference
Output frequency b3-02
Speed search operating time
Output current
Speed search wait time (b3-05)
Minimum baseblock time
(L2-03)
Fig 6.47 Speed Search After Baseblock (Current Detection: Loss Time > L2-03)
Continuing Operation
Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is
Lost
The frequency reference loss detection function continues operation using 80% speed of the frequency reference before loss when the frequency reference using an analog input is reduced 90% or more in 400ms.
When the error signal during frequency reference loss is output externally, set H2-01 to H2-05 (multi-function contact output terminal M1-M2, M3-M4, M5-M6, P3-C3, and P4-C4 function selection) to C (frequency reference lost).
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
L4-05
Frequency
Reference
Loss
Detection
Selection
Ref Loss Sel
Determines how the drive will react when the frequency reference is lost. The frequency reference is considered lost when reference drops 90% or more of its current value for 400ms.
0: Stop - Drive will stop.
1: Run at L4-06 PrevRef - Drive will run at the percentage set in
L4-06 of the frequency reference level at the time frequency reference was lost.
0 to 1 0 No A A A A A
6-
65
6
-66
Restarting Operation After Transient Error (Auto Restart Function)
If a drive error occurs during operation, the drive will perform self-diagnosis. If no error is detected, the drive will automatically restart. This is called the auto restart function.
Set the number of auto restarts in parameter L5-01.
The auto restart function can be applied to the following errors. If an error not listed below occurs, the protection function will operate and the auto restart function will not.
• OC (Overcurrent) • RH (Braking resistor overheated)
• GF (Ground fault)
• PUF (Fuse blown)
• OV (Main circuit overvoltage)
• UV1 (Main Circuit Undervoltage, Main Circuit MC Operation Failure)
*
• PF (Main circuit voltage fault)
• LF (Output phase failure)
• RR (Braking transistor error)
• OL1 (Motor overload)
• OL2 (Drive overload)
• OH1 (Motor overheat)
• OL3 (Overtorque)
• OL4 (Overtorque)
* When L2-01 is set to 1 or 2 (continue operation during momentary power loss)
Auto Restart External Outputs
To output auto restart signals externally, set H2-01 to H2-05 (multi-function contact output terminals M1-M2,
M3-M4, M5-M6, P3-C3, and P4-C4 function selection) to 1E (auto restart).
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
V/f with
PG
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
L5-01
Number of
Auto Restart
Attempts
Num of
Restarts
Sets the counter for the number of times the drive will perform an automatic restart on the following faults: GF, LF, OC, OV, PF, PUF,
RH, RR, OL1, OL2, OL3, OL4,
UV1. Auto restart will check to see if the fault has cleared every 5ms.
When no fault is present, the drive will attempt an auto restart. If the drive faults after an auto restart attempt, the counter is incremented.
When the drive operates without fault for 10 minutes, the counter will reset to the value set in L5-01.
0 to 10 0 No A A A A A
L5-02
Auto Restart
Operation
Selection
Restart Sel
Determines if the fault contact activates during an automatic restart attempt.
0: No Fault Relay - fault contact will not activate during an automatic restart attempt.
1: Fault Relay Active - fault contact will activate during an automatic restart attempt.
0 to 1 0 No A A A A A
Application Precautions
• The number of auto restarts count is reset under the following conditions:
After auto restart, normal operation has continued for 10 minutes.
•
After the protection operation has been performed, and the error has been verified, and an fault reset has been input.
After the power supply is turned OFF, and then ON again.
Do not use the auto restart function with variable loads.
Drive Protection
Drive Protection
This section explains the functions for protecting the drive and the braking resistor.
Performing Overheating Protection on Mounted Braking Resistors
Perform overheating protection on drive-mounted braking resistors (Model: ERF-150WJ ).
When overheating in a mounted braking resistor is detected, an alarm RH (Mounted braking resistor overheating) is displayed on the Digital Operator, and the motor coasts to a stop.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
L8-01
Internal
Dynamic
Braking
Resistor
Protection
Selection
DB Resistor
Prot
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Selects the DB protection only when using 3% duty cycle heatsink mount Yaskawa braking resistor. This parameter does not enable or disable the DB function of the drive.
0: Not Provided
1: Provided
0 to 1 0 No A A A A A
Multi-function Contact Outputs (H2-01 to H2-05)
Setting
Value
Function
D Braking resistor fault (ON: Resistor overheat or braking transistor fault)
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
INFO
The most likely causes of RH (Mounted braking resistor overheating) being detected are that the deceleration time is too short or that the motor regeneration energy is too large. In these cases, lengthen the deceleration time or replace the Braking Resistor Unit with one with a higher breaking capacity.
6-
67
6
-68
Reducing Drive Overheating Pre-Alarm Warning Levels
The drive detects the temperature of the cooling fins using the thermistor, and protects the drive from overheating. You can receive drive overheating pre-alarms in units of 10 C.
The following overheating pre-alarm warnings are available: Stopping the drive as error protection, and continuing operation, with the alarm OH (Radiation fins overheating) on the Digital Operator flashing.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
L8-02
L8-03
Overheat Alarm
Level
OH Pre-Alarm
Lvl
When the cooling fin temperature exceeds the value set in this parameter, an Overheat Alarm
(OH) will occur.
Overheat
Pre-Alarm
Operation
Selection
OH Pre-Alarm
Sel
Selects the drive operation upon an OH pre-alarm detection.
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop
3: Alarm Only
* Factory settings will vary based on drive capacity.
50 to
130
0 to 3
95 C*
3
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Input Terminal Functions
Input Terminal Functions
This section explains input terminal functions, which set operating methods by switching functions for the multi-function contact input terminals (S3 to S12).
Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator and Control
Circuit Terminals
You can switch the drive run command inputs and frequency reference inputs between local (i.e., Digital
Operator) and remote (input method using b1-01 and b1-02).
You can switch between local and remote by turning ON and OFF the terminals if an output from H1-01 to
H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection) has been set to 1 (local/remote selection).
To set the control circuit terminals to remote, set b1-01 and b1-02 to 1 (Control circuit terminals).
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Frequency
Reference
Selection b1-01
Reference
Source b1-02
Run
Command
Selection
Run Source
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Selects the frequency reference input source.
0: Operator - Digital preset speed
U1-01 or d1-01 to d1-17.
1: Terminals - Analog input terminal A1 (or terminal A2 based on parameter H3-09).
2: Serial Com - Modbus RS-422/
485 terminals R+, R-,
S+, and S-.
3: Option PCB - Option board connected on 2CN.
4: Pulse Input (Terminal RP)
Selects the run command input source.
0: Operator - RUN and STOP keys on Digital Operator.
1: Terminals - Contact closure on terminals S1 or S2.
2: Serial Com - Modbus RS-422/
485 terminals R+, R-,
S+, and S-.
3: Option PCB - Option board connected on 2CN.
0 to 4
0 to 3
1
1
No
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
You can also perform local/remote switching using the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator. When the local/remote function has been set in the external terminals, the LOCAL/REMOTE Key function on the
Digital Operator will be disabled.
INFO
6-
69
6
-70
Blocking Drive Outputs (Baseblock Commands)
Set 8 or 9 (Baseblock command NO/NC) in one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection) to perform baseblock commands using the terminal's ON/OFF operation, and prohibit drive output using the baseblock commands.
Clear the baseblock command to restart the operating using speed search from frequency references from the previous baseblock command input.
Multi-function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-10)
Setting
Value
Function
8
9
External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON)
External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF)
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Time Chart
The time chart when using baseblock commands is shown below.
Forward operation/Stop
Baseblock command
Frequency reference
Input Cleared
Search from stored frequency reference
Output frequency
Coast to a stop
Fig 6.48 Baseblock Commands
If using baseblock commands with a variable load, do not frequently input baseblock commands during operation, as this may cause the motor to suddenly start coasting, and may result in the motor falling or slipping.
INFO
Input Terminal Functions
Stopping Acceleration and Deceleration (Acceleration/Deceleration
Ramp Hold)
The acceleration/deceleration ramp hold function stops acceleration and deceleration, stores the output frequency at that point in time, and then continues operation.
Set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection) to A (acceleration/deceleration ramp hold) to stop acceleration and deceleration when the terminal is turned
ON and to store the output frequency at that point in time. Acceleration and deceleration will restart when the terminal is turned OFF.
If d4-01 is set to 1 and the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command is input, the output frequency is still stored even after the power supply is turned OFF.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 d4-01
Frequency
Reference Hold
Function
Selection
MOP Ref
Memory
This parameter is used to retain the held frequency reference in
U1-01 (d1-01) when power is removed. This function is available when the multi-function inputs “accel/decel ramp hold” or
“up/down” commands are selected (H1-XX = A or 10 and
11).
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 to 1 0 No A A A A A
Time Chart
The time chart when using Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold commands is given below.
Power supply
Forward/Stop
Acceleration/Deceleration
Ramp Hold
Frequency reference
Output frequency
Hold Hold
Fig 6.49 Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold
6-
71
6
-72
Application Precautions
•
•
•
When d4-01 is set to 1, the output frequency on hold is stored even after the power supply is turned OFF. If performing operations using this frequency after the drive has also been turned OFF, input the run command with the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold turned ON.
When d4-01 is set to 0 and a run command is input while the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold is turned ON, the output frequency will be set to zero.
If you input an Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command by error when decelerating during positioning, deceleration may be canceled.
Raising and Lowering Frequency References Using Contact Signals (UP/
DOWN)
The UP and DOWN commands raise and lower drive frequency references by turning ON and OFF a multifunction contact input terminal S3 to S7.
To use this function, set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to
S12 function selection) to 10 (UP command) and 11 (DOWN command). Be sure to allocate two terminals so that the UP and DOWN commands can be used as a pair.
The output frequency depends on the acceleration and deceleration time. Be sure to set b1-02 (Run command selection) to 1 (Control circuit terminal).
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 d2-01 d2-02 d2-03
Frequency
Reference
Upper Limit
Ref Upper
Limit
Frequency
Reference
Lower Limit
Ref Lower
Limit
Master Speed
Reference
Lower Limit
Ref1 Lower
Limit
0.0
to
110.0
Determines maximum frequency reference, set as a percentage of maximum output frequency
(E1-04). If the frequency reference is above this value, actual drive speed will be limited to this value. This parameter applies to all frequency reference sources.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0 to
110.0
100.0%
0.0%
0.0%
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Input Terminal Functions
Precautions
When setting and using UP and DOWN commands, observe the following precautions.
Setting Precautions
If multi-function input terminals S3 to S12 are set as follows, operation error OPE03 (Invalid multi-function input selection) will occur:
•
•
Only either the UP command or DOWN command has been set.
UP/DOWN commands and Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold have been allocated at the same time.
Application Precautions
• Frequency outputs using UP/DOWN commands are limited by the frequency reference upper and lower limits set in parameters d2-01 to d2-03. Here, frequency references from analog frequency reference terminal A1 becomes the frequency reference lower limit. If using a combination of the frequency reference from terminal A1 and the frequency reference lower limit set in either parameter d2-02 or d2-03, the larger lower limit will become the frequency reference lower limit.
•
•
•
If inputting the run command when using UP/DOWN commands, the output frequency accelerates to the frequency reference lower limit.
When using UP/DOWN commands, multi-step operations are disabled.
When d4-01 (Frequency Reference Hold Function Selection) is set to 1, the frequency reference held using the UP/DOWN functions is stored even after the power supply is turned OFF. When the power supply is turned ON and the run command is input, the motor accelerates to the frequency reference that has been stored. To reset (i.e., to 0Hz) the stored frequency reference, turn ON the UP or DOWN command while the run command is ON.
Connection Example and Time Chart
The time chart and settings example when the UP command is allocated to the multi-function contact input terminal S3, and the DOWN command is allocated to terminal S4, are shown below.
Parameter
H1-01
H1-02
Name
Multi-function input (terminal S3)
Multi-function input (terminal S4)
Set Value
10
11
0 to 10 V analog signal
Inverter
Forward operation/Stop
Reverse operation/Stop
Up command
Down command
Sequence common
Frequency reference lower limit
Fig 6.50 Connection Example when UP/DOWN Commands Are Allocated
6-
73
6
-74
Output frequency
Upper limit
Accelerates to lower limit
Lower limit
Same frequency
Forward operation/stop
UP command
DOWN command
Reference frequency reset
Frequency matching signal*
Power supply
* The frequency matching signal turns ON when the motor is not accelerating/ decelerating while the run command is ON.
Fig 6.51 UP/DOWN Commands Time Chart
Input Terminal Functions
Accelerating and Decelerating Constant Frequencies in the Analog References (+/- Speed)
The +/- speed function increments or decrements the frequency set in analog frequency reference d4-02 (+/-
Speed Limit) using two contact signal inputs.
To use this function, set One of the parameters H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact terminal inputs S3 to
S12 function selection) to 1C (Trim Control Increase command) and 1D (Trim Control Decrease command).
Be sure to allocate two terminals so that the Trim Control Increase command and Trim Control Decrease command can be used as a pair.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 d4-02
Trim Control
Level
Trim Control
Lvl
Sets the amount of frequency reference to be added or subtracted as a percentage of maximum output frequency
(E1-04) when multi-function inputs “trim control increase” and
“trim control decrease” are selected (H1-XX = 1C and 1D).
0 to 100 10% No A A A A A
Trim Control Increase/Decrease Command and Frequency Reference
The frequency references using Trim Control Increase/Decrease command ON/OFF operations are shown below.
Frequency Reference
Set Frequency
Reference
+ d4-02
Set Frequency
Reference
- d4-02
Set Frequency Command
Trim Control Increase
Command Terminal
Trim Control Decrease
Command Terminal
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Application Precautions
•
•
•
Trim Control Increase/Decrease command is enabled when speed reference > 0 and the speed reference is from an analog input.
When the analog frequency reference value - d4-02 < 0, the frequency reference is set to 0.
If only the Trim Control Increase command or Trim Control Decrease command has been set for a multifunction contact input terminal S3 to S12, operation error OPE03 (invalid multi-function input selected) will occur.
6-
75
6
-76
Hold Analog Frequency Using User-set Timing
When one of H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection) is set to 1E
(sample/hold analog frequency command), the analog frequency reference will be held from 100ms after the terminal is turned ON, and operation will continue thereafter at that frequency.
The analog value 100ms after the command is turned ON is used as the frequency reference.
Sample/hold command
Analog input
Frequency reference
Fig 6.52 Sample/Hold Analog Frequency
Precautions
When setting and executing sample and hold for analog frequency references, observe the following precautions.
Setting Precautions
When using sample/hold of analog frequency reference, you cannot use the following commands at the same time. If these commands are used at the same time, operation error OPE03 (invalid multi-function input selection) will occur.
• Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command
•
•
UP/DOWN command
Trim Control Increase/Decrease command
Application Precautions
• When performing sample/hold of analog frequency references, be sure to store references of 100ms minimum. If the reference time is less than 100ms, the frequency reference will not be held.
• The analog frequency reference that is held will be deleted when the power supply is turned OFF.
Switching Operations between a Communications Option Card and Control Circuit Terminals
You can switch reference input between the Communications Option Card and the control circuit terminals.
Set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection) to 2 (Option/Drive selection) to enable switching reference input using the terminal ON/OFF status when the drive is stopped.
Input Terminal Functions
Setting Precautions
To switch command inputs between the Communications Option Card and the control circuit terminals, set the following parameters.
• Set b1-01 (Reference Selection) to 1 (Control circuit terminal [analog input])
•
•
Set b1-02 (Operation Method Selection to 1 (Control circuit terminal (sequence inputs])
Set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection) to 2 (Option/Drive selection).
Terminal Status
OFF
Frequency Reference and Run Command Selection
Drive
(Can be operated from frequency reference or control circuit terminal from analog input terminal.)
ON
Communications Option Card
(Frequency reference and run command are enabled from communications Option Card.)
Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands
(FJOG/RJOG)
The FJOG/RJOG command functions operate the drive using jog frequencies by using the terminal ON/OFF operation. When using the FJOG/RJOG commands, there is no need to input the run command.
To use this function, set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to
S12 function selection) to 12 (FJOG command) or 13 (RJOG command).
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 d1-17
Jog Frequency
Reference
Jog Reference
Frequency reference when: "Jog frequency reference" is selected via multi-function input terminals. "Jog frequency reference" has priority over
"multi-step speed reference 1 to
4". Parameter d1-17 is also the reference for the JOG key on the
Digital Operator, and the multifunction inputs "forward jog" and
"reverse jog". Setting units are affected by o1-03.
0.00 to
400.00
*1
6.00Hz
Yes Q Q Q Q Q
*1 Setting range changes to 0 thru 66.0 when operating in Vector 2 wo/PG.. The upper limit for the setting range also depends on the upper limit in E1-
04. The max setting is 400.00.
Multi-Function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-10)
Setting
Value
12
13
Function
FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17)
RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-17)
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Application Precautions
• Jog frequencies using FJOG and RJOG commands are given priority over other frequency references.
• When both FJOG command and RJOG commands are ON for 500ms or longer at the same time, the drive stops according to the setting in b1-03 (stopping method selection).
6-
77
6
-78
Stopping the Drive by Notifying Programming Device Errors to the Drive
(External Fault Function)
The external fault function performs the error contact output, and stops the drive operation if the drive peripheral devices break down or an error occurs. The digital operator will display EFx (External fault [input terminal Sx]). The x in EFx shows the terminal number of the terminal that input the external fault signal. For example, if an external fault signal is input to terminal S3, EF3 will be displayed.
To use the external fault function, set one of the values 20 to 2F in one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-10
(multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection).
Select the value to be set in H1-01 to H1-10 from a combination of any of the following three conditions.
• Signal input level from peripheral devices
•
•
External fault detection method
Operation during external fault detection
The following table shows the relationship between the combinations of conditions and the set value in H1-
.
Set
Value
20
Input Level
(See Note 1.)
NO Contact NC Contact
Yes
Error Detection Method
(See Note 2.)
Constant
Detection
Detection
During
Operation
Yes
Operation During Error Detection
Decelerate to Stop
(Error)
Yes
Coast to
Stop (Error)
Emergency
Stop (Error)
Continue
Operation
(Warning)
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Note 1. Set the input level to detect errors using either signal ON or signal OFF. (NO contact: External fault when ON; NC contact: External fault when
OFF).
2. Set the detection method to detect errors using either constant detection or detection during operation.
Constant detection: Detects while power is supplied to the drive.
Detection during operation: Detects only during drive operation.
Monitor Parameters
Monitor Parameters
This section explains the analog monitor and pulse monitor parameters.
Using the Analog Monitor Parameters
This section explains the analog monitor parameters.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
H4-01
H4-02
H4-03
H4-04
H4-05
H4-06
H4-07
Terminal FM
Monitor
Selection
Terminal FM
Sel
Selects the monitor output (U1-xx) function for terminals FM and FC.
Refer to "U1-xx" monitors for available settings.
Unavailable settings:
4, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 25, 28, 29, 30,
31, 34, 35, 39, 40, 41, 42, 47, 49, 50
Terminal FM
Gain Setting
Terminal FM
Gain
Sets terminal FM output level when selected monitor is at 100%.* 1
Terminal FM
Bias Setting
Terminal FM
Bias
Sets terminal FM output level when selected monitor is at 0%.* 1
Terminal AM
Monitor
Selection
Terminal AM
Sel
Selects which monitor will be the output on terminals AM and FC.
Same function choices as H4-01.
Terminal AM
Gain Setting
Terminal AM
Gain
Sets terminal AM output voltage (in percent of 10Vdc) when selected monitor is at 100% output.*
1
Terminal AM
Bias Setting
Terminal AM
Bias
Sets terminal AM output voltage (in percent of 10Vdc) when selected monitor is at 0% output.*
1
Terminal FM
Signal Level
Selection
AO Level
Select1
Selects the signal level of terminal
FM.
0: 0 to 10Vdc
1: -10 to +10Vdc
2: 4 to 20mA* 2
*Set the analog output jumper
CN15 in the proper position.
1 to 48
0.0 to
1000.0
-110.0
to
110.0
1 to 48
0.0 to
1000.0
-110.0 to
110.0
0 to 2
2
100%
0.0%
3
50.0%
0.0%
0
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
6-
79
6
-80
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
F4-01
F4-02
F4-03
F4-04
F4-05
F4-06
F4-07
F4-08
AO-08/AO-
12 Channel 1
Monitor
Selection
AO Ch1
Select
Sets the number of the monitor item to be output. (U1-oo)
The following settings cannot be used:
4, 10 to 14, 25, 28, 29, 30, 34, 35,
39, 40, 41.
AO-08/AO-
12 Channel 1
Gain
AO Ch1 Gain
Sets the channel 1 gain.
Ex: Set F4-02 = 50% to output
100% at 5.0V output.
AO-08/AO-
12 Channel 2
Monitor
Selection
AO Ch2
Select
Sets the number of the monitor item to be output. (U1-xx)
The following settings cannot be set:
4, 10 to 14, 25, 28, 29, 30, 34, 39,
40, 41.
AO-08/AO-
12 Channel 2
Gain
AO Ch2 Gain
Sets the channel 2 gain. *
3
Ex: Set F4-04 = 50% to output
100% at 5.0V output.
AO Ch1 Bias Sets the channel 1 bias (100%/10V).
Ex: Set F4-05 = 50% to output 0%
AO Ch1 Bias at 5.0V output.
AO Ch2 Bias Sets the channel 2 bias (100%/10V).
Ex: Set F4-06 = 50% to output 0%
AO Ch2 Bias at 5.0V output.
AO-12
Channel 1
Signal Level
AO Opt
Level Sel
Sets the range of the voltage output.
0: 0 to 10Vdc
1: -10 to +10Vdc
AO-12
Channel 2
Signal Level
AO Opt
Level Sel
Sets the range of the voltage output.
0: 0 to 10Vdc
1: -10 to +10Vdc
1 to 45
0.00
to
1000.0
1 to 45
0.00
to
1000.0
-110.0 to
110.0
-110.0 to
110.0
0 to 1
0 to 1
2
100.0%
3
50.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0
0
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
*
1
In order to adjust the meter, 100% of the appropriate output is multiplied for the gain setting, the bias amount is added and then output.
See H4-02 when stopped in Quick, Advanced, or Verify mode. If 03 appears on the setting screen, then terminal FM is used.
See H4-04 when stopped in Quick, Advanced, or Verify mode. If 06 appears on the setting screen, then terminal AM is used.
*
*
2
Setting "2: 4 to 20mA" is not available in G7A
3
In order to adjust the meter, 100% of the appropriate output is multiplied for the gain setting, and the bias amount is added and then output.
See F4-02 when stopped in Quick, Advanced, or Verify mode. If 05 appears on the setting screen, then CH1 is used.
See F4-04 when stopped in Quick, Advanced, or Verify mode. If 06 appears on the setting screen, then CH2 is used.
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Monitor Parameters
Selecting Analog Monitor Items
The digital operator monitor items (U1 [status monitor]) are output from multi-function analog output
terminals FM-AC and AM-AC. Refer to Chapter 5 User Parameters
, and set the values for the part of
U1 (status monitor).
Alternatively, you can output monitor items (U1 [status monitor]) from analog output option terminal channels 1 and 2 on analog monitor cards AO-08 and AO-12. Refer to the table of parameters, and set the values.
Adjusting the Analog Monitor Items
Adjust the output voltage for multi-function analog output terminals FM-AC and AM-AC using the gain and bias in H4-02, H4-03, H4-05, and H4-06. Also, adjust the output voltage for output channels 1 and 2 of Analog Output Option Cards AO-08 and AO-12 using the gain and bias in F4-02, F4-04, and F4-06.
Adjusting the Meter
Display the data setting display for the gain and bias parameters corresponding to the output channel of the drive Unit and the AO Option Card while the drive is stopped to output the following voltages to the analog monitor terminal, to enable meter adjusting while the drive is stopped.
10 V/100% monitor output output gain + output bias
Output voltage
Gain x 10 V
Bias x 10/100 V
Monitor item
Fig 6.53 Monitor Output Adjustment
Switching Analog Monitor Signal Levels
Monitor items corresponding to 0 to ±10Voutput 0 to 10Vsignals when the monitor value is positive (+), and 0 to -10Vsignals when the monitor value is negative (-). For monitor items corresponding to 0 to ±10 V, refer to
You can select the signal levels separately for multi-function analog output terminals and analog output option terminals.
INFO
6-
81
6
-82
Using Pulse Train Monitor Contents
This section explains pulse monitor parameters.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
H6-06
H6-07
Terminal MP
Pulse Train
Monitor
Selection
Select the pulse train monitor output terminal MP function (value of the xx part of U1-xx). See Table A2 for the list of U1 monitors.
Pulse Output
Sel
Pulse Train
Monitor
Scaling
PO Scaling
Sets the number of output pulses when the monitor is 100% (inHz).
Set H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to 0, to make the pulse train monitor output synchronous to the output frequency.
1, 2, 5,
20, 24,
31, 36 only
0 to
32000
2
1440Hz
Yes
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Selecting Pulse Monitor Items
Output digital operator monitor items (U1 [status monitor]) from pulse monitor terminal MP-SC. Refer to
Chapter 5 User Parameters , and set the
part of U1 (Status monitor). The possible monitor selections are limited as follows: U1-01, 02, 05, 20, 24, 36.
Adjusting the Pulse Monitor Items
Adjust the pulse frequency output from pulse monitor terminal MP-SC. Set the pulse frequency output when
100% frequency is output to H6-07.
Set H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to 0, to output the frequency synchronous with the drive's U-phase output.
Application Precautions
When using a pulse monitor parameter, connect a peripheral device according to the following load conditions. If the load conditions are different, there is a risk of characteristic insufficiency or damage to the machinery.
Using a Sourcing Output
Output Voltage
(Isolated)
VRL (V)
+5V min.
+8V min.
+10V min.
Load Impedance (k )
1.5 k min.
3.5 k min.
10 k min.
MP
AC
VRL
Load impedance
Using a Sinking Input
External Power
Supply (V)
Sink Current (mA)
12 VDC ± 10%,
15 VDC ± 10%
16mA Max
Monitor Parameters
MP
External power supply
Load impedance
Sinking current
AC
6-
83
6
-84
Individual Functions
This section explains the individual functions used in special applications.
Using MODBUS Communications
You can perform serial communications with MEMOCON-series Programmable Controllers (PLCs) or similar devices using the MODBUS protocol.
MODBUS Communications Configuration
MODBUS communications are configured using 1 master (PLC) and a maximum of 31 slaves. Serial communications between master and slave are normally started by the master, and the slave responds.
The master performs signal communications with one slave at a time. Consequently, you must set the address of each slave beforehand, so the master can perform signal communications using that address. Slaves receiving commands from the master perform the specified function, and send a response to the master.
MEMOCON-series PLC
Drive Drive Drive
RS-485 connections example
Fig 6.54 Example of Connections between PLC and Drive
Communications Specifications
The MODBUS communications specifications are shown in the following table.
Item
Interface
Communications Cycle
Communications Parameters
Communications Protocol
Number of Connectable Units
Specifications
RS-422, RS-485
Asynchronous (Start-stop synchronization)
Baud rate:
Data length:
Select from 1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600, and 19,200 bps.
8 bits fixed
Parity:
Stop bits:
Select from even, odd, or none.
1 bit fixed
MODBUS (RTU mode only)
31 units max. (when using RS-485)
Individual Functions
Communications Connection Terminal
MODBUS communications use the following terminals: S+, S-, R+, and R-. Set the terminating resistance by turning ON pin 1 of switch S1 for the last drive only, as seen from the PLC.
RS-422A or RS-485
S+
-
+
SS1
R+
O
F
F
R-
Switch
1
Terminating resistance (1/2 W, 110 Ohms)
1
2
Fig 6.55 Communications Connection Terminal
OFF ON
Terminating resistance
INFO
1. Separate the communications cables from the main circuit cables and other wiring and power cables.
2. Use shielded cables for the communications cables, connect the shield cover to the drive earth terminal, and arrange the terminals so that the other end is not connected to prevent operating errors due to noise.
3. When using RS-485 communications, connect S+ to R+, and S- to R-, on the drive exterior.
R+ S+
Procedure for Communicating with the PLC
Use the following procedure to perform communications with the PLC.
1. Turn OFF the power supply turned and connect the communications cable between the PLC and the drive.
2. Turn ON the power supply.
3. Set the required communications parameters (H5-01 to H5-07) using the Digital Operator.
4. Turn OFF the power supply, and check that the Digital Operator display has completely disappeared.
5. Turn ON the power supply once again.
6. Perform communications with the PLC.
INFO
Set the timer on the master to monitor response time from the slave. Set the master so that if the slave does not respond to the master within the set time, the same command message will be sent from the master again.
6-
85
6
-86
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 b1-01 b1-02
H5-01
H5-02
H5-03
H5-04
Frequency
Reference
Selection
Reference
Source
Run
Command
Selection
Run Source
Drive Node
Address
Serial Comm
Adr
Communicati on Speed
Selection
Serial Baud
Rate
Communicati on Parity
Selection
Serial Com
Sel
Stopping
Method After
Communicati on Error
Serial Fault
Sel
Selects the frequency reference input source.
0: Operator - Digital preset speed
U1-01 or d1-01 to d1-17.
1: Terminals - Analog input terminal A1 (or terminal A2 based on parameter H3-09).
2: Serial Com - Modbus RS-422/
485 terminals R+, R-,
S+, and S-.
3: Option PCB - Option board connected on 2CN.
4: Pulse Input (Terminal RP)
Selects the run command input source.
0: Operator - RUN and STOP keys on Digital Operator.
1: Terminals - Contact closure on terminals S1 or S2.
2: Serial Com - Modbus RS-422/
485 terminals R+, R-,
S+, and S-.
3: Option PCB - Option board connected on 2CN.
Selects drive station node number
(address) for Modbus terminals
R+, R-, S+, S-. The drive's power must be cycled for the setting to take effect.
Selects the baud rate for Modbus terminals R+, R-, S+ and S-. The drive's power must be cycled for the setting to take effect.
0: 1200 bps
1: 2400 bps
2: 4800 bps
3: 9600 bps
4: 19200 bps
Selects the communication parity for Modbus terminals R+, R-, S+ and S-. The drive's power must be cycled for the setting to take effect.
0: No Parity
1: Even Parity
2: Odd Parity
Selects the stopping method when a communication timeout fault
(CE) is detected.
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop
3: Alarm Only
0 to 4
0 to 3
0 to 20
*
0 to 4
0 to 2
0 to 3
1
1
1F
3
0
3
No
No
No
No
No
No
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
Individual Functions
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
H5-05
H5-06
H5-07
Communicati on Fault
Detection
Selection
Serial Flt Dtct
Enables or disables the communications timeout fault
(CE).
0: Disabled - A communication loss will not cause a communication fault.
1: Enabled - If communication is lost for more than 2 seconds, a
CE fault will occur.
Drive
Transmit Wait
Time
Transmit
WaitTIM
RTS Control
Selection
RTS Control
Sel
Set the delay time from when the drive receives data to when the drive sends data.
Enables or disables "request to send" (RTS) control:
0: Disabled - RTS is always on
1: Enabled - RTS turns on only when sending
0 or 1
5 to 65
0 or 1
1
5ms
1
* If H5-01 is set to zero, then the drive will be unable to respond to Modbus communication.
No
No
No
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
6-
87
6
-88
MODBUS communications can perform the following operations regardless of the settings in b1-01 and b1-02.
• Monitoring operation status from the PLC
•
•
•
Setting and reading parameters
Resetting errors
Inputting multi-function commands
An OR operation is performed between the multi-function commands input from the PLC and commands input from multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S7.
Message Format
In MODBUS communications, the master sends commands to the slave, and the slave responds. The message format is configured for both sending and receiving as shown below, and the length of data packets is changed by the command (function) contents.
Slave address
Function code
Data
Error check
The space between messages must support the following.
PLC to Inverter
Command message
Inverter to PLC
Response message
PLC to Inverter
Command message
Time (Seconds)
24 bits long H5-06 setting
24 bits long
Fig 6.56 Message Spacing
5 ms min.
Slave Address
Set the drive address from 0 to 32. If you set 0, commands from the master will be broadcast (i.e., the drive will not return responses).
Function Code
The function code specifies commands. There are three function codes, as shown below.
Function Code
(Hexadecimal)
03H
08H
10H
Function
Read storage register contents
Loopback test
Write multiple storage registers
Command Message
Min.
(Bytes)
Max.
(Bytes)
8
8
11
8
8
41
Response Message
Min.
(Bytes)
Max.
(Bytes)
7
8
8
37
8
8
Data
Configure consecutive data by combining the storage register address (test code for a loopback address) and the data the register contains. The data length changes depending on the command details.
Individual Functions
Error Check
Errors are detected during communications using CRC-16. Perform calculations using the following method.
1. The factory setting for CRC-16 communications is usually 0, but when using the MODBUS system, set the factory setting to 1 (i.e., set all 16 bits to 1).
2. Calculate CRC-16 using MSB as slave address LSB, and LSB as the MSB of the final data.
3. Also calculate CRC-16 for response messages from the slaves, and compare them to the CRC-16 in the response messages.
MODBUS Message Example
An example of MODBUS command/response messages is given below.
Reading Storage Register Contents
Read the contents of the storage register only for specified quantities whose addresses are consecutive, starting from a specified address. The contents of the storage register are separated into higher place 8 bits and lower place 8 bits, and comprise the data within response messages in address order.
The following table shows message examples when reading status signals, error details, data link status, and frequency references from the slave 2 drive.
Command Message
02H
03H
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Slave Address
Function Code
02H
03H
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave Address
Function Code
02H
83H
Slave Address
Function Code
Start
Address
Quantity
CRC-16
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
00H
20H
00H
04H
45H
F0H
Data quantity
Lead storage register
Next storage register
Next storage register
Next storage register
CRC-16
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
08H
00H
65H
00H
00H
00H
00H
01H
F4H
AFH
82H
Error code
CRC-16
Higher place
Lower place
03H
F1H
31H
6-
89
6
-90
Loopback Test
The loopback test returns command messages directly as response messages without changing the contents to check the communications between the master and slave. You can set user-defined test code and data values.
The following table shows a message example when performing a loopback test with the slave 1 drive.
Command Message
Slave address
Function code
Test Code
Data
CRC-16
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
01H
08H
00H
00H
A5H
37H
DAH
8DH
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Slave address 01H
Function code 08H
Test Code
Data
CRC-16
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
00H
00H
A5H
37H
DAH
8DH
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave address 01H
Function code 89H
Error Code
CRC-16
Higher place
Lower place
01H
86H
50H
Writing to Multiple Storage Registers
Write the specified data to each specified storage register from the specified addresses. The written data must be in the following order in the command message: Higher place 8 bits, then lower place 8 bits, in storage register address order.
The following table shows an example of a message when forward operation has been set at a frequency reference of 60.0Hz in the slave 1 drive by the PLC.
Command Message
Slave Address
Function Code
Start
Address
Quantity
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
No. of data
Lead data
Next data
CRC-16
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
01H
10H
00H
01H
00H
02H
04H
00H
01H
02H
58H
63H
39H
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Slave Address 01H
10H Function Code
Start
Address
Quantity
CRC-16
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
Higher place
Lower place
00H
01H
00H
02H
10H
08H
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave Address 01H
Function Code 90H
Error code
CRC-16
Higher place
Lower place
02H
CDH
C1H
Individual Functions
Set the number of data specified using command messages as quantity of specified messages x 2. Handle response messages in the same way.
INFO
Data Tables
The data tables are shown below. The types of data are as follows: Reference data, monitor data, and broadcast data.
Reference Data
The reference data table is shown below. You can both read and write reference data.
Register No.
0000H
0001H
0002H
0003H
0004H
0005H
0006H
0007H
0008H
Contents
Not used
Frequency reference
Bit 0 Run/stop command 1: Run 0: Stop
Bit 1
Bit 2
Forward/reverse operation 1: Reverse 0: Forward
External fault 1: Error (EFO)
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit A
Bit B
Bit C
Bit D
Bit E
Bit F
Fault reset
ComNet
ComCtrl
1: Reset command
Multi-function input command 3
Multi-function input command 4
Multi-function input command 5
Multi-function input command 6
Multi-function input command 7
Multi-function input command 8
Multi-function input command 9
Multi-function input command 10
Multi-function input command 11
Multi-function input command 12
Frequency reference (Set units using parameter o1-03)
Not used
Torque reference
Torque compensation
PID target value
Analog output 1 setting (-11 V/-1540 to 10 V/1540)
Analog output 2 setting (-11 V/-1540 to 11 V/1540)
Multi-function contact output setting
Bit 0 Contact output (terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1 Contact output (terminal M3-M4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Contact output (terminal M5-M6)
PHC3(Contact P3-C3)
1: ON 0: OFF
1: ON 0: OFF
0009H
Bit 5
Bit 6
PHC4(Contact P4-C4)
Not used
1: ON 0: OFF
Set error contact (terminal MA-MC) output using bit 7. 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 7 Error contact (terminal MA-MC)
Bits 8 to F Not used
000AH to 000EH Not used
1: ON 0: OFF
6-
91
6
-92
Register No.
000FH
Contents
Reference selection settings
Bit 0 Not used
Bit 1 Use MODBUS 0006H PID target value
Bits 2 to B Not used
E
F
C
D
Broadcast data terminal S5 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Broadcast data terminal S6 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Broadcast data terminal S7 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Broadcast data terminal S8 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Note Write 0 to all unused bits. Also, do not write data to reserved registers.
Monitor Data
The following table shows the monitor data. Monitor data can only be read.
Register No.
0020H
0021H
0022H
0023H
0024H
0025H
0026H
0027H
0028H
Contents
Drive status
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Operation 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Reverse operation 1: Reverse operation 0: Forward operation
Drive startup complete 1: Completed 2: Not completed
Error 1: Error
Data setting error 1: Error
Multi-function contact output 1 (terminal M1 - M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function contact output 2 (terminal M3 - M4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function contact output 3 (terminal M5 - M6) 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function PHC output 3 (terminal P3 - C3) 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function PHC output 4 (terminal P4 - C4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits A and B Not used
Error details
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Overcurrent (OC) Ground fault (GF)
Main circuit overvoltage (OV)
Drive overload (OL2)
Drive overheat (OH1, OH2) Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Injection brake transistor resistance overheat (rr, rH)
Fuse blown (PUF)
PID feedback reference lost (FbL)
External fault (EF, EFO) Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Hardware error (CPF)
Motor overload (OL1), overtorque 1 (OL3) detected, or overtorque 2 (OL4) detected
Bit A
Bit B
Bit C
Bit D
Bit E
Bit F
Data link status
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
PG broken wire detected (PGO), Overspeed (OS), Speed deviation (DEV)
Main circuit undervoltage (UV) detected
Main circuit undervoltage (UV1), control power supply error (UV2), inrush prevention circuit error (UV3), power loss
SPO output phase open, SPI output phase open
MODBUS communications error (CE)
Operator disconnected (OPR)
Writing data
Not used
Not used
Upper and lower limit errors
Bit 4 Data integrity error
Bits 5 to F Not used
Frequency reference (U1-01)
Output frequency (U1-02)
Output voltage reference (U1-06)
Output current (U1-03)
Output power (U1-08)
Torque reference (U1-09)
Individual Functions
Register No.
0029H
002AH
002BH
002CH
Contents
Not used
Not used
Sequence input status
Bit 0 1: Control circuit terminal S1 ON
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
1: Control circuit terminal S2 ON
1: Control circuit terminal S3 ON
1: Control circuit terminal S4 ON
1: Control circuit terminal S5 ON
1: Control circuit terminal S6 ON
1: Control circuit terminal S7 ON
1: Control circuit terminal S8 ON
1: Control circuit terminal S9 ON
Bit 9
Bit A
1: Control circuit terminal S10 ON
1: Control circuit terminal S11 ON
Bit B 1: Control circuit terminal S12 ON
Bits C to F Not used
Drive status
Bit 0 Operation
Bit 1 Zero speed
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Frequency matching
User-defined speed matching
Frequency detection 1
Frequency detection 2
Drive startup completed
1: Operating
1: Zero speed
1: Matched
1: Matched
1: Startup completed
Bit 8
Bit 9
Baseblock
Frequency reference mode
1: Drive output baseblock
1: Not communications 0: Communications
Bit A Run command mode 1: Not communications 0: Communications
Bit B
Bit C
Bit D
Bit E
Overtorque detection
Frequency reference lost
Retrying error
1: Detected
1: Lost
1: Retrying
Error (including MODBUS communications time-out) 1:Error occurred
Bit F MODBUS communications time-out 1: Timed out
Multi-function contact output status
002DH
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Multi-function contact output 1 (terminal M1 - M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function contact output 2 (terminal M3 - M4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function contact output 3 (terminal M5 - M6) 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function PHC output 3 (terminal P3 - C3) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 4 Multi-function PHC output 4 (terminal P4 - C4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 5 to F Not used
002EH - 0030H Not used
0031H Main circuit DC voltage
0032H
0033H
Torque monitor
Output power (U1-08)
0034H - 0037H Not used
0038H PID feedback quantity (Input equivalent to 100%/Max. output frequency; 10/1%; without sign)
0039H
003AH
003BH
003CH
PID input quantity (±100%/±Max. output frequency; 10/1%; with sign)
PID output quantity (±100%/±Max. output frequency; 10/1%; with sign)
CPU software number
Flash software number
6-
93
6
-94
Register No.
Contents
003DH
003EH
003FH
Communications error details
Bit 0 CRC error
Bit 1
Bit 2
Invalid data length
Not used
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Parity error
Overrun error
Framing error
Time-out
Bits 7 to F Not used kVA setting
Control method
Note Communications error details are stored until an fault reset is input (you can also reset while the Unit is operating).
Broadcast Data
The following table shows the broadcast data. You can also write this data.
Register
Address
Contents
0001H
0002H
Operation signal
Bit 0
Bit 1
Run command 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Reverse operation command 1: Reverse 0: Forward
Bits 2 and 3 Not used
Bit 4
Bit 5
External fault 1: Error (set using H1-01)
Fault reset 1: Reset command (set using H1-02)
Bits 6 to B Not used
Bit C Multi-function contact input terminal S5 input
Bit D
Bit E
Bit F
Frequency reference
Multi-function contact input terminal S6 input
Multi-function contact input terminal S7 input
Multi-function contact input terminal S8 input
30000/100%
Note Bit signals not defined in the broadcast operation signals use local node data signals continuously.
ENTER Command
When writing parameters to the drive from the PLC using MODBUS communications, the parameters are temporarily stored in the parameter data area in the drive. To enable these parameters in the parameter data area, use the ENTER command.
There are two types of ENTER commands: ENTER commands that enable parameter data in RAM, and
ENTER commands that write data to EEPROM (non-volatile memory) in the drive at the same time as enabling data in RAM.
The following table shows the ENTER command data. ENTER command data can only be written.
The ENTER command is enabled by writing 0 to register number 0900H or 0910H.
Register No.
0900H
0910H
Contents
Write parameter data to EEPROM
Parameter data is not written to EEPROM, but refreshed in RAM only.
INFO
The maximum number of times you can write to EEPROM using the drive is 100 thousand. Do not frequently execute ENTER commands (0900H) written to EEPROM.
The ENTER command registers are write-only. Consequently, if reading these registers, the register address will become invalid (Error code: 02H).
Individual Functions
Error Codes
The following table shows MODBUS communications error codes.
Error Code
01H
02H
03H
21H
22H
23H
24H
Contents
Function code error
A function code other than 03H, 08H, or 10H has been set by the PLC.
Invalid register number error
• The register address you are attempting to access is not recorded anywhere.
• With broadcast sending, a start address other than 0000H, 0001H, or 0002H has been set.
Invalid quantity error
• The number of data packets being read or written is outside the range 1 to 16.
• In write mode, the number of data packets in the message is not No. of packets x 2.
Data setting error
• A simple upper limit or lower limit error has occurred in the control data or when writing parameters.
• When writing parameters, the parameter setting is invalid.
Write mode error
• Attempting to write parameters from the PLC during operation.
• Attempting to write via ENTER commands from the PLC during operation.
• Attempting to write parameters other than A1-00 to A1-05, E1-03, or 02-04 when warning alarm
CPF03 (defective EEPROM) has occurred.
• Attempting to write read-only data.
Writing during main circuit undervoltage (UV) error
• Writing parameters from the PLC during UV (main circuit undervoltage) alarm.
• Writing via ENTER commands from the PLC during UV (main circuit undervoltage) alarm.
Writing error during parameter processing
Attempting to write parameters from the PLC while processing parameters in the drive.
Slave Not Responding
In the following cases, the slave will ignore the write function. If the slave address specified in the command message is 0, all slaves execute the write function, but do not return response messages to the master.
•
•
When a communications error (overrun, framing, parity, or CRC-16) is detected in the command message.
When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the drive do not agree.
•
•
When the data that configures the message and the data time length exceeds 24 bits.
When the command message data length is invalid.
Application Precautions
Set a timer in the master to monitor response time from the slaves. Make the setting so that if no response is sent to the master from the slave within the set time, the same command message is sent again from the master.
6-
95
6
-96
Self-Diagnosis
The drive has a built-in function for self-diagnosing the operations of serial communications interface circuits.
This function is called the self-diagnosis function. The self-diagnosis function connects the communications parts of the send and receive terminals, receives the data sent by the drive, and checks if communications are being performed normally.
Perform the self-diagnosis function using the following procedure.
1. Turn ON the power supply to the drive, and set 67 (communications test mode) in parameter H1-05 (Terminal S7 Function Selection).
2. Turn OFF the power supply to the drive.
3. Perform wiring according to the following diagram while the power supply is turned OFF.
4. Turn ON the terminating resistance. (Turn ON pin 1 on DIP switch 1.)
5. Turn ON the power supply to the drive again.
S1
SC
S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7
Fig 6.57 Details of Communications Terminals
“Pass” will be displayed if self-diagnosis is completed without an error occurring.
If an error occurs, a CE (MODBUS communications error) alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator, the error contact output will be turned ON, and the drive operation ready signal will be turned OFF.
Individual Functions
Using the Timer Function
Multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S7 can be designated as timer function input terminals, and multifunction output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, and M5-M6 can be designated as timer function output terminals.
By setting the delay time, you can erase chattering from the sensors and switches.
•
•
Set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12) to 18 (timer function input).
Set H2-01 to H2-03 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, M5-M6, P3-C3, and P4-C4 function selection) to 12 (timer function output).
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 b4-01 b4-02
Timer Function
ON-Delay Time
Delay-ON
Timer
Used in conjunction with a multifunction digital input and a multifunction digital output programmed for the timer function. This sets the amount of time between when the digital input is closed, and the digital output is energized.
Timer Function
OFF-Delay
Time
Delay-OFF
Timer
Used in conjunction with a multifunction digital input and a multifunction digital output programmed for the timer function. This sets the amount of time the output stays energized after the digital input is opened.
0.0 to
300.0
0.0 to
300.0
0.0sec
0.0sec
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Setting Example
When the timer function input ON time is longer than the value set in b4-01, the timer output function is turned ON. When the timer function input OFF time is longer than the value set in b4-02, the timer output function is turned OFF. An example of timer function operation is given in the following diagram.
Timer function input
Timer function output
Fig 6.58 Timer Function Operation Example
6-
97
6
-98
Using PID Control
PID control is a method of making the feedback value (detection value) match the set target value. By combining proportional control (P), integral control (I), and derivative control (D), you can even control targets
(machinery) with play time.
The characteristics of the PID control operations are given below.
P control Outputs the amount of operation proportional to the deviation. You cannot, however, set the deviation to zero using P control alone.
I control Outputs the amount of operation that integrates the deviation. Used for matching feedback value to the target value. I control is not suited, however, to rapid variations.
D control Outputs the amount of operation derived from the deviation. Can respond promptly to rapid variations.
PID Control Operation
To understand the differences between each PID control operation (P, I, and D, the variation in the amount of operation (output frequency) is as shown in the following diagram when the deviation (i.e., the difference between the target value and feedback value) is fixed.
Deviation
Time
Amount of operation
PID control
I control
D control
P control
Time
Fig 6.59 PID Control Operation
PID Control Applications
The following table shows examples of PID control applications using the drive.
Application Control Details
Example of
Sensor Used
Speed Control
• Feeds back machinery speed information, and matches speed to the target value.
• Inputs speed information from other machinery as the target value, and performs synchronous control using the actual speed feedback.
Tachometer generator
Pressure
Control
Flow Rate
Control
Feeds back pressure information, and performs constant pressure control.
Feeds back flow rate information, and controls the flow rate highly accurately.
Pressure sensor
Flow rate sensor
Temperature Control
Feeds back temperature information, and performs temperature adjustment control by rotating the fan.
• Thermocouple
• Thermistor
Individual Functions
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 b5-01 b5-02 b5-03 b5-04 b5-05 b5-06 b5-07 b5-08 b5-09
PID Function
Setting
PID Mode
This parameter determines the function of the PID control.
0: Disabled
1: D= Feedback
2: D= Feed-Forward
3: Freq. Ref. + PID output
(D = Feedback)
4: Freq. Ref. + PID output
(D = Feed-Forward)
Proportional
Gain Setting
PID Gain
Intregral Time
Setting
PID I Time
Intregral Limit
Setting
Sets the proportional gain of the
PID controller.
Sets the integral time for the PID controller. A setting of zero disables integral control.
PID I Limit
Sets the maximum output possible from the integrator. Set as a percentage (%) of maximum frequency.
Derivative
Time
PID D Time
PID Output
Limit
PID Limit
PID Offset
Adjustment
PID Offset
PID Primary
Delay Time
Constant
PID Delay
Time
PID Output
Level Selection
Output Level
Sel
Sets D control derivative time. A setting of 0.00 disables derivative control.
Sets the maximum output possible from the entire PID controller. Set as a percentage (%) of maximum frequency.
Sets the amount of offset of the output of the PID controller. Set as a percentage (%) of maximum frequency.
The offset is summed with the
PID output. This can be used to artificially kick-start a slow starting PID loop.
Sets the amount of time for the filter on the output of the PID controller.
Note: The offset is summed with the PID output. This can be used to artifically kick-start a slow starting PID loop.
Note: Normally , change is not required.
Determines whether the PID controller will be direct or reverse acting.
0: Normal Output (direct acting)
1: Reverse Output (reverse acting)
0 to 4
0.00
to
25.00
0.0
to
360.0
0.0
to
100.0
0.00 to
10.00
0.0
to
100.0
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.00 to
10.00
0 to 1
0
1.00
1.0sec
100.0%
0.00sec
100.0%
0.0%
0.00sec
0
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
6-
99
6
-100
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 b5-10 b5-11 b5-12 b5-13 b5-14 b5-15 b5-16 b5-17
H6-01
PID Output
Gain Setting
Output Gain
PID Output
Reverse
Selection
Output Rev Sel
PID Feedback
Reference
Missing
Detection
Selection
Fb los Det Sel
Sets the output gain of the PID controller.
0: Zero Limit (when PID output goes negative, drive stops).
Zero Limit is automatic when reverse prohibit is selected using b1-04.
1: Reverse (when PID goes negative, drive reverses).
0: Disabled (no detection of loss of PID feedback)
1: Alarm (detection of loss of
PID feedback, operation continues during detection with the fault contact not energized)
2: Fault (detection of loss of PID feeedback, coast to stop during detection and fault contact energizes)
PID Feedback
Loss Detection
Level
Fb los Det Lvl
Sets the PID feedback loss detection level as a percentage
(%) of maximum frequency
(E1-04).
PID Feedback
Loss Detection
Time
Fb los Det Time
Sets the PID feedback loss detection delay time in terms of seconds.
PID Sleep
Function Start
Level
PID Sleep
Level
Terminal RP
Pulse Train
Input Function
Selection
Pulse Input Sel
Sets the sleep function start frequency.
Note: Enabled even when PID control mode has not been selected.
PID Sleep
Delay Time
PID Sleep Time
Sets the sleep function delay time in terms of 0.1 seconds.
PID Accel/
Decel Time
PID SFS Time
Applies an accel/decel time to the
PID setpoint reference. The drive's standard softstarter
(C1-xx and S-curve) still affects the output of the PID algorithm.
Selects the function of pulse train terminal RP.
0: Frequency reference
1: PID feedback value
2: PID setpoint value
0.0 to
25.0
0 to 1
0 to 2
0 to 100
0.0
to
25.5
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 to
25.5
0 to 2
1.0
0
0
0%
1.0sec
0.0Hz
0.0sec
0.0sec
0
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Individual Functions
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Output Signal Level During
Multi-Function Analog
Output
Min.
Unit
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
U1-24
U1-36
U1-37
U1-38
PI Feedback
Value
PID
Feedback
Feedback signal level when PID control is used.
10V: Maximum Frequency
(possible for -10V thru +10V)
PID Input
PID Input
Input error to the PID regulator
(PID Setpoint - PID Feedback).
PID Output Output of the PID regulator as a percentage of maximum
PID Output frequency (E1-04).
PID Setpoint Setpoint of the PID regulator
PID Setpoint
(PID reference + PID bias).
10V: Maximum Frequency
(possible for -10V thru +10V)
10V: Maximum Frequency
(possible for -10V thru +10V)
10V: Maximum Frequency
0.01
%
0.01
%
0.01
%
0.01
%
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Multi-Function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-10)
Setting
Value
19
30
31
34
35
Function
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes PID control disable (ON: PID control disabled)
PID control integral reset (reset when reset command is input or when stopped during
PID control)
PID control integral hold (ON: Hold)
PID soft starter
PID input characteristics switch
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Multi-Function Analog Input (H3-05, H3-09)
Setting
Value
B
C
Function
PID feedback
PID target value
Contents (100%)
Maximum output frequency
Maximum output frequency
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
6-
101
6
-102
PID Control Methods
There are four PID control methods. Select the method by setting parameter b5-01.
Set Value
1
2
3
4
Control Method
PID output becomes the drive output frequency, and D control is used in the difference between PID target value and feedback value.
PID output becomes the drive output frequency, and D control is used in the PID feedback value.
PID output is added as compensation value of the drive output frequency, and D control is used in the difference between PID target value and feedback value.
PID output is added as compensation value of the drive output frequency, and D control is used in the
PID feedback value.
PID Input Methods
Enable PID control using parameter b5-01, and set the PID target value and PID feedback value.
PID Target Value Input Methods
Select the PID control target value input method according to the setting in b1-01 (Reference Selection).
Normally, the frequency reference selected in b1-01 is the PID target value, but you can also set the PID target value as shown in the following table.
PID Target Input Method
Multi-Function Analog Terminal A2 Input
MODBUS register 0006H
Pulse train input
Setting Conditions
Set H3-05 or H3-09 to C (PID target value). Also, be sure to set H6-01 (pulse train input function selection) to 1 (PID feedback value).
Set MODBUS bit 1 in register address 000FH to 1 to be able to use register number
0006H as the PID target value.
Set H6-01 to 2 (PID target value).
PID Feedback Input Methods
Select one of the following PID control feedback input methods.
Input Method
Multi-function analog input
Pulse train input
Setting Conditions
Set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to B (PID feedback).
Set H6-01 to 1 (PID feedback).
INFO
Adjust PID target value and PID feedback value using the following items.
• Analog input: Adjust using the analog input terminal gain and bias.
• Pulse train input: Adjust using pulse train scaling, pulse train input gain, and pulse train input bias.
Individual Functions
PID Adjustment Methods
Use the following procedure to adjust PID while performing PID control and measuring the response waveform.
1. Set b5-01 (PID Control Mode Selection) to 1 or 2 (PID control enabled).
2. Increase b5-02 (Proportional Gain (P)) to within a range that does not vibrate.
3. Reduce b5-03 (Integral (I) time) to within a range that does not vibrate.
4. Increase b5-05 (Derivative (D) time) to within a range that does not vibrate.
PID Fine Adjustment Methods
This section explains the fine adjustment of PID after setting the PID control parameters.
Suppressing Overshoot
If overshoot occurs, reduce derivative time (D), and increase integral time (I).
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Set a Rapidly Stabilizing Control Condition
To rapidly stabilize the control even if overshoot occurs, reduce integral time (I), and lengthen derivative time (D).
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Suppressing Long-cycle Vibration
If vibration occurs with a longer cycle than the integral time (I) set value, the integral operation is too strong.
Lengthen the integral time (I) to suppress the vibration.
Response Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
6-
103
6
-104
Suppressing Short Cycle Vibration
If vibration occurs when the vibration cycle is short, and the cycle is almost identical to the derivative time (D) set value, the differential operation is too strong. Shorten the derivative time (D) to suppress the vibration.
If vibration continues even when the derivative time (D) is set to 0.00 (D control disabled), reduce the proportional gain (P), or increase the PID primary delay time constant.
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Setting Precautions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
In PID control, the b5-04 parameter is used to prevent the calculated integral control value from exceeding a specified amount. When the load varies rapidly, drive response is delayed, and the machine may be damaged or the motor may stall. In this case, reduce the set value to speed up drive response.
The b5-06 parameter is used to prevent the arithmetic operation following the PID control calculation from exceeding a specified amount. Set taking the maximum output frequency to be 100%.
The b5-07 parameter is used to adjust PID control offset. Set in increments of 0.1%, taking the maximum output frequency to be 100%.
Set the low pass filter time constant for the PID control output in b5-08. Enable this parameter to prevent machinery resonance from occurring when machinery adhesive abrasion is great, or rigidity is poor. In this case, set the parameter to be greater than the resonance frequency cycle. Increase this time constant to reduce drive responsiveness.
Using b5-09, you can invert the PID output polarity. Consequently, if you increase the PID target value, you can apply this parameter to applications to lower the drive output frequency.
Using b5-10, you can apply gain to the PID control output. Enable this parameter to adjust the amount of compensation if adding PID control output to the frequency reference as compensation.
When PID control output is negative, you can use parameter b5-11 to invert the drive. When b1-04 (Prohibition of Reverse Operation) is set to 1 (enabled), however, PID output limit is 0.
With the drive, by setting an independent acceleration/deceleration time in parameter b5-17, you can increase or decrease the PID target value using the acceleration/deceleration time. The acceleration/ deceleration function (parameter C1) used normally, however, is allocated after PID control, so depending on the settings, resonance with PID control and hunting in the machinery may occur. If this happens, reduce parameter C1 until hunting does not occur, and maintain the acceleration/deceleration time using b5-17. Also, you can disable the set value in b5-17 from the external terminals during operation using multi-function input set value 34 (PID soft starter).
PID Control Block
The following diagram shows the PID control block in the drive.
Upper limit Fmax x109%
Individual Functions
1 T
Fig 6.60 PID Control Block
6-
105
6
-106
PID Feedback Loss Detection
When performing PID control, be sure to use the PID feedback loss detection function. If PID feedback is lost, the drive output frequency may accelerate to the maximum output frequency.
When setting b5-12 to 1 and the status of the PID feedback value detection level in b5-13 is insufficient and continues for the time set in b5-14, an FbL (PID feedback reference lost) alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator and drive operation will continue.
When b5-12 is set to 2, an FbL (PID feedback reference lost) error alarm will be displayed on the Digital
Operator, the error contact will operate, and drive operation will be stopped.
The time chart for PID feedback loss detection (set b5-12 to 2) is shown below.
PID feedback value
Loss detection level
(b5-13)
Loss detection time
(b5-14)
Time
No FbL detection
FbL detection
Loss detection time
(b5-14)
Fig 6.61 PID Feedback Loss Detection Time Chart
PID Sleep
The PID sleep function stops the drive when the PID sleep function delay time continues while the PID control target value is at an insufficient level to operate the PID sleep function. When the PID sleep delay time continues and the PID control target value is above the PID sleep function operation level, drive operation will automatically resume.
When PID control is disabled, the PID sleep function is also disabled. When using the PID sleep function, select decelerate to stop or coast to stop as the stopping method.
The PID sleep time chart is shown below.
PID target value
Sleep operation level b5-15
Sleep operation delay time b5-16
Internal run command
Operation
External run command
Operating
Sleep operation delay time b5-16
Stopped
Run command has been input
Operation status output
Fig 6.62 PID Sleep Time Chart
Individual Functions
Energy-saving
To perform energy saving, set b8-01 (Energy Saving Mode Selection) to 1. Energy-saving control can be performed using both V/f control and open-loop vector control. The parameters to be adjusted are different for each. In V/f control, adjust b8-04 to b8-06, and in vector control, adjust b8-02 and b8-03.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 b8-01 b8-02 b8-03 b8-04 b8-05 b8-06
E2-02
E2-11
Energy Saving
Control
Selection
Energy Save
Sel
Energy Saving
Gain
Energy Save
Gain
Energy Saving
Control Filter
Time Constant
Energy Save
F.T
Energy Saving
Coefficient
Value
Energy Save
COEF
Energy Savings function enable/ disable selection.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Sets energy savings control gain when in vector control mode.
Sets energy saving control filter time constant when in vector control mode.
Used to fine-tune the energy savings function when in V/f
Control Mode.
Power
Detection Filter
Time
Used to fine-tune the energy savings function when in V/f
Control Mode.
kW Filter Time
Search
Operation
Voltage Limit
Used to fine-tune the energy savings function when in V/f
Control Mode.
Search V Limit
Motor Rated
Slip
Motor Rated
Slip
Motor Rated
Output
Mtr Rated
Power
Sets the motor rated slip in hertz
(Hz). This value is automatically set during rotational
Auto-Tuning.
Sets the motor rated power in kilowatts (kW). This value is automatically set during
Auto-Tuning. 1HP = 0.746kW
0 or 1
0.0 to
10.0
0.00 to
10.0
0.0 to
655.00
0 to
2000
0 to 100
0.00 to
20.00
0.00 to
650.00
0
0.7
*1
0.50sec
*2
*3
*4
20ms
0%
2.90Hz
*4
0.40kW
*3
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
A
No No
No No
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
No
No
No
A
Q
A
A
A
No
No
No
A
Q
A
A
A
No
No
No
A
Q
* 1. Set to 1.0 in Vector Control Mode with PG.
* 2. Initial settings vary based on drive capacity and control mode.
* 3. Caution: Initial settings will vary based on motor capacity
* 4. Initial/Default settings vary based on drive capacity. Values shown here are for 200-240V class 0.4kW drives.
6-
107
6
-108
Adjusting Energy-saving Control
The method of adjustment during energy-saving control operations differs depending on the control method.
Refer to the following when making adjustments.
V/f Control
In V/f control method, the voltage for optimum motor efficiency is calculated and becomes the output voltage reference.
•
• b8-04 (Energy-saving Coefficient) is set at the factory for motor use applied to the drive. If the motor capacity differs from the motor applied to the drive, set the motor capacity in E2-11 (Motor Rated Output).
Also, adjust the output voltage in steps of 5 until it reaches minimum. The larger the energy-saving coefficient, the greater the output voltage.
To improve response when the load fluctuates, reduce the power detection filter time constant b8-05. If b8-
05 is set too small, however, motor rotations when the load is light may become unstable.
• Motor efficiency varies due to temperature fluctuations and differences in motor characteristics. Consequently, control motor efficiency online to optimize efficiency by causing minute variations in voltage using the search operation. Parameter b8-06 (Search Operation Voltage Limiter) controls the range that control the voltage using the search operation. For 200-240V class drives, set the range to 100%/200 V, and for 380-480V class drives, set the range to 100%/380-480 V. Set to 0 to disable the search operation.
Vector Control
In vector control method, control the slip frequency so that motor efficiency is maximized.
• Taking the motor rated slip for the base frequency as optimum slip, calculate the optimum slip for motor efficiency for each frequency. In vector control, be sure to perform autotuning, and set the motor rated slip.
• If the motor performs hunting when using energy-saving control in vector control, reduce the set value in b8-02 (Energy-saving Gain), or increase the set value in b8-03 (Energy-saving Filter Time Constant).
Setting Motor Parameters
In vector control method, the motor parameters are set automatically using autotuning. If autotuning does not complete normally, set them manually.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
E2-01
E2-02
Motor Rated
Current
Motor Rated
FLA
Motor Rated
Slip
Motor Rated
Slip
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Sets the motor nameplate full load current in amperes (A). This value is automatically set during
Auto-Tuning.
Sets the motor rated slip in hertz
(Hz). This value is automatically set during rotational
Auto-Tuning.
0.32 to
6.40
*2
0.00 to
20.00
1.90 A
*1
2.90Hz
*1
No
No
Q
A
Q
A
Q
A
Q
A
Q
A
Individual Functions
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
E2-03
E2-04
E2-05
E2-06
E2-07
E2-08
E2-10
Motor No-Load
Current
No-Load
Current
Sets the magnetizing current of the motor as a percentage of full load amps (E2-01). This value is automatically set during rotational
Auto-Tuning.
Number of
Motor Poles
Number of
Poles
Motor Line-to-
Line Resistance
Term
Resistance
Motor Leakage
Inductance
Leak
Inductance
Motor Iron-core
Saturation
Coefficient 1
Saturation
Comp1
Motor Iron-core
Saturation
Coefficient 2
Saturation
Comp2
Motor Iron
Loss for Torque
Compensation
Tcomp Iron
Loss
Sets the number of motor poles.
This value is automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
Sets the phase-to-phase motor resistance in ohms. This value is automatically set by
Auto-Tuning.
Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage of motor rated voltage.
This value is automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 50% of magnetic flux. This value is automatically set during rotational
Auto-Tuning.
Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 75% of magnetic flux. This value is automatically set during rotational
Auto-Tuning.
Sets the motor iron loss in watts
(W).
0.00 to
1.89
*3
2 to 48
0.000
to
65.000
0.0
to
40.0
0.00 to
0.50
0.00 to
0.75
0 to
65535
1.20 A
*1
4 poles
9.842
*1
18.2%
*1
0.50
0.75
14 W
*1
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
No
A
No
No
No
A
A
Q
A
No
No
No
A
* 1. Initial/Default settings vary based on drive capacity. Values shown here are for 200-240V class 0.4kW drives.
* 2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the drive's rated current. Values shown here are for 200-240V class 0.4kW drives.
* 3. The setting range will vary based on drive capacity. Values shown here are for 200-240V class 0.4kW drives.
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
A
No
A
A
A
A
No
A
Q
A
A
A
A
No
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
Q
A
A
A
A
No
6-
109
6
-110
Manual Motor Parameter Setting Methods
The motor parameter settings methods are given below. Make (enter) settings referring to the motor test report.
Motor Rated Voltage Setting
Set E2-01 to the rated current on the motor nameplate.
Motor Rated Slip Setting
Set E2-02 to the motor rated slip calculated from the number of rated rotations on the motor nameplate.
Amount of motor rated slip = Motor rated frequency (Hz) - No. of rated rotations (min
1 ) x No. of motor poles/120.
Motor No-Load Current Setting
Set E2-03 to the motor no-load current using the rated voltage and rated frequency. The motor no-load current is not normally written on the motor nameplate. Consult the motor manufacturer.
Factory setting is the no-load current value for a standard Yaskawa 4-pole motor.
Number of Motor Poles Setting
E2-04 is displayed only when V/f control method with PG is selected. Set the number of motor poles (number of poles) as written on the motor nameplate.
Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Setting
E2-05 is set automatically when performing motor line-to-line resistance autotuning. When you cannot perform tuning, consult the motor manufacturer for the line-to-line resistance value. Calculate the resistance from the line-to-line resistance value in the motor test report using the following formula, and then make the setting accordingly.
•
•
•
E-type isolation: [Line-to line resistance ( ) at 75 C of test report] 0.92 ( )
B-type isolation: [Line-to line resistance ( ) at 75 C of test report] 0.92 ( )
F-type isolation: [Line-to line resistance ( ) at 115 C of test report] 0.87 ( )
Motor Leak Inductance Setting
Set the amount of voltage drop due to motor leak inductance in E2-06 using the percentage over the motor rated voltage. Make this setting when the high-speed motor inductance is small. If the inductance is not written on the motor nameplate, consult the motor manufacturer.
Motor Iron Saturation Coefficients 1 and 2 Settings
E2-07 and E2-08 are set automatically using autotuning.
Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation Setting
E2-10 is displayed only when in V/f control method. To increase the torque compensation accuracy when in
V/f control method, set the motor iron loss in Watts.
Motor Mechanical Loss
When using flux vector control, adjust mechanical loss in the following cases. (There is normally no reason to make this adjustment.) The mechanical loss setting is used to compensate the torque.
•
•
There is excessive torque loss from the motor bearings.
There is excessive torque loss from a fan, pump, etc.
Individual Functions
Setting the V/f Pattern
In V/f control method, you can set the drive input voltage and the V/f pattern as the need arises.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
E1-01
E1-03
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Input voltage setting
Input Voltage
Set the drive input voltage in 1 volt.
This setting is used as a reference value in protection functions.
155.0 to
255.0
(240V)
310.0 to
510.0
(480V)*1
230.0V
or
460.0V
*1
V/f pattern selection
V/F Selection
Max. output frequency
Max
Frequency
Max. voltage
0 to E: Select from the 15 preset patterns.
F: Custom user-set patterns (Applicable for settings E1-04 to E1-10.)
0 to F
40.0 to
400.0
*5
F
60.0Hz
*2
Max Voltage
0.0 to
255.0
*1
230.0V
or
460.0V*
1*2
Base frequency
Base
Frequency
Mid. output frequency
Mid
Frequency A
Mid. output frequency voltage
Mid Voltage
A
Min. output frequency
Min
Frequency
Min. output frequency voltage
Min Voltage
Output voltage (V)
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 to
255.0
*1
*5
Frequency (Hz)
0.0 to
400.0
To set V/f characteristics in a straight line, set the same values for E1-07 and
E1-09. In this case, the setting for E1-08 will be disregarded.
Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following manner:
E1-04 (FMAX) E1-06 (FA) > E1-07
(FB) E1-09 (FMIN)
0.0 to
255.0 *1
0.0 to
400.0
*5
60.0Hz
*2
3.0Hz
*2
12.6Vac
or
25.3
*1 *2
0.5Hz
*2
2.3Vac
or
4.6Vac
*1 *2
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
A
A
Q
A
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
A
A
Q
A
Q
No
Q
Q
Q
A
A
Q
A
Q
No
Q
Q
Q
No
No
A
No
Q
No
Q
Q
Q
No
No
Q
No
6-
111
6
-112
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
E1-11
E1-12
Mid. output frequency 2
Mid
Frequency B
Mid. output frequency voltage 2
Mid Voltage
B
Set only to fine-adjust V/f for the output range. Normally, this setting is not required.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 to
255.0
*1
*5
0.0Hz
*3
0.0 V
*3
No
No
A
A
A
A
E1-13
Base voltage
Base Voltage
0.0 to
255.0
*1
0.0 V
*4
No A A
* 1. These are values for a 200-240V class drive. Values for a 380-480V class drive are double.
* 2. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open-loop vector control factory settings are given.)
* 3. The contents of parameters E1-11 and E1-12 are ignored when set to 0.00.
* 4. E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.
* 5. The setting range is 0 to 66.0 for open-loop vector control 2.
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
Q
Individual Functions
Setting Drive Input Voltage E1-01
Setting Range: 155.0V to 255.0V (200-240V Models)
310.0V to 510.0V (380-480V Models)
Factory Defaults: 240.0V (200-240V Models)
480.0V (380-480V Models)
Set the Input Voltage parameter (E1-01) to the nominal voltage of the connected AC power supply. This parameter adjusts the levels of some protective features of the drive (i.e. Overvoltage, Stall Prevention, etc.). E1-01 also serves as the Maximum/Base Voltage used by the Preset V/Hz curves (E1-03= 0 to E).
WARNING
DRIVE INPUT VOLTAGE (NOT MOTOR VOLTAGE) MUST BE SET IN E1-01 FOR THE PROTECTIVE
FEATURES OF THE DRIVE TO FUNCTION PROPERLY. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE AND/OR PERSONAL INJURY.
E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection
9
A
7
8
B
C
D
E
F
FF
Setting
0
1
4
5
6
2
3
Description
50 Hz
60 Hz Saturation
50 Hz Saturation
72 Hz
50 Hz VT1
50 Hz VT2
60 Hz VT1
60 Hz VT2
50 Hz HST1
50 Hz HST2
60 Hz HST1
60 Hz HST2
90 Hz
120 Hz
180 Hz
Custom V/f ( factory default, with parameter values per setting 1 )
Custom w/o limit
The drive operates utilizing a set V/f pattern to determine the appropriate output voltage level for each commanded speed. There are 15 different preset V/f patterns to select from with varying voltage profiles, saturation levels (frequency at which maximum voltage is reached), and maximum frequencies.
There are also settings for Custom V/f patterns that will allow the programmer to manually set (“Customize”) the V/f pattern using parameters E1-04 through E1-13.
Using parameter E1-03, the programmer can select one of the preset V/f patterns or chose between a custom V/f pattern with an upper voltage limit (E1-03= “F: Custom V/F”) and a custom V/f pattern without a voltage limit (E1-03=
“FF: Custom w/o limit”).
6-
113
6
-114
E1-04 Maximum Output Frequency
Setting Range: 0.0 to 400.0Hz
Factory Default: 60.0Hz
E1-05 Maximum Output Voltage
Setting Range: 0.0 to 255.0V (200-240V Models)
0.0 to 510.0V (380-480V Models)
Factory Defaults: 230.0V (200-240V Models)
480.0V (380-480V Models)
E1-06 Base Frequency
Setting Range: 0.0 to 400.0Hz
Factory Default: 60.0Hz
E1-07 Mid Output Frequency A
Setting Range: 0.0 to 400.0Hz
Factory Default: 3.0Hz
E1-08 Mid Output Voltage A
Setting Range: 0.0 to 255.0V (200-240V Models)
0.0 to 510.0V (380-480V Models)
Factory Defaults: 12.6V (200-240V Models)
25.2V (380-480V Models)
E1-09 Minimum Output Frequency
Setting Range: 0.0 to 400.0Hz
Factory Default: 0.5Hz
E1-10 Minimum Output Voltage
Setting Range: 0.0 to 255.0V (200-240V Models)
0.0 to 510.0V (380-480V Models)
Factory Defaults: 2.3V (200-240V Models)
4.6V (380-480V Models)
E1-11 Mid Output Frequency B
Setting Range: 0.0 to 400.0Hz
Factory Default: 0.0Hz
E1-12 Mid Output Voltage B
E1-13 Base Voltage
Setting Range: 0.0 to 255.0V (200-240V Models)
0.0 to 510.0V (380-480V Models)
Factory Defaults: 0.0V (200-240V Models)
0.0V (380-480V Models)
To set up a custom V/f pattern, program the points shown in the diagram below using parameters E1-04 through
E1-13. Be sure that the following condition is true:: E1-09 E1-07 E1-06 E1-11 E1-04
Individual Functions
Max Voltage E1-05
Mid Voltage B E1-12
Base Voltage E1-13
Mid Voltage A E1-08
Min Voltage E1-10
Min
Freq
E1-11
Mid
Freq A
A
Base
Freq
Mid
Freq B
E1-04
Max
Freq
Frequency
Fig.38 Custom V/f Pattern Programming Curve
Increasing the voltage in the V/f pattern increases the available motor torque. However, when setting a custom V/f pattern, increase the voltage gradually while monitoring the motor current, to prevent:
• Drive faults as a result of motor over-excitation
• Motor overheating or excessive vibration
Table 9 V/f Pattern Default Settings for Drive Capacity 0.4~1.5kW for 240V Class
Parameter
No.
Name Unit
E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection —
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
E1-11
E1-12
E1-13
Max Output Frequency
Max Output Voltage
Base Frequency
Mid Output Frequency A
Mid Output Voltage A
Min Output Frequency
Mid Output Voltage
Mid Output Frequency B
Mid Output Voltage B
Base Voltage
For 480V class units, the value is twice that of 240V class units.
V
Hz
V
Hz
Hz
V
Hz
V
V
V
0
50.0
240.0
50.0
2.5
17.2
1.3
10.3
0
0
0
1
60.0
240.0
60.0
3.0
17.2
1.5
10.3
0
0
0
2
60.0
240.0
50.0
3.0
17.2
1.5
10.3
0
0
0
Factory Setting
3
72.0
240.0
60.0
3.0
17.2
1.5
10.3
0
0
0
4 5 6 7
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
240.0
240.0
240.0
240.0
50.0
25.0
50.0
25.0
60.0
30.0
60.0
30.0
40.2
1.3
9.2
0
0
0
57.5
1.3
10.3
0
0
0
40.2
1.5
9.2
0
0
0
57.5
1.5
10.3
0
0
0
6-
115
Table 9 V/f Pattern Default Settings for Drive Capacity 0.4~1.5kW for 240V Class (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Name Unit
E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection —
E1-04 Max. Output Frequency Hz
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
E1-11
E1-12
E1-13
Max. Output Voltage
Base Frequency
Mid. Output Frequency A
Mid. Output Voltage A
Min. Output Frequency
Mid. Output Voltage
Mid Output Frequency B
Mid Output Voltage B
Base Voltage
For 480V class units, the value is twice that of 240V class units.
V
Hz
V
Hz
V
Hz
V
V
V
8
50.0
240.0
50.0
2.5
21.8
1.3
12.6
0
0
0
9
50.0
240.0
50.0
2.5
27.6
1.3
14.9
0
0
0
A
60.0
240.0
60.0
3.0
21.8
1.5
12.6
0
0
0
Factory Setting
B C D E F
60.0
90.0
120.0
180.0
60.0
240.0
240.0
240.0
240.0
240.0
60.0
3.0
60.0
3.0
60.0
3.0
60.0
3.0
60.0
3.0
27.6
1.5
17.2
0
0
0
17.2
1.5
10.3
0
0
0
17.2
1.5
10.3
0
0
0
17.2
1.5
10.3
0
0
0
0
0
17.2
1.5
10.3
0
Table 10 V/f Pattern Default Settings for Drive Capacity 2.2~45kW for 240V Class
Parameter
No.
Name Unit
E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection —
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
Max. Output Frequency
Max. Output Voltage
Base Frequency
Mid. Output Frequency A
Mid. Output Voltage A
E1-09
E1-10
E1-11
E1-12
Min. Output Frequency
Mid. Output Voltage
Mid Output Frequency B
Mid Output Voltage B
E1-13 Base Voltage V
For 480V class units, the value is twice that of 240V class units.
Hz
V
Hz
V
Hz
V
Hz
V
V
0
50.0
240.0
50.0
2.5
16.1
0
0
1.3
8.0
0
1
60.0
240.0
60.0
3.0
16.1
1.5
8.0
0
0
0
2
60.0
240.0
50.0
3.0
16.1
0
0
1.5
8.0
0
Factory Setting
3
72.0
240.0
60.0
3.0
16.1
0
0
1.5
8.0
0
4 5 6 7
0
0
1.3
6.9
0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
240.0
240.0
240.0
240.0
50.0
25.0
40.2
50.0
25.0
57.5
60.0
30.0
40.2
60.0
30.0
57.5
1.3
8.0
0
0
0
0
0
1.5
6.9
0
0
0
1.5
8.0
0
6
-116
Individual Functions
Table 10 V/f Pattern Default Settings for Drive Capacity 2.2~45kW for 240V Class (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Name Unit
E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection —
E1-04 Max. Output Frequency
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
E1-11
E1-12
E1-13
Max. Output Voltage
Base Frequency
Mid. Output Frequency A
Mid. Output Voltage A
Min. Output Frequency
Mid. Output Voltage
Mid Output Frequency B
Mid Output Voltage B
Base Voltage
For 480V class units, the value is twice that of 240V class units.
Hz
Hz
V
Hz
V
V
V
Hz
V
V
8
50.0
9
50.0
1.3
10.3
0
0
0
240.0
240.0
50.0
2.5
20.7
50.0
2.5
26.4
1.3
12.6
0
0
0
A
Factory Setting
B C D E F
60.0
60.0
90.0
120.0
180.0
60.0
1.5
10.3
0
0
0
240.0
240.0
240.0
240.0
240.0
240.0
60.0
3.0
20.7
60.0
3.0
26.4
60.0
3.0
16.1
60.0
3.0
16.1
60.0
3.0
16.1
60.0
3.0
16.1
1.5
14.9
0
0
0
1.5
8.0
0
0
0
1.5
8.0
0
0
0
1.5
8.0
0
0
0
1.5
8.0
0
0
0
Table 11 V/f Pattern Default Settings for Drive Capacity 55~300kW for 240V Class
Parameter
No.
Name
E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
E1-11
E1-12
E1-13
Max. Output
Frequency
Max. Output Voltage
Max. Voltage
Frequency
Mid. Output
Frequency A
Mid. Output
Voltage A
Min. Output
Frequency
Mid. Output
Voltage
Mid Output Frequency B
Mid Output Voltage B
Base Voltage
For 480V class units, the value is twice that of 240V class units.
Unit
–
V
V
Hz
V
Hz
V
V
Hz
V
Hz
0
50.0
240.0
240.0
50.0
60.0
2.5
13.8
1.3
6.9
0
0
0
1
60.0
3.0
13.8
1.5
6.9
0
0
0
2
Factory Setting
3 4 5 6 7
60.0
72.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
240.0
240.0
240.0
240.0
240.0
240.0
50.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
3.0
13.8
1.5
6.9
0
0
0
3.0
13.8
1.5
6.9
0
0
0
25.0
40.2
1.3
5.7
0
0
0
25.0
57.5
1.3
6.9
0
0
0
30.0
40.2
1.5
5.7
0
0
0
30.0
57.5
1.5
6.9
0
0
0
6-
117
Table 11 V/f Pattern Default Settings for Drive Capacity 55~300kW for 240V Class (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Name Unit
E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection – 8
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
E1-11
E1-12
E1-13
Max. Output
Frequency
Max. Output Voltage
Base
Frequency
Mid. Output
Frequency A
Mid. Output
Voltage A
Min. Output
Frequency
Mid. Output
Voltage
Mid Output Frequency B
Mid Output Voltage
B
Base Voltage
Hz
V
Hz
V
V
Hz
V
Hz
V
V
50.0
240.0
50.0
For 480V class units, the value is twice that of 240V class units.
2.5
17.2
1.3
8.0
0
0
0
9
50.0
240.0
50.0
2.5
23.0
1.3
10.3
0
0
0
A
60.0
240.0
60.0
3.0
17.2
1.5
8.0
0
0
0
Factory Setting
B
60.0
240.0
60.0
3.0
23.0
1.5
12.6
0
0
0
C
90.0
240.0
60.0
3.0
13.8
1.5
6.9
0
0
0
D
120.0
240.0
60.0
3.0
13.8
1.5
6.9
0
0
0
E
180.0
240.0
60.0
3.0
13.8
1.5
6.9
0
0
0
0
0
0
1.5
6.9
F
60.0
240.0
60.0
3.0
13.8
6
-118
Individual Functions
Specifications E1-03
60Hz Saturation
50Hz Saturation
50Hz
60Hz
50Hz
72Hz
Variable
Torque 1
Variable
Torque 2
Variable
Torque 1
Variable
Torque 2
0
1
F
2
3
4
5
6
7
Table 8 Preset V/f Patterns
V/f Pattern *1 Specifications E1-03
230
(V)
17
10
0 1.3 2.5
0
50
(Hz)
230
(V)
17
10
0 1.5 3.0
2
1
F
50 60
(Hz)
230
(V)
3
50Hz
High
Starting
Torque 1
High
Starting
Torque 2
High
Starting
Torque 1
60Hz
High
Starting
Torque 2
8
9
A
B
90Hz C
17
10
0 1.5 3.0
230
(V)
60 72
(Hz)
5
57
40
10
9
0 1.3
25
4
50
(Hz)
230
(V)
7
57
40
10
9
0 1.5
30
6
60
(Hz)
120Hz
180Hz
D
E
V/f Pattern *1
230
(V)
9
28
22
15
13
0 1.3 2.5
8
50
(Hz)
230
(V)
28
22
17
13
0 1.5 3.0
B
A
230
(V)
C
17
10
0 1.5 3.0
230
(V)
D
17
10
0 1.5 3.0
60
(Hz)
60 90
(Hz)
17
10
0 1.5 3.0
230
(V)
E
60 120
(Hz)
60 180
(Hz)
Fig 6.63 User-Set V/f Pattern
If one of the custom V/f patterns is selected, then parameters E1-04 through E1-13 will determine the V/f pattern.
IMPORTANT
When a factory Initialization is performed, the setting of E1-03 is unaffected but the settings of E1-04 through E1-13 are returned to their factory default settings.
Setting Precautions
When the setting is to user-defined V/f pattern, beware of the following points.
•
•
When changing control method, parameters E1-07 to E1-10 will change to the factory settings for that control method.
Be sure to set the four frequencies as follows:
E1-04 (FMAX) E1-06 (FA) E1-07 (FB) E1-09 (FMIN)
6-
119
6
-120
Torque Control
With flux vector control or open-loop vector control 2, the motor's output torque can be controlled by a torque reference from an analog input. Set d5-01 to 1 to control torque.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 d5-01 d5-02 d5-03 d5-04
Torque Control
Selection
Torq Control
Sel
Torque
Reference
Delay Time
Torq Ref Filter
Speed Limit
Selection
Speed Limit Sel
Speed Limit
Speed Lmt
Value
Selects speed or torque control.
The torque reference is set via analog input A2 or A3 when it is set for "torque reference" (H3-05 or H3-09 = 13). Torque reference is set as a percentage of motor rated torque. To use this function for switching between speed and torque control, set to 0 and set a multi-function input to "speed/ torque control change" (H1-xx =
71).
0: Speed Control (controlled by
C5-01 to C5-07)
1: Torque Control
Sets the torque reference delay time in milliseconds.
This function can be used to correct for noise in the torque control signal or the responsiveness with the host controller. When oscillation occurs during torque control, increase the set value.
Sets the speed limit command method for the torque control method.
1: Analog Input - Limited by the output of the soft starter (b1-01 selection and active acceleration/ deceleration and S-curve settings).
2: Program Setting - Limited by d5-04 setting value.
Sets the speed limit during torque control as a percentage of the maximum output frequency
(E1-04).
This function is enabled when d5-03 is set to 2. Directions are as follows.
+: run command direction
-: run command opposite direction
0 to 1
0 to
1000
1 or 2
-120 to
+120
0
0ms
*
1
0%
No
No
No
No
No No
No No
No No
No No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Individual Functions
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 d5-05 d5-06
H3-04
H3-05
H3-06
H3-07
H3-08
H3-09
Speed Limit
Bias
Speed Lmt Bias
Speed/Torque
Control
Switchover
Timer
Ref Hold Time
Sets the speed limit bias as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04). Bias is given to the specified speed limit.
It can be used to adjust the margin for the speed limit.
Sets the delay time from inputting the multi-function input "speed/ torque control change" (from On to OFF or OFF to ON) until the control is actually changed. This function is enabled when the multi-function input "speed/ torque control change"
(H1-xx= 71) is set. While in the speed/torque control switching timer, the analog inputs hold the value present when the "speed/ torque control change" is received.
Terminal A3
Signal Level
Selection
Term A3 Signal
Terminal A3
Function
Selection
Terminal A3
Sel
Terminal A3
Gain Setting
Terminal A3
Gain
Terminal A3
Bias Setting
Terminal A3
Bias
Terminal A2
Signal Level
Selection
Sets the signal level of terminal
A3.
0: 0 to 10Vdc
1: -10 to +10Vdc
[Refer to table "H3-05, H3-09
Settings" for multi-function selections]
Sets the output level when 10V is input.
Sets the frequency reference when
0V is input.
Term A2 Signal
Selects the signal level of terminal
A2.
0: 0 to 10Vdc (switch S1-2 must be in the OFF position).
1: -10 to +10Vdc (switch S1-2 must be in the OFF position).
2: 4 to 20mA (switch S1-2 must be in the ON position)
Note: Switch between current or voltage inputs by using (S1-2) switch on the terminal board.
Terminal A2
Function
Selection
Terminal A2
Sel
Selects the function of terminal
A2.
Same choices as Terminal A3
Function Selection (H3-05).
0 to 120
0 to
1000
0 to 1
0 to 1F
0.0 to
1000.0
-100.0
to
+100.0
0 to 2
0 to 1F
10%
0ms
0
2
100.0%
0.0%
2
0
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No No
No No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
6-
121
6
-122
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
H3-10
H3-11
Terminal A2
Gain Setting
Terminal A2
Gain
Terminal A2
Bias Setting
Terminal A2
Bias
Sets the output level when 10V is input.
Sets the output level when 0V is input.
0.0 to
1000.0
-100.0
to
+100.0
100.0%
0.0%
Yes
Yes
A
A
* Factory setting will change according to the control mode (factory settings for Flux Vector Control are shown here).
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
A
Multi-function Contact Input Functions (H1-01 to H1-10)
Setting
Value
71
78
Function
Speed/torque control change (ON: Torque control)
Polarity reverse command for external torque reference
V/f
No
No
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
No
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No Yes Yes
No No Yes Yes
Multi-function Contact Output Functions (H2-01 to H2-05)
Setting
Value
Function
32
Speed control circuit operating for torque control (except when stopped).
The external torque reference will be limited if torque control is selected.
Output when the motor is rotating at the speed limit.
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No No No Yes Yes
Multi-function Analog Inputs (H3-05, H3-09)
Setting
Value
0
13
14
Function
Add to terminal A1
Torque reference/torque limit at speed control
Torque compensation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
No No No Yes Yes
No No No Yes Yes
Monitor Function
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Output Signal Level During
Multi-Function Analog Output
Min.
Unit
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
U1-09
Torque reference
Torque Reference
Monitor in internal torque reference value for vector control.
10 V: Motor rated torque
(0 to ± 10V possible)
0.1% No No A A A
Individual Functions
Inputting Torque References and Torque Reference Directions
The torque reference can be changed according to an analog input by setting H3-09 (Multi-function analog input terminal A2 selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function analog input terminal A3 selection) to 13 (torque reference) or 14 (torque compensation). The torque reference input methods are listed in the following table.
Torque Reference Input
Method
Reference Location
Selection
Method
Remarks
Voltage input (0 to ± 10 V)
Current input (4 to 20mA)
Between A3 and AC
Between A2 and AC
(Turn OFF pin 2 of
SW1.)
Between A2 and AC
(Turn ON pin 2 of
SW1.)
H3-04 = 1
H3-05 = 13
H3-08 = 1
H3-09 = 13
H3-08 = 2
H3-09 = 13
Set H3-04 to 0 for a 0 to 10-V torque reference.
To switch the torque reference between positive and negative torque, set a multifunction analog input to 78.
Set H3-08 to 0 for a 0 to 10-V torque reference.
To switch the torque reference between positive and negative torque, set a multifunction analog input to 78.
The input can be used for torque compensation by setting H3-09 to 14.
To switch the torque reference between positive and negative torque, set a multifunction analog input to 78.
The input can be used for torque compensation by setting H3-09 to 14.
Option Card (AI-14B)
(0 to ± 10 V)
Between TC2 and TC4
F2-01 = 0
H3-08 = 1
H3-09 = 13
The input can be used for torque compensation by setting H3-05 to 14.
The direction of the torque output from the motor will be determined by the sign of the analog signal input. It does not depend on the direction of the run command. The direction of torque will be as follows:
• Positive analog reference: Torque reference for forward motor rotation (counterclockwise as viewed from the motor output axis).
• Negative analog reference: Torque reference for reverse motor rotation (clockwise as viewed from the motor output axis).
Application Precautions
If the analog signal input level is 0 to 10V or 4 to 20mA, a forward torque reference will not be applied. To apply reverse torque, use an input level of -10V to 10V or switch the direction using a multi-function input set to 78 (polarity reverse command for external torque reference).
Torque compensation from analog input
Torque reference from analog input
Speed limit from analog input from terminal A1
Speed limit d5-04
Speed limit bias d5-05
1
Torque primary delay filter d5-02
+
2 d5-03
Speed controller
(ASR)
Priority circuit
+
+
+
Torque limit
Internal torque reference
Refer to torque limit setting via constants and analog input
Speed feedback
Speed limiter
Fig 6.64 Torque Control Block Diagram
6-
123
6
-124
Speed Limiter and Priority Circuit (Speed Limit Function)
If the external torque reference and load are not balanced during torque control, the motor will accelerate in either the forward or reverse direction. The speed limit function is used to limit the speed to a specified value and it consists of the speed limiter circuit and priority circuit.
Application Precautions
There are two ways to set a speed limit: using an input from an analog input terminal and setting a speed limit in d5-04.
The inputs methods for a speed limit are listed in the following table.
Speed Limit Input Method
Voltage input (0 to ±10 V)
Current input (4 to 20mA)
Option Card (AI-4B)
(0 to ±10 V)
Location of
Reference
Set in d5-04
Between A1 and AC
Between A2 and AC
Between A2 and AC
Between TC1 and TC4
Parameter
Settings d5-03 = 2 b1-01 = 1
H3-01 = 1
Remarks
-
Set H3-01 to 0 if the speed limit is always to be positive.
b1-01 = 0
H3-08 = 1
H3-09 = 1 b1-01 = 0
H3-08 = 2
H3-09 = 1 b1-01 = 3
F2-01 = 0
The value will be added to the value input on A1 to determine the speed limit.
Set H3-03 to 0 if the speed limit input on
A2 is always to be positive.
Turn OFF (V side) pin 2 of DIP switch S1 on the terminal board.
The value will be added to the value input on A1 to determine the speed limit.
Turn ON (I side) pin 2 of DIP switch S1 on the terminal board.
If H3-09 is set to 0, the sum of the input between TC2 and TC4 will be added the input between TC1 and TC4 to determine the speed limit.
The direction in which speed is controlled is determined by the sign of the speed limit signal and the direction of the run command.
• Positive voltage applied: The speed in the forward direction will be limited for forward operation.
• Negative voltage applied: The speed in the reverse direction will be limited for reverse operation.
If the direction of motor rotation and the command direction are not the same, speed will be limited to 0 as long as b5-05 is set to 0.
Speed Limit Bias Setting
The speed limit bias can be set to limit both the forward and reverse speed to the same value. This differs from the operation of the speed limit setting. To use the speed limit bias, set d5-04 to 0 and set the bias in d5-05 as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
To set 50% forward and reverse speed limits, set the speed limit setting to 0 (d5-03 = 2, d5-04 = 0, and d5-05 = 50).
The range of torque control will be from -50% to 50% of the maximum output speed.
When using both the speed limit and the speed limit bias, the range of torque control will be positive and negative speed limits with the speed limit bias added to each.
The range of torque control when the forward speed limit is 50% and the speed limit bias is 10% is shown in the following figure. This figure does not take the priority circuit into account.
Individual Functions
Positive torque
Speed limit bias d5-05
Reverse operation
Forward speed limit
50%
Forward operation
Negative torque
Fig 6.65 Speed Limit Bias Setting
Torque Limit Operation Examples
Operation examples will be described separately for winding operation, in which the speed and motor torque are in the same directions, and rewinding operation, in which the speed and motor torque are in opposite directions.
Winding Operation
In a winding operation, the line (speed) and torque generated by the motor are in the same direction. For the winding operation, both the speed limit and the torque reference input are positive. The motor will accelerate when the torque reference input is larger than the load and will decelerate when it is smaller than the load. If the motor turns faster than the speed limit, a negative compensation value is output from the speed limiter circuit. When the speed then drops below the speed limit, a positive compensation value is output. The torque compensation is proportional to the ASR proportional gain. When the sum of the torque reference and the torque compensation output by the speed limiter is the same as the actual load, the motor will stop accelerating and run at a constant speed.
Rewinding Operation
In a rewinding operation, the line (speed) and torque generated by the motor are in the opposite directions. (In this example, we’ll assume that the line speed is positive and the torque reference input is negative.) For the rewinding operation, the speed limit is positive and the torque reference input is negative. If the motor turns faster than the speed limit, a negative compensation value is output from the speed limiter circuit. If the motor is rotating in reverse, a negative compensation value is output. If the speed is 0 or is below the speed limit, a 0 compensation value is output. In this way, the output from the speed limiter is used to maintain the motor speed between 0 and the speed limit. When the sum of the torque reference and the torque compensation output by the speed limiter is the same as the actual load, the motor will stop accelerating and run at a constant speed.
6-
125
6
-126
Winding Operation
Line direction
X
N T
T
N
X
Rewinding Operation
Line direction
Configuration
M Motor
M
Normal Rotation
Direction
Torque Reference
Polarity (TREF)
Speed Limit Polarity (SLIM)
Forward Reverse Forward Reverse
Generated Torque
Torque limit
Torque
TREF
-(d5-05) 0
SLIM
Speed
Torque limit
TREF(%)
C5-01
Torque limit
Torque Torque limit
Torque
SLIM
(d5-05)
0
TREF
Speed
Torque limit
-(d5-05)
TREF(%)
C5-01
0
SLIM
Speed
TREF
Torque limit
TREF(%)
C5-01 d5-05(%)
The smaller of these
Torque limit
Torque
TREF
SLIM 0
(d5-05)
Speed
Torque limit
TREF(%)
C5-01 d5-05(%)
The smaller of these
Torque Reference Adjustment
Consider the following information when adjusting the torque.
Torque Reference Delay Time: d5-02
The time constant of the primary filter in the torque reference section can be adjusted. This parameter is used to eliminate noise in the torque reference signal and adjust the responsiveness to the host controller. Increase the setting if oscillation occurs during torque control.
Setting the Torque Compensation
Set multi-function analog input A2 or A3 to torque compensation (setting 14). When the amount of torque loss for mechanical loss or other factor at the load is input to one of these terminals, it is added to the torque reference to compensate for the loss. The direction of torque will be as follows:
•
•
Positive voltage (current): Torque compensation reference for forward motor rotation (counterclockwise as viewed from the motor output axis).
Negative voltage: Torque compensation reference for reverse motor rotation (clockwise as viewed from the motor output axis).
Since the polarity of the voltage input determines the direction, only forward torque compensation can be input when the 0 to 10V or 4 to 20mA signal level has been selected. If you want to input reverse torque compensation, be sure to select the 0 to ±10V signal level.
Individual Functions
Speed/Torque Control Switching Function
It is possible to switch between speed control and torque control when one of the multi-function inputs (H1-01 to H1-10) is set to 71 (Speed/Torque Control Change). Speed control is performed when the input is OFF and torque control is performed when the input is ON. Set d5-01 to switch speed/torque control.
Setting the Speed/Torque Control Switching Timer
The delay between a change in the speed/control switching function input (ON to OFF or OFF to ON) and the corresponding change in the control mode can be set in d5-06. During the timer delay, the value of the 3 analog inputs will retain the values they had when the ON/OFF status of speed/torque control switching signal was changed. Use this delay to complete any changes required in external signals.
Application Precautions
• The frequency reference (during speed control) is set in b1-01. The speed limit during torque control is set in d5-03.
•
•
•
If the torque reference has been assigned to a multi-function analog input, terminal A2, or terminal A3, the input function changes when the control mode is switched between torque control and speed control.
During speed control: The analog input terminal is used as the torque limit input.
During torque control: The analog input terminal is used as the torque reference input.
When the run command turns OFF, the control method when stopped will be for speed control. Even from the torque control mode, the system will automatically change to speed control and decelerate to a stop when the run command turns OFF.
When A1-02 (control method selection) is set to 3 (flux vector control), the speed/torque change command
(a setting of 71) can be set for a multi-function input (H1-01 to H1-10) to switch between speed and torque control during operation. An example is shown below.
Terminal No.
8
A1
A3
User Parameter
No.
H1-06 b1-01
C5-03
H3-05
Factory Setting
8
1
1
0
Setting
71
1
1
13
Function
Speed/torque control change
Frequency reference selection
(terminals A1, A2)
Speed limit (terminals A1, A2)
Torque reference/torque limit
6-
127
A timing chart for switching between speed and torque control is shown in the following figure.
CLOSED CLOSED
OPEN OPEN
Speed/torque change signal
(terminal S8 input)
Run
Run command Stop
Control mode Speed (decel to stop)
Terminal A1 input
Terminal A3 input
Speed
Speed reference
Torque limit
Torque
Speed limit
Speed
Speed reference
Torque limit
Torque reference
Torque
Speed limit
Torque reference
Fig 6.66 Speed/Torque Control Switching Time Chart.
6
-128
Speed Control (ASR) Structure
Speed control (ASR) during vector control adjusts the torque reference so that the deviation between the speed reference and the estimated speed (PG feedback or speed estimator) is 0. Speed control (ASR) during V/ f control with a PG adjusts the output frequency so that the deviation between the speed reference and the estimated speed (PG feedback or speed estimator) is 0. The following block diagram shows the structure of the speed control for vector or V/f control with a PG.
Frequency reference
Detected speed
Estimated speed
Frequency reference
+
Torque limits
C5-0, C5-03
P
I I limit
+
+
Primary filter
C5-06
L7-01 to L7-04
C5-02, C5-04 C5-08
Speed Control Block Diagram for Vector Control
+
Torque reference
Output frequency
+
Limit
Detected speed
+
Change rate limiter
P
+
+
C5-01
C5-03
I
C5-05
C5-02, C5-04
Speed Control Block Diagram for V/f Control with a PG
Fig 6.67 Speed Control Block Diagrams
Individual Functions
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
C5-01
C5-02
C5-03
C5-04
C5-05
C5-06
C5-07
ASR
Proportional
Gain 1
ASR P Gain
1
Sets the proportional gain of the speed control loop (ASR)
ASR Integral
Time 1
Sets the integral time of the speed control loop (ASR)
ASR I Time
1
ASR
Proportional
Gain 2
ASR P Gain
2
ASR Integral
Time 2
Sets the speed control gain 2 and integral time 2 of the speed control loop (ASR).
Note: Adjustment is not normally required.
ASR I Time
2
ASR Limit
ASR Limit
Sets the upper limit for the speed control loop (ASR) as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04).
ASR Primary
Delay Time
Constant
Sets the filter time constant for the time from the speed loop to the torque command output.
ASR Delay
Time
ASR Gain
Switching
Frequency
ASR Gain
SW Freq
Sets the frequency for switching between
Proportional Gain 1, 2 and Integral Time 1,
2.
0.00 to
300.00
*2
0.000 to
10.000
0.00 to
300.00
*2
0.000 to
10.000
0.0 to
20.0
0.000 to
0.500
0.0 to
400.0
20.00
*1
0.500
sec
*1
20.00
*1
0.500
sec
*1
5.0%
0.004
*1
0.0
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
C5-08
ASR Integral
Limit
ASR I Limit
Sets the ASR integral upper limit and rated load as a percentage of maximum output frequency (E1-04).
0 to 400 400 No
* 1. Factory settings will change depending on the control mode.
* 2. The setting range becomes 1.00 to 300.0 when using controls modes Flux Vector or Open Loop Vector 2.
No A
No A
No A
No A
No A
No
No
No
No
No
No No No
No No No
No No No
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
6-
129
6
-130
Multi-function Contact Input Functions (H1-01 to H1-10)
Setting
Value
Function
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No Yes No No No D
E
77
Speed control disable setting for V/f control with PG
OFF: Use speed control V/f control with PG
ON: Do not use speed control for V/f control with PG
Speed control integral reset
Enables switching between PI and P control for the speed control loop.
Speed control (ASR) proportional gain switch (switching between C5-01 and C5-03)
OFF: Use proportional gain in C5-01
ON: Use proportional gain in C5-03
No No No Yes Yes
No No No Yes Yes
Speed Control (ASR) Gain Adjustment for Vector Control
Use the following procedure to adjust C5-01 and C5-03 with the mechanical system and actual load connected.
At zero-speed, increase C5-01
(ASR P Gain 1) until there is no oscillation.
At zero-speed, decrease C5-02
(ASR I Time 1) until there is no oscillation.
Does oscillation develop when the motor operates at the maximum normal operating speed?
NO
Adjustment completed.
(When there is higher-level position control, adjust the position loop gain so that overshooting/undershooting doesn’t occur.)
YES Decrease C5-01 (ASR P Gain 1).
Increase C5-02 (ASR I Time 1).
Individual Functions
Fine Adjustments
When you want even finer gain adjustment, adjust the gain while observing the speed waveform. Parameter settings like those shown in the following table will be necessary to monitor the speed waveform.
Parameter
No.
H4-01
Name
Multi-function analog output 1 terminal FM monitor selection
H4-02
H4-03
Multi-function analog output 1 terminal FM output gain
Multi-function analog output 1 terminal FM bias
Setting
2
1.00
0.0
Explanation
Settings that allow multi-function analog output 1 to be used to monitor the output frequency.
H4-04
H4-05
Multi-function analog output 2 terminal AM monitor selection
Multi-function analog output 2 terminal AM output gain
5
1.00
Settings that allow multi-function analog output 2 to be used to monitor the motor speed.
H4-06
H4-07
Multi-function analog output 2 terminal AM bias selection
Multi-function analog output 1 terminal signal level selection
0.00
1
H4-08 Multi-function analog output 2 terminal signal level selection 1
Settings that allow a 0 to 10V signal range to be monitored.
The multi-function analog outputs have the following functions with these parameter settings.
•
•
Multi-function analog output 1 (terminal FM): Outputs drive's output frequency (0 to ±10 V).
Multi-function analog output 2 (terminal AM): Outputs actual motor speed (0 to 10 V).
Terminal AC is the multi-function analog output common.
We recommend monitoring both the output frequency and the motor speed to monitor the response delay or deviations from the reference value, as shown in the following diagram.
Adjusting ASR Proportional Gain 1 (C5-01)
This gain setting adjusts the responsiveness of the speed control (ASR). The responsiveness is increased when this setting is increased. Usually this setting is higher for larger loads. Oscillation will occur if this setting is increased too much.
The following diagram shows the type of changes that can occur in the response when the ASR proportional gain is changed.
Motor speed
The proportional gain is high.
(Oscillation occurs when the gain is too high.)
The proportional gain is low.
Time
Fig 6.68 Responsiveness for Proportional Gain
6-
131
6
-132
Adjusting ASR Integral Time 1 (C5-02)
This parameter sets the speed control (ASR) integral time.
Lengthening the integral time lowers the responsiveness, and weakens the resistance to external influences.
Oscillation will occur if this setting is too short. The following diagram shows the type of changes that can occur in the response when the ASR integral time is changed.
Motor speed
Short integral time
Long integral time
Time
Fig 6.69 Responsiveness for Integral Time
Different Gain Settings for Low-speed and High-speed
Switch between low-speed and high-speed gain when oscillation occurs because of resonance with the mechanical system at low speed or high speed. The proportional gain P and integral time I can be switched according to the motor speed, as shown below.
P, I
0 C5-07
If C5-07 is set to 0, P = C5-01 and I = C5-02.
P = C5-01
I = C5-02
P = C5-03
I = C5-04 (Low speed)
Motor speed (Hz)
Fig 6.70 Low-speed and High-speed Gain Settings
Setting the Gain Switching Frequency (C5-07)
Set the switching frequency to about 80% of the motor operating frequency or the frequency at which oscillation occurs.
Low-speed Gain Adjustments (C5-03, C5-04)
Connect the actual load and adjust these parameters at zero-speed. Increase C5-03 (ASR proportional gain 2) until there is no oscillation. Decrease C5-04 (ASR integral time 2) until there is no oscillation.
Individual Functions
High-speed Gain Adjustments (C5-01, C5-02)
Adjust these parameters at normal operating speed. Increase C5-01 (ASR proportional gain 1) until there is no oscillation. Decrease C5-02 (ASR integral time 1) until there is no oscillation. Refer to Fine Adjustments on
page 6 - 131 for details on making fine adjustments of high-speed operation.
ASR Proportional Gain Switch Setting
When one of the multi-function inputs (H1-01 to H1-10) is set to 77, the input can be used to switch between
C5-01 (proportional gain 1) and C5-03 (proportional gain 2). Proportional gain 2 is used when the multi-function input is ON. This input has higher priority than the ASR switching frequency set in C5-07.
ON
ASR Gain Switch signal
(a multi-function input)
OFF
Proportional gain (P)
Proportional gain determined by motor speed.
C5-03 gain setting
C5-02 C5-02
The gain is changed linearly in integral time 1 (C5-02).
Fig 6.71 ASR Proportional Gain Switch
Gain Adjustment for Speed Control during V/f Control with PG
When using V/f control with PG, set the proportional gain (P) and the integral time (I) at E1-09 (minimum out-
shows how the proportional gain and integral time change in linear fashion based on the speed.
P and I setting
P = C5-01
I = C5-02
P = C5-03
I = C5-04
0 E1-09
Min. output frequency
Motor speed (Hz)
E1-04
Max. output frequency
Fig 6.72 Speed Control Gain Integral Time Adjustment for V/f Control with PG
6-
133
6
-134
Gain Adjustments at Minimum Output Frequency
Operate the motor at the minimum output frequency. Increase C5-03 (ASR proportional gain 2) to a level where there is no oscillation. Decrease C5-04 (ASR integral time 2) to a level where there is no oscillation.
Monitor the drive's output current and verify that it is less than 50% of the drive rated current. If the output current exceeds 50% of the drive's rated current, decrease C5-03 and increase C5-04.
Gain Adjustments at Maximum Output Frequency
Operate the motor at the maximum output frequency. Increase C5-01 (ASR proportional gain 1) to a level where there is no oscillation. Decrease C5-02 (ASR integral time 1) to a level where there is no oscillation.
Fine Adjustments
When you want even finer gain adjustment, adjust the gain while observing the speed waveform. The adjustment method is the same as that for vector control.
Enable integral operation during acceleration and deceleration (by setting F1-07 to 1) when you want the motor speed to closely follow the frequency reference during acceleration and deceleration. Reduce the setting of C5-01 if overshooting occurs during acceleration, and reduce the setting of C5-03 and increase the setting of C5-04 if undershooting occurs when stopping. If overshooting and undershooting cannot be eliminated by adjusting only the gain, reduce the value of C5-05 speed control and reduce the limit of the frequency reference compensation value.
Droop Control Function
Droop control is a function that allows the user to set the amount of motor slip.
When a single load is operated with two motors (such as in a crane conveyor), a high-resistance motor is normally used. This is to use torque characteristics that exhibit proportion movements due to changes in the secondary resistor to maintain torque balance with the load and overall speed balance with the load.
If droop control is used, a high-resistance motor characteristics can be set for a general-purpose motor.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 b7-01
Droop Control
Level
Droop Quantity
Sets the speed decrease as a percentage of motor base speed
(E1-06) when the motor is at
100% load torque. Setting of 0.0 disables droop control.
0.0 to
100.0
0.0
Yes No No No A A b7-02
Droop Control
Delay Time
Droop Delay
Time
Determines the droop control delay time in response to a load change.
0.03 to
2.00
0.05sec
No A A A A A
Individual Functions
Setting Precautions
•
•
•
Droop control is disabled if b7-01 is set to 0.0.
Set b7-01 to the amount of slip as the percentage of slip when the maximum output frequency is input and the rated torque is generated.
Parameter b7-02 is used to adjust the responsiveness of droop control. Increase this setting if oscillation or hunting occur.
Setting the Droop Control Gain
Set the droop control gain as the speed reduction at a 100% motor torque, as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
Torque b7-01
100%
0 Speed reference
Fig 6.73 Droop Control Gain
Speed
Zero-servo Function
The zero-servo function holds the motor when the motor is stopped in what is call a zero-servo status. This function can be used to stop the motor even with an external force acts on the motor or the analog reference input is offset.
The zero-servo function is enabled when one of the multi-function inputs (H1-01 to H1-10) is set to 72 (zero servo command). If the zero servo command is ON when the frequency (speed) reference falls below the zero speed level, a zero-servo status is implemented.
6-
135
6
-136
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display b2-01
DC Injection
Braking Start
Frequency
DCInj Start
Freq b9-01 b9-02
Zero Servo
Gain
Zero Servo
Gain
Zero Servo
Completion
Width
Zero Servo
Count
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
V/f with
PG
Control Methods
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Sets the frequency at which DC injection braking starts when ramp to stop (b1-03 = 0) is selected. If b2-01< E1-09, DC
Injection braking starts at E1-09.
Note: Zero Speed restrictions are active in Flux Vector Mode.
Sets the position loop gain for
Zero Servo command. This function is effective when multi-function input "zero servo command" is set.
0.0 to
10.0
0 to 100
0.5Hz
5
No
No
A A
No No
A
No
A
A
A
No
Sets number of pulses used for the multi-function output of "zero servo completion".
0 to
16383
10 No No No No A No
Individual Functions
Multi-function Contact Input Functions (H1-01 to H1-10)
Setting
Value
Function
72 Zero-servo command (ON: Zero-servo)
Multi-function Contact Output Functions (H2-01 to H2-03)
V/f
No
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
No
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No Yes No
Setting
Value
Function
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
33
Zero-servo end
ON: Current position is within zero-servo start position ± the zero-servo end width.
No No No Yes No
To output the zero-servo status externally, assign the Zero Servo End signal (setting 33) to one of the multifunction outputs (H2-01 to H2-03).
Monitor Function
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Output Signal Level During
Multi-Function
Analog Output
Min.
Unit
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
U1-35
Zero-servo movement pulses
Zero Servo
Pulse
Shows the number of PG pulses times 4 for the movement range when stopped at zero.
(Cannot be output.) 1 No No No A No
6-
137
6
-138
Time Chart
A time chart for the zero servo function is given in Fig 6.74 Time Chart for Zero Servo .
OFF
Run command
Zero servo command
ON
ON OFF
Frequency (speed) reference
Excitation level b2-01
Motor speed
Zero Servo End signal Zero-servo status
Fig 6.74 Time Chart for Zero Servo
Application Precautions
•
•
•
•
Be sure to leave the run command input ON. If the run command is turned OFF, the output will be interrupted and the zero-servo function will become ineffective.
The holding force of the zero-servo is adjusted in b9-01. The holding force will increase if the value of the setting is increased, but oscillation and hunting will occur if the setting is too large. Adjust b9-01 after adjusting the speed control gain.
The zero-servo detection width is set as the allowable position offset from the zero-servo start position. Set
4 times the number of pulses from the PG.
The Zero Servo End signal will go OFF when the zero servo command is turned OFF.
Do not lock the servo for extended periods of time at 100% when using the zero servo function. drive errors may result. Extended periods of servo lock can be achieved by ensuring that the current during the servolock is 50% or less or by increasing the drive capacity.
INFO
Digital Operator Functions
Digital Operator Functions
This section explains the Digital Operator functions.
Setting Digital Operator Functions
You can set Digital Operator-related parameters such as selecting the Digital Operator display, multi-function selections, and copy functions.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 o1-02 o1-03
User Monitor
Selection After
Power-Up
Power-On
Monitor
Digital
Operator
Display
Selection
Display Scaling
Selects which monitor will be displayed upon power-up.
1: Frequency Reference (U1-01)
2: Output Frequency (U1-02)
3: Output Current (U1-03)
4: User Monitor (set by o1-01)
Sets the units of the Frequency
References (d1-01 to d1-17), the
Frequency Reference Monitors
(U1-01, U1-02, U1-05), and the
Modbus communication frequency reference.
0: Hz
1: % (100% = E1-04)
2 to 39: RPM (Enter the number of motor poles).
40 to 39999: User display.
Set the number desired at maximum output frequency.
4 digit number
Number of digits from the right of the decimal point.
1 to 4
0 to
39999 o1-04
Example 1: o1-03 = 12000, will result in frequency reference from
0.0 to 200.0 (200.0 = Fmax).
Example 2: o1-03 = 21234, will result in frequency reference from
0.00 to 12.34 (12.34 = Fmax).
Setting unit for frequency parameters related to V/F characteristics
Display Units
Sets the setting units related to
V/F pattern frequency related parameters (E1-04, -06, -09, -11)
0: Hertz
1: RPM
0 to 1
1
0
0
Yes
No
No
A
A
A
A
No No
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
6-
139
6
-140
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 o2-01 o2-02 o2-03 o2-05 o2-07 o2-10
Local/Remote
Key Function
Selection
Local/Remote
Key
Determines if the Digital
Operator Local/Remote key is functional.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
STOP Key
Function
Selection
Oper STOP
Key
Determines if the STOP key on the Digital Operator will stop the drive when drive is operating from external terminals or serial communication.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
User Parameter
Default Value
User Defaults
Allows storing of parameter settings as a User Initialization
Selection.
0: No Change
1: Set Defaults - Saves current parameter settings as user
initialization. A1-03 now allows selecting <1110> for user
initialization and returns o2-03 to zero.
2: Clear All - Clears the currently saved user initialization. A1-03 no longer allows selecting <1110> and returns o2-03 to zero.
Frequency
Reference
Setting Method
Selection
Operator
M.O.P.
Determines if the Data/Enter key must be used to input a frequency reference from the Digital
Operator.
0: Disabled - Data/Enter key must be pressed to enter a frequency reference.
1: Enabled - Data/Enter key is not required. The frequency reference is adjusted by the up and down arrow keys on the Digital
Operator without having to press the data/enter key.
Cumulative
Operation Time
Setting
Sets the initial value of the elapsed operation timer U1-13.
Elapsed Time
Set
Cumulative
Cooling Fan
Operation Time
Setting
Sets the initial value of the heatsink fan operation time monitor U1-40.
Fan ON Time
Set
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 2
0 to 1
0 to
65535
0 to
65535
1
1
0
0
0 hr
0 hr
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Digital Operator Functions
Changing Frequency Reference and Display Units
Set the Digital Operator frequency reference and display units using parameter o1-03. You can change the units for the following parameters using o1-03.
•
•
U1-01 (Frequency Reference)
U1-02 (Output Frequency)
•
•
•
U1-05 (Motor Speed)
U1-20 (Output Frequency after Soft Start) d1-01 to d1-17 (Frequency references)
Switching Monitors when the Power Supply Is ON
Using parameter o1-02, select the monitor item (U1 [status monitor]) to be displayed on the Digital
Operator when the power supply is turned ON. For monitors that can be displayed, refer to U1
.
Setting Precautions
If selecting monitor parameters other than U1-01 (Frequency Reference), U1-02 (Output Frequency), and U1-
03 (Output Current), first select the monitor items to be displayed in o1-01, and then set o1-02 to 4.
Disabling the STOP Key
If b1-02 (Operation Method Selection) is set to 1, 2, or 3, the stop command from the STOP Key on the Digital
Operator is an emergency stop command.
Set o2-02 to 0 to disable emergency stop commands from the STOP Key on the Digital Operator.
Disabling the LOCAL/REMOTE Key
Set o2-01 to 0 to disable the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator. You cannot switch drive reference inputs set using reference inputs from the Digital Operator, b1-01 (Reference Selection), or b1-02 (Operation Method Selection).
6-
141
6
-142
Initializing Changed Parameter Values
You can save to the drive parameter set values that you have changed as parameter initial values. Change the set values from the drive factory settings, and then set o2-03 to 1.
Set A1-03 (Initialize) to 1110 to initialize the drive parameters using the user-set initial values in memory. To clear the user-set initial values in memory, set o2-03 to 2.
Setting the Frequency Reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without Using the
Enter Key
Use this function when inputting frequency references from the Digital Operator. When o2-05 is set to 1, you can increment and decrement the frequency reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without using the Enter
Key.
For example, enter the Run command using a 0 Hz reference, and then continuously press the UP Key to increment the frequency reference by 0.01Hz only for the first 0.5 s, and then by 0.01Hz every 80ms for 3 s thereafter. Press and hold down the UP Key for 3 s minimum to reach the maximum output frequency 10 s after that. The frequency reference that has been set will be stored in memory 5 s after the UP or DOWN Keys are released.
Clearing Cumulative Operation Time
Set the cumulative operation time initial value in time units in parameter o2-07. Set o2-07 to 0 to clear U1-13
(drive Operating Time).
Clearing Drive Cooling Fan Operation Time
Set the fan operation time initial value in time units in parameter o2-10. Set o2-10 to 0 to clear U1-40 (Cooling
Fan Operating Time).
Digital Operator Functions
Copying Parameters
The Digital Operator can perform the following three functions using the built-in EEPROM (non-volatile memory).
•
•
•
Store drive parameter set values in the Digital Operator (READ)
Write parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator to the drive (COPY)
Compare parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator with drive parameters (VERIFY)
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2 o3-01 o3-02
Copy Function
Selection
Copy Function
Sel
Copy Allowed
Selection
Read Allowable
This parameter controls the copying of parameters to and from the Digital Operator.
0: COPY SELECT (no function)
1: INV --> OP READ - All parameters are copied from the drive to the Digital Operator.
2: OP --> INV WRITE - All parameters are copied from the
Digital Operator to the drive.
3: OP<-->INV VERIFY -
Parameter settings in the drive are compared to those in the
Digital Operator.
Note: When using the copy function, the drive model number (o2-04), software number (U1-14), and control method (A1-02) must match or an error will occur.
Enables and disables the Digital
Operator copy functions.
0: Disabled - No Digital Operator copy functions are allowed.
1: Enabled - Copying allowed.
0 to 3
0 to 1
0
0
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
6-
143
6
-144
Storing Drive Set Values in the Digital Operator (READ)
To store drive set values in the Digital Operator, make the settings using the following method.
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display
1
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
Table 6.1 READ Function Procedure
Explanation
Press the Menu Key, and select advanced programming mode.
2
3
4
5
-ADV-
Initialization
A1 - 00=1
Select Language
-ADV-
COPY Function o3 - 01=0
Copy Funtion Sel
-ADV-
Copy Funtion Sel o3-01= 0
COPY SELECT
*0*
-ADV-
Copy Funtion Sel o3-01= 1
*0*
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the parameter monitor display.
Display o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using the Increment Key and Decrement
Key.
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the parameter setting display.
Change the set value to 1 using the Increment Key.
6
-ADV-
READ
INV OP READING
7
-ADV-
READ
READ COMPLETE
Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The READ function will start.
If the READ function ends normally, End is displayed on the Digital Operator.
8
-ADV-
Copy Funtion Sel o3 01 =0
COPY SELECT
*0*
The display returns to o3-01 when a key is pressed.
An error may occur while saving to memory. If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display and return to the o3-01 display.
Digital Operator Functions
Error displays and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to Chapter 7
Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function
.)
Error Display Meaning
PRE
READ IMPOSSIBLE
You are attempting to set o3-01 to 1 while o3-02 is set to 0.
IFE
READ DATA ERROR
Read data length mismatch or read data error.
RDE
DATA ERROR
Tried to write parameters to EEPROM on the Digital Operator, but unable to perform write operation.
Select READ Permitted
Prevent overwriting the data stored in EEPROM in the Digital Operator by mistake. With o3-02 set to 0, if you set o3-01 to 1, and perform the write operation, PrE will be displayed on the Digital Operator, and the write operation will be stopped.
Writing Parameter Set Values Stored in the Digital Operator to the Drive (COPY)
To write parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator to the drive, make the settings using the following method.
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display
1
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
Table 6.2 COPY Function Procedure
Explanation
Press the MENU Key, and select advanced programming mode.
2
3
4
-ADV-
Initialization
A1 - 00=1
Select Language
-ADV-
COPY Function o3 - 01=0
Copy Funtion Sel
-ADV-
Copy Funtion Sel o3-01= 0
COPY SELECT
*0*
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the parameter monitor display.
Display o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using the Increment Key and Decrement
Key.
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the parameter setting display.
6-
145
6
-146
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display
5
-ADV-
Copy Funtion Sel o3-01= 2
*0*
OP INV WRITE
Table 6.2 COPY Function Procedure
Explanation
Change the set value to 2 using the Increment Key.
6
-ADV-
COPY
OP INV COPYING
Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The COPY function will start.
7
-ADV-
COPY
COPY COMPLETE
If the COPY function ends normally, End is displayed on the Digital Operator.
8
-ADV-
Copy Funtion Sel o3 01 =0
COPY SELECT
*0*
The display returns to o3-01 when a key is pressed.
During the copy operation, errors may occur. If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display and return to the 03-01 display.
Error displays and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to
Errors when Using Digital Operator
Copy Function.)
Error Display Meaning
CPE
ID UNMATCH Drive product code and drive software number are different.
VAE
INV. KVA UNMATC
Drive capacity with which you are trying to copy, and the drive capacity stored in the
Digital Operator are different.
CRE
CONTROL UNMATCH
The drive control method in which you are trying to copy, and the drive control method stored in the Digital Operator are different.
CYE
COPY ERROR
Comparison between the parameter written to the drive and the parameter in the Digital
Operator shows they are different.
CSE
SUM CHECK ERROR
After copying has ended, comparison between the sum value of the drive parameter area and the sum value of the Digital Operator parameter area shows they are different.
Digital Operator Functions
Comparing Drive Parameters and Digital Operator Parameter Set Values (VERIFY)
To compare drive parameters and Digital Operator parameter set values, make the settings using the following method.
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display
1
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
Table 6.3 VERIFY Function Procedure
Explanation
Press the MENU Key. and select advanced programming mode.
2
3
4
5
-ADV-
Initialization
A1 - 00=1
Select Language
-ADV-
COPY Function o3 - 01=0
Copy Funtion Sel
-ADV-
Copy Funtion Sel o3-01= 0
COPY SELECT
*0*
-ADV-
Copy Funtion Sel o3-01= 3
*0*
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the parameter monitor display.
Display o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using the Increment Key and Decrement
Key.
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the function setting display.
Change the set value to 3 using the Increment Key.
6
-ADV-
VERIFY
DATA VERIFYING
Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The VERIFY function will start.
7
-ADV-
VERIFY
VERIFY COMPLETE
If the VERIFY function ends normally, End is displayed on the Digital Operator.
8
-ADV-
Copy Funtion Sel o3 01 =0
COPY SELECT
*0*
The display returns to o3-01 when a key is pressed.
6-
147
6
-148
An error may occur during the comparison. If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display
Errors when Using Digital Operator Copy Function.)
Error Display Meaning
VYE
VERIFY ERROR
Verify error (Settings in the Digital Operator and the drive do not match).
Application Precautions
When using the copy function, check that the following settings are the same between the drive and the Digital
Operator.
•
•
Drive product and type
Software number
•
•
Drive capacity and voltage
Control method
Prohibiting Writing Parameters from the Digital Operator
If you set A1-01 to 0, you can refer to and set the A1 and A2 parameter groups, and refer to drive mode, using the Digital Operator.
If you set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) to 1B (write parameters permitted), you can write parameters from the digital operator when the terminal that has been set is ON. When the set terminal is OFF, writing parameters other than the frequency reference is prohibited. You can, however, reference parameters.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A1-01
Access Level
Selection
Access Level
Selects which parameters are accessible via the Digital
Operator.
0: Operation Only
1: User Level (only available if
A2 parameters have been set)
2: Advanced Level
0 to 2 2 Yes A A A A A
Digital Operator Functions
Setting a Password
When a password is set in A1-05, if the set values in A1-04 and A1-05 do not match, you cannot refer to or change the settings of parameters A1-01 to A1-03, or A2-01 to A2-32.
You can prohibit the setting and referencing of all parameters except A1-00 by using the password function in combination with setting A1-01 to 0 (Monitor only).
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A1-01
A1-04
A1-05
Access Level
Selection
Access Level
Password 1
Enter
Password
Password 2
Select
Password
Selects which parameters are accessible via the Digital
Operator.
0: Operation Only
1: User Level (only available if
A2 parameters have been set)
2: Advanced Level
When the value set into A1-04 does NOT match the value set into
A1-05, parameters A1-01 thru A1-
03 and A2-01 thru A2-32 cannot be changed. All other parameters as determined by A1-01 can be changed. Parameter A1-05 can be accessed by pressing the MENU key while holding the RESET key.
When the value set into A1-04 does NOT match the value set into
A1-05, parameters A1-01 thru A1-
03 and A2-01 thru A2-32 cannot be changed. All other parameters as determined by A1-01 can be changed. Parameter A1-05 can be accessed by pressing the MENU key while holding the RESET key.
0 to 2
0 to
9999
0 to
9999
2
0
0
Yes
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Setting Precautions
Parameter A1-05 cannot be displayed using normal key operations. To display A1-05, hold down the RESET
Key and press the MENU Key while A1-04 is displayed.
Displaying User-set Parameters Only
You can set and refer to parameters necessary to the drive only, using the A2 parameters (user-set parameters) and A1-01 (Parameters Access Level).
Set the number of the parameter to which you want to refer in A2-01 to A2-32, and then set A1-01 to 1. You can set and refer to parameters set in A1-01 to A1-03 and A2-01 to A2-32 only, using advanced programming mode.
6-
149
6
-150
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
User setting parameters
A2-01 to
A2-32
User Param 1 to 32
Used to set the parameter numbers that can be set/read.
Maximum 32.
Effective when the Parameter
Access Level (A1-01) is set to
User Program (1). Parameters set in parameters A2-01 to A2-32 can be set/read in programming mode.
b1-01 to o3-02
No A A A A A
Options
Options
This section explains the drive option functions.
Performing Speed Control with PG
This section explains functions with V/f control with PG.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
F1-01
F1-02
F1-03
F1-04
PG parameter Sets the number of pulses per revolution (PPM) of the encoder
PG Pulses/Rev
(pulse generator).
Operation selection at PG open circuit (PGO)
PG Fdbk Loss
Sel
Sets stopping method when a PG open circuit fault (PGO) occurs.
See parameter F1-14.
0: Ramp to stop - Decelerate to stop using the active deceleration time.
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast - Stop - Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in
C1-09.
3: Alarm Only - Drive continues operation.
Operation selection at overspeed (OS)
PG Overspeed
Sel
Operation
Selection at
Deviation
PG Deviation
Sel
Sets the stopping method when an overspeed (OS) fault occurs. See
F1-08 and F1-09.
0: Ramp to stop - Decelerate to stop using the active deceleration time.
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast - Stop - Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in
C1-09.
3: Alarm Only - Drive continues operation.
Sets the stopping method when a speed deviation (DEV) fault occurs.
0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration stop using Deceleration Time
1, C1-02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop using the deceleration time in
C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (DEV is displayed and operation continued.)
0 to
60000
0 to 3
0 to 3
0 to 3
600
1
1
3
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Q
A
A
A
No
No
No
No
Q
A
A
A
No
No
A
A
6-
151
6
-152
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
F1-05
F1-06
F1-07
F1-08
F1-09
F1-10
F1-11
PG Rotation
Selection
PG Rotation Sel
0: Fwd=C.C.W. - Phase A leads with forward run command.
(Phase B leads with reverse run command.)
1: Fwd=C.W. - Phase B leads with forward run command.
(Phase A leads with reverse run command.)
0 or 1
PG Division
Rate (PG Pulse
Monitor)
PG Output Ratio
Sets the division ratio for the pulse monitor of the PG-B2 encoder feedback option board. This function is not available with the PG-
X2 option board.
Division ratio = [(1 + n) / m]
(n = 0 to 1, m =1 to 32)
The first digit of the value of
F1-06 stands for n, the second and the third stand for m. (from left to right).
The possible division ratio settings are:
1/32 F1-06 1
Integral Function during
Accel/Decel
Selection
PG Ramp PI/I
Sel
Sets integral control during acceleration/deceleration to either enabled or disabled.
0: Disabled - The integral function is not used while accelerating or decelerating.
1: Enabled - The integral function is used at all times.
1 to 132
0 or 1
0
1
0
Overspeed
Detection Level Configures the overspeed fault
PG Overspd
Level
(OS) detection.
OS fault will occur, if the motor
Overspeed
Detection Delay
Time speed feedback is greater than the
F1-08 setting for a time longer than F1-09. F1-08 is set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04). See F1-03.
PG Overspd
Time
0 to 120 115%
0.0 to
2.0
0.0sec
*
Excessive Speed
Deviation
Detection Level
PG Deviate
Level
Excessive Speed
Deviation
Detection Delay
Time
PG Deviate
Time
Configures the speed deviation fault (DEV) detection.
DEV fault will occur if the speed deviation is greater than the F1-10 setting for a time longer than
F1-11. F1-10 is set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04). Speed deviation is the difference between actual motor speed and the frequency reference command. See F1-04.
0 to 50
0.0 to
10.0
10%
0.5sec
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
Options
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
F1-12
F1-13
F1-14
Number of PG
Gear Teeth 1
PG # Gear
Teeth1
Number of PG
Gear Teeth 2
PG # Gear
Teeth2
PG Open-Circuit Detection
Time
PGO Detect
Time
Sets the gear ratio between the motor shaft and the encoder (PG).
A gear ratio of 1 will be used if either of these parameters is set to
0. This function is not available in flux vector control.
Configures the PG open (PGO) function. PGO will be detected if no PG pulses are detected for a time longer than F1-14. See
F1-02.
0 to
1000
0.0 to
10.0
0
0
2.0sec
No
No
No
No
No
No
* Factory setting will change according to the control mode (factory settings for Vector Control w/PG are shown here).
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
No
No
No
No
A
No
No
No
Using PG Speed Control Card
There are four types of PG Speed Control Card that can be used in V/f control with PG.
• PG-A2: A-phase (single) pulse input, compatible with open collector or complimentary outputs.
•
•
•
PG-B2: A/B-phase pulse input, compatible with complimentary outputs.
PG-D2: A-phase (single) pulse input, compatible with line drivers.
PG-X2: A/B/Z-phase pulse input, compatible with line drivers.
There are two types of PG Speed Control Cards that can be used for flux vector control.
• PG-B2: A/B phase pulse inputs, complementary outputs
• PG-X2: A/B/Z phase pulse inputs, line driver outputs
For the connection diagram, refer to
Setting Number of PG Pulses
Set the number of PG (Pulse Generator/Encoder) pulses in pulses/rotation. Set the number of A-phase or Bphase pulses per 1 motor rotation in F1-01.
Matching PG Rotation Direction and Motor Rotation Direction
Parameter F1-05 matches the PG rotation direction and the motor rotation direction. If the motor is rotating forwards, set whether it is A-phase driven or B-phase driven. Make this setting when using PG-B2 or PG-X2.
6-
153
Drive
Forward command
Motor PG (encoder)
A-phase driven when set value = 0
A-phase
B-phase
Pulse output
B-phase driven when set value = 1
A-phase
B-phase
6
-154
Example: Forward rotation of standard Yaskawa motor (PG used: Samtack (KK))
Forward command
Motor output axis rotates counter-clockwise during drive forward command.
Rotation
(CCW)
A-phase
B-phase
Yaskawa standard PG used is A-phase driven (CCW) when motor rotation is forward.
Fig 6.75 PG Rotation Direction Setting
Generally, PG is A-phase driven when rotation is clockwise (CW) see from the input axis. Also, motor rotation is counter-clockwise (CCW) seen from the output side when forward commands are output. Consequently, when motor rotation is forward, PG is normally A-phase driven when a load is applied, and B-phase driven when a load is not applied.
Setting Number of Gear Teeth Between PG and Motor
Set the number of PG gear teeth in F1-12 and F1-13. If there are gears between the motor and PG, you can operate the motor by setting the number of gear teeth.
When the number of gear teeth has been set, the number of motor rotations within the drive is calculated using the following formula.
No. of motor rotations (min
1 .) = No. of input pulses from PC 60 / F1-01 F1-13 (No. of gear teeth on load side) / F1-12 (No. of gear teeth on motor side)
Matching Motor Speed During Acceleration and Deceleration to Frequency Reference
You can select whether to enable or disable integral operation during acceleration and deceleration when using flux vector control.
To match the motor speed as closely as possible to the frequency reference even during acceleration and deceleration, set F1-07 to 1.
If F1-01 is set to 1, overshoot or undershoot may occur easily immediately after acceleration and deceleration. To minimize the possibility of overshoot or undershoot occurring, set F1-01 to 0.
INFO
Options
Setting PG Pulse Monitor Output Dividing Ratio
This function is enabled only when using PG speed control card PG-B2. Set the dividing ratio for the PG pulse monitor output. The set value is expressed as n for the higher place digit, and m for the lower place 2 digits.
The dividing ratio is calculated as follows:
Dividing ratio = (1 + n)/m (Setting range) n: 0 or 1, m: 1 to 32
F1-06 = n
m
The dividing ratio can be set within the following range: 1/32 F1-06 1. For example, if the dividing ratio is
1/2 (set value 2), half of the number of pulses from the PG are monitor outputs.
Detecting PG Open Circuit
Select the stopping method when PG cable disconnected is detected and the PG open circuit (PGO) detection time.
When the drive is operating with the frequency reference set to 1% minimum (except when operating on direct current), if the speed feedback from PG is greater than the time setting in F1-14, PGO is detected.
Detecting Motor Overspeed
An error is detected when the number of motor rotations exceeds the regulated limit. An overspeed (OS) is detected when a frequency that exceeds the set value in F1-08 continues for longer than the time set in F1-09.
After detecting an overspeed (OS), the drive stops according to the setting in F1-03.
Detecting Speed Difference between the Motor and Speed Reference
An error is detected when the speed deviation (i.e., the difference between the designated speed and the actual motor speed) is too great. Speed deviation (DEV) is detected after a speed agreement is detected and when the speed reference and actual workpiece speed are within the setting of L4-02, if a speed deviation great than the set value in F1-10 continues for longer than the time set in F1-11. After a speed deviation is detected, the drive stops according to the setting in F1-04.
6-
155
6
-156
Using Digital Output Cards
There are two types of drive digital output cards:
• DO-02C
Relay contact output (DPDT contact)
• DO-08
6 photocoupler output channels (shared commons)
2 (independent) relay contact output channels (NC contact)
Inverter control panel
3CN 3CN
+24 V
NC
NC
NO
NO
TD
3
4
5
1
2
6
CH1
CH2
Relay contact
DO-02C Digital Output Card
Inverter control panel 3CN
Photocoupler TD5
CH1 Photocoupler
3CN
TD6
TD7
CH2
CH3
TD10
TD11
TD1
TD2
TD3
TD4
DO-08 Digital Output Card
TD8
TD9
CH4
CH5
CH6
COM (0 V common)
CH7
Relay contact
CH8
Fig 6.76 Digital Output Cards
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
F5-01
F5-02
F5-03
F5-04
DO-02/DO-08
Channel 1 Output Selection
DO Ch1 Select
DO-02/DO-08
Channel 2 Output Selection
DO Ch2 Select
Sets the digital output function number for channel 1. See the H2 parameter group for possible selections.
Enabled when digital output card
DO-02 or DO-08 is used.
Sets the digital output function number for channel 2. See the H2 parameter group for possible selections.
Enabled when digital output card
DO-02 or DO-08 is used.
DO-08 Channel
3 Output Selection
DO Ch3 Select
Sets the digital output function number for channel 3. See the H2 parameter group for possible selections.
Enabled when digital output card
DO-02 or DO-08 is used.
DO-08 Channel
4 Output Selection
DO Ch4 Select
Sets the digital output function number for channel 4. See the H2 parameter group for possible selections.
Enabled when digital output card
DO-02 or DO-08 is used.
0 to 37
0 to 37
0 to 37
0 to 37
0
1
2
4
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Options
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
F5-05
F5-06
F5-07
DO-08 Channel
5 Output Selection
DO Ch5 Select
Sets the digital output function number for channel 5. See the H2 parameter group for possible selections.
Enabled when digital output card
DO-02 or DO-08 is used.
DO-08 Channel
6 Output Selection
DO Ch6 Select
Sets the digital output function number for channel 6. See the H2 parameter group for possible selections.
Enabled when digital output card
DO-02 or DO-08 is used.
DO-08 Channel
7 Output Selection
DO Ch7 Select
Sets the digital output function number for channel 7. See the H2 parameter group for possible selections.
Enabled when digital output card
DO-02 or DO-08 is used.
0 to 37
0 to 37
0 to 37
6
37
F
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
F5-08
F5-09
DO-08 Channel
8 Output Selection
DO Ch8 Select
Sets the digital output function number for channel 8. See the H2 parameter group for possible selections.
Enabled when digital output card
DO-02 or DO-08 is used.
DO-08 Output
Mode Selection
DO-08 Selection
Sets the function of the DO-08 digital output option board.
0: 8-channel individual outputs.
1: Binary code output.
2: 8-channel Selected - Output according to F5-01 to F5-08 settings.
0 to 37
0 to 2
F
0
No
No
A A
A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Setting Output Items for the DO-02C Digital Output Card
If using DO-02C Digital Output Card, set the output items using F5-01 and F5-02.
Setting Output Items for the DO-08 Digital Output Card
If using DO-08 Digital Output Card, select one of the following three output modes according to the setting in
F5-09.
6-
157
6
-158
F5-09 Set to 0
Set Value
0: 8 separate outputs
Terminal
Number
TD5-TD11 Overcurrent (SC, OC, GF)
TD6-TD11 Overvoltage (OV)
TD7-TD11 Drive overload (OL2)
Output Details
TD8-TD11 Fuse blown (PUF)
TD9-TD11 Overspeed (OS)
TD10-TD11 Drive overheated (OH1) or motor overload (OL1)
TD1-TD2 Zero speed detected
TD3-TD4 Speed agreement
F5-09 Set to 1
Set Value
1: Binary code output
Terminal
Number
TD5-TD11 bit 0
TD6-TD11 bit 1
TD7-TD11 bit 2
TD8-TD11 bit 3
TD9-TD11 Zero speed detected
TD10-TD11 Speed agreement
TD1-TD2 Operating
TD3-TD4 Minor fault
Output Details
Encoded output
(Refer to table below)
The following table shows the code outputs.
Bits 3, 2, 1, and 0
0000
0001
Output Details
No error
Overcurrent (SC, OC, GF)
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
Overvoltage (OV)
Drive overload (OL2)
Drive overheated (OH, OH1)
Overspeed (OS)
Fuse blown (PUF)
Dynamic braking resistor (RH)
Injection brake transistor error (RR)
F5-09 Set to 2
Output depends on the settings in F5-01 to F5-08.
Bits 3, 2, 1, and 0
1000
Output Details
External fault (EFxx)
1001 Controller error (CPFxx)
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
Motor overload (OL1)
Not used
Power loss (UV1, UV2, or UV3)
Speed deviation (DEV)
PG open circuit (PGO)
1111 Not used
Options
Using an Analog Reference Card
When using a AI-14B or A1-14U Analog Reference Card, set parameter b1-01 (Reference selection) to 3
(Option Card).
AI-14B provides 3 channels of bi-polar inputs with 14-bit A/D conversion accuracy (and a sign bit). The function of each channel is determined by the setting of F2-01.
AI-14U provides 2 channels of bi-polar inputs with 14-bit A/D conversion accuracy. Channel 1 is a voltage input and channel 2 is a current input. The sum of channels 1 and 2 is a frequency input. F2-01 does not need to be set for the AI-14U.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
F2-01
AI-14 Input
Selection
AI-14 Input Sel
Sets the function for channel 1 to 3 of the AI-14B analog input reference option board.
0: 3-channel individual (Channel
1: terminal A1, Channel 2: terminal A2, Channel 3: terminal A3)
1: 3-channel addition (Summed values of channels 1 to 3 is the frequency reference)
When set to 0, select 1 for b1-01.
In this case, the multi-function input "Option/Drive selection" cannot be used.
0 to 1 0 No A A A A A
Setting Precautions
Always set b1-01 (Reference selection) to 1 (control circuit terminal) when using the AI-14B for three channels of independent inputs. When this is done, H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact inputs) cannot be set to
2 (Option/Drive selection).
Using a Digital Reference Card
When using a DI-08 or DI-16H2 Digital Reference Card, set b1-01 (Reference selection) to 3 (Option Card).
The DI-16H2 can be used to set a frequency using a 16-bit digital reference. The DI-08 can be used to set a frequency using a 8-bit digital reference.
6-
159
6
-160
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
F3-01 o1-03
DI-08 / DI-
16H2 Input
Selection
DI Input
Digital Operator Display
Selection
Display Scaling
Sets the function of the DI-08 or the DI-16H2 digital input option board.
0: BCD 1% unit
1: BCD 0.1% unit
2: BCD 0.01% unit
3: BCD 1Hz unit
4: BCD 0.1Hz unit
5: BCD 0.01Hz unit
6: BCD (5-digit) 0.01Hz unit
(only effective when DI-16H2 is used.)
7: Binary input
When o1-03 is set to 2 or higher, the input will be BCD, and the units will change to the o1-03 setting.
Sets the units of the Frequency
References (d1-01 to d1-17), the
Frequency Reference Monitors
(U1-01, U1-02, U1-05), and the
Modbus communication frequency reference.
0: Hz
1: % (100% = E1-04)
2 to 39: RPM (Enter the number of motor poles).
40 to 39999: User display.
Set the number desired at maximum output frequency.
4 digit number
Number of digits from the right of the decimal point.
0 to 7
0 to
39999
Example 1: o1-03 = 12000, will result in frequency reference from
0.0 to 200.0 (200.0 = Fmax).
Example 2: o1-03 = 21234, will result in frequency reference from
0.00 to 12.34 (12.34 = Fmax).
0
0
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Options
Selecting Input Terminal Functions for the DI-16H2 Digital Reference Card
The frequency reference from the DI-16H2 Card is determined by the setting of F3-01 and the 12/16-bit switch on the Option card. The possible settings are listed in the following table.
Terminal
TC1
TC2
TC3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
3
9
10
7
8
1
5
6
3
4
Pin No.
1
2
12-bit Binary with Sign
F3-01 = 7
S1: 12 bit
Bit 1 (2
0
)
16-bit Binary with Sign
F3-01 = 7
S1: 16 bit
Bit 1 (2
0
)
Bit 1 (2
Bit 1 (2
Bit 1 (2
1
2
3
)
)
)
Bit 1 (2
1
)
Bit 1 (2
2
)
Bit 1 (2
3
)
1
3-digit BCD with Sign
F3-01 = 0 to 5
S1: 12 bit
2
4
8
BDC digit 1
(0 to 9)
Bit 1 (2
Bit 1 (2
Bit 1 (2
Bit 1 (2
Bit 1 (2
Bit 1 (2
Bit 1 (2
Bit 1 (2
-
-
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
Bit 1 (2
4
)
Bit 1 (2
5
)
Bit 1 (2
6
)
Bit 1 (2
7
)
1
2
4
8
Bit 1 (2
8
)
Bit 1 (2
9
)
1
2
Bit 1 (2
10
) 4
Bit 1 (2
11
) 8
Bit 1 (2
12
)
Bit 1 (2
13
)
Bit 1 (2
14
)
Bit 1 (2
15
)
Sign signal (0: Forward, 1: Reverse)
SET (read) signal (1: Read)
Input signal common (0 V)
Shield wire connection terminal
BDC digit 2
(0 to 9)
BDC digit 3
(0 to 9)
-
-
-
-
2
4
8
1
8
1
2
4
4
8
1
2
4
8
1
4-digit BCD with Sign
F3-01 = 0 to 5
S1: 16 bit
2
BDC digit 1
(0 to 9)
BDC digit 2
(0 to 9)
BDC digit 3
(0 to 9)
BDC digit 4
(0 to 9)
4
8
1
2
1
2
4
8
1
2
4
8
1
2
2
4-digit BCD without Sign
F3-01 = 6
S1: 16 bit
4
BDC digit 1
(2 to 9)
8
BDC digit 2
(0 to 9)
BDC digit 3
(0 to 9)
BDC digit 4
(0 to 9)
BDC digit 5
(0 to 3)
Application Precautions
•
•
The maximum frequency (100% speed) reference will be used when the binary input is set (setting: 6 or 7) and all bits are 1.
Setting F3-01 to 6 is valid only when the D1-16H2 is used. Using this setting, a frequency from 0.00 to
399.8Hz can be set in BCD. The sign bit is used as a data bit, so only positive (plus) data can be set. Also, the digit starts from 0, so the minimum setting is 0.02Hz.
Selecting the Input Terminal Function for a DI-08 Digital Reference Card
The frequency reference from a DI-08 Card is determined by the setting of F3-01, as shown in the following table.
6-
161
6
-162
Terminal
TC
5
6
7
3
4
1
2
8
9
10
11
Pin No.
8-bit Binary with Sign
F3-01 = 7
Bit 1 (2
0
)
Bit 1 (2
1
)
Bit 1 (2
2
)
Bit 1 (2
3
)
Bit 1 (2
4
)
Bit 1 (2
5
)
Bit 1 (2
6
)
Bit 1 (2
7
)
Sign signal
SET (read) signal
Reference common signal (0 V)
2
4
8
1
2-digit BCD with Sign
F3-01 = 0 to 5
1
2
4
BDC digit 1
(0 to 9)
BDC digit 2
(0 to 15)
8
Application Precautions
The DI-08 will not function if F3-01 is set to 6
Selecting the Digital Reference
The range of the digital references is determined by the combination of the settings of o1-03 and F3-01. The information monitored in U1-01 (Frequency reference) will also change.
DI-16H2 Reference Ranges
When using the DI-16H2, the following ranges can be set depending on the settings of the parameters.
Options o1-03 F3-01
0 or 1
2 to 39
40 to
39999
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
-
-
-
Switch
S1
Reference Input Mode
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 1%
16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 1%
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 0.1%
16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 0.1%
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 0.01%
16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 0.01%
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 1Hz
16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 1Hz
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 0.1Hz
16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 0.1Hz
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 0.01Hz
16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 0.01Hz
16 bits 5-digit BCD without sign, 0.01Hz
12 bits 12-bit binary with sign, 100%/4095
16 bits 16-bit binary with sign, 100%/30000
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 1 rpm
16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 1 rpm
12 bits
16 bits
3-digit BCD with sign, 100%/(1- to 4digit setting of o1-03)
4-digit BCD with sign, 100%/(1- to 4digit setting of o1-03)
10000 x = 1 to 3
16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 100%/10000
Reference Setting
Range
-110 to 110%
-110 to 110%
-110.0 to 110.0%
-110.0 to 110.0%
-15.99 to 15.99%
-110.0 to 110.0%
-400 to 400Hz
-400 to 400Hz
-159.9 to 159.9Hz
-400.0 to 400.0Hz
-15.99 to 15.99Hz
-159.99 to 159.99Hz
000.00 to 399.98Hz
-4095 to 4095
-33000 to 33000
-1599 to 1599 rpm
-15999 to 15999 rpm
U1-01 Monitor Unit o1-03 = 0 o1-03 = 1
0.01Hz
1 rpm
1 rpm
0.01%
-4095 to 4095
-10999 to 10999
(when o1-03 = 9999)
-11000 to 11000
5th digit of o1-03 setting:
X = 0, unit: 1
X = 1, unit: 0.1
X = 2, unit: 0.01
X = 3, unit: 0.001
DI-08 Reference Ranges
When using the DI-08, the following ranges can be set depending on the settings of the parameters.
U1-01 Monitor Unit o1-03 = 0 o1-03 = 1
F3-01
4
5
6
2
3
0
1
7
Reference Input Mode
2-digit BCD with sign, 1%
2-digit BCD with sign, 0.1%
2-digit BCD with sign, 0.01%
2-digit BCD with sign, 1Hz
2-digit BCD with sign, 0.1Hz
2-digit BCD with sign, 0.01Hz
12-bit binary with sign, 100%/
4095
Reference Setting Range
-
-110 to 110%
-15.9 to 15.9%
-1.59 to 1.59%
-159 to 159Hz
-15.9 to 15.9Hz
-1.59 to 1.59Hz
-255 to 255
0.01Hz
0.01%
6-
163
6
-164
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the fault displays and countermeasure for the drive and motor problems and countermeasures.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions ...........................7-2
Troubleshooting .........................................................7-27
7
-2
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
This section describes the alarm functions of the drive. The alarm functions include fault detection, alarm detection, operation error detection, and autotuning error detection.
Fault Detection
When the drive detects a fault, the fault contact output operates, and the drive output is shut OFF causing the motor to coast to a stop. (The stopping method can be selected for some faults, and the selected stopping method will be used with these faults.) A fault code is displayed on the Digital Operator.
When a fault has occurred, refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the fault.
Use one of the following methods to reset the fault after restarting the drive:
• Set a multi-function contact input (H1-01 to H1-05) to 14 (Fault Reset) and turn ON the fault reset signal.
•
•
Press the RESET Key on the Digital Operator.
Turn the main circuit power supply OFF and then ON again.
Display
OC
Over Current
Meaning
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing
Probable Causes
• A short-circuit or ground fault occurred at the Inverter output. (A short or ground fault can be caused by motor burn damage, worn insulation, or a damaged cable.)
• The load is too large or the acceleration/deceleration time is too short.
• A special-purpose motor or motor with a capacity too large for the
Inverter is being used.
• A magnetic contactor was switched at the Inverter output.
Overcurrent
The Inverter output current exceeded the overcurrent detection level. (200% of rated current)
There is a break in the PG wiring.
The PG is wired incorrectly.
Reset the fault after correcting its cause.
Note: Before turning the power
ON again, make sure that no shortcircuit or ground fault occurs at the
Inverter output.
Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.
Corrective Actions
Fix the wiring.
Power isn't being supplied to the PG.
Supply power to the PG properly.
• A short-circuit between +V, V, and
AC terminals occurred.
• Overload in the control circuit terminal.
• Make sure that incorrect wiring has not been done.
• Check the resistance and wiring for the frequency setting potentiometer, etc. (Check that the current for terminals +V and –V is
20 mA or less.)
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Display
GF
Ground
Fault
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing(Continued)
Meaning
Ground Fault
*
The ground fault current at the
Inverter output exceeded approximately 50% of the Inverter rated output current.
Probable Causes
A ground fault occurred at the Inverter output. (A ground fault can be caused by motor burn damage, worn insulation, or a damaged cable.)
• A short-circuit between +V,
AC terminals occurred.
V, and
• Overload in the control circuit terminal.
Corrective Actions
Reset the fault after correcting its cause.
Note: Before turning the power
ON again, make sure that no shortcircuit or ground fault occurs at the
Inverter output.
• Make sure that incorrect wiring has not been done.
• Check the resistance and wiring for the frequency setting potentiometer, etc. (Check that the current for terminals +V and –V is
20 mA or less.)
* The ground fault here is one which occurs in the motor wiring while the motor is running. A ground fault may not be detected in the following cases.
A ground fault with low resistance which occurs in motor cables or terminals.
A ground fault occurs when the power is turned ON.
PUF
Main IGBT
Fuse
Blown
Fuse Blown
The fuse in the main circuit is blown.
The output transistor has failed because of a short-circuit or ground fault at the
Inverter output.
Check whether there is a short-circuit between the following terminals. A short-circuit will damage the output transistor:
B1 ( 3) U, V, W
U, V, W
Replace the Inverter after correcting the cause.
The deceleration time is too short and the regenerative energy from the motor is too large.
Increase the deceleration time or connect a braking resistor (or
Braking Resistor Unit). Alternatively, enable (set to 1) the stall prevention selection during deceleration (L3-04).
OV
DC Bus
Overvolt
Main Circuit Overvoltage
The main circuit DC voltage exceeded the overvoltage detection level.
200-240 V Class: Approx. 410 V
380-480 V Class: Approx. 820 V
(E1-01 400 V)
Approx. 720 V
(E1-01 < 400 V)
Motor ground fault
(Ground fault current flowed to the capacitor in the control circuit of the
Inverter through the power supply.)
Incorrect constant setting for speed search
(The speed search can be performed during momentary power loss recovery and auto restart after a fault.)
Check the output cable, relay terminal, or motor terminal box and correct the cause of ground fault.
• Use the speed search function.
• Adjust the settings of the Speed search operating current (b3-02) and Speed search deceleration time (b3-03).
• Use the estimated speed search function. (Autotuning for motor line-to-line resistance is required.)
Improper PG cable connection
(PG noise, PG disconnection)
Check to see if the PG cable is connected properly.
The regenerative energy when an overshoot occurs after acceleration is completed is too large.
The power supply voltage is too high.
In vector control, enable (set to 1) the overvoltage inhibit selection
(L3-11).
Decrease the voltage so it’s within specifications.
7-
3
7
-4
Display
UV1
DC Bus
Undervolt
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing(Continued)
Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Main Circuit Undervoltage
The main circuit DC voltage is below the Undervoltage Detection
Level (L2-05).
200-240 V Class: Approx. 190 V
380-480 V Class: Approx. 380 V
Main Circuit Magnetic Connector
Operation Failure
The magnetic connector stopped responding during Inverter operation.
Applicable Inverter Capacities
200-240 V Class: 30 to 110 kW
380-480 V Class: 55 to 300 kW
• An open-phase occurred with the input power supply.
• A momentary power loss occurred.
• The wiring terminals for the input power supply are loose.
• The voltage fluctuations in the input power supply are too large.
• A fault occurred in the surge prevention circuit.
• The magnetic contactor in the control circuit was released (Contact failure in the auxiliary contact).
• The contact of the magnetic contactor in the control circuit was corroded due to environmental dust or gas.
• A fuse on the Change Power Tap Circuit Board has blown for a 400 V
Class Inverter of 55 kW or higher.
• Reset the fault after correcting its cause.
• Improve the power supply environment. (Check to see if the correct power tap is selected.)
• Improve the operating environment.
• Replace the Inverter.
Power tap
200 V Class power supply
400 V Class power supply
Operating power supply input terminals
Jumper
(default position)
CHARGE indicator
UV2
CTL PS
Undervolt
Control Power Fault
The control power supply voltage dropped.
• The wiring of the control power circuit is incorrect.
• A Backup Capacitor Unit for
Momentary Power Loss is not attached to a 200 V/400 V Class
Inverter of 7.5 kW or less and the value of the Momentary power loss ridethru time (L2-02) factory setting has been changed to the larger value.
• Try turning the power supply off and on.
• Replace the Inverter if the fault continues to occur.
• Attach a Backup Capacitor Unit for Momentary Power Loss.
UV3
MC
Answerback
Inrush Prevention Circuit Fault
A fault occurred in the surge prevention circuit.
The magnetic contactor did not respond for 10 s even though the magnetic contactor ON signal has been output.
• The magnetic contactor in the main circuit failed.
• The magnetic contactor excitation coil is burned out.
• Try turning the power supply off and on.
• Replace the Inverter if the fault continues to occur.
PF
Input Pha
Loss
Main Circuit Voltage Fault
The main circuit DC voltage oscillates unusually (not when regenerating).
This fault is detected if a load is greater than approximately 80% of the maximum motor capacity.
This fault is detected when L8-05 is set to 1.
• An open-phase occurred in the input power supply.
• A momentary power loss occurred.
• The wiring terminals for the input power supply are loose.
• The voltage fluctuations in the input power supply are too large.
• The voltage balance between phases is bad.
Reset the fault after correcting its cause.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Display
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing(Continued)
Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Actions
LF
Output Pha
Loss
Output Open-phase
An open-phase occurred at the
Inverter output.
This fault is detected when L8-07 is set to 1 or 2
• There is a broken wire in the output cable.
• There is a broken wire in the motorwinding.
• The output terminals are loose.
Reset the fault after correcting its cause.
The motor being used has a capacity less than 5% of the rated output current.
Check the motor and Inverter capacity.
OH
(OH1)
Heatsnk
Overtemp
(Heatsnk
MAX
Temp)
The ambient temperature is too high.
Cooling Fin Overheating
The temperature of the Inverter's cooling fins exceeded the setting in
L8-02 or the overheat protection level.
OH: The temperature exceeded the setting in L8-02 (Stopping method can be changed by L8-03.).
OH1: The temperature exceeded
100 C (Stopping method: Coast to stop).
There is a heat source nearby.
The Inverter's cooling fan has stopped.
• A short-circuit between +V, V, and
AC terminals occurred.
• Overload in the control circuit terminal.
Install a cooling unit.
Remove the heat source.
Replace the cooling fan. (Contact our sales representative.)
• Make sure that incorrect wiring has not been done.
• Check the resistance and wiring for the frequency setting potentiometer, etc. (Check that the current for terminals +V and –V is
20 mA or less.)
Inverter's Cooling Fan Fault
(200 V Class: 7.5 kW or more,
400 V Class: 5.5 kW or more)
This fault is detected when L8-32 is set to 1.
• The Inverter's cooling fan has stopped.
• The heatsink is clogged.
• Replace the cooling fan. (Contact our sales representative.)
• Clean the heatsink.
Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
OH3
Motor
Overheat 1
Motor Overheating Alarm
The Inverter will stop or will continue to operate according to the setting of L1-03.
The motor has overheated.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the Motor Rated Current
(E2-01).
RH
DynBrk
Resistor
Installed Braking Resistor Overheating
Braking resistor protection function set in L8-01 has operated.
Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
OH4
Motor
Overheat 2
Motor Overheating Fault
The Inverter will stop according to the setting of L1-04.
The motor has overheated.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the Motor Rated Current
(E2-01).
The deceleration time is too short and the regenerative energy from the motor is too large.
• Reduce the load, increase the deceleration time, or reduce the motor speed.
• Change to a Braking Resistor
Unit.
7-
5
7
-6
Display
RR
DynBrk
Transistr
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing(Continued)
Meaning Probable Causes
Internal Braking Transistor Fault
The braking transistor is not operating properly.
• The braking transistor is damaged.
• The Inverter’s control circuits are faulty.
Corrective Actions
• Disconnect the Braking Resistor wiring, turn ON the power supply again, and operate the motor. If the power supply is turned ON while the Braking
Resistor wiring is connected, the
Braking Resistor or Inverter may overheat and be damaged.
• Replace the Inverter if the fault continues to occur.
The load is too heavy. The acceleration time, deceleration time, and cycle time are too short.
Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
OL1
Motor
Overloaded
Motor Overload
The motor overload protection function has operated based on the internal electronic thermal value.
The constant setting for speed search is incorrect.
(Motor overload occurred due to motor hunting and vibration.)
• Use the speed search function.
• Adjust the settings of the Speed search operating current (b3-02) and Speed search deceleration time (b3-03).
• Use the estimated speed search function. (Autotuning for motor line-to-line resistance is required.)
• Motor overload occurred when running at low speed. (If a general-purpose motor is used, motor overload can occur when running at low speed even if running within the rated current.)
• Motor protection selection (L1-01) is set to general-purpose motor protection (1) when an Inverter duty motor is used.
• Check the size of the load.
• Check the setting of L1-01.
• Increase the frame size of the
Inverter.
The directions of the motor and PG are different. (Only in flux vector control)
• Correct the PG wiring.
• Correct the motor wiring.
• Change the setting of PG rotation (F1-05).
The V/f characteristics voltage is too high.
The Motor Rated Current (E2-01) is incorrect.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the Motor Rated Current
(E2-01).
• A short-circuit between +V, V, and
AC terminals occurred.
• Overload in the control circuit terminal.
• Make sure that incorrect wiring has not been done.
• Check the resistance and wiring for the frequency setting potentiometer, etc. (Check that the current for terminals +V and –V is
20 mA or less.)
The input voltage is lower than the
Inverter’s output voltage reference (U1-
06) and hunting or fluctuation is occurring in the output current.
• Decrease the setting of E1-05
(Max. Voltage). (Typically, decrease in intervals by 10%.)
• Decrease the setting of C4-01
(Torque Compensation Gain)
(0.0 to 0.5).
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Display
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing(Continued)
Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Actions
The load is too heavy. The acceleration time, deceleration time and cycle time are too short.
Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
The constant setting for speed search is incorrect.
(Motor overload occurred due to motor hunting and vibration.)
• Use the speed search function.
• Adjust the settings of the Speed search operating current (b3-02) and Speed search deceleration time (b3-03).
• Use the estimated speed search function. (Autotuning for motor line-to-line resistance is required.)
OL2
Inv Overloaded
Inverter Overload
The Inverter overload protection function has operated based on the internal electronic thermal value.
The directions of the motor and PG are different. (Only in flux vector control)
• Correct the PG wiring.
• Correct the motor wiring.
• Change the setting of PG rotation (F1-05).
The V/f characteristics voltage is too high.
Check the V/f characteristics.
OL3
Overtorque
Det 1
OL4
Overtorque
Det 2
OL7
HSB-OL
Overtorque Detected 1
There has been a current greater than the setting in L6-02 for longer than the setting in L6-03.
Overtorque Detected 2
There has been a current greater than the setting in L6-05 for longer than the setting in L6-06.
High-slip Braking OL
The output frequency did not change for longer than the time set in N3-04.
The Inverter capacity is too low.
Replace the Inverter with one that has a larger capacity.
• A short-circuit between +V, V, and
AC terminals occurred.
• Overload in the control circuit terminal.
• Make sure that incorrect wiring has not been done.
• Check the resistance and wiring for the frequency setting potentiometer, etc. (Check that the current for terminals +V and –V is
20 mA or less.)
Inverter overload occurred when running at a low speed of 6 Hz or less.
The inertia returned to the load is too large.
–
–
• Reduce the load.
• Increase the frame size of the
Inverter.
• Lower the carrier frequency.
• Make sure that the settings in
L6-02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque.
• Make sure that the current setting in L6-05 and time setting in
L6-06 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque.
• Make sure the load is an inertial load.
• Set the system so that the deceleration time that does not produce overvoltages is 120 s or less.
7-
7
7
-8
Display
UL3
Undertorq
Det 1
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing(Continued)
Meaning Probable Causes
Undertorque Detected 1
There has been a current less than the setting in L6-02 for longer than the setting in L6-03.
–
Corrective Actions
• Make sure that the settings in
L6-02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque.
UL4
Undertorq
Det 2
Undertorque Detected 2
There has been a current less than the setting in L6-05 for longer than the setting in L6-06.
–
• Make sure that the current setting in L6-05 and time setting in
L6-06 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque.
OS
Overspeed
Det
Overshooting/Undershooting are occurring.
Adjust the gain again.
Overspeed
The speed has been greater than the setting in F1-08 for longer than the setting in F1-09.
The reference speed is too high.
The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 aren't appropriate.
Check the reference circuit and reference gain.
Check the settings in F1-08 and
F1-09.
PGO
PG Open
DEV
Speed
Deviation
There is a break in the PG wiring.
Brake is applied to the motor.
Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.
PG Disconnection Detected
PG pulses were input when the
Inverter was outputting a frequency.
The PG is wired incorrectly.
Fix the wiring.
Power isn't being supplied to the PG.
Supply power to the PG properly.
Check for open circuit when using brake (motor).
The load is too heavy.
Reduce the load.
Excessive Speed Deviation
The speed deviation has been greater than the setting in F1-10 for longer than the setting in F1-11.
The acceleration time and deceleration time are too short.
The load is locked.
The settings in F1-10 and F1-11 aren't appropriate.
Lengthen the acceleration time and deceleration time.
Check the mechanical system.
Check the settings in F1-10 and
F1-11.
CF
Out of
Control
Brake is applied to the motor.
Check for open circuit when using brake (motor).
Control Fault
The torque limit was reached continuously for 3 seconds or longer during a deceleration stop during open-loop vector 1 control.
An error occurred in the speed estimation calculation for open-loop vector 2 control.
Motor constant settings are not correct.
• Check the motor constants.
• Perform autotuning.
Refer to
Corrective Actions for Control Faults (CF) on page 7-15.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Display
FBL
Feedback
Loss
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing(Continued)
Meaning Probable Causes
PID Feedback Reference Lost
A PID feedback reference loss was detected (b5-12 = 2) and the PID feedback input was less than b5-13
(PID feedback loss detection level) for longer than the time set in b5-14
(PID feedback loss detection time).
The settings in b5-13 and b5-14 aren’t appropriate.
The wiring of the PID feedback circuit is incorrect.
Corrective Actions
Check the settings in b5-13 and b5-14.
Fix the wiring.
EF0
Opt External Flt
External Fault Input from Communications Option Board
–
Check the Communications
Option Board and communications signals.
EF3
Ext Fault
S3
External Fault (Input Terminal 3)
EF4
Ext Fault
S4
External Fault (Input Terminal 4)
EF5
Ext Fault
S5
External Fault (Input Terminal 5)
EF6
Ext Fault
S6
External Fault (Input Terminal 6)
EF7
Ext Fault
S7
External Fault (Input Terminal 7)
An “external fault” was input from a multi-function input terminal.
EF8
Ext Fault
S8
External Fault (Input Terminal 8)
• Reset external fault inputs to the multi-function inputs.
• Remove the cause of the external fault.
EF9
Ext Fault
S9
External Fault (Input Terminal 9)
EF10
Ext Fault
S10
External Fault (Input Terminal 10)
EF11
Ext Fault
S11
External Fault (Input Terminal 11)
EF12
Ext Fault
S12
External Fault (Input Terminal 12)
SVE
Zero Servo
Fault
Zero-servo Fault
The rotation position moved during zero-servo operation.
The torque limit is too small.
The load torque is too large.
–
Increase the limit.
Reduce the load torque.
Check for signal noise.
7-
9
7
-10
Display
SER
Search
Retrials
Fault
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing(Continued)
Meaning Probable Causes
Exceeded Allowable Number of
Speed Search Retrials
The speed search has been retried more than the number of times set in b3-19 (Number of speed search retrials).
The settings in b3-17 and b3-18 aren’t appropriate.
Corrective Actions
Make sure that the settings in b3-
17 and b3-18 are appropriate.
OPR
Oper Disconnect
Digital Operator Connection
Fault
The connection to the Digital Operator was broken during operation for a Run Command from the Digital Operator.
–
Check the connection to the Digital Operator.
CE
Memobus
Com Err
MEMOBUS Communications
Error
A normal reception was not possible for 2 s or longer after control data was received once.
BUS
Option
Com Err
Option Communications Error
A communications error was detected during a Run Command or while setting a frequency reference from a Communications Option
Board.
–
–
Check the communications devices and communications signals.
Check the communications devices and communications signals.
E5
SI-T WDT
Err
SI-T Watchdog Error
Consistency error of received control data
Synchronization error between master controller and Inverter for control data.
Check the communications timing such as communications cycle.
Refer to MECHATROLINK COM-
MUNICATIONS INTERFACE
CARD INSTRUCTIONS
(TOBPC73060008) for details.
E-15
SI-F/G
Com Err
SI-F/G Communications Error
Detected
A communications error was detected when a Run Command or frequency reference was set from an option board and continuous operation was set for the E-15 operation selection.
E-10
SI-F/G
CPU down
SI-F/G Option Board CPU Failure
SI-F/G Option Board operation failed.
CPF00
COM-ERR
(OP &
INV)
Digital Operator Communications Error 1
Communications with the Digital
Operator were not established within 5 seconds after the power was turned on.
–
Digital Operator connection is faulty.
Inverter control circuit is faulty.
The Digital Operator's connector isn't connected properly.
Check the communications signals.
Disconnect and then reconnect the
Digital Operator.
Replace the Inverter.
Disconnect the Digital Operator and then connect it again.
The Inverter's control circuits are faulty. Replace the Inverter.
CPU External RAM Fault
–
The control circuits were destroyed.
Try turning the power supply off and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Display
CPF01
COM-ERR
(OP &
INV)
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing(Continued)
Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Digital Operator Communications Error 2
After communications were established, there was a communications error with the Digital Operator for more than 2 seconds.
The Digital Operator isn't connected properly.
Disconnect the Digital Operator and then connect it again.
The Inverter's control circuits are faulty. Replace the Inverter.
CPF02
BB Circuit
Err
Baseblock Circuit Error
–
Try turning the power supply off and on again.
CPF03
EEPROM
Error
EEPROM Error
The control circuit is damaged.
–
Replace the Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off and on again.
The Inverter power supply was shut off while writing data to the Inverter constants.
Initialize the constant settings (A1-
03).
CPF04
Internal
A/D Err
CPF05
External
A/D Err
CPF06
Option error
CPF07
RAM-Err
CPU Internal A/D Converter
Error
CPU External A/D Converter
Error
Option Board Connection Error
ASIC Internal RAM Fault
The control circuit is damaged.
–
The control circuit is damaged.
Replace the Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
• A short-circuit between +V, V, and
AC terminals occurred.
• Overload in the control circuit terminal.
• Make sure that incorrect wiring has not been done.
• Check the resistance and wiring for the frequency setting potentiometer, etc. (Check that the current for terminals +V and –V is
20 mA or less.)
–
The control circuit is damaged.
Try turning the power supply off and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
• A short-circuit between +V, V, and
AC terminals occurred.
• Overload in the control circuit terminal.
• Make sure that incorrect wiring has not been done.
• Check the resistance and wiring for the frequency setting potentiometer, etc. (Check that the current for terminals +V and –V is
20 mA or less.)
The option board is not connected properly.
Turn off the power and insert the board again.
The Inverter or option board is faulty.
–
The control circuit is damaged.
Replace the option board or the
Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
7-
11
7
-12
Display
CPF08
WAT-Err
CPF09
CPU-Err
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing(Continued)
Meaning Probable Causes
Watchdog Timer Fault
–
Corrective Actions
Try turning the power supply off and on again.
The control circuit is damaged.
Replace the Inverter.
CPU-ASIC Mutual Diagnosis
Fault
–
The control circuit is damaged.
Try turning the power supply off and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
CPF10
ASIC-Err
ASIC Version Fault The Inverter control circuit is faulty Replace the Inverter.
CPF20
Option
A/D error
Communications Option Board
A/D Converter Error
The option board is not connected properly.
Turn off the power and insert the board again.
The option board's A/D converter is faulty.
Replace the Communications
Option Board.
CPF21
Option
CPU down
Communications Option Board
Self Diagnostic Error
CPF22
Option
Type Err
Communications Option Board
Model Code Error
Communications Option Board fault.
Replace the option board.
CPF23
Option
DPRAM
Err
VCF
Vcn Failure
Communications Option Board
DPRAM Error
Communications Option Board fault.
Replace the option board.
The copy function of the Digital Operator was used during communications.
• Use the copy function off-line.
• Use the copy function with an option board removed.
The option board is not connected properly.
Turn off the power and insert the board again.
A loss in capacity due to aging of the main circuit capacitor.
Replace the main circuit capacitor.
(Consult your YASKAWA representative.)
Replace the Inverter.
The Inverter parts are faulty.
An open phase was detected for an output.
Main Circuit Capacitor Neutral
Point Potential Error
An excessive imbalance occurred in the main circuit capacitor’s neutral point potential.
Carrier frequency set value (C6-03, C6-
04) is unsuitable.
Refer to LF (output open phase) in this table.
Check the set values for C6-03 and
C6-04. The maximum output frequency that can be set for 400 V
Class Inverters is restricted by the carrier frequency setting. Refer to page 6-46.
In V/f or open-loop vector control, the motor consecutively loses synchronism
(the output current exceeds 200% of the
Inverter rated current).
• Reduce the load.
• Increase the acceleration time.
• Check the settings for V/f control.
• Use larger capacity Inverter.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Display
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing(Continued)
Meaning
OPERA-
TOR ERR
RAM
CHECK
ERR
Operator Error (Internal RAM
Fault)
At power ON, an error was detected from the results of the internal
RAM Write/Read check.
Probable Causes
OPERA-
TOR ERR
ROM
CHECK
ERR
Operator Error (CPU Internal
ROM Fault)
At power ON and during operation, an error was detected when the internal ROM was checked.
OPERA-
TOR ERR
DATA
SEND
ERR
Operator Error (Transmission
Circuit Fault)
During operation, send processing did not complete within 500 ms continuously at least 10 times.
OPERA-
TOR ERR
RAM
CHECK
ERR
Operator Error (Internal RAM
Fault)
During operation, an error was detected when the display pattern for the character code 80 to 8F recorded in the internal RAM was checked.
OPERA-
TOR ERR
WATCH-
DOG ERR
Operator Error (Watchdog Error)
During operation, an error was detected in the program execution.
–
Corrective Actions
Replace the Operator.
7-
13
7
-14
Display
Table 7.2 Causes and Corrective Actions When the Digital Operator Goes Dark
Meaning
• A short-circuit between +V, V, and
AC terminals occurred.
• Overload in the control circuit terminal.
Probable Causes Corrective Actions
• Make sure that incorrect wiring has not been done.
• Check the resistance and wiring for the frequency setting potentiometer, etc. (Check that the current for terminals +V and
–V is 20 mA or less.)
The short-circuit bar between +1 and
+2 terminals in the main circuit has been removed.
Malfunction occurred in the control power circuit.
Attach the short-circuit bar.
No display
There was a drop in control power voltage.
P terminal and N terminal of the Braking Unit are connected in reverse.
• Check the wiring for the Braking Unit, including cables connected to the Braking Unit and relay terminals.
• Replace the Inverter.
Control power circuit failure
Charge indicator is lit:
• Replace the Digital Operator.
• Replace the board or the
Inverter.
Charge indicator is not lit:
• Check the input power supply voltage.
• Replace the Inverter.
Turn OFF the power, wait for 5 minutes, and turn ON the power again.
The Digital Operator is not connected properly.
Turn OFF the power, disconnect the Digital Operator, and then reconnect it again.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Corrective Actions for Control Faults (CF)
CF occurs
Are the motor and
Inverter connected properly?
Yes
Are the motor constants set correctly?
Yes
Has autotuning been executed for line-to-line resistance?
Yes
No
U1-50 = 01,02
No
U1-50 = 00,01,
No 02,08
Fix the wiring.
Execute autotuning for the motor constants.
Execute autotuning for the line-to-line resistance.
Are the torque limit settings (L7-01 to L7-04, analog input) or the torque reference input too small?
No
Is the stopping method appropriate?
Yes
Is an operation reference being input while the motor is coasting?
No
Yes
Increase the torque limit or torque reference until is it within the allowable range for the machine.
No
U1-50 = 00
If deceleration stop is not possible or unnecessary for the machine, set b1-03 to 1 (coast to stop).
U1-50 = 02
Yes
· Input the operation reference after the motor stops.
· Set b3-01 to 1 or 3 (speed search enabled).
What is the CF error code (U1-50)?
U1-50 = 04
Adjust the speed estimator's integral time (N4-07) or proportional gain (N4-08).
U1-50 = 08
If the machine rotates only in the same direction as the sign of the speed limit, set b1-10 to 1.
Use in open loop vector 1 control.
U1-50 = 10 · If the machine rotates only in the same direction as the sign of the speed limit (winding operation), set d5-07 to 1.
· Ensure that the motor's speed is not 0 or that it does not rotate in the opposite direction.
U1-50 = 20
· If the machine rotates in the opposite direction to the sign of the speed limit (unwinding operation), set d5-07 to 0.
· Start with speed control and then switch to torque control when the frequency exceeds 3 Hz.
Refer to u Autotuning on page 4-9. Execute autotuning after the control method is changed.
Refer to u Autotuning on page 4-9. Execute autotuning after changing
Refer to n Torque Limits: L7 on page 5-66. In particular, if the regenerative torque limit has been reduced to prevent overvoltages, set L3-11 to 1 and set the regenerative torque limit to a large value.
Refer to u Speed Search on page 6-65.
Refer to Procedure for
Increasing the Speed
Response (PRG 102o only) on page 4-33.
Refer to n Speed/Torque
Control Switching Function on page 6-136.
7-
15
7
-16
Meaning of CR Error Codes
10
20
04
08
U1-50
00
01
02
Stop error
Magnetic flux calculation error 1
Magnetic flux calculation error 2
Speed estimator gain adjustment fault
Low-speed regeneration fault
Zero-speed fault
Rotation direction limit fault
Meaning
Alarm Detection
Alarms are detected as a type of drive protection function that do not operate the fault contact output. The system will automatically returned to its original status once the cause of the alarm has been removed.
The Digital Operator display flashes and the alarm is output from the multi-function outputs (H2-01 to H2-
03).
When an alarm occurs, take appropriate countermeasures according to the table below.
Display
EF
(blinking)
External
Fault
Forward/Reverse Run Commands
Input Together
Both the forward and Reverse Run
Commands have been ON for more than 0.5 s.
Meaning
Table 7.3 Alarm Displays and Processing
Probable causes
–
Corrective Actions
Check the sequence of the forward and Reverse Run Commands.
Since the rotational direction is unknown, the motor will be decelerated to a stop when this minor fault occurs.
UV
(blinking)
DC Bus
Undervolt
Main Circuit Undervoltage
The following conditions occurred when there was no Run signal.
• The main circuit DC voltage was below the Undervoltage Detection
Level Setting (L2-05).
• The surge current limiting magnetic contactor opened.
• The control power supply voltage when below the CUV level.
OV
(blinking)
DC Bus
Overvolt
See causes for UV1, UV2, and UV3 faults in the previous table.
See corrective actions for UV1,
UV2, and UV3 faults in the previous table.
Main Circuit Overvoltage
The main circuit DC voltage exceeded the overvoltage detection level.
200-240 V Class: Approx. 410 V
380-480 V Class: Approx. 820 V
The power supply voltage is too high.
Decrease the voltage so it's within specifications.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Display
Table 7.3 Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued)
Meaning Probable causes Corrective Actions
The ambient temperature is too high.
Install a cooling unit.
There is a heat source nearby.
Remove the heat source
OH
(blinking)
Heatsink
Overtemp
The Inverter cooling fan has stopped.
Cooling Fin Overheating
The temperature of the Inverter's cooling fins exceeded the setting in L8-02.
• A short-circuit between +V, V, and
AC terminals occurred.
• Overload in the control circuit terminal.
Replace the cooling fan. (Contact your Yaskawa representative.)
• Make sure that incorrect wiring has not been done.
• Check the resistance and wiring for the frequency setting potentiometer, etc. (Check that the current for terminals +V and –V is
20 mA or less.)
FAN
(blinking)
Cooling
Fan Fault
Inverter’s Cooling Fan Fault
An Inverter’s cooling fan fault was detected.
This fault is detected when L8-32 is set to 0.
The Inverter’s cooling fan has stopped.
Replace the cooling fan. (Contact our sales representative.)
OH2
(blinking)
Over Heat
2
Inverter Overheating Pre-alarm
An OH2 alarm signal (Inverter overheating alarm signal) was input from a multi-function input terminal (S3 to
S7).
–
Clear the multi-function input terminal's overheating alarm input.
OH3
(blinking)
Motor
Overheat 1
OL3
(blinking)
Overtorque Det
1
Motor Overheating
E was set for H3-09 and the motor temperature thermistor input exceeded the alarm detection level.
Overtorque 1
There has been a current greater than the setting in L6-02 for longer than the setting in L6-03.
The motor has overheated.
–
Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the motor temperature input on terminals A1 and A2.
• Make sure that the settings in L6-
02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque.
OL4
(blinking)
Overtorque Det
2
UL3
(blinking)
Undertorq
Det 1
Overtorque 2
There has been a current greater than the setting in L6-05 for longer than the setting in L6-06.
Undertorque 1
There has been a current less than the setting in L6-02 for longer than the setting in L6-03.
–
–
• Make sure that the current setting in L6-05 and time setting in L6-
06 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque.
• Make sure that the settings in L6-
02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque.
7-
17
7
-18
Display
UL4
(blinking)
Undertorq
Det 2
Table 7.3 Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued)
Meaning Probable causes
Undertorque 2
There has been a current less than the setting in L6-05 for longer than the setting in L6-06.
–
Corrective Actions
• Make sure that the current setting in L6-05 and time setting in L6-
06 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque.
Overshooting/undershooting are occurring.
Adjust the gain again.
OS
(blinking)
Overspeed
Det
Overspeed
The speed has been greater than the setting in F1-08 for longer than the setting in F1-09.
The reference speed is too high.
Check the reference circuit and reference gain.
The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 aren't appropriate.
Check the settings in F1-08 and F1-
09.
PGO
(blinking)
PG Open
There is a break in the PG wiring.
Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.
The PG is Disconnected
The Inverter is outputting a frequency, but PG pulses aren't being input.
The PG is wired incorrectly.
Fix the wiring.
Power isn't being supplied to the PG. Supply power to the PG properly.
Brake is applied to the motor.
Check for open circuit when using brake (motor).
The load is too large.
Reduce the load.
DEV
(blinking)
Speed
Deviation
Excessive Speed Deviation
The speed deviation has been greater than the setting in F1-10 for longer than the setting in F1-11.
The acceleration time and deceleration time are too short.
The load is locked.
Brake is applied to the motor.
Lengthen the acceleration time and deceleration time.
Check the mechanical system.
The settings in F1-10 and F1-11 aren't appropriate.
Check the settings in F1-10 and F1-
11.
Check for open circuit when using brake (motor).
EF0
(blinking)
Opt External Flt
External Fault Detected for Communications Board Other Than
SI-K2
Continuing operation was specified for EF0 (F6-03 = 3)and an external fault was input from the option board.
–
Remove the cause of the external fault.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Display
EF3
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S3
Table 7.3 Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued)
Meaning
External Fault (Input Terminal S3)
Probable causes
EF4
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S4
External Fault (Input Terminal S4)
EF5
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S5
External Fault (Input Terminal S5)
EF6
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S6
External Fault (Input Terminal S6)
EF7
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S7
External Fault (Input Terminal S7)
EF8
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S8
External Fault (Input Terminal S8)
An external fault was input from a multi-function input terminal (S3 to
S7).
Corrective Actions
• Reset external fault inputs to the multi-function inputs.
• Remove the cause of the external fault.
EF9
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S9
External Fault (Input Terminal S9)
EF10
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S10
External Fault (Input Terminal S10)
EF11
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S11
External Fault (Input Terminal S11)
EF12
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S12
External Fault (Input Terminal S12)
FBL
(blinking)
Feedback
Loss
PID Feedback Reference Lost
A PID feedback reference loss was detected (b5-12 = 2) and the PID feedback input was less than b5-13 (PID feedback loss detection level) for longer than the time set in b5-14 (PID feedback loss detection time).
The settings in b5-13 and b5-14 aren’t appropriate.
The wiring of the PID feedback circuit is incorrect.
Check the settings in b5-13 and b5-
14.
Fix the wiring.
7-
19
7
-20
Display
Table 7.3 Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued)
Meaning
CE
(blinking)
MEMOBUS
Com Err
MEMOBUS Communications Error
Normal reception was not possible for
2 s or longer after received control data.
Probable causes
–
Corrective Actions
Check the communications devices and signals.
BUS
(blinking)
Option
Com Err
Option Board Communications
Error
A communications error occurred in a mode where the Run Command or a frequency reference is set from an
Communications Option Board.
–
Check the communications devices and signals.
CALL
(blinking)
Com Call
RUNC
(blinking)
Ext Run
Active
Communications on Standby
Control data was not normally received when power was turned ON.
Reset during Run Command Input
Error
The reset signal was input during Run
Command input from an external terminal or other source.
–
–
Check the communications devices and signals.
Check that a Run Command is not being input from an external terminal or other source.
E5
(blinking)
SI-T WDT
Err
SI-T Watchdog Error Detected
A Watchdog error was detected when the Run Command or a frequency reference was set from an option board and continuous operation was set for the E5 operation selection.
Synchronization error between master controller and Inverter for control data.
Check the communications timing such as communications cycle.
*1
AER
(blinking)
SI-T
Address
Err
SI-T Station Number Setting Error
Station number of SI-T option board was out of setting range.
Station number setting error.
Check the setting of the station number.
*1
Circuit of SI-T option board is faulty.
Check the communications devices and signals.
*1
CYC
(blinking)
SI-T Cycle
Err
SI-T Communications Cycle Setting Error
Communications cycle of SI-T option board was out of range.
Communications cycle of SI-T option board set in master controller was out of range.
Check the communication cycle of
SI-T option board set in master controller.
*1
BB
(blinking)
Baseblock
Receiving External Baseblock
Command
An external baseblock signal was input from a multi-function input terminal, and the Inverter output was shut down.
An external baseblock signal was input from a multi-function input terminal.
Check the external sequence.
The load is too heavy or the accel/ decel time is too short.
Increase the acceleration/deceleration time.
HCA
(blinking)
High Current Alarm
Current Alarm
The output current has exceeded the overcurrent alarm level (over 150% of the rated current).
Either a specialized motor or an excessively large motor is being used.
The current has risen too high while performing speed search either during a momentary loss in power or during a fault restart.
Verify the setting for the Inverter capacity.
Momentary losses in power or fault restarts may occasionally trigger an overcurrent alarm, and are not necessarily indicators of an overcurrent problem.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Display
LT-C
(blinking)
C
Maintenance
Table 7.3 Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued)
Meaning Probable causes
Electrolytic Capacitor Maintenance
Timer
Monitor U1-61 has reached 100%.
The electrolytic capacitors have reached their estimated maintenance time period.
Corrective Actions
Reset constant o2-18 to “0%” after replacing
*2
the electrolytic capacitors.
LT-F
(blinking)
Fan
Maintenance
Cooling Fan Maintenance Timer
Monitor U1-63 has reached 100%.
The cooling fan has reached its estimated maintenance time period.
Replace the cooling fan constant o2-10 to “0H”.
*2
and set
7-
21
7
-22
Operation Errors
An operation error will occur if there is an invalid setting or a contradiction between two parameter settings. It won't be possible to start the drive until the parameters have been set correctly. (The alarm output and fault contact outputs will not operate either.)
When an operation error has occurred, refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the errors.
Display
OPE01 kVA Selection
OPE02
Limit
Table 7.4 Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings
Meaning
Incorrect Inverter
Capacity Setting
Incorrect settings
The Inverter capacity setting doesn't match the Unit. (Contact your Yaskawa representative.)
OPE03
Terminal
Constant Setting Range
Error
The constant setting is outside of the valid setting range. Press the ENTER Key on the Digital Operator to display OPE fault constant (U1-34).
Multi-function Input
Selection Error
One of the following errors has been made in the multi-function input (H1-01 to H1-
10) settings:
• The same setting has been selected for two or more multi-function inputs.
• An UP or DOWN command was selected independently. (They must be used together.)
• The UP/DOWN commands (10 and 11) and Accel/Decel Ramp Hold (A) were selected at the same time.
• Speed Search 1 (61, maximum output frequency) and Speed Search 2 (62. set frequency) were selected at the same time.
• The UP/DOWN commands (10 and 11) were selected while PID Control Method
Selection (b5-01) was enabled.
• Positive and negative speed commands have not been set at the same time.
• The emergency Stop Command NO and NC have been set at the same time.
OPE05
Sequence
Select
Option Board Selection
Error
OPE06
PG Opt Missing
Control Method Selection Error
The option board was selected as the frequency reference source by setting b1-01 to
3, but an option board isn't connected (C option).
The frequency reference selection result can be checked with U1-85.
V/f control with PG feedback was selected by setting A1-02 to 1, but a PG Speed
Control Board isn't connected.
OPE07
Analog
Selection
OPE08
OPE09
Multi-function Analog
Input Selection Error
Constant Selection
Error
PID Control Selection
Error
The same setting has been selected for the analog input selection and the PID function selection.
• H3-09 = B and H6-01 = 1
• H3-09 = C and H6-01 = 2 b1-01 (Reference Selection) is set to 4 (pulse input) and H6-01 (Pulse Train Input
Function Selection) is set to a value other than 0 (frequency reference).
A setting has been made that is not required in the current control method. Ex.: A function used only with open-loop vector control was selected for V/f control. Press the ENTER Key on the Digital Operator to display OPE fault constant (U1-34).
The following settings have been made at the same time.
• b5-01 (PID Control Method Selection) has been set to a value other than 0.
• b5-15 (PID Sleep Function Operation Level) has been set to a value other than 0.
• b1-03 (Stopping Method Selection) has been set to 2 or 3.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Display
OPE10
V/f Ptrn Setting
OPE11
Carr Freq/
On-Delay
Table 7.4 Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings (Continued)
Meaning Incorrect settings
V/f Data Setting Error
Constants E1-04, E1-06, E1-07, and E1-09 do not satisfy the following conditions:
• E1-04 (FMAX) E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) E1-09 (FMIN)
• E3-02 (FMAX) E3-04 (FA) > E3-05 (FB) E3-07 (FMIN)
Constant Setting Error
One of the following constant setting errors exists.
• C6-05 (Carrier Frequency Gain) > 6, the Carrier Frequency Lower Limit (C6-04)
> the Carrier Frequency Gain (C6-05)
• Upper/lower limit error in C6-03 to 05.
• C6-02 is 7 to E.
ERR
EEPROM
R/W Err
EEPROM Write Error
A verification error occurred when writing EEPROM.
• Try turning the power supply off and on again.
• Try setting the constants again.
7-
23
7
-24
Errors During Autotuning
The errors that can occur during autotuning are given in the following table. If an error is detected, the motor will coast to a stop and an error code will be displayed on the Digital Operator. The error contact output and alarm output will not function.
Display
Data Invalid
Minor Fault
STOP key
Motor data error
Alarm
Meaning
STOP key input
Table 7.5 Errors During Autotuning
Probable causes
There is an error in the data input for autotuning.
There is an error in the relationship between the motor output and the motor rated current.
The is an error between the no-load current setting and the input motor rated current (when autotuning for only lineto-line resistance is performed for vector control).
Corrective Actions
• Check the input data.
• Check the capacity of the Inverter and motor.
• Check the motor rated current and noload current.
A minor fault occurred during autotuning (xxx).
The STOP Key was pressed to cancel autotuning.
• Check the input data.
• Check wiring and the machine.
• Check the load.
Resistance
No-Load Current
Rated Slip
Accelerate
PG Direction
Motor Speed
I-det. Circuit
Line-to-line resistance error
No-load current error
Autotuning was not completed in the specified time.
The results of autotuning has exceeded the setting range for a user constant.
• Check the input data.
• Check motor wiring.
• If the motor is connected to the machine, disconnect it.
Rated slip error
Acceleration error
(detected only for rotational autotuning)
Motor Direction
Error
Motor speed error
(detected only for rotational autotuning)
Current detection error
The motor did not accelerate in the specified time.
There is a faulty connection between the
Inverter and PC (A or B phase) or the
Inverter and Motor (U, V, or W).
The torque reference was too high
(100%) during acceleration (for openloop vector control or flux vector control).
• Increase C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
• Increase L7-01 and L7-02 (Reverse
Torque Limits) if they are low.
• If the motor is connected to the machine, disconnect it.
• Check the PG wiring.
• Check the motor wiring.
• Check the PG rotation direction and
F1-05 (PG rotation).
• If the motor is connected to the machine, disconnect it.
• Increase C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
• Check the input data (particularly the number of PG pulses and the number of motor poles).
The current flow exceeded the motor rated current.
The detected current sign was the opposite of what it should be.
Check the current detection circuit, motor wiring, current detector, and installation methods.
There is a phase fault for U, V, or W.
Leak Inductance
Leakage inductance error
Autotuning was not completed in the specified time.
Check motor wiring.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Display
PG Open
V/f Over Setting
Saturation
Rated FLA Alm
Adjusted Slip
Value
V/f settings excessive *
Table 7.5 Errors During Autotuning (Continued)
Meaning
PG Disconnection
Detected
Probable causes
PG pulses were input when the Inverter was outputting a frequency.
The torque reference exceeded 20% and the no-load torque exceeded 70% during autotuning.
Corrective Actions
Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.
• Check and correct the settings.
• Disconnect the load from the motor.
Motor core saturation error (detected only for rotational autotuning)
*
The results of autotuning has exceeded the setting range for a user constant so a temporary setting was made for the motor core saturation coefficient.
• Check the input data.
• Check motor wiring.
• If the motor is connected to the machine, disconnect it.
Rated current setting alarm
*
The rated current is set high.
Check the input data (particularly the motor output current and motor rated current).
Adjusted slip value fell below lower limit
As a result of stationary autotuning 1, the slip value has fallen to 0.2 Hz or below.
Check the input data.
If rotational autotuning is possible, perform it. If impossible, perform stationary autotuning 2.
* Displayed after autotuning has been completed.
7-
25
7
-26
Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function
The errors that can occur when using the copy function from the Digital Operator are given in the following table. An error code will be displayed on the Digital Operator. If a Digital Operator key is pressed when an error code is being displayed, the display will be cleared and 03-01 will be displayed. The error contact output and alarm output will not function.
Function
Read
Copy
Display Meaning
CPE
ID UNMATCH
ID not matched
VAE
INV. KVA
UNMATCH
CRE
CONTROL
UNMATCH
Inverter capacity matched
Control method matched
CYE
COPY ERROR
Verify error
Table 7.6 Errors during Copy Function
PRE
READ
IMPOSSIBLE
Digital Operator write-protected
IFE
READ DATA
ERROR
Illegal read data
RDE
DATA ERROR
CSE
SUM CHECK
ERROR
Illegal write status
Checksum error
Probable causes o3-01 was set to 1 to write a constant when the Digital Operator was writeprotected (o3-02 = 0).
Corrective Actions
Set o3-02 to 1 to enable writing constants with the Digital Operator.
The read data length does not agree.
Repeat the read.
Check the Digital Operator cable.
The write data is incorrect.
Replace the Digital Operator.
An attempted write of a constant to
EEPROM on the Digital Writer failed.
A low Inverter voltage has been detected.
Repeat the read.
Replace the Digital Operator.
The Inverter product code or software number is different.
Use the copy function for the same product code and software number.
The capacity of the Inverter being copied and the capacity in the Digital
Operator are different.
Use the copy function for the same
Inverter capacity.
The control method of the Inverter being copied and the control method in the Digital Operator are different.
Use the copy function for the same control method.
The constant written to the Inverter was compared with the constant in the
Digital Operator and they were different.
Retry the copy.
The checksum in the Inverter constant area was compared with the checksum in the Digital Operator constant area and they were different.
Retry the copy.
The Inverter product code or software number is different.
Use the copy function for the same product code and software number.
Verify
VYE
VERIFY
ERROR
Verify error
CPE
ID UNMATCH
ID not matched
The Digital Operator and Inverter settings do not agree.
The Inverter product code or software number is different.
Retry the copy and verify again.
Use the copy function for the same product code and software number.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Due to parameter setting errors, faulty wiring, and so on, the drive and motor may not operate as expected when the system is started up. If that should occur, use this section as a reference and apply the appropriate measures.
If the contents of the fault are displayed, refer to
Protective and Diagnostic Functions .
If Parameters Cannot Be Set
Use the following information if an drive parameter cannot be set.
The display does not change when the Increment and Decrement Keys are pressed.
The following causes are possible.
The drive is operating (drive mode).
There are some parameters that cannot be set during operation. Turn the drive off and then make the settings.
Parameter write enable is input.
This occurs when “parameter write enable” (set value: 1B) is set for a multi-function input terminal (H1-01 to
H1-10). If the parameter write enable input is OFF, the parameters cannot be changed. Turn it ON and then set the parameters.
Passwords do not match. (Only when a password is set.)
If the parameter A1-04 (Password) and A1-05 (Password Setting) numbers are different, the parameters for the initialize mode cannot be changed. Reset the password.
If you cannot remember the password, display A1-05 (Password Setting) by pressing the Reset/Select Key and the Menu Key simultaneously while in the A1-04 display. Then reset the password. (Input the reset password in parameter A1-04.)
OPE01 through OPE11 is displayed.
The set value for the parameter is wrong. Refer to Operation Errors in this chapter and correct the setting.
CPF00 or CPF01 is displayed.
This is a Digital Operator communications error. The connection between the Digital Operator and the drive may be faulty. Remove the Digital Operator and then re-install it.
7-
27
7
-28
If the Motor Does Not Operate
Use the following information if the motor does not operate.
The motor does not operate when the RUN Key on the Digital Operator is pressed.
The following causes are possible.
IMPORTANT
If the drive is not in drive mode, it will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the Menu Key to display the drive mode, and enter the drive mode by pressing the DATA/ENTER Key. “-Rdy-” will be displayed when drive mode is entered.
The operation method setting is wrong.
If parameter b1-02 (Operation Method Selection) is set to 1 (control circuit terminal), the motor will not operate when the Run Key is pressed. Either press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key* to switch to Digital Operator operation or set b1-02 to 0 (Digital Operator).
The LOCAL/REMOTE Key is enabled by setting o2-01 to 1 and disabled by setting o2-01 to 2. It is enabled when the drive mode is entered.
INFO
The frequency reference is too low.
If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the drive will not operate.
Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.
There is a multi-function analog input setting error.
If multi-function analog input H3-09 is set to 1 (frequency gain), and if no voltage (current) is input, then the frequency reference will be zero. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are correct.
The motor does not operate when an external operation signal is input.
The following causes are possible.
The drive is not in drive mode.
If the drive is not in drive mode, it will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the MENU Key to display the drive mode, and enter the drive mode by pressing the DATA/ENTER Key. “-Rdy-” will be displayed when drive mode is entered.
Troubleshooting
The operation method selection is wrong.
If parameter b1-02 (reference selection) is set to 0 (Digital Operator), the motor will not operate when an external operation signal is input. Set b1-02 to 1 (control circuit terminal) and try again.
Similarly, the motor will also not operate if the LOCAL/REMOTE Key has been pressed to switch to Digital
Operator operation. In that case press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key* again to return to the original setting.
The LOCAL/REMOTE Key is enabled by setting o2-01 to 1 and disabled by setting o2-01 to 2. It is enabled when the drive mode is entered.
INFO
A 3-wire sequence is in effect.
The input method for a 3-wire sequence is different than when operating by forward/stop and reverse/stop (2wire sequence). When 3-wire sequence is set, the motor will not operate even when an input terminal suitable for forward run/stop and reverse run/stop is turned ON.
When using a 3-wire sequence, refer to the timing chart and input the proper signals.
When using a 2-wire sequence, set the multi-function input terminal (H1-01 through H1-10, terminals S3 to
S11) to a value other than 0.
The frequency reference is too low.
If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the drive will not operate. Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.
There is a multi-function analog input setting error.
If multi-function analog inputs H3-05 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A3 Selection) and H3-09
(Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Selection) are set to 1 (frequency gain), and if no voltage (current) is input, then the frequency reference will be zero. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are correct.
The Inverter does not operate.
When the motor does not operate, and there is no fault or alarm indication, check the items listed below to find the cause and take corrective action.
Table 7.7 Troubleshooting when Motor Does Not Operate
Probable Causes
Run command is not sent.
Descriptions
Inverter does not operate if a Run command is not sent.
Corrective Actions
If the indicator on the RUN Key is not lit, the Run Command is not sent. Input the
Run Command.
The operation method selection is wrong.
b1-02 has to be set according to the Run
Command input method to be used. b1-02 =
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (factory setting)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option board
4: Pulse train input
Set b1-02 according to the Run Command input method to be used.
The Run Command selection result can be checked with U1-86.
7-
29
7
-30
The frequency reference is too low.
Table 7.7 Troubleshooting when Motor Does Not Operate (Continued)
Probable Causes Descriptions
The frequency reference has to be set above the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency).
Corrective Actions
If the indicator on the STOP Key is flashing, check the frequency reference monitor (U1-01) and set the frequency reference above the frequency set in E1-
09.
The frequency reference selection is wrong.
b1-01 has to be set according to the frequency reference input method to be used. b1-01 =
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (factory setting)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option board
4: Pulse train input
Set b1-01 according to the frequency reference input method to be used.
The frequency reference selection result can be checked with U1-85.
The MENU Key was pressed.
The ESC Key was pressed twice.
The LOCAL/REMOTE Key was pressed.
If the MENU Key is pressed once or the
ESC Key is pressed twice, the Inverter will exit the drive mode and will not operate. If the MENU Key is pressed during operation, the Inverter will not start even if the Run
Command is sent at the next operation.
• Press the DATA/ENTER Key.
• Try turning the power supply off and on again.
• Set b8-01 (Run Command selection in programming modes) to 1(Cannot operate) to remain in the drive mode and continue operation even if the MENU
Key or ESC Key is pressed.
If the LOCAL/REMOTE Key is pressed while the Inverter is stopped, the Inverter will switch to Digital Operator operation and cannot be operated with the external input terminals.
• Press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key.
• Try turning the power supply off and on again.
• Set o2-01 (LOCAL/REMOTE Key enable/disable) to 0 (Disabled) to disable the LOCAL/REMOTE Key.
The STOP Key was pressed.
Wrong selection of a 2-wire or a 3-wire sequence.
“Reverse run prohibited” is selected.
Autotuning has just been completed.
If the STOP Key is pressed during operation, the Inverter will decelerate to a stop.
If 0 is set to one of H1-01 to H1-10, a 3wire sequence is set.
• Turn the Run Command off and then on again.
• Set o2-02 (STOP key during control circuit terminal operation) to 0 (Disabled) to disable the STOP Key.
Make sure that H1-01 to H1-10 are set to a value other than 0 to use a 2-wire sequence.
If b1-04 (Prohibition of reverse operation) is set to 1 (Reverse disabled), the motor will not start if the Reverse Run Command is sent.
Check the setting of b1-04.
The Inverter remains in the autotuning mode right after autotuning has been completed and cannot be operated even if the
Run Command is sent.
Press the MENU Key to display the drive mode on the Digital Operator and press the DATA/ENTER Key to enter the drive mode.
The motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected.
The load may be too heavy. The drive has a stall prevention function and an automatic torque boost function, but the motor responsiveness limit may be exceeded if acceleration is too rapid or if the load is too heavy.
Lengthen the acceleration time or reduce the load. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.
Troubleshooting
The motor only rotates in one direction.
“Reverse run prohibited” is selected. If b1-04 (Prohibition of Reverse Operation) is set to 1 (reverse run prohibited), the drive will not receive reverse run commands. To use both forward and reverse operation, set b1-
04 to 0.
If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed
If the motor operates in the wrong direction, the motor output wiring is faulty. When the drive T1(U), T2(V), and T3(W) are properly connected to the motor T1(U), T2(V), and T3(W), the motor operates in a forward direction when a forward run command is executed. The forward direction depends on the manufacturer and the motor type, so be sure to check the specifications.
The direction of rotation can be reversed by switching two wires among U, V, and W.
If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow
Use the following information is the motor does not output torque or if acceleration is too slow.
The torque limit has been reached.
When a torque limit has been set in parameters L7-01 to L7-04, no torque will be output beyond that limit.
This can cause the torque to be insufficient, or the acceleration time to be too long. Check to be sure that the value set for the torque limit is suitable.
If torque limits have been set for the multi-function analog input (H3-05 or H3-09 = 10 to 12 or 15), check to be sure that the analog input value is suitable.
The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low.
If the value set for L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration) is too low, the acceleration time will be too long. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
The stall prevention level during running is too low.
If the value set for L3-06 (Stall Prevention Level during Running) is too low, the speed will drop before outputting torque. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
Autotuning has not been performed for vector control
Vector control will not be perform if autotuning has not been performed. Perform autotuning separately for the motor, or set the motor parameters through calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Method Selection
(A1-02) to V/f control (0 or 1).
7-
31
7
-32
If the Motor Operates Higher Than the Reference
Use the following information if the motor operates higher than the reference.
The analog frequency reference bias setting is wrong (the gain setting is wrong).
The frequency reference bias set in parameter H3-03 is added to the frequency reference. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
A signal is being input to the frequency reference (current) terminal A1.
When 1F (frequency reference) is set for parameter H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection), a frequency corresponding to the terminal A2 input voltage (current) is added to the frequency reference. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are suitable.
If the Slip Compensation Function Has Low Speed Precision
If speed control accuracy is low for the slip compensation function, the slip compensation limit has been reached. With the slip compensation function, compensation cannot be carried out beyond the slip compensation limit set in parameter C3-03. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
If There is Low Speed Control Accuracy at High-speed Rotation in Openloop Vector Control Mode
The motor's rated voltage is high.
The drive's maximum output voltage is determined by its input voltage. (For example, if 200 Vac is input, then the maximum output voltage will be 200 Vac.) If, as a result of vector control, the output voltage reference value exceeds the drive output voltage maximum value, the speed control accuracy will decrease. Use a motor with a low rated voltage (i.e., a special motor for use with vector control), or change to flux vector control.
Troubleshooting
If Motor Deceleration is Slow
Use the following information when the motor deceleration is slow.
The deceleration time is long even when braking resistor is connected.
The following causes are possible.
“Stall prevention during deceleration enabled” is set.
When braking resistor is connected, set parameter L3-04 (Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration) to 0
(disabled) or 3 (with braking resistor). When this parameter is set to 1 (enabled, the factory setting), braking resistor does not fully function.
The deceleration time setting is too long.
Check the deceleration time setting (parameters C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, and C1-08).
Motor torque is insufficient.
If the parameters are correct and there is no overvoltage fault, then the motor's power is limited. Consider increasing the motor capacity.
The torque limit has been reached.
When a torque limit has been set in parameters L7-01 to L7-04, no torque will be output beyond that limit.
This can cause the deceleration time to be too long. Check to be sure that the value set for the torque limit is suitable.
If torque limits have been set for the multi-function analog input terminal A2 Function H3-09 (set value: 10 to
12 or 15), check to be sure that the analog input value is suitable.
If the Vertical-axis Load Drops When Brake is Applied
The sequence is incorrect. The drive goes into DC injection braking status for 0.5 seconds after deceleration is completed. (This is the factory-set default.)
To ensure that the brake holds, set frequency detection 2 (H2-01 = 5) for the multi-function contact output terminals (M1 and M2) so that the contacts will turn OFF when the output frequency is greater than L4-01 (3.0 to
5.0 Hz). (The contacts will turn ON below L4-01.)
There is hysteresis in frequency detection 2 (i.e., a frequency detection width, L4-02 = 2.0 Hz). Change the setting to approximately 0.5 Hz if there are drops during stop. Do not use the multi-function contact output run signal (H2-01 = 0) for the brake ON/OFF signal.
7-
33
7
-34
If the Motor Overheats
Take the following steps if the motor overheats.
The load is too big.
If the motor load is too heavy and the motor is used with the effective torque exceeding the motor's rated torque, the motor will overheat. Some motor rating are given for short period performance and are not continuous ratings. Reduce the load amount by either lightening the load or lengthening the acceleration/deceleration time. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.
The ambient temperature is too high.
The motor rating is determined within a particular ambient operating temperature range. The motor will burn out if it is run continuously at the rated torque in an environment in which the maximum ambient operating temperature is exceeded. Lower the motor's ambient temperature to within the acceptable ambient operating temperature range.
The withstand voltage between the motor phases is insufficient.
When the motor is connected to the drive output, a surge is generated between the drive switching and the motor coil. Normally the maximum surge voltage is three times the drive's input power supply voltage. Be sure to use a motor with a withstand voltage between the motor phases that is greater than the maximum surge voltage. In particular, when using a 380-380 V class drive, use a special motor for drives.
Autotuning has not been performed for vector control
Vector control will not perform if autotuning has not been performed. Perform autotuning, or set the motor parameters through calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Method Selection (A1-02) to V/f control (0 or 1).
If There is Noise When the Drive is Started or From an AM Radio
If noise is generated by drive switching, implement the following countermeasures:
• Change the drive's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency. This will help to some extent by reducing the amount of internal switching.
•
•
•
•
•
Install an Input Noise Filter at the drive's power supply input area.
Install an Output Noise Filter at the drive's power supply output area.
Use metal tubing. Electric waves can be shielded by metal, so encase the drive with metal (steel).
Ground the drive and motor.
Separate main circuit wiring from control wiring.
Troubleshooting
If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Drive is Run
The drive performs internal switching, so there is a certain amount of leakage current. This may cause the ground fault interrupter to operate and cut off the power supply. Change to a ground fault interrupter with a high leakage detection level (i.e., a sensitivity current of 200 mA or greater per Unit, with an operating time of
0.1 s or more), or one that incorporates high frequency countermeasures (i.e., one designed for use with drives). It will also help to some extent to change the drive's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency. In addition, remember that the leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened.
If There is Mechanical Oscillation
Use the following information when there is mechanical oscillation.
The machinery is making unusual sounds.
The following causes are possible.
There may be resonance between the mechanical system's characteristic frequency and the carrier frequency.
If the motor is running with no problems and the machinery is oscillating with a high-pitched whine, it may indicate that this is occurring. To prevent this type of resonance, adjust the carrier frequency with parameters
C6-02 to C6-05.
There may be resonance between a machine's characteristic frequency and the output frequency of the drive.
To prevent this from occurring, either use the jump frequency functions in parameters d3-01 to d3-04 or install rubber padding on the motor base to reduce oscillation.
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with open-loop vector control 1.
The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Reset the gain to a more effective level by adjusting parameters C4-
02 (torque compensation time parameter), C2-01 (S-curve Characteristic Time at Acceleration Start), and C3-
02 (Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time) in order. Lower the gain setting and raise the primary delay time setting.
Vector control will not perform if autotuning has not been performed. Perform autotuning separately for the motor, or set the motor parameters through calculations. Alternatively, change the control method selection
(A1-02) to V/f control (0 or 1).
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with V/f control.
The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Reset the gain to a more effective level by adjusting parameters C4-
02 (Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant), n1-02 (Hunting Prevention Gain), and C3-02 (Slip
Compensation Primary Delay Time) in order. Lower the gain setting and raise the primary delay time setting.
7-
35
7
-36
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with V/f w/PG control.
The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Adjust the various types of speed control loop (ASR) gain.
If the oscillation cannot be eliminated in this way, set the hunting prevention selection (parameter n1-01) to 0
(disabled) and then try adjusting the gain again.
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with flux vector control.
The gain adjustment is insufficient. Adjust the various gains for speed control (ASR). If the oscillation points overlap with those of the machine and cannot be eliminated, increase the primary delay time constant for speed control (ASR) in C5-06 and then readjust the gains.
If autotuning is not performed, proper performance cannot be achieved for vector control. Perform autotuning or set the motor parameters according to calculations.
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with PID control.
If there is oscillation or hunting during PID control, check the oscillation cycle and individually adjust P, I,
and D parameters. (Refer to page 6-102.)
Autotuning has not been performed with vector control.
Vector control will not perform if autotuning has not been performed. Perform autotuning separately for the motor, or set the motor parameters through calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Method Selection
(A1-02) to V/f control.
If the Motor Rotates Even When Drive Output is Stopped
If the motor rotates even when the drive output is stopped, the DC injection braking is insufficient. If the motor continues operating at low speed, without completely stopping, and after a deceleration stop has been executed, it means that the DC injection braking is not decelerating enough. Adjust the DC injection braking as follows:
•
•
Increase the parameter b2-02 (DC Injection Braking Current) setting.
Increase the parameter b2-04 (DC Injection Braking (initial excitation) Time at Stop) setting.
If 0 V is Detected When the Fan is Started, or Fan Stalls
Generation of 0 V (main circuit voltage) and stalling can occur if the fan is turning when it is started. The DC injection braking is insufficient when starting.
This can be prevented by slowing fan rotation by DC injection braking before starting the fan. Increase the parameter b2-03 (DC injection braking time (initial excitation) at start) setting.
Troubleshooting
If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference
Use the following information if the output frequency does not rise to the frequency reference.
The frequency reference is within the jump frequency range.
When the jump frequency function is used, the output frequency does not change within the jump frequency range. Check to be sure that the Jump Frequency (parameters d3-01 to d3-03) and Jump Frequency Width
(parameter d3-04) settings are suitable.
The frequency reference upper limit has been reached.
The output frequency upper limit is determined by the following formula:
Maximum Output Frequency (E1-04) Frequency Reference Upper Limit (d2-01) / 100
Check to be sure that the parameter E1-04 and d2-01 settings are suitable.
Acoustic Noise From the Motor
The carrier frequency is automatically reduced if a current exceeding 110% of the Inverter rated current flows while the Inverter output frequency is low. When the carrier frequency is reduced, acoustic noise form the motor will change.
If acoustic noise from the motor causes a problem, change L8-38 (Carrier frequency reduction selection) to 0
(Disabled). However, for mechanical loads that require repetitive high torque, such as with cranes, leave L8-
38 to 1 (Enabled) without changing.
Acoustic noise from the motor can be changed by changing the setting of L8-39 (Reduced carrier frequency).
(The minimum set value is 1.0 kHz for open-loop vector control.)
If Motor Overload (OL1) is Detected Even Though the Current is below the Motor Rated Current
Take the following action if a motor overload (OL1) is detected even though the current is below the motor rated current.
A general-purpose motor is being continuously operated at rated current, even in low-frequency range.
For a general-purpose motor (standard motor), cooling ability is directly proportional to the fourth root of the frequency (f 1/4 ), i.e., it is lower at lower frequencies. For this reason, the motor may overheat in the low-frequency range even at or below the motor rated current. This may cause an overload (OL1) to occur. Use a special motor designed for the purpose to continuously operate the motor at the rated current, even in the lowfrequency range.
7-
37
7
-38
The Inverter’s output voltage is larger than the input voltage.
The Inverter cannot output a voltage that is greater than the input voltage. If the output voltage reference value exceeds the Inverter’s maximum output voltage value, hunting will occur in the output current and a motor overload (OL1) may be detected, even when the current is below the motor rated current. Decrease the setting of E1-05 (Max. Voltage) or the setting of C4-01 (Torque Compensation Gain) to lower the output voltage reference value.
Maintenance and
Inspection
This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection for the drive.
Maintenance and Inspection........................................8-2
Maintenance and Inspection
Outline of Maintenance
The maintenance period of the drive is as follows:
Maintenance Period: Within 18 months of shipping from the factory or within 12 months of being delivered to the final user, whichever comes first.
Daily Inspection
Check the following items with the system in operation.
• The motor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises.
•
•
There should be no abnormal heat generation.
The ambient temperature should not be too high.
•
•
The output current value shown on the monitor displays should not be higher than normal.
The cooling fan on the bottom of the drive should be operating normally.
8
-2
Periodic Inspection
Check the following items during periodic maintenance.
Always turn OFF the power supply before beginning inspection. Confirm that the LCD and LED indicators on the front cover have all turned OFF, and then wait until at least five minutes has elapsed before beginning the inspection. Be sure not to touch terminals right after the power has been turned off. Doing so can result in electric shock.
Table 8.1 Periodic Inspections
Item
External terminals, mounting bolts, connectors, etc.
Inspection
Are all screws and bolts tight?
Are connectors tight?
Cooling fins
PCBs
Cooling fan
Power elements
Smoothing capacitor
Corrective Procedure
Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly.
Reconnect the loose connectors.
Are the fins dirty or dusty?
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the PCBs?
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the elements?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 10
4
to 58.8 x 10
4
Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm
2
).
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 10
4
to 58.8 x 10
4
Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm
2
).
Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean.
Is there any abnormal noise or vibration or has the total operating time exceeded
20,000 hours?
Replace the cooling fan.
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 10
4
to 58.8 x 10
4
Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm
2
).
Are there any irregularities, such as discoloration or odor?
Replace the capacitor or drive.
Maintenance and Inspection
Periodic Maintenance of Parts
The drive is configured of many parts, and these parts must be operating properly in order to make full use of the drive functions.
Among the electronic components, there are some that require maintenance depending on their usage conditions. In order to keep the drive operating normally over a long period of time, it is necessary to perform period inspections and replace parts according to their service life.
Periodic inspection standards vary depending the drive's installation environment and usage conditions. The drive's maintenance periods are noted below. Keep them as reference.
Cooling fan
Breaker relays
Fuses
Part
Smoothing capacitor
Aluminum capacitors on PCBs
Table 8.2 Part Replacement Guidelines
Standard Replacement Period
2 to 3 years
Replacement Method
Replace with new part.
5 years
-
10 years
5 years
Replace with new part. (Determine need by inspection.)
Determine need by inspection.
Replace with new part.
Replace with new board. (Determine need by inspection.)
Note The standard replacement period is based on the following usage conditions:
Ambient temperature:Yearly average of 30 C
Load factor: 80% max.
Operating rate: 12 hours max. per day
8-
3
8
-4
Cooling Fan Replacement Outline
200-240 V and 380-480 V Class Drives of 15 kW or Less
A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the drive.
If the drive is installed using the mounting holes on the back of the drive, the cooling fan can be replaced without removing the drive from the installation panel.
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Press in on the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows 1 and when pull the fan out in the direction of arrow 2.
2. Pull out the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the relay connector.
3. Open the fan cover on the left and right sides and remove the fan cover from the fan.
1
Airflow direction
2
1
Fan cover
Fig 8.1 Cooling Fan Replacement (Drives of 15 kW or Less)
Mounting the Cooling Fan
1. Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan. Be sure that the air flow direction indicated by the arrows above faces into the drive.
2. Connect the relay connector securely and place the relay connector and cable into the fan cover.
3. Mount the fan cover on the drive. Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on the drive.
Maintenance and Inspection
200-240 V and 380-480 V Class Drives of 18.5 kW or More
A cooling fan is attached to the top panel inside the drive.
The cooling fan can be replaced without removing the drive from the installation panel.
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Remove the terminal cover, drive cover, Digital Operator, and front cover from the front of the drive.
2. Remove the controller bracket to which the cards are mounted. Remove all cables connected to the controller.
3. Remove the cooling fan power cable connector (CN26 and CN27) from the gate driver positioned at the back of the controller.
4. Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the drive.
5. Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover.
Mounting the Cooling Fan
After attaching a new cooling fan, reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the air flow faces the top of the drive.
Controller bracket
Controller
Air flow direction
Fan cover
Connector
Gate driver
Fig 8.2 Cooling Fan Replacement (Drives of 18.5 kW or More)
8-
5
8
-6
Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card
The control circuit terminal card can be removed and mounted without disconnecting the cables.
Always confirm that the charge indicator is not lit before removing or mounting the control circuit terminal card.
IMPORTANT
Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card
1. Remove the Digital Operator and front cover.
2. Remove the connecting line connectors connected to FE and NC on the control circuit terminal card.
3. Loosen the mounting screws (1) on the left and right sides of the control terminals until they are free. (It is not necessary to remove these screws completely. They are self-rising.)
4. Pull the terminal card out sideways (in direction 2) with the screws sticking out from the card.
Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card
Reverse the removal procedure to mount the terminal card.
Confirm that the terminal circuit card and the controller properly meet at connector CN5 before pressing in on the card.
The connector pins may be bent if the card is forced into place, possibly preventing correct drive operation.
11
11
Removing and Mounting the
Control Circuit Terminal Card
Fig 8.3 Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card
Specifications
This chapter describes the basic specifications of the drive and specifications for options and peripheral devices.
Standard Drive Specifications......................................9-2
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices .......9-6
9
-2
Standard Drive Specifications
The standard drive specifications are listed by capacity in the following tables.
Specifications by Model
Specifications are given by model in the following tables.
200-240V Class
Model Number CIMR-G7U
Max. applicable motor output
(kW)
Rated input current (A)
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current (A)
Table 9.1 200-240 V Class Drives
20P4 20P7 21P5 22P2 23P7 25P5 27P5 2011 2015 2018 2022 2030 2037 2045 2055 2075 2090 2110
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11 15 18.5
22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110
3.8
1.2
3.2
7.2
2.3
6
9.6
14.4
22
3.0
8
4.6
12
6.9
32
10
40
13
59
19
79
25
88
30
106 143 176 201 246 330 394 457
37 50 61 70 85 110 140 160
Max. output voltage (V)
Max. output frequency
(Hz)
Rated voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
Allowable voltage fluctuation
18 27 34 49 66 80 96 130 160 183 224 300 358 415
3-phase; 200, 208, 220, 230, or 240 Vac
(Proportional to input voltage.)
Frequencies supported up to 400 Hz using parameter setting
3-phase, 200/208/220/230/240 Vac, 50/60 Hz
*2
+ 10%, - 15%
Allowable frequency fluctuation
±5%
Measures for power supply harmonics
DClink choke
12-phase rectification
Optional
Not possible
Built in
Possible
*3
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa motor. When selecting the actual motor and drive, be sure that the drive's rated current is applicable for the motor's rated current.
* 2. The voltage of the cooling fan for 200-240 V Class drives of 30 kW is three-phase, 200, 208, or 220 V at 50 Hz or 200, 208, 220, or 230 V at 60 Hz.
* 3. A 3-wire transformer is required on the power supply for 12-phase rectification.
Standard Drive Specifications
380-480 V Class
Model Number CIMR-G7U
Max. applicable motor output
(kW) *1
Rated input current (A)
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current (A)
Max. output voltage (V)
Max. output frequency
(Hz)
Rated voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
Allowable voltage fluctuation
Allowable frequency fluctuation
Measures for power supply harmonics
DC link choke
12-phase rectification
40P4
0.4
2.2
1.4
1.8
40P7
0.75
4.1
2.6
3.4
Table 9.2 380-480 V Class Drives
41P5
1.5
42P2
2.2
43P7
3.7
44P0
4.0
45P5
5.5
47P5
7.5
4011
11
5.8
3.7
7.4
4.7
10.8
6.9
13.2
8.4
18
11
25
16
32
21
4.8
6.2
9 11 15 21 27
3-phase; 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 Vac (Proportional to input voltage.)
Frequencies supported up to 400 Hz using parameter setting
4015
15
40
26
34
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480 Vac, 50/60 Hz
+ 10%, - 15%
Optional
Not possible
±5%
4018
18.5
46
32
42
Built in
Possible *2
Model Number CIMR-G7U
Max. applicable motor output
(kW) *1
Rated input current (A)
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current (A)
Max. output voltage (V)
Max. output frequency
(Hz)
Max. voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
Allowable voltage fluctuation
4022
22
57
40
52
4030
30
72
50
65
4037
37
4045
45
4055
55
4075
75
4090
90
4110
110
4132
132
4160
160
4185
185
88
61
107
74
141
98
182
130
215
150
264
180
297
210
332
230
407
280
80 97 128 165 195 240 270 302
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 Vac (Proportional to input voltage.)
370
Frequencies supported up to 400 Hz using parameter setting
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 Vac, 50/60 Hz
+ 10%, - 15%
4220
220
495
340
450
4300
300
666
460
605
Allowable frequency fluctuation
±5%
Measures for power supply harmonics
DC link choke
12-phase rectification
Built in
Possible *2
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa motor. When selecting the actual motor and drive, be sure that the drive's rated current is applicable for the motor's rated current.
* 2. A 3-wire transformer (optional) is required on the power supply for 12-phase rectification.
9-
3
9
-4
Common Specifications
The following specifications apply to both 200-240 V and 380-480 V Class drives.
Table 9.3 Common Specifications
Model Number
CIMR-G7U
Control method
Torque characteristics
Speed control range
Speed control accuracy *4
Speed control response
Torque limits
Torque accuracy
Frequency control range
Frequency accuracy (temperature characteristics)
Frequency setting resolution
Output frequency resolution
Overload capacity and maximum current *2
Frequency setting signal
Acceleration/Deceleration time
Specification
Sine wave PWM
Flux vector control, open-loop vector control 1 or 2, V/f control without PG, V/f control with PG (switched by parameter setting)
150%/0.3 Hz (Open-loop vector control 2), 150%/0 min
1:200 (Open-loop vector control 2), 1:1000 (Flux vector control)
±0.2% (Open-loop vector control, 25 C ± 10
0.001 Hz
1
(Flux vector control)
150% of rated output current per minute, 200% for 5 s
-10 to 10 V, 0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA, pulse train
*5 *8
*1
C), ±0.02% (Flux vector control, 25
10 Hz (Open-loop vector control 2), 30 Hz (Flux vector control)
5%
0.01 to 400 Hz *3
Digital references: ± 0.01% (-10 C to +40 C)
Analog references: ±0.1% (25 C ±10 C)
*1
C ± 10
Digital references: 0.01 Hz, Analog references: 0.03 Hz/60 Hz (11 bit with no sign)
Provided for vector control only (4 quadrant steps can be changed by parameter settings.)
C)
0.01 to 6000.0 s (4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings)
Braking torque
Main control functions
Approximately 20% (Approximately 125% with Braking Resistor option, braking transformer built into 200-240 V and 380-480
V class drives for 15 kW or less.)
*2
Restarting for momentary power loss, speed searches, overtorque detection, torque limits, 17-speed control (maximum), acceleration/deceleration time changes, S-curve acceleration/deceleration, 3-wire sequence, autotuning (rotational or stationary), dwell functions, cooling fan ON/OFF control, slip compensation, torque compensation, jump frequencies, upper and lower limits for frequency references, DC braking for starting and stopping, high-slip braking, PID control (with sleep function), energy-saving control, MODBUS communications (RS-485/422, 19.2 kbps maximum), fault reset, function copying, droop control, torque control, speed/torque control switching, etc.
UL recognized protection by electronic thermal overload relay.
Motor protection
Instantaneous overcurrent protection
Fuse blown protection
Overload protection
Overvoltage protection
Undervoltage protection
Momentary power loss ridethrough *7
Cooling fin overheating
Stall prevention
Grounding protection
*6
Charge indicator
Ambient operating temperature
Ambient operating humidity
Storage temperature
Application site
Altitude
Vibration
Stops at approx. 200% of rated output current.
Stops for fuse blown.
150% of rated output current per minute, 200% for 5 s
200-240V Class drive: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 410 V.
380-480V Class drive: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 820 V.
200-240V Class drive: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 190 V.
380-480V Class drive: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 380 V.
Stops for 15ms or more.
By selecting the momentary power loss method, operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 s.
Protection by thermistor.
Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration, or running.
Protection by electronic circuits.
Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approx. 50 V or more.
-10 C to 40 C (Enclosed wall-mounted type)
10 C to 45 C (Open chassis type)
95% max. (with no condensation)
- 20 C to + 60 C (short-term temperature during transportation)
Indoor (no corrosive gas, dust, etc.)
1000 m max.
Tolerance for vibration frequency less than 20 Hz, 9.8 m/s 2 max.; 20 to 50 Hz, 2 m/s 2 max
* 1. Rotational autotuning must be performed to ensure obtaining the specifications given for flux vector control and open-loop vector control 1 and 2.
* 2. When connecting a Braking Resistor or Braking Resistor Unit, set L3-04 (Stall prevention selection during deceleration) to 0 (disabled). Stopping may not be possible in the specified deceleration time if this function is not disabled.
* 3. The maximum output frequency for open-loop vector control 2 is 66 Hz (for PRG 103 , 132 Hz).
Standard Drive Specifications
* 4. The speed control accuracy depends on the installation conditions and type of motor used. Contact your Yaskawa representative for details.
* 5. Derating is required for applications that use repetitive loads. (Refer to page 10-6 for details.)
* 6. A ground fault is detected if it occurs while the motor is running. Ground fault protection may not be available in the following cases.
A ground fault with low resistance which occurs in motor cables or terminals.
A ground fault occurs when the power is turned ON.
* 7. Attach a Backup Capacitor Unit for Momentary Power Loss if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 200 V/400 V Class
Inverters with outputs of 0.4 to 7.5 kW.
* 8. If running at a speed of 6 Hz or less, the overload protection function can operate even if running within 150% of rated output current per minute.
* 9. For the 400 V Class, there are limitations on the maximum output frequency depending on the setting of the carrier frequency and capacity.
The maximum output frequency for 400 V Class, 90 to 110 kW is 250 Hz. The maximum output frequency for 400 V Class, 132 to 300 kW is 166 Hz.
9-
5
9
-6
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices
The following options and peripheral devices can be used for the drive. Select them according to the application.
Table 9.4 Options and Peripheral Devices
Purpose
Protect drive wiring
Name
MCCB or Ground
Fault Interrupter *1
Model (Code)
NF
Prevents burning when a Braking Resistor is used.
Contains switching surge
Magnetic Contactor
Surge Absorber
HI J
DCR2
Isolates I/O signals
Improve the input power factor of the drive
Isolator
DC Reactor
AC Reactor
Input Noise Filter
Reduce the affects of radio and control device noise
Finemet zerophase reactor to reduce radio noise
*2
Output Noise Filter
Braking Resistor
Enable stopping the machine in a set time
Braking Resistor
Unit
Braking Unit
VS Operator
(small plastic
Operator)
DGP
UZDA
UZBA
(Single phase) LNFB
(3 phase) LNFD HF
F6045GB
(FIL001098)
F11080GB
(FIL001097)
LF-o
ERF-150WJ
(R00 )
LKEB
(75600-K 0)
CDBR
(72600-R 0)
JVOP-95•
(73041-0905X )
Operates the drive externally
VS Operator
(Standard steelplate Operator)
JVOP-96•
(73041-0906X )
Digital Operator
Connection Cable
1 m cable: (72606-
WV001)
3 m cable: (72606-
WV003)
Controls drive system
VS System Module
Provides drive
momentary power loss recovery time
Set/monitor frequencies and voltages externally.
Momentary Power
Loss Recovery
Unit
P00 0
(73600-P00 0)
Frequency Meter DCF-6A
Frequency Setter RV30YN20S (2 k )
Frequency Setter
Knob
CM-3S
Output Voltmeter SCF-12NH
Correct frequency reference input, frequency meter, ammeter scales
Variable Resistor
Board for Frequency Reference
Frequency Meter
Scale Correction
Resistor
JGSM-
2 k
20 k
(ETX003270)
(ETX003120)
(RH000850)
Descriptions
Always connect a breaker to the power supply line to protect drive wiring. Use a ground fault interrupter suitable for high frequencies.
Install to prevent the braking resistor from burning out when one is used. Always attach a surge absorber to the coil.
Absorbs surge from the magnetic contactor and control relays. Connect surge absorbers to all magnetic contactors and relays near the drive.
Isolates the I/O signals of the drive and is effective against inductive noise.
Used to improve the input power factor of the drive. All drives of 18.5 kW or higher contain built-in DC reactors.
These are optional for drives of 15 kW or less. Install DC and AC reactors for applications with a large power supply capacity (600 kVA or higher).
Reduces noise coming into the drive from the power supply line and to reduce noise flowing from the drive into the power supply line. Connect as close to the drive as possible.
Reduces noise from the line that sneaks into the drive input power system. Insert as close to the drive as possible.
Can be use on both the input side and output side.
Reduces noise generated by the drive. Connect as close to the drive as possible.
Consumes the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to reduce deceleration time (use rate: 3% ED).
Consumes the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to reduce deceleration time (use rate: 10% ED).
Used with a Braking Resistor Unit to reduce the deceleration time of the motor.
Allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF operation control to be performed by analog references from a remote location (50 m max.).
Frequency counter specifications: 60/120 Hz, 90/180Hz
Allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF operation control to be performed by analog references from a remote location (50 m max.).
Frequency counter specifications: 75 Hz, 150 Hz, 220 Hz
Extension cable to use a Digital Operator remotely.
Cable length: 1 m or 3 m
A system controller that can be match to the automatic control system to produce an optimum system configuration.
Handles momentary power losses for the control power supply for models 2.2 kW or less (maintains power for
2 s).
Devices to set or monitor frequencies externally.
Measures the output voltage externally and designed for use with a PWM drive.
Connected to the control circuit terminals to input a frequency reference.
Calibrates the scale of frequency meters and ammeters.
Power supply
MCCB or ground fault interrupter
Magnetic contactor
AC reactor to improve power factor
Zero phase reactor Braking resistor
Input-line noise filter
Drive
VS Operator
Frequency meter
Ground
Output-line noise filter
Ground
DC reactor
Motor
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices
* 1. Use a ground fault interrupter with a current sensitivity of 200 mA minimum and an operating time of 0.1 s minimum to prevent operating errors. The interrupter must be suitable for high-frequency operation.
Example: NV series by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation (manufactured in or after 1988)
EG, SG series by Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. (manufactured in or after 1984)
* 2. The finement zero-phase reactor is manufactured by Hitachi Metals.
9-
7
9
-8
Built-in
(connect
to connector)
Type
The following Option Cards are available .
Table 9.5 Option Cards
Name
Code
Number
Function
Analog
Reference
Card
AI-14U
73600-
C001X
Enables high-precision, high-resolution setting of analog speed references.
• Input signal ranges: 0 to 10 V (20 k ), 1 channel
4 to 20 mA (250 ), 1 channel
• Input resolution: 14-bit (1/16384)
Speed
(Frequency)
Reference
Option
Cards
Analog
Reference
Card
AI-14B
Digital
Reference
Card
DI-08
Digital
Reference
Card
DI-16H2
Analog
Monitor Card
AO-08
Monitoring
Optional
Cards
Analog
Monitor Card
AO-12
Digital
Output Card
DO 08
73600-
C002X
73600-
C003X
73600-
C016X
73600-
D001X
73600-
D002X
73600-
D004X
Enables high-precision, high-resolution setting of analog speed references.
• Input signal ranges: 0 to ±10 V (20 k )
4 to 20 mA (500 ), 3 channels
• Input resolution: 13-bit + sign (1/8192)
Enables 8-bit digital setting of speed references.
• Input signal: 8-bit binary
2-digit BCD + sign signal + set signal
• Input voltage: +24 V (isolated)
• Input current: 8 mA
Enables 16-bit digital setting of speed references.
• Input signal: 16-bit binary
4-digit BCD + sign signal + set signal
• Input voltage: +24 V (isolated)
• Input current: 8 mA
With 16-bit/12-bit switch.
Converts analog signals to monitor the drive's output status
(output frequency, output current, etc.) to absolute values and outputs them.
• Output resolution: 8 bits (1/256)
• Output voltage: 0 to +10 V (not insulated)
• Output channels: 2 channels
Output analog signals to monitor the drive's output status (output frequency, output current, etc.).
• Output resolution: 11 bits (1/2048) + sign
• Output voltage: -10 to +10 V (not insulated)
• Output channels: 2 channels
Outputs isolated digital signals to monitor the drives operating status (alarm signals, zero speed detection, etc.)
Output form: Photocoupler output, 6 channels
(48 V, 50 mA max.)
Relay contact outputs, 2 channels
(250 Vac: 1 A max., 30Vdc: 1 A max.)
2C-Relay
Output Card
DO 02C
73600-
D007X
Provides two multi-function outputs (DPDT relay contacts) in addition to those provided by the drive.
Document
Number
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices
Type
Built-in
(connect to connector)
PG
Speed
Control
Cards
Name
PG A2
PG
PG
-
-
B2
D2
PG-X2
Table 9.5 Option Cards (Continued)
Code
Number
Function
73600-
A012X
Used for V/f with PG control. Speed feedback is performed using the PG attached to the motor to compensate for speed fluctuations caused by slipping.
• A-phase pulse (single pulse) input (voltage, complementary, open-collector input)
• Maximum input frequency: 32767 Hz
• Pulse monitor output: +12 V, 20 mA
(PG power supply output: +12 V, 200 mA max.)
73600-
A013X
• Used for V/f control.
• A-, B-phase input (complimentary input)
• Maximum input frequency: 32767 Hz
• Pulse monitor output: Open-collector
(PG power supply output: +12 V, 200 mA max.)
73600-
A014X
73600-
A015X
• Differential input.
• A-phase pulse (differential pulse) input, for V/f control
• Maximum input frequency: 300 kHz
• Input: Conforms to RS-422
• Pulse monitor output: RS-422
(PG power supply output: +5 or +12 V, 200 mA max.)
• A-, B-, Z-phase pulse (differential pulse) input
• Maximum input frequency: 300 kHz
• Input: Conforms to RS-422
• Pulse monitor output: RS-422
(PG power supply output: +5 or +12 V, 200 mA max.)
Document
Number
-
-
-
-
9-
9
9
-10
Type Name
DeviceNet
Communications Interface Card
SI-N
ProfiBus-DP
Communications Interface Card
SI-P
Built-in
(connected to connector)
Communications
Option
Cards
InterBus-S
Communications Interface Card
SI-R
CANopen
Communications Interface Card
SI-S
ControlNet
Communications Interface Card
SI-U
CC-Link
Communications Interface Card
SI-C
* Under development.
Table 9.5 Option Cards (Continued)
Code
Number
Function
73600-
C021X
Used to communicate with drive from a host computer using
DeviceNet communications to start/stop drive operation, read/ set parameters, and read/set monitor parameters (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
Document
Number
-
73600-
C022X
*
*
*
73600-
C032X
Used to communicate with drive from a host computer using
ProfiBus-DP communications to start/stop drive operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor parameters (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
Used to communicate with drive from a host computer using
InterBus-S communications to start/stop drive operation, read/ set parameters, and read/set monitor parameters (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
Used to communicate with drive from a host computer using
CANopen communications to start/stop drive operation, read/ set parameters, and read/set monitor parameters (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
Used to communicate with drive from a host computer using
ControlNet communications to start/stop drive operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor parameters (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
Used to communicate with drive from a host computer using
CC-Link communications to start/stop drive operation, read/ set parameters, and read/set monitor parameters (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
-
-
-
-
-
Appendix
This chapter provides precautions for the drive, motor, and peripheral devices and also provides lists of parameters.
Varispeed G7 Control Modes ....................................10-2
Drive Application Precautions....................................10-7
Motor Application Precautions .................................10-10
Conformance to UL and CE Markings .....................10-12
UL Markings..............................................................10-18
Varispeed G7 Control Modes
Details of the Varispeed G7-Series drive control modes and their features are provided in this section.
10
-2
Control Modes and Features
Varispeed G7-Series drives support the following five control modes, allowing the selection of a control mode
to suit the required purpose. Table 10.1
provides an overview of the control modes and their features.
Control Mode
Parameter Setting
Basic Control
Main Applications
PG Speed Control Card
(Option)
Speed Control
Range
*1
Basic
Performance
Speed Control
Accuracy
*2
Speed
Response
*3
Maximum
Output Frequency
Starting
Torque
*4
Table 10.1 Overview and Features of Control Modes
V/f Control without PG
A1-02 = 0
V/f Control with PG
A1-02 = 1
Open-loop Vector Control 1
A1-02 = 2
(factory setting)
Flux Vector
Control
A1-02 = 3
Open-loop Vector Control 2
A1-02 = 4
Voltage/frequency fixed ratio control
Voltage/frequency fixed ratio control with speed compensation using a
PG
Current vector control without a PG
Current vector control with a PG
Current vector control without a PG using a high-performance magnetic flux and speed estimator
(software)
Variable speed control, particularly for control of multiple motors with a single drive and for replacing existing drives
Applications requiring high-precision speed control using a PG on the machine side
Variable speed control, applications requiring high performance without a PG on the motor side, and for replacing openloop vector control of the previous VS-
616G5.
Not required.
Required (PG-A2 or PG-D2).
Not required.
Very high-performance control with a PG on the motor side (simple servodrives, high-precision speed control, torque control, and torque limiting)
Very high-performance control without a PG on the motor side
(such as simple servodrives, torque control, and torque limiting), and function applications between flux vector and open-loop vector 1 control.
Required (PG-B2 or PG-X2).
Not required.
1:40
2 to 3%
Approx. 1 Hz
400 Hz
150%/3 Hz
1:40
0.03%
Approx. 1 Hz
400 Hz
150%/3 Hz
1:100
0.2%
5 Hz
400 Hz
150%/1 Hz
1:1000
0.02%
40 Hz
400 Hz
150%/0 min
1
1:200
0.2%
10 Hz
60 Hz
*13
*13
150%/0.3 Hz
Application
Functions
Autotuning
Line-to-line resistance (Normally not required.)
Line-to-line resistance (Normally not required.)
Rotational autotuning, stationary autotuning, stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only
Rotational autotuning, stationary autotuning, sta5 ionary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only
Rotational autotuning, stationary autotuning, stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only
Varispeed G7 Control Modes
Control Mode
Torque Limiting
*5
Torque Control
*6
Table 10.1 Overview and Features of Control Modes
V/f Control without PG
No
V/f Control with PG
No
Open-loop Vector Control 1
Yes (except during acceleration/deceleration, below minimum frequency, or during reverse rotation)
Flux Vector
Control
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Open-loop Vector Control 2
Yes (except below minimum frequency and during reverse rotation)
Yes
Yes (except for
0 min
1
and during reverse rotation)
Yes (except below minimum frequency and during reverse rotation)
Yes (Except below minimum frequency and during reverse rotation)
Droop Control
*7
Application
Functions
(Cont.)
Zero-servo
Control
*8
Speed Estimation (Detection)
Instantaneous
Speed
Search
*9
Automatic
Energy-saving
Control
*10
High-slip
Braking
*11
Feed Forward
Control
*12
No
Yes (speed and rotation direction estimation)
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes (speed detection and rotation direction estimation)
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes (speed and rotation direction estimation)
Yes
(Under development)
No
Yes
Yes (speed and rotation direction detection)
Yes
(Under development)
Yes
No
Yes (speed and rotation direction estimation)
Yes
(Under development)
Yes
* 1. The variable speed control range. (For continuous operation, the motor's temperature rise must be considered.)
* 2. The speed deviation in relation to the maximum speed with a rated load and when the load is stable. (For open-loop vector control 1 and 2, the motor temperature must be 25 °C ± 10 °C.)
* 3. The speed response guidelines indicating the extent of the motor's actual speed gain in proportion to the speed reference, which changes in a sinusoidal wave form, within a range where motor torque does not become saturated.
* 4. A guideline for the motor torque that can be generated when started at a low speed and its output frequency (rotations) at that time.
* 5. This function limits the maximum motor torque to protect the machine and the load.
* 6. This function directly controls the amount of torque being generated at the motor and its rotation direction, e.g., to control force.
* 7. This function controls the amount of motor slip that occurs to prevent mechanical shock, when replacing a torque motor, etc.
* 8. This function performs simple positioning control (servo lock), without using an external positioning control device.
* 9. This function instantaneously estimates (or detects) the speed and rotation direction of a coasting motor, and quickly starts it without subjecting it to shock.
* 10.This function automatically adjusts the voltage applied to the motor to optimize the motor's efficiency with light loads.
* 11.This function improves the deceleration time without using a braking resistor by making the motor winding absorb regenerative power. As a standard, this function is effective with a motor running on 160 kW or less with a high-inertia load.
* 12.This function enables proportional gain in relation to changes in the speed reference, even for low rigidity (corresponds to the servo's model gain control).
* 13.Set the maximum output frequency (E1-04) for open-loop vector control 2 to a value not exceeding 60 Hz. Use within a speed control range of 1:10 for torque control on the regenerative side.
10-
3
10
-4
Application Function Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the application functions.
• Perform rotational autotuning during trial operation whenever it is possible to separate the motor and
machine. To achieve the characteristics of vector control described in Table 10.1
adjusted within a range that the machine will not vibrate after rotational autotuning has been performed.
•
•
With vector control, the motor and drive must be connected 1:1. Vector control is not possible when multiple motors are connected to a single drive. Select drive capacity so the rated motor current is 50% to 100% of the rated drive current.
For estimated speed searching, the motor and drive must be connected 1:1. The speed search must be performed at a frequency of 130 Hz or less and with a motor with the same number of frames as or one frame less than the drive capacity.
•
•
•
During high-slip braking, motor loss increases, so use a high-slip braking frequency of 5% ED or less, and a braking time of 90 seconds or less. Once high-slip braking has started, the motor cannot be restarted until it has stopped.
Feed forward control is a function that improves the proportional gain of the motor speed in relation to the change in the speed reference. Adjust the response to interference loads using the speed controller (ASR) parameters.
The torque limit function will not operate during acceleration or deceleration (during soft start transition) when using a control mode such as open-loop vector control 1. Even if the motor speed drops due to torque limiting while set to a fixed speed, the speed will not fall below the minimum frequency and the motor will not slip into reverse rotation. These conditions also apply to open-loop vector control 2 and other application functions.
Precautions When Using Open-loop Vector Control 2
Using open-loop vector control 2 (A1-02=4) gives a higher level of control than conventional open-loop vector control (A1-02=2). When using open-loop vector control 2, pay attention to the points listed below. For a comparison with other control modes, refer to
Table 10.1 Overview and Features of Control Modes .
General Precautions
• The maximum possible setting for the maximum output frequency (E1-04) is 60 Hz.
• Be sure to perform autotuning. Refer to the precautions given under Autotuning in
.
Precaution on Regeneration
With speed control, in the low speed range (approx. 6 Hz max.), the speed increases for large regenerative loads, and it may not be possible to maintain speed accuracy. Examples are given below for forward rotation at frequencies of 0.3, 1, 3, 6, and 60 Hz.
Varispeed G7 Control Modes
Load torque (%)
200
100
0
-100
0.3
1
-200
3 6 60
Driving torque
Speed (Hz)
Regenerative torque
With torque control, operate within a speed control range of 1:10 on the regenerative side.
Precautions on Setting Parameters
If the parameters are not set properly, performance may be adversely affected.
• If there is a possibility of starting with the motor already rotating, enable the speed search function (b3-
01=1).
•
•
When lowering a torque limit (L7the system.
), set it to as high a value as possible within the range allowed by
If torque limit acceleration is performed, or if the motor slips at the torque limit causing a CF (control fault), increase n4-08 (proportional gain of speed estimator) in steps of 5 until acceleration and deceleration are performed smoothly. When n4-08 is increased, the torque reference (U1-09) may oscillate. If so, increase C5-06 (ASR primary delay time) by about 0.050 s.
Precaution on Torque Accuracy
To ensure torque accuracy within the speed control range of 1:10 when the motor is operated by itself at the minimum frequency and the torque reference (U1-09) is higher than in the medium- and high-speed ranges, increase the setting of the torque adjustment gain (n4-17) and adjust the torque reference so that it is about the same as that in the medium and high speed ranges.
10-
5
Control Modes and Applications
10
-6
V/f Control without PG (A1-02 = 0)
V/f control without a PG is suitable for applications where multiple motors are operated with a single drive, such as with multi-motor drives.
(Thermal relay)
Inverter M1
M2
M3
Fig 10.1
V/f Control with PG (A1-02 = 1)
V/f control with a PG enables precise control of machine line speed. Speed control using the speed feedback of the machine shaft is possible in this mode.
Conveyor
Inverter
M
PG
PG Speed Control Card
(PG-A2 or PG-D2)
Fig 10.2
Flux Vector Control (A1-02 = 2 or 4)
Flux vector control enables the use of high-performance drives without a speed detector. PG (pulse generator) wiring is not required.
Inverter
M
Fig 10.3
Vector Control with PG (A1-02 = 3)
Vector control with a PG is suitable for applications using high-precision drives with PG feedback. High-precision positioning, zero-speed control, and torque control are possible with this mode.
Inverter M
PG
PG Speed Control Card
(PG-B2 or PG-X2)
Fig 10.4
Drive Application Precautions
Drive Application Precautions
This section provides precautions for selecting, installing, setting, and handling drives.
Selection
Observe the following precautions in selecting drive.
Installing Reactors
A large peak current will flow in the power input circuit when the drive is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kVA or higher) or when switching a phase capacitor. Excessive peak current can destroy the convertor section. To prevent this, install a DC or AC reactor (optional) to improve the power supply power factor.
DC reactors are built into 200-240 V class drives of 18.5 to 110 kW and 380-480 V class drives of 18.5 to 300 kW.
If a thyristor convertor, such as a DC drive, is connected in the same power supply system, connect a DC or
AC reactor regardless of the power supply conditions shown in the following diagram.
Power supply capacity (kVA)
DC or AC reactor
Required
DC or AC reactor
Not required
Drive capacity (kVA)
Fig 10.5
Drive Capacity
When connecting special motors or multiple motors in parallel to drive, select the drive capacity so that the rated output current of the drive is 1.1 times the sum of all the motor rated currents.
Initial Torque
The startup and acceleration characteristics of the motor are restricted by the overload current ratings of the drive that is driving the motor. The torque characteristics are generally less than those required when starting using a normal commercial power supply. If a large initial torque is required, select drive with a somewhat larger capacity or increase the capacity of both the motor and the drive.
Emergency Stop
Although the drive's protective functions will stop operation when a fault occurs, the motor will not stop immediately. Always provide mechanical stop and protection mechanisms on equipment requiring an emergency stop.
Options
Terminals B1, B2, , 1, 2, 3 are for connecting only the options specifically provided by
Yaskawa. Never connect any other devices to these terminals.
10-
7
10
-8
Installation
Observe the following precautions when installing drive.
Installation in Enclosures
Either install the drive in a clean location not subject to oil mist, airborne matter, dust, and other contaminants, or install the drive in a completely enclosed panel. Provide cooling measures and sufficient panel space so that the temperature surrounding the drive does not go beyond the allowable temperature. Do not install the drive on wood or other combustible materials.
Installation Direction
Mount the drive vertically to a wall or other horizontal surface.
Settings
Observe the following precautions when making settings for drive.
Upper Limits
The Digital Operator can be used to set high-speed operation up to a maximum of 400 Hz (depends on the carrier frequency). Incorrect settings can be dangerous. Use the maximum frequency setting functions to set upper limits.
(The maximum output frequency is factory-set to 60 Hz.)
DC Injection Braking
The motor can overheat if the DC injection braking voltage or braking time is set to a large value.
Acceleration/Deceleration Times
The motor's acceleration and deceleration times are determined by the torque generated by the motor, the load torque, and the load's inertial moment (GD 2 /4). If the stall prevention functions are activated during acceleration or deceleration, increase the acceleration or deceleration time. The stall prevention functions will increase the acceleration or deceleration time by the amount of time the stall prevention function is active.
To reduce the acceleration or deceleration times, increase the capacity of the motor and drive.
Drive Application Precautions
Handling
Observe the following precautions when wiring or performing maintenance for drive.
Wiring Check
The drive will be internally damaged if the power supply voltage is applied to output terminal U/T1, V/T2, or
W/T3 . Check wring for any mistakes before supplying power. Check all wiring and sequences carefully.
Magnetic Contactor Installation
Do not start and stop operation frequently with a magnetic contactor installed on the power supply line. Doing so can cause the drive to malfunction. Do not turn the drive ON and OFF with a magnetic contactor more than one time every 30 minutes.
Maintenance and Inspections
After turn OFF the main circuit power supply, always confirm that the CHARGE indicator is not lit before performing maintenance or inspections. The voltage remaining in the capacitor may cause electric shock.
10-
9
Motor Application Precautions
This section provides precautions for motor application.
10
-10
Using the Drive for an Existing Standard Motor
When a standard motor is operated with the drive, power loss is slightly higher than when operated with a commercial power supply. Observe the following precautions when using drive for an existing standard motor.
Low Speed Ranges
Cooling effects diminish in the low-speed range, resulting in an increase in the motor temperature. Therefore, the motor torque should be reduced in the low-speed range whenever using a motor not made by Yaskawa. If
100% torque is required continuously at low speed, consider using a special drive or vector motor.
Installation Withstand Voltage
If the input voltage is high (440 V or higher) or the wiring distance is long, the motor insulation voltage must be considered. Contact your Yaskawa representative for details.
High-speed Operation
When using the motor at a high speed (60 Hz or more), problems may arise in dynamic balance and bearing durability. Contact your Yaskawa representative for details.
Torque Characteristics
The motor may require more acceleration torque when the motor is operated with the drive than when operated with a commercial power supply. Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be used with the motor to set a proper V/f pattern.
Vibration
The drive uses a high carrier PWM to reduce motor vibration. (A parameter can be set to select low carrier,
PWM modulation control as well.) When the motor is operated with the drive, motor vibration is almost the same as when operated with a commercial power supply.
Motor vibration may, however, become greater in the following cases.
Resonance with the Natural Frequency of the Mechanical System
Take special care when a machine that has been operated at a constant speed is to be operated in variable speed mode. If resonance occurs, install vibration-proof rubber on the motor base or use the frequency jump function to skip any frequency resonating the machine.
Imbalanced Rotor
Take special care when the motor is operated at a higher speed (60 Hz or more).
Noise
Noise varies with the carrier frequency. At high carrier frequencies, the noise is almost the same when the motor is operated with a commercial power supply. Motor noise, however, becomes louder when the motor is operated at a speed higher than the rated speed (60 Hz).
Motor Application Precautions
Using the Drive for Special Motors
Observe the following precautions when using a special motor.
Pole-changing Motor
The rated input current of pole-changing motors differs from that of standard motors. Select, therefore, an appropriate drive according to the maximum input current of the motor to be used. Before changing the number of poles, always make sure that the motor has stopped. Otherwise, the overvoltage protective or overcurrent protective mechanism will be actuated, resulting in an error.
Submersible Motor
The rated input current of submersible motors is higher than that of standard motors. Therefore, always select drive by checking its rated output current. When the distance between the motor and drive is long, use a cable thick enough to connect the motor and drive to prevent motor torque reduction.
Explosion-proof Motor
When an explosion-proof motor is to be used, it must be subject to an explosion-proof test in conjunction with the drive. This is also applicable when an existing explosion-proof motor is to be operated with the drive.
Since the drive itself is, however, not explosion-proof, always install it in a safe place.
Gearmotor
The speed range for continuous operation differs according to the lubrication method and motor manufacturer.
In particular, continuous operation of an oil-lubricated motor in the low speed range may result in burning. If the motor is to be operated at a speed higher than 60 Hz, consult with the manufacturer.
Synchronous Motor
A synchronous motor is not suitable for drive control. If a group of synchronous motors is individually turned
ON and OFF, synchronism may be lost.
Single-phase Motor
Do not use drive for a single-phase motor. The motor should be replaced with a 3-phase motor.
Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts, and Chains)
If an oil-lubricated gearbox or speed reducer is used in the power transmission mechanism, oil lubrication will be affected when the motor operates only in the low speed range. The power transmission mechanism will make noise and experience problems with service life and durability if the motor is operated at a speed higher than 60 Hz.
10-
11
10
-12
Conformance to UL and CE Markings
Information regarding conformance to UL and CE markings is provided in this section.
CE Markings
CE markings indicate conformance to safety and environmental standards that apply to business transactions
(including production, imports, and sales) in Europe. There are unified European standards for mechanical products (Machine Directive), electrical products (Low Voltage Directive), and electrical noise (EMC Directive). CE markings are required for business transactions in Europe (including production, imports, and sales).
The Varispeed G7-Series drives bear CE markings indicating conformance to the Low Voltage Directive and the EMC Directive.
•
•
Low Voltage Directive: 73/23/EEC
93/68/EEC
EMC Directive: 89/336/EEC
92/31/EEC
93/68/EEC
Machinery and installations that incorporate the drive are also subject to CE markings. It is ultimately the responsibility of customers making products incorporating the drive to attach CE markings to the finished products. The customer must confirm that the finished products (machines or installations) conform to the
European Standards.
Requirements for Conformance to CE Markings
Low Voltage Directive
Varispeed G7-Series drives satisfy testing for conformance to the Low Voltage Directive under the conditions described in European Standard EN50178.
Requirements for Conformance to the Low Voltage Directive
Varispeed G7-Series drives must satisfy the following conditions in order to conform to the Low Voltage
Directive.
•
•
•
Area of Use - Install this product in a location with Overvoltage Category III and pollution degree 2 or less as specified in IEC/CE 60664.
Input fuses:
For details on selecting fuses, refer to
Table 10.2 Selection Requirements for Input Fuses with Examples .
With drives CIMR-G7U2018 to 2110 and CIMR-G7U4018 to 4300, an enclosure preventing foreign matter from entering from the top or front sides is required (IP4X or higher: panel installation).
Conformance to UL and CE Markings
Input Fuses
In order to conform to the Low Voltage Directive or UL, fuses must be provided for inputs. Use UL-compatible input fuses with ratings higher than the voltages and currents, and fusing I 2 t specifications within the ranges shown in the table below.
Voltage
Class
200-240
V class
Drive Model
Number
CIMR-G7U
Table 10.2 Selection Requirements for Input Fuses with Examples
Selection Requirements Input Fuse (Examples)
Voltage
(V)
Current
(A)
Fusing I
(A 2 sec)
2 t
Model Number Manufacturer Ratings
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
23P7
25P5
27P5
2011
2015
2018
2022
2030
2037
2045
2055
2075
2090
2110
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
90
120
140
160
220
270
300
370
500
600
700
12 to 25
23 to 55
34 to 98
82 to 220
220 to 610
290 to 1300
450 to 5000
1200 to 7200
1800 to 7200
870 to 16200
1500 to 23000
2100 to 19000
2700 to 55000
4000 to 55000
7100 to 64000
11000 to 64000
13000 to 83000
13000 to 83000
A60Q12-2
CR2LS-20/UL
CR2LS-30/UL
CR2LS-50/UL
CR2LS-75/UL
CR2LS-75/UL
CR2LS-100/UL
CR2L-125/UL
CR2L-150/UL
CR2L-150/UL
CR2L-200/UL
CR2L-260/UL
CR2L-300/UL
CR2L-300/UL
CR2L-400/UL
CR2L-500/UL
CR2L-600/UL
A50P700-4
FERRAZ
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FERRAZ
250 V
300 A
250 V
350 A
250 V
450 A
250 V
600 A
250 V
600 A
250 V
150 A
250 V
150 A
250 V
200 A
250 V
260 A
250 V
75 A
250 V
75 A
250 V
100 A
250 V
125 A
600 V
12 A
600 V
12 A
250 V
20 A
250 V
30 A
250 V
50 A
Fusing
I
2 t
(A
2 sec)
17
27
60
200
560
560
810
1570
2260
2260
4010
7320
9630
9630
24000
40000
52000
49000
10-
13
10
-14
Voltage
Class
380-480
V class
Drive Model
Number
CIMR-G7U
Table 10.2 Selection Requirements for Input Fuses with Examples
Selection Requirements Input Fuse (Examples)
Voltage
(V)
Current
(A)
Fusing I
(A
2 sec)
2 t
Model Number Manufacturer Ratings
40P4
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P7
44P0
45P5
47P5
4011
4015
4018
4022
4030
4037
4045
4055
4075
4090
4110
4132
4160
4185
4220
4300
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
5
10
10
15
20
30
40
50
50
60
70
90
110
140
160
220
280
330
400
450
540
620
750
1000
16 to 660
19 to 660
46 to 660
78 to 660
110 to 660
220 to 660
240 to 900
320 to 900
1000 to 1800
1500 to 4100
530 to 5800
1130 to 5800
1700 to 5800
2000 to 13000
3000 to 13000
6800 to 55000
9000 to 55000
12000 to 23000
18000 to 64000
28000 to 250000
40000 to 250000
43000 to 400000
63000 to 400000
94000 to 920000
CR6L-20/UL
CR6L-20/UL
CR6L-30/UL
CR6L-50/UL
CR6L-50/UL
CR6L-50/UL
CR6L-50/UL
CR6L-75/UL
CR6L-100/UL
CR6L-150/UL
CR6L-150/UL
CR6L-150/UL
CR6L-150/UL
CR6L-200/UL
CR6L-200/UL
CR6L-300/UL
CR6L-300/UL
A70P400-4
A70P450-4
A70P600-4
A70P700-4
A70P900-4
A70P900-4
A70P1000-4
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FUJI
FERRAZ
FERRAZ
FERRAZ
FERRAZ
FERRAZ
FERRAZ
FERRAZ
600 V
150 A
600 V
200 A
600 V
200 A
600 V
300 A
600 V
100 A
600 V
150 A
600 V
150 A
600 V
150 A
600 V
50 A
600 V
50 A
600 V
50 A
600 V
75 A
600 V
20 A
600 V
20 A
600 V
30 A
600 V
50 A
700 V
700 A
700 V
900 A
700 V
900 A
700 V
1000 A
600 V
300 A
700 V
400 A
700 V
450 A
700 V
600 A
Fusing
I
2 t
(A
2 sec)
26
26
59
317
317
317
317
564
1022
3070
3070
3070
3070
5200
5200
17700
17700
19000
24000
43000
59000
97000
97000
120000
Conformance to UL and CE Markings
EMC Directive
Varispeed G7-Series drives satisfy testing for conformance to the EMC Directive under the conditions described in European Standard EN61800-3.
Installation Method
In order to ensure that the machinery or installation incorporating the drive conforms to the EMC Directive, perform installation according to the method below.
•
•
Use a shielded line or metal piping for wiring between the drive and Motor. Make the wiring as short as possible.
• To suppress harmonics, install a DC reactor in CIMR-G7U20P4, 20P7, 40P4, and 40P7 models. (Refer to
Table 10.4 DC Reactors for Suppressing Harmonics
.)
L1L2L3PE
Remove the paint on the ground side.
Inputs
Filter
Outputs
Drive
L1L2L3 T1T2T3
Wiring length:
40 cm max.
Metallic plate
Remove the paint on the ground side.
Wiring length: 20 m max.
IM
Fig 10.6 Installation Method for Filter and Drive (CIMR-G7U20P4 to 2018, 40P4 to 4018)
10-
15
L1L2L3 PE
Remove the paint on the ground side.
10
-16
Inputs
Filter
Outputs
Drive
L1L2L3 T1 T2 T3
Wiring length:
40 cm max.
Metallic plate
Remove the paint on the ground side.
Wiring length: 20 m max.
IM
Voltage
Class
200-
240 V class
Drive Model
Number
CIMR-G7U
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
23P7
25P5
27P5
2011
2015
2018
2022
2030
2037
2045
2055
2075
2090
2110
Fig 10.7 Installation Method for Filter and Drive (CIMR-G7U2022 to 2110, 4022 to 4300)
Table 10.3 EMC Noise Filters
Noise Filter (Made by Schaffner)
Model Number Rated Current (A) Weight (kg)
FS 5972-10-07
FS 5972-18-07
FS 5972-35-07
10
18
35
1.1
1.3
1.4
FS 5972-60-07 60 3
FS 5972-100-07
FS 5972-120-35
FS 5972-180-40
FS 5972-300-37
FS 5972-300-37
FS 5972-300-37
100
120
180
300
360
450
4.9
4.3
6
11
11
11
Dimensions
141 x 330 x 46
141 x 330 x 46
141 x 330 x 46
206 x 355 x 60
236 x 408 x 80
90 x 366 x 180
120 x 451 x 170
130 x 610 x 240
130 x 610 x 240
130 x 610 x 240
Conformance to UL and CE Markings
Voltage
Class
380-
480 V class
Drive Model
Number
CIMR-G7U
40P4
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P7
44P0
45P5
47P5
4011
4015
4018
4022
4030
4037
4045
4055
4075
4090
4110
4132
4160
4185
4220
4300
Voltage Class
200-240 V class
380-480 V class
Table 10.3 EMC Noise Filters
Model Number
Under development
Under development
Under development
Under development
Under development
Under development
Under development
Under development
Under development
Under development
Under development
Under development
Under development
Noise Filter (Made by Schaffner)
Rated Current (A)
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Weight (kg)
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Table 10.4 DC Reactors for Suppressing Harmonics
Drive Model Number
CIMR-G7U
20P4
Model Number
DC Reactor
Manufacturer Ratings
UZDA-B YASKAWA 5.4 A 8 mH
20P7
40P4
UZDA-B YASKAWA 3.2 A 28 mH
40P7
Dimensions
---
---
Code Number
X010084
X010052
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
10-
17
UL Markings
The G7 is UL listed to UL Standard 508C, UL FILE No.: E13145.
Conformance to UL Standard
To comply with UL standard, follow the appropriate installation instructions.
Installation Site
Area of Use - Install this product in a location with Overvoltage Category III and pollution degree 2 or less as specified in UL 508C.
Closed-Loop Connector Specifications
The closed-loop connectors must be installed on conductors before installing to terminal blocks. Use UL
Listed closed-loop connectors shown below. Use rated 75 °C copper wire. Yaskawa recommends UL-Listed crimp terminals made by JST and UL Recognized insulation cap by Tokyo DIP.
NOTICE
Damage to Equipment. The insulation cap must be examined for cracking, tearing or other reduction in the integrity of the insulation cap certainly after installation. The appropriate size insulation cap shall be used which does not allow slippage or require undue force to apply.
10
-18
4018
4022
4030
4037
2055
2075
2090
2110
Drive
Model
CIMR-G7
2015
2018
2022
2030
2037
2045
Input Wire
Size
Fig 10.8 Closed-loop Connector Sizes by Model
Input JST Kit P/N
Insulation
Cap Model
No.
Output Wire
Size
Output JST Kit P/N
R38–8 TP-038 4 AWG R22–8 2 AWG
2 AWG R38–8
1/0 AWG R60–8
TP-038
TP-060
2 AWG
1/0 AWG
R38–8
R60–8
3/0 AWG 80-10
4/0 AWG R100–10
1/0 AWG R60–10 (2 per phase)
TP-080
TP-100
TP-060
3/0 AWG
4/0 AWG
1/0 AWG
80–10
R100–10
R60–10 (2 per phase)
3/0 AWG 80–10 (2 per phase)
250 kcmil R150–12 (2 per phase)
400kcmil
400kcmil
R200–12 (2 per phase)
R200–12 (2 per phase)
6 AWG
4 AWG
2 AWG
2 AWG
R14–6
R22–6
R38–8
R38–8
TP-080
TP-150
TP-200
TP-200
TP-014
TP-022
TP-038
TP-038
3/0 AWG
4/0 AWG
250 kcmil
300 kcmil
6 AWG
4 AWG
4 AWG
2 AWG
80–10 (2 per phase)
R100–12 (2 per phase)
R150–12 (2 per phase)
R150–12 (2 per phase)
R14–6
R22–6
R22–8
R38–8
TP-080
TP-100
TP-150
TP-150
TP-014
TP-022
TP-022
TP-038
Insulation
Cap Model
No.
TP-022
TP-038
TP-060
TP-080
TP-100
TP-060
Conformance to UL and CE Markings
4132
4160
4185
4220
4300
Drive
Model
CIMR-G7
4045
4055
4075
4090
4110
Input Wire
Size
Fig 10.8 Closed-loop Connector Sizes by Model
Input JST Kit P/N
Insulation
Cap Model
No.
Output Wire
Size
Output JST Kit P/N
1/0 AWG R60–8 TP-060 1/0 AWG R60–8
3/0 AWG 80–10
4/0 AWG R100–10
1/0 AWG R60–10 (2 per phase)
3/0 AWG 80–10 (2 per phase)
TP-080
TP-100
TP-060
TP-080
3/0 AWG
4/0 AWG
1/0 AWG
3/0 AWG
80–10
R100–10
R60–10 (2 per phase)
80–10 (2 per phase)
3/0 AWG 80–12 (2 per phase)
4/0 AWG R100–12 (2 per phase)
TP-080
TP-100
250 kcmil RD150–14 (2 per phase) TP-150
400 kcmil RD200–14 (2 per phase) TP-200
650 kcmil RD325–14 (2 per phase) TP-325
3/0 AWG
4/0 AWG
250 kcmil
300 kcmil
650 kcmil
80–12 (2 per phase)
R100–12 (2 per phase)
TP-080
TP-100
RD150–14 (2 per phase) TP-150
RD150–14 (2 per phase) TP-150
RD325–14 (2 per phase) TP-325
Insulation
Cap Model
No.
TP-060
TP-080
TP-100
TP-060
TP-080
Control Circuit Terminal
A UL Listed, Class 2 power supply must be used for the control circuits. See Table 10.6
below.
Table 10.5 Power Supply for Control Circuits
Input/Output
Open Collector Outputs P3, P4, PC, C3, C4
Terminal Power Supply
Class 2 power supply
Digital Inputs
Analog Inputs
S1, S2, S3, S4,
S5, S6, S7, S8,
S9, S10, S11,
S12, SC
RP, +V, -V, A1,
A2, A3, AC
LVLC power supply when using internal power supply. Class 2 power supply when using external power supply.
Interrupting Rating
WARNING! Fire Hazard. This product requires installation of Branch Circuit Protection (BCP) as defined in
NFPA 70 of the National Electrical Code, Article 430, Section IV, Paragraph 430.52. Failure to comply may result in injury to personnel from fire.
(Table 10.2) .
Varispeed G7 is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 240 VAC maximum (200 V Class) and 480 VAC maximum (400 V Class). Use a circuit breaker or fuses having an interrupting rating not less than 100,000 RMS symmetrical ampers, 600 VAC maximum.
Motor Over-temperature Protection
This product does not provide motor over-temperature sensing. External motor over-temperature protection is required as defined in NFPA 70 of the National Electrical Code, Article 430, Section X, Paragraph 430.126.
10-
19
10
-20
User Parameters
Factory settings are given in the following table. These setting are for a 200-240 V Class drive of 0.4 kW set to factory set control method (open-loop vector control).
No.
A1-00
A1-01 Parameter access level
A1-02 Control method selection
A1-03 Initialize
A1-04 Password
A1-05 Password setting
A2-01 to
A2-32
User setting parameters b1-01 Reference selection b1-02 Operation method selection b1-03 Stopping method selection b1-04 Prohibition of reverse operation b1-05
Operation selection for setting E1-
09 or less b1-06 Read sequence input twice b1-07
Operation selection after switching to remote mode
Run command selection in prob1-08 gramming modes
Zero speed level (DC injection b2-01 braking starting frequency) b2-02 DC injection braking current b2-03 DC injection braking time at start b2-04 DC injection braking time at stop b2-08
Magnetic flux compensation volume b3-01 Speed search selection b3-02 Speed search operating current b3-03 Speed search deceleration time b3-05 Speed search wait time b4-01 Timer function ON-delay time b4-02 Timer function OFF-delay time b5-01 PID control mode selection b5-02 Proportional gain (P) b5-03 Integral (I) time b5-04 Integral (I) limit b5-05 Derivative (D) time b5-06 PID limit b5-07 b5-08 b5-09
Name
Language selection for digital operator display
PID offset adjustment
PID primary delay time constant
PID output characteristics selection b5-10 PID output gain
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
-
Table 10.6 User Parameters
Factory
Setting
Setting
1
*1
2
2
*1
No.
Name b5-11 PID reverse output selection b5-12 b5-13
Selection of PID feedback command loss detection
PID feedback command loss detection level b5-14
PID feedback command loss detection time b5-15 PID sleep function operation level b5-16 PID sleep operation delay time b5-17
Acceleration/deceleration time for
PID reference b6-01 Dwell frequency at start b6-02 Dwell time at start b6-03 Dwell frequency at stop b6-04 Dwell time at stop b7-01 Droop control gain b7-02 Droop control delay time b8-01 Energy-saving mode selection
Factory
Setting
Setting
0
0
0
1.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.05
0
0
0.5
50
0.00
0.50
0
2
*2 *3
100
*2
2.0
0.2
0.0
0.0
0
1.00
1.0
100.0
0.00
100.0
0.0
0.00
0
1.0
b8-02 Energy-saving gain 1.0
b8-03 Energy-saving filter time constant 0.50
b8-04 Energy-saving coefficient b8-05
Power detection filter time constant b8-06 Search operation voltage limiter b9-01 b9-02
Zero-servo gain
Zero-servo completion width
C1-01 Acceleration time 1
C1-02 Deceleration time 1
C1-03 Acceleration time 2
C1-04 Deceleration time 2
C1-05 Acceleration time 3
C1-06 Deceleration time 3
C1-07 Acceleration time 4
C1-08 Deceleration time 4
C1-09 Emergency stop time
C1-10 Accel/decel time setting unit
C1-11
Accel/decel time switching frequency
C2-01
C2-02
C2-03
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end
S-curve characteristic time at
C2-04 deceleration start
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration end
*6
*4
20
0
5
10
*5
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
1
0.0
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.00
User Parameters
Table 10.6 User Parameters (Continued)
No.
Name
C3-01 Slip compensation gain
C3-02
Slip compensation primary delay time
C3-03 Slip compensation limit
C3-04
Slip compensation selection during regeneration
C3-05
Output voltage limit operation selection
C4-01 Torque compensation gain
C4-02
Torque compensation primary delay time constant
C4-03 Forward starting torque
C4-04 Reverse starting torque
C4-05 Starting torque time constant
C5-01 ASR proportional gain 1
Factory
Setting
1.0
*3
Setting
200
*2
200
0
0
1.00
20
*2*3
0.0
0.0
10
20.00
C5-02 ASR integral (I) time 1
C5-03 ASR proportional gain 2
C5-04 ASR integral (I) time 2
C5-05 ASR limit
C5-06 ASR primary delay time
C5-07 ASR switching frequency
C5-08 ASR integral (I) limit
C6-02 Carrier frequency selection
0.500
20.00
0.500
5.0
0.004
0.0
400
6
*6
C6-03 Carrier Frequency Upper Limit 15.0
*6
15.0
*6
00
C6-04 Carrier Frequency Lower Limit
C6-05
Carrier Frequency Proportional
C6-11
Gain
Carrier frequency for open-loop vector control 2 d1-01 Frequency reference 1 d1-02 Frequency reference 2 d1-03 Frequency reference 3 d1-04 Frequency reference 4 d1-05 Frequency reference 5 d1-06 Frequency reference 6 d1-07 Frequency reference 7 d1-08 Frequency reference 8 d1-09 Frequency reference 9 d1-10 Frequency reference 10 d1-11 Frequency reference 11 d1-12 Frequency reference 12 d1-13 Frequency reference 13 d1-14 Frequency reference 14 d1-15 Frequency reference 15
4
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
d1-16 d1-17 d2-01 d2-02 d2-03
Frequency reference 16
Jog frequency reference
Frequency reference upper limit
Frequency reference lower limit
Master speed reference lower limit
0.00
6.00
100.0
0.0
0.0
No.
d3-01 Jump frequency 1 d3-02 Jump frequency 2 d3-03 Jump frequency 3 d3-04 Jump frequency width d4-01
Frequency reference hold function selection d4-02 + - Speed limits d5-01 Torque control selection d5-02 Torque reference delay time d5-03 Speed limit selection d5-04 Speed limit d5-05 Speed limit bias d5-06
Speed/torque control switching timer d6-01 Field weakening level d6-02 Field frequency d6-03 Field forcing function selection d6-05 A R time constant
E1-01 Input voltage setting
E1-03 V/f pattern selection
E1-04 Max. output frequency
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
Max. voltage
Name
Base frequency
Mid. output frequency
Factory
Setting
0.0
Setting
0.0
0.0
1.0
0
10
0
0
1
0
10
0
80
0.0
0
1.00
200
*7
F
60.0
200.0
*2 *7
60.0
*2
3.0
*2
E1-08 Mid. output frequency voltage 15.0
*2 *7
E1-09
E1-10
E1-11
E1-12
Min. output frequency
Min. output frequency voltage
Mid. output frequency 2
Mid. output frequency voltage 2
1.5
*2
9.0
*2 *7
0.0
*9
0.0
*9
E1-13
E2-01
E2-02
Base voltage
Motor rated current
Motor rated slip
E2-03 Motor no-load current
E2-04 Number of motor poles
0.0
*10
1.90
*6
2.90
*6
1.20
4
*6
E2-05
E2-06
Motor line-to-line resistance
Motor leak inductance
9.842
*6
18.2
*6
E2-07 Motor iron saturation coefficient 1 0.50
E2-08 Motor iron saturation coefficient 2 0.75
E2-09 Motor mechanical loss 0.0
E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
14
*4
E2-11
E3-01
E3-02
Motor rated output
Motor 2 control method selection
Motor 2 max. output frequency
(FMAX)
0.40
*4
2
60.0
*2
E3-03 Motor 2 max. voltage (VMAX) 230.0
*2
E3-04
Motor 2 max. voltage frequency
(FA)
60.0
10-
21
10
-22
F1-01
F1-02
F4-01
F4-02
F4-03
F4-04
F4-07
PG constant
Channel 1 monitor selection
Channel 1 gain
Channel 2 monitor selection
Channel 2 gain
F4-05 Channel 1 output monitor bias
F4-06 Channel 2 output monitor bias
Analog output signal level for channel 1
Table 10.6 User Parameters (Continued)
No.
Name
E3-05
E3-06
E3-07
Motor 2 mid. output frequency 1
(FB)
Motor 2 mid. output frequency voltage 1 (VC)
Motor 2 min. output frequency
(FMIN)
Motor 2 min. output frequency
E3-08 voltage (VMIN)
E4-01 Motor 2 rated current
E4-02 Motor 2 rated slip
E4-03 Motor 2 no-load current
E4-04
Motor 2 number of poles (number of poles)
E4-05 Motor 2 line-to-line resistance
E4-06 Motor 2 leak inductance
E4-07 Motor 2 rated capacity
Factory
Setting
Setting
3.0
*2
12.6
0.5
*7
*2
2.3
*7
1.90
*6
2.90
*6
1.20
*6
4
9.842
*6
18.2
*6
0.40
*6
Operation selection at PG open circuit (PGO)
F1-03
Operation selection at overspeed
(OS)
F1-04 Operation selection at deviation
F1-05 PG rotation
F1-06
PG division rate (PG pulse monitor)
F1-07
Integral value during accel/decel enable/disable
F1-08 Overspeed detection level
F1-09 Overspeed detection delay time
F1-10
Excessive speed deviation detection level
Excessive speed deviation detec-
F1-11 tion delay time
F1-12 Number of PG gear teeth 1
F1-13 Number of PG gear teeth 2
F1-14 PG open-circuit detection time
F2-01
Bi-polar or uni-polar input selection
F3-01 Digital input option
1024
1
1
3
0
1
0
115
0.0
10
0.5
0
0
2.0
0
0
2
1.00
3
0.50
0.0
0.0
0
No.
F4-08
F5-07
Name
Analog output signal level for channel 2
F5-01 Channel 1 output selection
F5-02
F5-03
Channel 2 output selection
Channel 3 output selection
F5-04 Channel 4 output selection
F5-05 Channel 5 output selection
F5-06 Channel 6 output selection
Channel 7 output selection
F5-08 Channel 8 output selection
F5-09 DO-08 output mode selection
F6-01
Operation selection after commu-
F6-02
F6-03 nications error
Input level of external fault from
Communications Option Card
Stopping method for external fault from Communications Option
Card
Trace sampling from Communica-
F6-04 tions Option Card
Torque reference/torque limit
F6-06 selection from optical option
H1-01 Terminal S3 function selection
H1-02 Terminal S4 function selection
H1-03 Terminal S5 function selection
H1-04 Terminal S6 function selection
H1-05 Terminal S7 function selection
H1-06 Terminal S8 function selection
H1-07 Terminal S9 function selection
H1-08 Terminal S10 function selection
H1-09 Terminal S11 function selection
H1-10 Terminal S12 function selection
H2-01
Terminal M1-M2 function selection (contact)
H2-02
Terminal M3-M4 function selection (open collector)
Terminal M5-M6 function selec-
H2-03 tion (open collector)
Terminal P3 function selection
H2-04
(open-collector)
Terminal P4 function selection
H2-05
(open-collector)
H3-01
Signal level selection (terminal
A1)
H3-02 Gain (terminal A1)
H3-03 Bias (terminal A1)
H3-04
Signal level selection (terminal
A3)
Factory
Setting
Setting
0
0
1
2
4
6
37
0F
0F
0
1
0
1
0
1
24
14
3 (0)
*8
4 (3)
*8
6 (4)
*8
8 (6)
5
32
7
15
0
1
2
6
5
0
0
100.0
0
User Parameters
H4-02 Gain (terminal FM)
H4-03 Bias (terminal FM)
H4-05 Gain (terminal AM)
H4-06 Bias (terminal AM)
H6-06 Pulse train monitor selection
H6-07 Pulse train monitor scaling
L1-01 Motor protection selection
L1-02
L2-02
Motor protection time constant
L2-03 Min. baseblock time
Table 10.6 User Parameters (Continued)
No.
Name
H3-05
Multi-function analog input (terminal A3)
H3-06 Gain (terminal A3)
H3-07 Bias (terminal A3)
H3-08
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 function selection
H3-09
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 signal level selection
H3-10 Gain (terminal A2)
H3-11 Bias (terminal A2)
H3-12 Analog input filter time constant
H4-01 Monitor selection (terminal FM)
Factory
Setting
Setting
2
100.0
0.0
2
0
100.0
0.0
0.03
2
H4-04 Monitor selection (terminal AM)
H4-07
Analog output 1 signal level selection
Analog output 2 signal level selec-
H4-08 tion
H5-01 Station address
H5-02 Communication speed selection
H5-03 Communication parity selection
H5-04
Stopping method after communication error
Communication error detection
H5-05 selection
H5-06 Send wait time
H5-07 RTS control ON/OFF
H6-01 Pulse train input function selection
H6-02 Pulse train input scaling
H6-03 Pulse train input gain
H6-04 Pulse train input bias
H6-05 Pulse train input filter time
L1-03
L1-04
Alarm operation selection during motor overheating
Motor overheating operation selection
L1-05
Motor temperature input filter time constant
L2-01 Momentary power loss detection
Momentary power loss ridethru time
1.00
0.0
3
0.50
0.0
0
0
1F
3
0
3
1
5
1
0
1440
100.0
0.0
0.10
2
1440
1
1.0
3
1
0.20
0
0.1
*6
0.5
No.
L6-02 Torque detection level 1
L6-03
L6-04 Torque detection selection 2
L6-05 Torque detection level 2
L6-06 Torque detection time 2
L7-01 Forward drive torque limit
L7-02 Reverse drive torque limit
L7-03 Forward regenerative torque limit
L7-04 Reverse regenerative torque limit
L8-01
Protect selection for internal DB resistor (Type ERF)
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level
L8-03
Operation selection after overheat
L8-05 pre-alarm
Input open-phase protection selection
L8-07
Output open-phase protection selection
L8-09 Ground protection selection
L8-10
L8-11
L8-12
L8-15
Name
Torque detection time 1
Cooling fan control selection
Cooling fan control delay time
Ambient temperature
OL2 characteristics selection at low speeds
Factory
Setting
Setting
L2-04 Voltage recovery time 0.3
L2-05 Undervoltage detection level
L2-06 KEB deceleration time
190
*7
0.0
L2-07 Momentary recovery time 0
*11
L2-08
Frequency reduction gain at KEB start
Stall prevention selection during
100
L3-01 accel
1
L3-02 Stall prevention level during accel 150
L3-03
L3-04
Stall prevention limit during accel
Stall prevention selection during decel
50
1
L3-05
Stall prevention selection during running
Stall prevention level during run-
L3-06 ning
L4-01 Speed agreement detection level
L4-02 Speed agreement detection width
1
160
0.0
2.0
L4-03
Speed agreement detection level
(+/-)
Speed agreement detection width
L4-04
(+/-)
Operation when frequency refer-
L4-05 ence is missing
L5-01 Number of auto restart attempts
L5-02 Auto restart operation selection
L6-01 Torque detection selection 1
0.0
2.0
0
0
0
0
150
0.1
0
150
0.1
200
200
200
200
0
95
3
0
0
1
0
60
45
1
10-
23
10
-24
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
Setting
L8-18 Soft CLA selection n1-01
Hunting-prevention function selection n1-02 Hunting-prevention gain n2-01
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) gain n2-02 n2-03
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) time constant
Speed feedback detection control n3-01
(AFR) time constant 2
High-slip braking deceleration frequency width n3-02 High-slip braking current limit n3-03 High-slip braking stop dwell time
1
1
1.00
1.00
50
750
5
150
1.0
n3-04 High-slip braking OL time 40 n4-07 Integral time of speed estimator n4-08
Proportional gain of speed estimator
0.100
15 n4-17 Torque adjustment gain 0.8
n4-18 Feeder resistance adjustment gain 1.00
n5-01 Feed forward control selection 0 n5-02 Motor acceleration time 0.178
n5-03 Feed forward proportional gain o1-01 Monitor selection o1-02 Monitor selection after power up o1-03
Frequency units of reference setting and monitor o1-04
Setting unit for frequency parameters related to V/f characteristics o1-05 LCD brightness adjustment
1.0
6
1
0
0
3
Table 10.6 User Parameters (Continued)
No.
o2-01
LOCAL/REMOTE key enable/disable
STOP key during control circuit o2-02 terminal operation o2-03 User parameter initial value o2-04 kVA selection
Name
Factory
Setting
Setting
0
1
1
0
*6 o2-05 o2-06
Frequency reference setting method selection
Operation selection when digital operator is disconnected
0
0
0 o2-07 Cumulative operation time setting o2-08
Cumulative operation time selection o2-10 Fan operation time setting o2-12
Fault trace/fault history clear function o3-01 Copy function selection o3-02 Read permitted selection
T1-00 Motor 1/2 selection
T1-01 Autotuning mode selection
T1-02 Motor output power
T1-03 Motor rated voltage
T1-04 Motor rated current
T1-05 Motor base frequency
T1-06 Number of motor poles
0
1
0
0.40
200.0
*7
1.90
*6
60.00
4
1750
0
0
0
0
T1-07 Motor base speed
T1-08
PG pulses per revolution for teaching
600
* 1. Not initialized. (Japanese standard specifications: A1-01 = 1, A1-02 = 2)
* 2. The factory setting will change if the control method is changed. The factory settings given above are for V/f without PG control.
* 3. Factory setting depends on the control method (A1-02).
* 4. For V/f with PG control: 1.0
* 5. For drives with a capacity of 55 kW or more: 2.00
* 6. Setting range and initial setting depend on drive capacity.
* 7. Setting for 200-240 V class drives. For 380-480 V class drives, double the value.
* 8. Factory setting in the parentheses is for 3-wire sequence.
* 9. The contents is ignored if the setting is 0.0.
* 10.E1-13 will have the same value as E1-05 after autotuning.
* 11.If the set value is 0, acceleration will be to the speeds for the acceleration times (C1-01 to C1-08)
* 12.The setting range is 10% to 200% of the drive rated output. (The value given is for a 200-240 V Class drive for 0.4 kW.)
Symbols
Numerics
A
acceleration and deceleration times, 6-15
advanced programming mode, 3-5, 3-10
B
BUS Option Com Err, 7-10, 7-20
C
communications on standby, 7-20
constant selection error, 7-22
constant setting range error, 7-22
control circuit terminals, 2-22
Index-1
control method selection error, 7-22
CPU internal A/D converter error, 7-11
CPU-ASIC mutual diagnosis fault, 7-12
crimp terminals, 2-5, 2-22, 2-40
Index
D
detecting motor overspeed, 6-155
detecting PG open circuit, 6-155
digital operator communications error 1, 7-10
digital operator communications error 2, 7-11
digital operator connection fault, 7-10
E
EF0 Opt External Flt, 7-9, 7-18
excessive speed deviation, 7-8, 7-18
F
forward/reverse run commands input together, 7-16
frequency reference, 6-2, 6-24
G
ground fault interrupter, 2-15
H
hunting-prevention function, 6-37
I
incorrect inverter capacity setting, 7-22
inrush prevention circuit fault, 7-4
installed braking resistor overheating, 7-5
internal braking transistor fault, 7-6
J
L
limiting motor rotation direction, 6-56
M
main circuit undervoltage, 7-4, 7-16
main circuit voltage fault, 7-4
maintenance and inspection, 8-1
Index-2
Index
MEMOBUS communications error, 7-10, 7-20
motor overheating alarm, 7-5 motor overheating fault, 7-5
motor protection operation time, 6-53
multi-function analog input, 6-42
multi-function analog input selection error, 7-22 multi-function input selection error, 7-22
N
number of gear teeth between PG and motor, 6-154
O
OPE011 Carr Freq/On-Delay, 7-23
option card communications error, 7-20
option card connection error, 7-11
option card selection error, 7-22
option communications error, 7-10
overtorque detected 1, 7-7 overtorque detected 2, 7-7
P
periodic maintenance of parts, 8-3
PG disconnection detected, 7-8
PG pulse monitor output dividing ratio, 6-155
PID control selection error, 7-22
PID feedback reference lost, 7-9, 7-19
Q
quick programming mode, 3-5, 3-8
R
S
Index-3
Index
slip compensation function, 6-32
stall prevention function, 6-20, 6-22, 6-45
standard connection diagrams, 2-14
standard inverter specifications, 9-2
straight solderless terminals, 2-40
switching motors when the power supply is ON, 6-141
T
U
undertorque detected 1, 7-8 undertorque detected 2, 7-8
user constant access levels, 4-16
V
W
Index
Index-4
Revision History
The revision dates and numbers of the revised manuals are given on the bottom of the back cover.
MANUAL NO. TOE-S616-60.1B <1>
Published in Japan March 2003
Revision number
Date of publication
Date of
Publication
Feb 2021
August 2016
Rev.
No.
Section
<2> Multiple
Revised Content
Incorporated supplemental document EZZ022922_1. Closed-Loop Connectors, and various UL compliance content.
Updated Safety Information section and Parameter tables.
Safety Information and Chapter 5
Chapter 7 and 9
<1> Chapter 9: Specifications by Model
Updated Troubleshooting chapter and Specifications chapter. (Common Specifications table)
Addition: Rated input current in Table 9.1 200 V Class Inverters and Table 9.2 400 V Class
Inverters
Drives Technical Support in USA and Canada
Technical Support for drives is available by phone as follows:
Normal: Monday through Friday during the hours of 8 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. C.S.T.
Emergency: After normal hours, 7 days a week including weekends and holidays
To contact Technical Support, please call 1-800-YASKAWA (927-5292).
From the menu, dial 2 for Drive Products, then 5 for Technical Support.
Drives Technical Support can also be reached by e-mail at [email protected]
.
Support information, such as technical manuals, FAQs, instruction sheets and software downloads are available at our website, www.yaskawa.com
.
When calling for technical support, please have the following materials available:
The appropriate Technical Manual in hand because the support associate may refer to this
Complete nameplate information from the drive and the motor.
(Confirm that drive nameplate Output Amps is greater than Motor Nameplate amps)
list with your parameter settings
A sketch of the electrical power train, from AC line to motor, including filters and disconnects
Field Service, Start Up Assistance, Factory Repair, Replacement Parts, and Other Support
Contact Technical Support for help with any of these needs.
Technical Training
Training is conducted at Yaskawa training centers, at customer sites, and via the internet.
For information, visit www.yaskawa.com
or call 1-800-YASKAWA (927-5292).
From the phone menu, dial 2 for Drive Products, then 4 for Product Training.
Support in Other Countries
Yaskawa is a multi-national company with offices and service representation around the world.
To obtain support, always contact the local distributor first for guidance and assistance.
Contact the closest Yaskawa office listed for further assistance.
YASKAWA AC Drive G7
Technical Manual
YASKAWA AMERICA, INC.
2121, Norman Drive South, Waukegan, IL 60085, U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-YASKAWA (927-5292) or 1-847-887-7000 Fax: 1-847-887-7310 http://www.yaskawa.com
DRIVE CENTER (INVERTER PLANT)
2-13-1, Nishimiyaichi, Yukuhashi, Fukuoka, 824-8511, Japan
Phone: 81-930-25-3844 Fax: 81-930-25-4369 http://www.yaskawa.co.jp
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
New Pier Takeshiba South Tower, 1-16-1, Kaigan, Minatoku, Tokyo, 105-6891, Japan
Phone: 81-3-5402-4502 Fax: 81-3-5402-4580 http://www.yaskawa.co.jp
YASKAWA ELÉTRICO DO BRASIL LTDA.
777, Avenida Piraporinha, Diadema, São Paulo, 09950-000, Brasil
Phone: 55-11-3585-1100 Fax: 55-11-3585-1187 http://www.yaskawa.com.br
YASKAWA EUROPE GmbH
185, Hauptstra e, Eschborn, 65760, Germany
Phone: 49-6196-569-300 Fax: 49-6196-569-398 http://www.yaskawa.eu.com
YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION
9F, Kyobo Securities Bldg., 26-4, Yeouido-dong, Yeongdeungpo-gu, Seoul, 150-737, Korea
Phone: 82-2-784-7844 Fax: 82-2-784-8495 http://www.yaskawa.co.kr
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD.
151, Lorong Chuan, #04-02A, New Tech Park, 556741, Singapore
Phone: 65-6282-3003 Fax: 65-6289-3003 http://www.yaskawa.com.sg
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (THAILAND) CO., LTD.
252/125-126, 27th Floor, Muang Thai-Phatra Tower B, Rachadapisek Road, Huaykwang, Bangkok, 10310, Thailand
Phone: 66-2693-2200 Fax: 66-2693-4200 http://www.yaskawa.co.th
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (CHINA) CO., LTD.
22F, One Corporate Avenue, No.222, Hubin Road, Shanghai, 200021, China
Phone: 86-21-5385-2200 Fax: 86-21-5385-3299 http://www.yaskawa.com.cn
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (CHINA) CO., LTD. BEIJING OFFICE
Room 1011, Tower W3 Oriental Plaza, No. 1, East Chang An Ave.,
Dong Cheng District, Beijing, 100738, China
Phone: 86-10-8518-4086 Fax: 86-10-8518-4082
YASKAWA ELECTRIC TAIWAN CORPORATION
9F, 16, Nanking E. Rd., Sec. 3, Taipei, 104, Taiwan
Phone: 886-2-2502-5003 Fax: 886-2-2505-1280
YASKAWA INDIA PRIVATE LIMITED
#17/A, Electronics City, Hosur Road, Bangalore, 560 100 (Karnataka), India
Phone: 91-80-4244-1900 Fax: 91-80-4244-1901 http://www.yaskawaindia.in
YASKAWA AMERICA, INC.
In the event that the end user of this product is to be the military and said product is to be employed in any weapons systems or the manufacture thereof, the export will fall under the relevant regulations as stipulated in the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Regulations.
Therefore, be sure to follow all procedures and submit all relevant documentation according to any and all rules, regulations and laws that may apply.
Specifications are subject to change without notice for ongoing product modifications and improvements.
© 2003-2021 YASKAWA AMERICA INC.
MANUAL NO. TM.G7.01 <2>
Published in U.S.A. February 2021
Lejupielādēt
Publiskā saite ir atjaunināta
Ir atjaunināta publiskā saite uz jūsu tērzēšanu. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Dokumenta publiskā saite
Reklāma